3830 2_MLM_Vol_R03_Dec1978 2 MLM Vol R03 Dec1978
User Manual: Pdf 3830-2_MLM_Vol_R03_Dec1978
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 232
Download | ![]() |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
if, l~ c c (: (= £ (~ (: ( (,:~ (~ (,'~ (: £ (: ( '" ( ( ( £ ===::.-= --~--~ =--= - -- ~~:;-= -== -=-. ==- (' ( Volume 3 PLAN ~!:~OUT LGND M LX STARTMAINT MSG PANEL MI CR 0 ~~~~-ICS OL SENSE FS PWR IN T R CM D M IC LEGEND ABBREVIA TlONS SYSTEM MESSAGES (' Maintenance Library Volume 2 CROSS REFERENCE 3830-2 (' Volume 1 ' Storage Control, Model 2 c ( (. POWER TDIAG DATA IFAULT SYSTEM INDEX C RL MPL MPL CH L I CT L I T CONTROL 23FD ATTACHMENT - CHANNEL INTERFACE - CONTROL INTERFACE ODUCTION COMMANDS ROPROGRAM MICFL~~~~ LOC I NST INDEX ATIONS ALLATION ( c' ( t l t t , SAFETY CE SAFETY PRACTICES CE-MLM Feedback forms are provided at the front of Volume ROI for reader comments. If the forms have been removed, send your comments to the address below. ; This manual was prepared by the IBM Systems Development Division, Product Publications, Department G24, San Jose, California 95114. SAFETY Be constantly aware of hazardous situations when working on the 3830-2 Storage Control. Take time to review the CE safety practices listed below which have been reprinted from the pocket-size card available from Mechanicsburg (Order No. S229-12641. All Customer Engineers are expected to take every safety precaution possible and observe the following safety practices while maintaining IBM equipment: 1. You should not work alone under hazardous conditions or around equipment with dangerous voltage. Always advise your manager if you MUST work alone. 2. Remove all power, ac and dc, when removing or assembling major components, working in immediate areas of power supplies, performing mechanical inspection of power supplies, or installing changes in machine circuitry. 3. After turning off wall box power switch, lock it in the Off position or tag it with a "Do Not Operate" tag, Form 229-1266. Pull power supply cord whenever possible. 4. When it is absolutely necessary to work on equipment having exposed operating mechanical parts or exposed live electrical circuitry anywhere in the machine, observe the following precautions: a. Another person familiar with power, off controls must be in immediate vicinity. b. Do not wear rings, wrist watches, chains, bracelets, or metal cuff links. c. Use only insulated pliers and screwdrivers. d. Keep one hand in pocket. e. When using test instruments, be certain that controls are set correctly and that insulated probes of proper capacity are used. f. Avoid contacting ground potential (metal floor strips, machine frames, etc.1. Use suitable rubber mats, purchased locally if necessary. 5. Wear safety glasses when: a. Using a hammer to drive pins, riveting, staking, etc. b. Power or hand drilling, reaming, grinding, etc. c. Using spring hooks, attaching springs. d. Soldering, wire cutting, removing steel bands. e. Cleaning parts with solvents, sprays, cleaners, chemicals, etc. f. Performing any other work that may be hazardous to your eyes. REMEMBER - THEY ARE YOUR EYES. 6. Follow special safety instructions when performing specialized tasks, such as handling cathode ray tubes and extramely high voltages. These instructions are outlined in CEMs and the safety portion of the maintenance manuals. 7. Do not use solvents, chemicals, greases, or oils that have not been approved by IBM. 8. Avoid using tools or test equipment that have not been approved by IBM. 9. Replace worn or broken tools and test equipment. 10. Lift by standing or pushing up with stronger leg musclesthis takes strain off back muscles. Do not lift any equipment or parts weighing over 60 pounds. 11. After maintenance, restore all safety devices, such as guards, shields, signs, and grounding wires. 12. Each Customer Engineer is responsible to be certain that no action on his part renders products unsafe or exposes customer personnel to hazards. 13. Place removed machine covers in a safe out-of-the-way place where no one can trip over them. 14. Ensure that all machine covers are in place before returning machine to customer. 15. Always place CE tool kit away from walk areas where no one can trip over it; for example, under desk or table. 16. AVOid touching moving mechanical parts when lubricalin~l. checking for play, etc. 17. When using stroboscope, do not touch ANYTHING - it may be moving. 18. AVOid wearing loose clothing that may be caught in machinery. Shirt sleeves must be left buttoned or rolled above the elbow. 19. Ties must be tucked in shirt or have a tie clasp (preferably nonconductive) approximately 3 inches from end. Tie chains are not recommended.' 20. Before starting equipment, make certain fellow CEs and customer personnel are not in a hazardous position, 21. Maintain good housekeeping in area of machine while performing and after completing maintenance. Knowing safety rules is not enough. An unsafe act will inevitably lead to an accident. Use good judgment - eliminate unsafe acts. ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION General Considerations 1. Start Immediately - Seconds Count Do not move victim unless absolutely necessary to remove from danger. Do not wait or look for help or stop to loosen clothing, warm the victim, or apply stimulants. 2. Check Mouth for Obstructions Remove foreign objects. Pull tongue forward. 3. Loosen Clothing - Keep Victim Warm Take care of these items after victim is breathing by himself or when help is available. 4. Remain in Position After victim revives, be ready to resume respiration if necessary. 5. Call a Doctor Have someone summon medicai'aid. 6. Don't Give Up Continue without interruption until victim is breathing without help or is certainly dead. Rescue Breathing for Adults 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Place victim on his back immediately. Clear throat of water, food, or foreign matter. Tilt head back to open air passage. Lift jaw up to keep tongue out of air passage. Pinch nostrils to prevent air leakage when you blow. Blow until you see chest rise. Remove your lips and allow lungsto empty. Listen for snoring and gurglings - signs of throat obstruction. 9. Repeat mouth to mouth breathing 10-20 times a minute. Continue rescue breathing until victim breathes for himself. Thumb and finger positions Final mouth-tomouth position 3830-2 SAFETY © " .. .- ''to. Copyright IBM Corporation t972, 1973 " '\, " ,-- J /' .'- / -~ , - -" ")", ,- ..J I" ,- . j "', 1''\ .,' 1- ... - ~t !!ll;;",,_', , r ( "" , " "I (/ L~ C (j ( ( c c c ( ( ' ( .' ( ( (. CONTENTS CONTENTS PWR 1 Power Power Supply Principles Major Components Power Sequence Box Primary Power Control Box Power Supplies and Regulators Basic Power Sequencing Concepts Power Failure Sensor Indicator Lights MPL File Power Control Sequencing of Logic Gate Voltages Reset Signel Power-On Anti-Recycle Circuits Power On/Off Sequence PWR Facility P_-Up Problem Analysis PWR Common Exit - 2 PWR PWR 240 245 CP3 Trips I Fan Problem I PWR 260 CP16 or CP17 Trips PWR 270 3830-2 Missing or Out-Ot-Spec Voltages. PWR 280 Distribution, Control Unit AC and DC PWR 300 Distribution By Power Terminals PWR 305 Power Sequencing Flo'Nehart PWR 310 10 PWR 20 3830-2 Power Problem Analysis PWR 30 CB2 Trips PWR 40 CP5 - Power Problem Analysis CP12 Trips PS7 Voltage Distribution . PWR 46 3830-2 Power Supply Adjustment Procedure PWR 50 Bulk 1 ICpal Power Problem Bul k Supply. PWR PWR 60 61 Bulk 2 (CP71 Power Problem Bul k 2 Supply PWR PWR 70 71 CP4 Trips PS15 Bias Supply Distribution PWR PWR 80 85 MACHINE IDENTIFICATION Power Sequence Problem . 3830-2 Power Sequence Theory and Locations . Voltages Present in Power Down Condition Two Step Process to Produce Final Regulated Voltages Power Supply Sequencing for CU Control Storage Controlled Delay in 6V Supply to 1/0 Interfaces Timer Operation for Power-Up Sequence Control and Automatic Verification Anti-Recycle Latch Voltage to be Expected at the Output of a Relay Driver Voltage Sequencing Logic Control Module Power Sequencing. PWR PWR 100 105 Early 3830-2 Storage Control Units contained som e power components that have been discontinued in later m achines. The changeover took place with serial numbers 30000 (U.S.A.). 73-81000 (Germany). 97-20000 (Japan) PWR PWR 110 132 CP1 or CP2 Trips . 24V dc Distribution PWR PWR 135 140 CP6, 9, or 10 Trips 12V dc Regulator PWR PWR 150 155 CP15118 Trips _ Solid Trip PS3 Voltage Distribution Intermittent Trip PWR PWR PWR PWR 160 160 165 170 CP14 Trips P54 Voltage Distribution PWR PWR 180 185 CP13 Trips . PS5 Voltage Distribution . PWR PWR 200 205 CP11 Trips _ PS6 Voltage Distribution . PWR PWR 220 225 MPL File AC Control ~14_1:_7_D!_~_~_5-L 3830-2 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1975 ______ t 1 G- CP9 G-CP10 o 4 - - - CP6 - Early CP6 Machines Only In this section, information pertaining specifically to one level or the other is labeled "only for early machin es (with CP7)" or "only for late machines (without CP7)" ~~ ______ ~ ______ ~ ______ ~ Machines can be identified (early/late) by opening the rightfront cover and observing the circuit protectors (C PsI as shown here. ~ cr CPl cr CP2 cr CP3 cr CP5 cr CP4 0 o G- I--- CP7 CP7 CPS ~ Early Machines Only 0 ~ ~ ________L -____ ~1 IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER CONTENTS PWR 1 POWER SUPPLY PRINCIPLES POWER SUPPL YPRINCIPLES A 12-second delay degates the effect of PLD sensing during power on. • Solid state sequencing with voltage sensing. • Relays and contactors control and distribute power. • Control modules are powered up sequentially. • MPL file is powered up by control unit and is powered up and down by program control after system is operating. • Power is shut down if line disturbances are sufficient to affect data integrity. Indicator Lights Three indicators signal fault conditions in the power area: 1. Power Supply Failure - CP tripped. 2. Power Supply Thermals. 3. Gate and Memory Thermals. Indicators are latched on by fault signals. The first latch set degates the other latches. Latches are reset manually (Test/ Reset switch) or by logic during power on. MAJOR COMPONENTS Major components are power sequence box, primary power control box, power supplies, and regulators. MPL File Power Control AC and dc voltages to the MPL file are switched by relays. AC is supplied by energizing K 10 and K 11. DC (+24, +6, and -3V) is provided by energizing K6. These three relays are energized by a control unit signal (+3V MPL File On, VB 148) to the power sequence logic. This signal is activated during the power-on sequence (MPL) or during execution of program instructions requiring MPL file operation. The MPL file is powered down when not in use. Power Sequence Box (YB011) In this enclosure reside all control circuit components: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Time-elapsed meter and associated components. Power system fault-indicating lights and Test/Reset switch. Control circuit logic cards. Control circu it 12V regu lator. Control circuit fogic board. Control relays. PWR 2 Power-On Anti-Recycle Circuits The anti-recycle latch prevents repeated unsuccessful power-on attempts by the 3830-2. Power on is unsuccessful if a voltage is low, a thermal is open or a CP is tripped. The anti-recycle latch is initially reset off when K 1 is down and no power-on signal is available from the stepping switch. When the switch advances to select the 3830-2, K 1 is picked to bring up power and set the anti-recycle latch. If a fault now occurs, K 1 drops providing the final ANDing condition with the anti-recycle latch to hold K 1 driver cut off. If a tripped CP prevented power-up, reset the CP and try to power up. To reinitiate power up, move Mode switch to a CE position and operate CE panel Power switch. With ac power on, the 3830-2 signals the system to advance the stepping switch to the next subsystem. Now position mode switch to Normal. Power On/Off Sequence Refer to PWR 310 for flowchart of power-on/off sequence. Sequencing of Logic Gate Voltages Primary Power Control Box (YBO 11) Initially the following power supplies turn on: 1. PS5 (-3/+1.25V) 2. PS7 (-3V/+l.25V) 3. PS3 (-36V, early machines only) This compartment contains ac control components: 1. Circuit breakers'and circuit protectors. 2. Main distributfon cireuit breakers. 3. Control unit main ac contactor. 4. MPL file contro~ ac relay. Then power to the memory panel B3 (W1 in logics) is applied in the following sequence: Power Supplies and Regulators 1. PS7 (-3/+l.25V on initially) 2. PS6 (+3.5V) Major power supplies and regulators are located in the front of the control unit. 1. Two bulk supplies (one in later machines). 2. DC regu lators. 3. DC circuit protectors. Finally +6V IPS 3) is turned on to the I/O channel. Reset Signal The function of this circuit is to check that the machine completes the power up sequence. BASIC POWER SEQUENCING CONCEPTS This check is achieved by starting a timer (K 1 hold delayed by 12 seconds) with the pick (power-on) signal and checking against selected points in the sequence circuit. If any of the check signals have not changed to their normal on state in the timing period, the 3830-2 is reset to the off condition. Power Failure Sensor The power failure sensor determines if the power line disturbance (PLD) ride·through capability has been exceeded and if all voltages are present. This circuitwill also initiate power down sequence, after the machine is fully sequenced up, if a check point reverts to its off state. The sensor monitors all bulk supply and bias supply output voltages. The outputs form an OR which indicates when any of the voltages dip below the specified tolerance levels. Any voltage not within tolerance powers down the the subsystem. 447460 3830-2 '-.:~ ". '\.J The circuit resets to the normal off condition ready for another start cycle once the pick signal is removed. 1 19Dec75~______~~______- L______~~______~______~______~ © Copyright IBM Corporation '975 ,":- -'. r ""'., r ~"", ,"--y ''-J '-.; "-~ "-Ji ,.,---co"'' ' , ,f· ""'~, ,,"-,J/ "'--.. fi "-. ... Ji IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER POWER SUPPLY PRINCIPLES L...,_ ) PWR 2 c: ,, C'-. ---'\, LP C-' b \ ( ~.. ': '.,.,,/ FACI LITY POWER-UP PROBLEM ANALYSIS PWR 20 ~~////////////////////////////////////~ CHECK ERROR INDICATORS ON ~IDANGER ~~ ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ ~ ~ ~ PWR 10 FACILITY POWER-UP PROBLEM ANALYSIS POWER SEQUENCE BOX BEFORE POWERING UP. THIS IS BECAUSE INDICATORS ARE RESET AUTO· MATICAllY ON POWER UP. in the power servicing area. ~ SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ until measured otherwise. ,~ POIIible Fault Conditions: START 10 ---,I I '----- ,---I I ___________ .1I ~//////////////////////////////////Q/.a ASSUME THAT THE 3830-Z/DR I VE FACILITY IS NOT AT FAULT Mllin Printed Cin:tlit Board 3830-2 Power Sequence Box III :OD9 @a ..... • : ! ~ !i ii !lii 11 :: !1 II ;;1:: ;;1 11 • ii@) i: n i l!Ij iiII iij1ii Un i 1. Unable to power up facility 2. System power sequence problem. 3. Bloweds) not running. 4. 3830-2 Power Sequence Panel indicator lamps on. (Thermal or CP failure). 5. System console message "Drive Intervention Required" (when a power problem is suspected). 6. Exit from non-PWR page without repair. 0 .4 l1lil1li CHECK FOR A VISIBLE PICK CONDITION OF RELAY K4 REMOVE THE DUST COVER BY SQUEEZING THE TOP AND BOTTOM OF THE COVER TO BOW OUT THE SIDES AS • YOU PULl. MEASURE FOR CONTINUITY ACROSS K4-3 (THESE ARE UNUSED CONTACTS WITH NO VOL TAGE). MEASURE AT THE REAR OF RELAY K4 BETWEEN THE COMMON AND THE NORMALLY OPEN CONTACTS. 00 Tabs 5-10 • ••• •• CHECK FOR OPEN o I ODE OR LAND BETWEEN CONNECTOR I-II AND K4 COIL SIDE e AND REPAIR •• •• NO REPLACE CHECK 0 lODE TO K4 COIL SIDE A IYBIZOI --,I K4 I Reer view of relays K1 and K4 K4Sequence Complete Relay Test points 0 o 0 N/C .0 0 N/O Common o I CPU LOG I C FOR PROPER SYSTEM CPU SEQUENCE STEP SWITCH OPERATION I I I I NO 4 3 2 0 CHECK THE SYSTEM 0 0 0 B A I PWR ZO I I I REPLACE I YES DIODE I I I Coil I I I lOR FORM THE NTACTS. IF CLEAN AND/OR FORM THE K4-1 CONTACT (FOR CONTROL S YSTEM I) OR K4-2 CONTACT (FOR USE SCOPE/METER TO ISOLATE AND REPAIR SYSTEM CPU PROBLEM KlOR~E~¢~RIF FOUND TO BE CONTROL SYSTEM 2). UNABLE TO REPA I R. REPLACE K4 RELAY. GOOD, TEMPORARILY IF I I I 1 REPA I R LAND AND ORDER NEW MAIN PRINTED C I RCU IT BOARD. J ~ PWR ZO K1 AND K4 ARE INTERCHANGEABLE FOR TROUBLESHOOTING PURPOSES. SOUEEZE THE SIDES OF THE RELAY AS YOU PULL AND THE COVER I ----~ WILL STAY ON. 3830-2 FACILITY POWER-UP PROBLEM ANAL VSIS © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1973 PWR 10 v c c ~c ------- C' C c C'" I" ~/ .' COMMON EXIT - POWER PROBLEM ANALYSIS I'" .~< c (, COMMON EXIT - POWER PROBLEM ANAL VSIS FIX VERIFICATION AND CHECKOUT PROCEDURE (;-. PWR 20 ~~////////////////////////////////////~ ~IDANGER ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ ~ ~ ~' ~ 8 in the power servicing area. SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE until measured otherwise. PAGES ALL ~ ~ ~ ~ ~////////////////////////////////////h_~ VERIFY UNIT POWERS UP AND DOWN CORRECTLY A CHART OF NORMAL POWER UP AND POWER DOWN SEQUENCES I S SHOWN ____ ON PWR 120 FOR THE CU. A SIMPLIFIED LOGIC DIAGRAM OF THE ENTI RE CU VOLTAGE SEQUENC I NG AREA IS SHOWN ON PWR 110 AND 120. YES NO WAS ANY COMPONENT REPLACED OR ANY LOOSE WIRING FOUND WHICH COULD AFFECT vOl. TAGE AO,JUSTMENT VERIFY THAT CORRECT PATH PWR RE-INSTAll 10 ALL REMOVED WAS FOLL.OWED ON , COMPONENTS. MAPS JUMPERS, ETC. RETURN ALL SWITCHES TO NORMAL. RETRACE PATH RETURN TO PAGE SPEC I F I ED ABovE RUN APPROPR I ATE DIAGNOSTICS TO ENSURE UNIT IS OPERATING PROPERLY. OPEN PIN CONNECT IONS AND I OR LANDS MAY ESULT IN ABNORMAL LOGIC VOLTAGE LEV S (FLOATING CONDITIONSI. THE MAPS 0 I AGNOSE TROUBLE TO A FIC C ULT COULO BE A OR OTH IN THE FROM THE CARD. - C I RCU ITRY NOTE THAT T IYER MAY INDICATE PR LEVEL AT I TS OUTPUT WHEN THE RELAY CIRCUIT T V. DC SUPPLY IS OPEN (SEE PWR ND 120). 3830·2 COMMON EXIT - POWER PROBLEM ANAL VSIS © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1973 PWR 20 3830-2 POWER PROBLEM ANAL VSIS (PART 1 OF 21 3830-2 POWER PROBLEM ANALYSIS (PART 10F 2) START 15, PWR 10 ~~////////////////////////////////////~ ~ DANGER ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 31 ~ C ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present in the power servicing area ~ SAF ETY cannot be overemphasized. ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ until measured otherwise. ~ CAPACITORS are potentially ~ explosive devices. ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. ~ After replacing any capacitor, ~ reinstall all SAFETY COVERS ~ before powering up machine. _~ o ~ THE RELATED BLOWER IS RUNNING 3830·2 CE PANEL) DC READY LAMP OFF • CHECK THE POWER SEQUENCE I NO I CATOR PANEL FOR THE FOLLOW I NG ERROR INDICATIONS ~/////////////////////////////////////..a • PWR YES ~ B20R •~C~S SCHEMATIC SHOWN ON PWR 31 YES AT THE RELATED FAN CONNECTOR NO CP 1 OR CP 9 TRIPPED ~ See PWR 31 for component locations. r ____________________ .. THE FAN ~ IS ON INDICATOR FAIL~ri~f~~~~TOR AC INPUT POINT TO THE RELATED FAN EXIT TO PAGE CP 3TO FANS PWR 260 YES CP4TOPS 15 BIAS' SUPPLY PWRBIl CP 5 AC TO MPL filE PWR45 CP 6 24V DC POWER SEO (NOTE 11 PWR 150. ENTRY A AFTER APPROXIMATELY 15 SECONDS TO 2 MINUTES AFTER POWER DOWN, A FAILING THERMAL WILL NORMALLY CLOSE AGAIN. ALLOWING THE UNIT TO BE POWERED UP. ATTEMPT TO POWER UP UN I T POWER Y !r_____ t PlNR 70 CP8ACTO BULK 1 PWR 60 PWR 150, ENTRY A CP 11 TOPS6 PWR 220 CP12TOPS7 PWR 240 CP 13 TO PS 5 PWR 200 CP 14TOPS4 PWR 180 CP 15 TO PS 3 (+6V PORTION OF DUAL PSI PWR 160 CP 16 +6V PS (NOTE 1) PWR 270 CP 17 -36V PS (NOTE 1) PWR 270 CP 18 TO PS 3 (-36V PORTION OF DUAL PSI (NOTE 11 PWR 160 OBST~~~T! CU POWER UP (DC READY LIGHT ON, YES FOUND NO IF THE CB.'CP IS TRIPPED EXIT TO PAGE CB 2 MAIN AC POWER PWR40 POWER DOWN, THEN MOVE OPERATION MODE SWITCH BACK TO NORMAL AND POWER UP FROM CPU -. NO CP 2 TO CONVENIENCE I CHECK FOR AN OPEN THERMAL BY MEASURING FOR THE PRESENCE OF + 12V ACROSS THE RELATED THERMALS r ______ GO TO NO~11i111l!111<''lfJl. ~~, ~NO~~C~Y~E~S CHECK THE POINT· TO· POINT INPUT WIRING OF THERMALS FROM THE POWER CIRCUIT BOARD CONNECTORS FOR THE LOSS OF +12V. CORRECT THE PROBLEM IF NO PROBLEM FOUND. REPLACE CARD P A1Ol. AN OPEN THERMAL .AS FOUND .------------;.;.;;;c: .. 90 DEG F (26DEG C) PWR 20 YES j N-F-O-R-M-t:-~-:LIS-~-~-6-~-~M-y~-:-o-' '-v-I~-~-~-E-~-T-H~-~-~I-g-~-~-l-G-~O-~-o-' ____- , CONNECT A JUMPER AROUND THE OPEN THERMAL AND POWER ON THE UNIT IF IT IS NOT ALREADY ON I I '-T-PRIOR TO JUMPERING PAST A THERMAL, CHECK THEAREA IN QUESTION FOR UNUSUAL AMOUNTS OF HEAT DAMAGE. OPEN COVERS, DUCTS, ETC. THAT ALLOW COOLING AIR TO ESCAPE. WHEN THE UNIT FEELS SUFFICIENTLY COOL, BYPASS THE THERMAL IN QUESTION TO ALLOW OR MAINTAIN POWER UP FOR FURTHER TROUBLE ISOLATION. DO NOT LEAVE THE THERMAL BYPASSED WITH POWER ON FOR MORE THAN 5 MINUTES, OR UNTIL AN ABNORMAL HEAT BUILDUP IS FELT AGAIN (WHICH EVER OCCURS FIRST). T L OPE~~R~A~Tm ING! ~o IBM Y~!tALL ?~~ PLANNING REPRESE IVE IF THERE IS A CO ING CAPACITY PROBLEM H NO ON -+I CORRECT THE PROBLEM FOR LOGIC AND STORAGE CP 10 +24V DC POWER SEO INOTE 21 Y.:.;E:;S:c :>=E~S~______________________________________________ PWR31 CP 7 AC TQ BULK 2 fOR DRIVERS (NOTE II FOLLOW THE CB/CP TRIPPED EXIT TO ANOTHER PAGE ONLY IF THE CB/CP REPEATEDLY (SOLIDLY) TRIPS, OR IF FREQUENT SERVICE CALLS ARE MADE AT THIS INSTALLATION FOR THE SAME CBICP BEING TRIPPED. PANELS. ETC. sucg:~F~rL. AND Tft Y TO POWER UP LOCALLY I N THE D~T~flR~:og~~~ ATTEMPT TO RETURN THE UNIT TO THE CUSTOMER. FOLLOW THE CP TRIPPED EXIT TO ANOTHER PAGE ONLY IF THE CP REPEATEDLY (SOLIDLYI TRIPS OR IF FREOUENT SERVICE CALLS ARE MADE AT THIS INSTALLATION FOR THE SAME CP BEING TRIPPED. OPERAT I ON MODE 5WI TCH TO CE MODE FOR AIR OBSTRUCT! ONS CP TRIPPED. INITIALL V RESET TRIPPED CP AND SWITCH THE INITIALLY RESET TRIPPED CB OR CP AND ATTEMPT TO POWER UP FROM CPU. CHECK 0 ISON IF THE CP IS TRIPPED NO YES CHECK REPLACE. ~YE~S~~~S00~~~~EE~~~~N~O~---------------, FAILURE PWR 30 PWR 135 PWR 135 MOVE THE OPERATION MODE SWITCH BACK TO NORMAL .+______~ __ CP9t12VTO PWR 150 POWER SEQUENCE BOARD _________...., ~g C821T~::t<@>· . . POWE~ t~ START COMPONENTS. REPLACE ANY RUN DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAMS TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION SIGNAL PRESENl AT PC 1 5 DAMA¥~~ ~~~~g~~~I~E NO • I F NO HEAT'DAMAGE IS N~~~~tJAEt~FAg.EI~~fl~~D T:~r~D"HOERCTu~lt5~~~,bN ATJ~~~~J~:fo~ER METER PANEL ROOMISBELOW90DEG.F. '-~H-I~-~-~-N-l-j--~~J::b:~:G:~:~Af.~:~:R:;=='l S~~~¢T6u FORS~~5E SIGNAL (26 DEG. CI CHECK THE POWER SEQUENCE INDICATORS BY OPERATING THE POWER SEOUENCE PANEL LAMP TEST SWITCH USE SC I SOL AT T~~ES~ltHE THIS LATCHES THE LAMPS ON AND LAMP RESET Will HAVE TO BE PUSHED TO TURN THEM OFF ~. K PWR 31 M~e~~~ UP SYSTEM. ~ TER TO REPAIR. NOTES: 1. Only for early machines (with CP 7). 2. Only for late machines (without CP 7). CHECK K 1 PICK AND HOLD PATHS THRU CE NORMAL SWITCH. REPAIR OPEN CKT FROM PC1-5 THRU SYSTEM STEP SWITCH TO PC1 ..6 GO TO PWR 20 3830-2 3830-2 POWER PROBLEM ANAL VSIS (PART 1 OF 21 © Copyright PWR30 IBM Corporation 1972, 1973 o o -" ; "\ '.- C './ Pc L .0" C C C,: (~I C' C ' .. -' {, (,",; (~r C ( . , C' C C: .. c) c~ (:' C. . " C C C C C C C C C C C C' C C ,'-,':.; 3830-2 POWER PROBLEM ANALYSIS (Part 2 of 2) ' ' -"., ,,'".1 3830-2 POWER PROBLEM ANALYSIS (Part 2 of 21 PWR 31 ~w///////////////////////////////////~ ~"~DANGER ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ ~ I GNORE THE COND I TI ON OF THE OR I VE REQUESTED POWER DOWN INDICATOR. IT IS NOT IONNECTED IN THE SUBSYSTEM. ~ in the power servicing area. ~ ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE until measured otherwise. ~ ~' SAFETY cannot be overemphasized, ~ ~ ~ ~W////////////////////////////////.//.a YES . ND YBtOI CHECK THE PO I NT TO POINT WIRING OF' 24V DC THROUGH CP • TO TAB 5 BY ISOL.ATlON. EITHER CORRECT THE WI RING OR REPL.ACE CP •• CHECK THE CUSTOMER'S POWER PANEL FOR A TRIPPED CB REPL.ACE THE DC READY INDICATOR LAMP PWR 20 PIS Thermals C4HH»-_r____~® T MEASURE FOR PROPER 3 PHASE PRIMARY POWER I NPUT TO THE CB 2 TERMINAL.S PWR PWR 20 141 -. r~. . . . . . . . . . . .__A~. . . . . . . . . ._ _. .~, +12V GatllMemory ®YB710®~:f.-_ _:~h_e_rm_.I_S~ EC2·F ~ EC2·E YB160 YB100 YES :~_)-+E.>Therma:a;mal YB110® ... GatelMemory Thermals ~> ~ +12V PS ......__.........." ~,. . . . . ._ _. . . . . . . .~*~ Sequence Logic P Gate 24V de Sequencing Supply ~ " " ' " , , . liT ~ ~ fVT~s ~({j Tabs 11-14 / BOARD ......,....__·Tabs 19-21 Tabs 22-34 TURN OFF THE CUSTOMER' S POWER PANEL CB AND THEN DISCONNECT THE AC L.I NE CORD FROM THE CUSTOMER I 5 OUTLET. MEA SURE FOR CONTI NU I TY BETWEEN AL.L. PL.UG L.EADS AND THE CB 2 TERM I NAL.S. PIS Thermal Failure L.OCATED ON BACK WALL •••• OF POWER SEQUENCE BOX. (SEE PWR 1551 002 Gate and Memory Thermal Failure K7 K11 PS Failure CORRECT THE LACK OF CONTINUITY FOUND REPL.ACE QI OR REPA IR WIRING AS NECESSARY SEE PWR 501 FOR •• PROCEDURE I AD.JUST + 12V REGULATOR PWR 20 *Only for early machines (with CP7) **Only for late machines (without CP7) 3830·2 3830-2 POWER PROBLEM ANAYLSIS (Part 2 of 21 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 197=" PWR 31 CB2TRIPS CB2 TRIPS ~~/////////////////////////#///////////////~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ DANGER LETHAL VOL TAGES are present in the power servicing area. SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE until measured otherwise. PWR40 p ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~///////////////////////////////////////////.a: Turn off main circuit breaker at customer's power panel before plugging or unplugging the power plug. See general safety CEM (metal clad plugs) REMOVE WALL... PLUG AND CHECK FOR SHORTS BETWEEN WIRES AND EACH WIRE TO GROUND FROM CB2 SEE PWR 300 FOR DISTRIBUTION NO g~CK c~~~ ~p~ A~5tY YES CP 1 • TR, ~p t NG WHEN t T SHOULO tWELDED CONTA C.I. IF THIS FOUND E CP7 AND BULK PWA SUPPLY 2 NOT USED ON LATE MACHINES ~~9 S Cb~A~7~~ a APPROPRIATE PAGE THE F AUL T THAT C DAMAGED CPo REP A I R SHORT Note 1 ETHE FIND SED THE ~------1~ 6~ g~~. A~~2NO~P~ADt PWR 160 -36V PS 3 REPLACE CB2. Note 1 YB200 ~-~>>---II"'~ Note 1 YB200 ... .-..-~»---t~ PWR 20 PWR 210 AND YA020 PWR 270 AND YA020 PWR 160 +6V PS 3 PWR 70 Note 1 1------111000 PWR 220 PS 6 Bulk 2 (Note 1) YB100 Note 1 YB160 and YB202 Note 2 _ PWR60 PWR 240 PS 7 Bulk 1 YB100 1------1l1000 PWR 200 PS 5 YB160 and YB201 K8 3 Phase PWR 180 PS4 +24V Supply YB101 I - - - - - - - - - - - - - - t . , . PWR 135 Fans YB10l 2 Phase Notes: 1. Only for early machines (with CP1). 2. Only for late machines (without CP7). 3. Not used on late 60Hz machines. YB160 1------1l1000 PWR 135 Use Meter SCRID Lamps PWR 260 YB110 t - - - - i Bias Supply PS 1 5 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - t 1 PWR 80 1 - - - - -... PWR 135 YB165 YB10l ~--------_-----. PWR 35 I---~ Convenience Outlet. l15V lOA 1 23FD Control YB100 PWR45 YBl80 3830·2 CB2 TRIPS © Copyright IBM " j " t /~ '. Corpor~tion (" 1972, 1913 /~ " \.~.j ; ~ "" "-..j /~ '---..j L' /-" ~, " "' \~j "'- ;! ;! ,,~j / ~., "'--J '-- .., ",-j PWR 40 C: C C C~.~' C C 'C C: C C' C Ci C,' C C; C . , ",'.'.: '" ... " / ". ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ in the power servicing area. ~ SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ until measured otherwise. ~ CAPACITORS are potentially ~ explosive devices. ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. ~ After replacing any capacitor, ~ reinstall all SAFETY COVERS ~ before p_ring up machine. _~ ~ ~ ~ Z ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ Z PWR « TB 11-7 YBI63 40 Tab 34 t~ TB 11-5 YB163 BE MADE WHILE IMPL SWITCH K Tab 33 <~ Tab 28 LB 1-7 YB18S YB121 REFERENCE DRAWING ON THIS PAGE FOR ~L~ OV Tab 26 +24V APPROPRIATE CONTACT LB 1-2 YBl85 TO CLEAN AND/OR FORM. IF UNABLE TO REPAIR REPLACE KG. IF NO K6 TROUBLE FOUND. USE THIS ORAWING TO CHECK OUT ANO REPAIR WIRING. ~//H/////////////////////////////////..a OV K6-2 IS OPERATED KTab 27 1~IATELY. 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 T1-TB 2-4 YBIOI ~T~I-~T~B~2~-2~Y~BI~0~1~«~T~ab~31~ ~-~>T~~~~~~r____ SeeMPL 1'Q tor MPL fite component locations ________ ~ $ee·lOC 12 for tab locations AC YBI80 d 1-4 YBIl5 2 181-3 CB2 K8 ~Yi~loo~------------~O----O------~~--~--------~~~~+-~ 3 L3 T3 LOGIC LEVELS J2 IS THE BOTTOM For Power Sequence Logic (P-A 1 Board VBP.... t forCt1",Y';;E;;'S_....., ______---, -I CHECK INPUT WI RING F"ROM 3-PHASE PR I MARY BACK TO CP e. REF"ERENCE SECOND LEVEL DRAW I NG ON PWR 6 I. LOOK FOR SHORTS BETWEEN LEADS AND EACH LEAD TO GROUND. ISEE NOTE 1.1 POWER UP THE UNIT 1 1 CORRECT THE PROBLEM F"OUND YES rb ~- o PWR 2 1 YES WITH P DO~~~ ~~P NO CP 8 TRIPS GO TO PWR 20 ALL CAPACITORS MEASURE NORMAL t REPLACE BLOWN CAPAC I TOR I S} RECONNECT ~ • I ~~~Ag: ~~RM~d~E C ~tROSS EACH CAPACITOR WITH AN OHMETER (X I OHM SCALE 1 I N BOTH 0 I RECTI ONS LOOK I NG F"OR A SHORT OR OPEN. A NORMAL CAPACITOR WILL GIVE A CAPACITIVE KICK FOLLOWED BY A RETURN TO INF"lNITY. REPLACE NO BLOWN CAPAC I TORS ~=-----..., TRIPS POWER MUS T BE DOWN YES ~NO~~(~Y~E~S~ FOUND LABEL. THEN 0 I SCONNECT THE SLI P ON CONNECTORS TO F"ERRO-RESONANT BLOWN CAPAC I TORS F"OUND 07, ~!~KC *~L~ Mg~N~DEK 'THE NEAR PRE-LOAD RESISTORS 150 WATT I RI-R3}. CT PRIMARY P I NPUT LEADS. ----'~------t'------------------~ REPLACE _--=CNO~APA~T~ORS .--- MEASURE NORMAL BAD RESI STDR I S} • RECONNECT ALL RESISTORS • RECONNECT REPLACE ALL RES I STORS BAD CAPACITORIS). RECONNECT ALL LEADS. DANGER POWER MUST BE DOWN _ _....."..._ _....J I I YES ~~~E~OL~~i~ N8 I fi8N~~~6s. A. HEAT SINK 1 TO WI IAT HEAT SINK}. B. TRANSF"ORMER SECONDARY COMMON 13 WIRES} TO W2 I AT W2}. I REF"ERENCE SECOND LEVEL DRAWl NG ON PWR 611. POWER UP THE UNIT ~~~E~OL~~i~N8 I m~~7CT A. B. C. O. ~~~E~OL~~i~N8 I C~~~~7CT "'.HEAT SiNK I TO WI IAT HEAl SINK}. B. TRANSF"ORMER SECONDARY COMMON 13 WIRES} TO W2 IAT W2}. C.HEAT SINK 2 TO W3 (AT HEAT SINK). D. TRANSF"ORMER SECONDARY COMMON 13 WIRES} TO W4 IAT W4}. E.HEAT SINK 3 TO W5 IAT HEAT SINK). F" • TRANSF"ORMER SECONDARY COMMON 13 FROM WI AND W2 TO RI. F"ROM W3 AND W4 TO R2. F"ROM W5 AND W6 TO R3. REMOVE R4 FROM CAPACITOR C12. 1 NO CP e TRIPS YES POWER UP THE UNIT G.~ms~,~~ :6T6AtH~6\;} REPLACE SIDE OF" CI2 IAT CI2). H. TRANSF"ORMER SECONDARY COMMON 13 WI RES} TO THE I-I SIDE OF" CI2 IAT CI2}. BAD CAPACITORIS} 6 MEASURE ACROSS R I -R3 F"OR 5 OHMS +/- 10%. MEASURE ACROSS R4 F"OR 50 OHMS +/- 5X. THE UNIT WILL NOT POWER UP NORMALLY AT THIS POINT, BUT WILL ST A Y UP LONG ENOUGH IMINIMUM OF" 12 SECONDS} F"OR A CP TRIP CONDiTION TO ~~g~~SA~~ ~~A~b~~:E~n BE MADE. TO GO TO PWR 20 NO CP 8 TRIPS ES PWR 64 A GO TO Note 1: PWR 20 Note 2: For troubleshooting, e short is considered 0-1 ohm. Ensure meter is zeroed before checking for shorts. Bulk 1 TBt is located on the Bulk t supply. PWR 62 E PWR 63 3830-2 BULK 1 (CPS) POWER PROBLEM (PART 1 OF 6) © Copyright IBM Corporation 1975, 1976, 1977, 1978 \ / PWR60 C- P(" (- L. C,'" (/ , , " c C (: .. -"' ( c: c (:. BULK 1 (CP 8) POWER PROBLEM (Part 2 of 6) BULK 1 (CP-II POWER PROBLEM SEE LOC 6,B, and 10 FOR COMPONENT LOCATION •••~.~ ~BULK1SUPPLY~.~~~ L T1 Secondaries CRI WI CPI3 -AIA2810 A Phase I Diode Soldered--' Connectlons . CB2 K8 CP8 ~ ~----------o L1 -10 Phase I -9 I ~--o-~--~~ I SINK I beck wall of bulk _mbly on aarly machina.. R ..istor mounted across bu. tarminals on lata machin... CR6 CR9 TB1 88 P-AIE1Jll EI hm " HEAT Pri mary Power Control Box PWR 61 ..-,.~.... \ Primary CR4 c: c + I VB100/PWR 40 ~" "~~1~~~~m~.MM(No.1' k l:p-erroresonant T r a n s f o r m e r ' itij A Connection CR3 Input AC Line Filter C' "Bulk 1 Dual 5.3V min to .nlor (Note1) P-AIE1JIO ,......tCH!"';-- EI CR8 To PS7 T1 I I I -+...-0------0 'S Pha.e Q. C 2 L2 ~ 91 TB1 -6-5 I ~ a. --...l.- C I') Pha.e 3 L3 On lat. machine•• I °n--o--o--o l2f-1~\\.) SINK 4 L - -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ------ EI A6 A C C C P-A I A2D02 P-A I EI DO, T2 Secondaries Ferroresonant Transformer T2 t:. Connection Phase I .' "Bulk 2 + 4,5 minimum to sensor BULK 2 SUPPLY Input AC line Filter ('. --L C 3 l3 No.2 o Gnd TBl -2 CR31 -I T3 No. I AC Gnd Bus Bll II II II A,B ~+--------~~+--E3 L-~~~;t::~~~==t=~_'~~ ToPS3 40.5 to 47,5V Unreg DC PWR 160 ~ ~--------------++-~Frame Ground ~ CR32 YB160 and YB202 ~:>-.:.;;.;..---=~- E11 ~~:}If' A,B Cl2 A,B To PS3 Cl3 P·A1A2B08 P·A1E1J09 A,B '-4I,.;..;:.:;--.......:j~-bI--N CR35 • Bulk 2 - 39.4V Minimum to Sensor CR36 VB115 Ii! L..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _...:+t-_ T810- 10 R7 :,:;:i 40.5 to 47.5V Unreg DC PWR270 CPI7 ~-"""---TalO-3 'These lines normally have the bulk voltage outputs shown, The minimum value indicated in the line name is what the sensor requires to consider bulk supolies normal. PLD sensor card on YB145, 3830-2 ONLV FOR EARLV MACHINES IWITH Cn) PWR 71 BULK 2 (CP7) POWER PROBI,.EM (PART 3 OF 51 BULK 2 (CP7) POWER PROBLEM (Part 30f5) ~~////////////////////////////////////~ ~ DANGER ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ in the power servicing area. ~ SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ until measured otherwise. ~ CAPACITORS are potentially ~ explosive devices. ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. ~ A Iter replacing any capacitor. ~ reinstall all SAFETY COVERS ~ before powering up machine. .~ • SEE PWA 71 FOR VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION. , POWER MUST BE DOWN DOWN R DISCONNECT DISCONNECT D~W~ha~D SEE BOX ON PWR 73: "CHECKING POWER DIODES." , MEASURE CR25-CR36 SHORTS OR .1 THE LEADS FROM W' AND WIO TO Rb AND R7. (R6 ANO R1 CONNECTIONS ON AND WID ARE AT C2b.1 LEADS FROM AND TO R5. (THE R5 CONNECTION ON W1 ANO W8 IS AT CI9). .8 S• SEE lOC 6, 8, AND 10 FOR COMPONENT LOCATIONS. DANGER POWER MUST BE 1 ~/////////////////////////////////////..a • ~ DANGER POWER MUS T BE DOWN PWR 72 •• -r 1 YES REPLACE BAD OIODE(SI. RECONNECT ALL LEADS , CHECK F"OR THE F"DLLOWI NG HIGH RESISTANCE SHORTS TO F"RAME GROUND: SINKS 5 AND & UNO. SOLDERED CTION OF" DIODES CR36 TO GROUND. MEASURE ACROSS R6 MEASURE ACROSS R5 FOR 4.5 TO 5.5 OHM (5 OHM +/- 101). ALSO CHECK FOR SHORTS TO GROUND. (SEE NOTE 1.1 AND R7 FOR 95.TO 105 OHM EACH (tOO OHM 5%1. ALSO GROUND. (SEE NOTE 1.1 NO~YES r VALUE CORRECT ,~ NO RESISTOR VALUES CORRECT YES REPLACE REPLACE THE BAD RESISTOR R5 PWR 20 "/~ CHECK FOR SHORTS TO CHECK THAT THE MACHINE 60 HZ ONLY. ~~~ cgG~~' ~a~~. YBt60, VOLTAGE RATING TAG, INPUT VOLTAGE MEASURED. AND THE FOLLOW' HG JUMPERS ARE IN AGREEMENT: •• .8 INPUT VOLTAGE l+/-IO'U JUMPERS AT BULK 2 182 ZOOV AC 2-4,6-8,IQ-12 220V AC Z301 2-3.6-1,10-1' zoel REMOVE REMOVE THE W1 ANO BUS BARS FROM C16-C19 AND WID BUS BARS FROM CZ4-CZ6. RECONNECT RECONNECT LEADS TO W9 AND WIO LEADS TO W1 ANO we 235v AC MEASURE ACROSS EACH CAPAC I TOR FOR A SHORT. A NORMAL CAPAC I TOR WI LL GIVE A CAPACITIVE KICK THEN RETURN TO I NF I N I TY IN EACH DIRECTION ON THE X I OHM SCALE. YES POWER UP THE UNIT MEASURE ACROSS EACH CAPAC I TOR FOR A SHORT. A NORMAL CAPAC ITOR WI LL GIVE A CAPACITIVE KICK F"DLLOWED BY A RETURN TO INF"INITY IN EACH D I RECTI ON ON THE • I OHM SCALE. POWER UP THE UNIT NO MEASURE ~HE 3 PHASE INPUT VOLTAGE ACROSS BULK 2 TB2-2 CHECK THE APPRQPR lATE TRANSF"ORMER SECONDAR I ES F"OR F"RA YEO OR SHORTEO WIRING TI) T82-6, T8Z-2 TO TB2;:6 0 tB~':'? 0 :BZ-6 CORRECT THE SHORTED HEAT SINK. RECONNECT ALL INPUT LEADS TO THE W BUS BARS. POWER NUS T BE DOWN DANGER POWER MUST BE POWER MUST 8E DOWN DOWN THIS MAY HAVE TO BE MEASURED DURING A PA~TlAl POWER UP CYCLE IBEFORE TIME OUlI <6>'" REPLACE CP 1 TRIPS THE SHORTED CAPAC ITOR I S I FOUND NO YES CP 1 0'" REPLACE CP 1 TRIPS DANGER THE SHORTED CAPACITORISI FOUNO NO REINSTALL FIX THE WIRE INSULATION. RECONNECT ALL I NPUT LEADS TO THE W BUS BARS, REINSTALL W1 AND W8 BUS BARS W9 ANO WIO BUS BARS sm. TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY (T2A A ~~~~H~~ ARE RECONNECT ALL INPUT LEADS TO THE W BUS BARS. REPLACE CORRECT JUMPERS ON T82 REF"ERENCE THE INST SECTION OF THIS MANUAL TO CHECK THAT OTHER TRANSFORMERS ARE WIRED CORREcn Y F"OR THIS INPUT VOLTAGE. RECONNECT RECONNECT ALL LEADS ALL LEADS ~ TO Pw.A 20 GO TO PWR 2Q RECONNECT ALL LEADS Note 1: For troubleshooting. a short is considered 0-1 ohm. Ensure meter is zeroed before checking for shorts. 383()'2 ONLY FOR EARLY MACHINES (WITH CP7) ~ PW R 72 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1973 J 0 0 r\ V 0 0 0 0 0 0) V 0 ,-,' 0 I , 0 ",--y 0 0 0 0 0 () '-,Y ;r'~ " '<..., ! ,..-..\ i ) """----' ~ j ,r " fr " ~, "- ;. ",--- "" y ;. .- "'".- / j , .,>, } \ .... Of ",j (:: p L ('" '-' ('~ (:, c; (j (~ (',/ C' C (-~" (' (\ (' -:,1 (/ (,/ C: C' C\ C (' ,_./ ",;.-;/ ,',) (~ .. .v C C: (,~. ~ DANGER ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ C C: C C' C C C C """J BULK 2 ICP7) POWER PROBLEM IPART 4 OF 5) BULK 2 (CP7) POWER PROBLEM (Part 4 of 5) ~~////////////////////////////////////~ c:' .. PWR 73 PWR 70 ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ in the power servicing area, ~ SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ until measured otherwise. ~ CAPACITORS are potentially ~ explosive devices. ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. Z After replacing any capacitor, ~ reinstall all SAFETY COVERS ~ before powering up machine. _~ ~/////////////////////////////////////.a CHECKING POWER DIODES A QUICK CHECK FOR SHORTED DIODES CAN BE MADE WITH THE CE TEST LAMP. IT I S NOT NECESSARY TO 0 I SCONNECT ~~~oe~gD~~6MB¥~PS!~~I~~~T BE BE POWER MUST BE: DOWN. HOLD THE TEST L AND TO eKED. ACT SHOR TRA THE THE L WITH INPUT LEADS .9 AND WID STILL THE ABOVE TEST DOES NOT CHECK FOR OPEN DIODES. OPEN DIODES AND MOST OTHER I RREGULAR I TI ES CAN BE DETECTED WITH POWER ON BY OBSERV I NG THE REel I F' I ER OUTPUT WAVEFORM ON AN OSCILLOSCOPE. WITH INPUT LEADS TO W7 AND W8 ST ILL gI6g~~~m~~R~~~8~ SHORTS OR OPENS. ob?gg~~g~~~ !C~~~CK FOR SHORT S OR OPENS CAUTION; 00 NOT OPER It. TE POWER SUPPLY WI TH CAPAC I TORS OR LOAD 0 I SCONNECTEO. SUSPECT 01 AN BE GIVEN A FINAL CHECK BY 0 ECT I NG THEM FROM THE SURING FORWARD AND HEAT SINK BACK RES I S I TH AN OHMMETER. FORWARD RE E SHOULO BE QU I TE LOW I COMPA A KNOWN GOOD DIODEI. BA RESISTANCE SHOULD BE HIGH. SUT NOT INFINITE. YES REPAIR TRANSFORMER SECONDAR I ES FOR FRAYEO OR SHORTEO WIRING. THE SHORTED HEAT SINK. RECONNECT THE I NPUT LEADS TO W7 AND W8. YES DANGER YES POWER MUS T BE DOWN. REPAIR RECONNECT I NPUT LEADS TO W7 AND W8. RECONNECT I NPUT LEADS TO W7 AND W8. WIRE INSULATION. RECONNECT THE INPUT LEADS TO W7 AND W8. NO TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY. I T2A l ~~~~H~~D S~~: I ARE RECONNECT I NPUT LEADS TO W7 AND W8. SHORTED HEAT SINK. RECONNECT INPUT LEADS TO W9 AND WIO. TRANSFORMER SECONDAR I ES FOR FRAYED OR SHORTED WIRING LABEL AND DISCONNECT PWR 20 THE FOLLOW I NG LEADS: I. HEAT SINK 6 TO .9 IAT W91. 2. TRANSFORMER SECONDARY COMMON ('3 WIRES) TO WIO (AT WtOI. THE UNIT WILL NOT POWER UP NORMALLY AT THIS POINT. BUT WILL STAY UP LONG ENOUGH IMINIMUM OF 12 SECONDS I FOR A CP TRIP CONDITION TO ~~~u~Ec~~sI2lLLOW MEASUREMENT TO BE MADE. REFER TO THE SECOND LEVEL DRAWING ON PWR 11 PWR 20 PWR 20 I NPUT LEADS TO W9 ANO WIO CHECK IN ORDER OF FAILURE PROBABILITY 1 I. CP7 TRIPPING WITHOUT EXCESS I VE CURRENT. 2. A~~A~s~g~M~~5RnAtoB. GROUND OR WINDINGS. YES SCOPE OR METER ISOLATE AND REPAIR PROBLEM. THEN RECONNECT ALL LEADS. POWER UP THE UNIT REPAIR WIRE INSULATION. RECONNECT INPUT LEADS W9 AND WIO. TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY IT2Al ~~~~H~~DSH:I ARE RECONNECT I NPUT LEADS TO W9 AND Wl0. Note 1: For troubleshooting, a short is considered 0-1 ohm. Ensure meter is zeroed before checking for shorts. PWR 12 PWR 20 3830-2 ONLV FOR EARL V MACHINES IWITH CP7) © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1973 ~ PWR 73 8000 () 00 o 0. ·.·. 10 J o r-··", \.j) ,r-" ~) " , ". y -- '. .> -- , '. '. . ,-_?' . .'" .../ ,,- '"i -------" ..... c' ~( .. <= c (-, (,j C,:1 (/ ("'; (" '",1'" ( (- (', ( (,' ( (~ (0 C C C· ... (~ (" "~ C (' (' C' '-'- BULK 2 (CP7) POWER PROBLEM (Part 5 of 5) ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ C C C c: PWR 74 110 ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ in the power servicing area. ~ SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ until measured otherwise. ~ CAPACITORS are potentially ~ explosive devices. ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. ~ After replacing any capacitor, ~ reinstall all SAFETY COVERS ~ before powering up machine. .~ PWR 11 I OURING A POWER UP MEASURE THE BULK 2 OUTPUT IN QUt. S T I ON FOR THE PROPER OUTPUT: BULK 2 OUTPUT TO: DANGER I. PS3(+bV SECTIONI POWER MUST BE DOWN. MEASURE: .'(+1 we TO (-I LABEL AND 0 I SCONNECT THE PROPER SET OF LEADS FOR THE 8ULK 2 OUTPUT I N QUEST ION: VALUE: BULK 2 OUTPUT TO: 10.& TO t2.4V DC A. 40.5 TO 41.5V DC CHECK THE FOLLOW JNG CAPAC I TORS FOR 8LOWN OUT VENT CAPS: • t • C 16-C 19 ANO C.24-C2& (LOCATED UNDER/OR NEAR THE • W' BUS BARS THAT TIE THE CAPAC I TORS TOGETHERt. 2. e21 -C23 I MOUNTED ON THE 8ACK WALL OF BULK 2 NEAR PRE-LOAD RESISTORS ,50 WATTI RI-R3 AND R5-Rll. SEE LOC 6. 8. AND 10 FOR COMPONENT LOCATIONS SEE PWR 71 FOR VOL TAGE DISTRIBUTION eYCLE~ l POWER MUS T BE DOWN. ~/////////////////////////////////////..a • (: BULK 2 (CP71 POWER PROBLEM (PART 5 OF 51 ~~////////////////////////////////////~ ~ DANGER c: 0 I SCQNNECT LEADS (REF PWR 11): CPI5 AND CPI6 8.CPt1 AND cPle LA8EL I. HEAT SINK 5 TO W1 ,AT .1). 2. TR ANSFORMER SECONDAR Y COMMON (THREE WIRE S I TO W8 (AT W81. I.HEATSINK&TOW9 IAT W91. 2. TRANSFORMER SECONDARY COMMON (THREE W'RESI TO W10 (AT Wl01. AND 0 I SCONNECT SL I P-ON CONNECTORS AT AND CZth':ZZ MEASURE THESE CAPAC I TORS FOR SHORTS OR OPENS. A NORMAL CAPACITOR WILL GIVE A 'CAPACITIVE KICK' FOLLOWED BY A RETURN TO INFINITY IN 80TH DIRECTIONS ON THE XI OHM SCALE. YES CHECK SEE BOX ON PWR 73 "CHECKING POWER DIODES." FOR AN OPEN CP WITHOuT vISI8LE INDICATION. AL SO CHECK FOR AN OUTPUT WI RING PROBLEM I N THE POWER SUPPL Y OR SENSING LOGIC. BULK 2 OUTPUT TO: MEASURE DIODES: A. e. CRZS-CR30 CR3t-CR3b CPt!> AND CPI& CPI1 AND CPl8 REPLACE THE BLOWN CAPAC I TOR MEA SURE THE INPUT THREE PHASE VOLTAGE ACROSS BULK 2 T82-2 TO T8 2-&, T8 2-2 TO .2~: THIS MAY HAVE TO BE MEASURED DURING A PARTIAL POWER UP CYCLE (BEFORE TIMEOUT! ~o I ~B ~~? 0 TB REPA IR OR REPLACE AS NECESSARY PWR 20 60 HZ ONLY. FOR 50 HZ, SEE LOGIC PAGES YB 160. YB202. YES BAD CAPAC I TOR,S I • j NO CHECK THAT THE MACHINE VOLTAGE RATING TAG, INPUT VOLTAGE MEASURED, AND THE ~OLLOWI NG JUMPERS ARE IN AGREEMENT: • -- INPUT VOLTAGE ( +1011 JUMPERS AT BULK ...:Z~T::B";Z::""'_ _ _ _ _ PWR 20 RECONNECT I ALL LEADS 10-12 10-11 10-9 200V AC 208/220v 230/235v BAD OIODEISI RECONNECT ALL LEADS PWR 20 FOR THE BULK 2 OUTPUT I N QUE S T ION. DISCONNECT THE PROPER SET O~ CAPAC I TORS THEN MEASURE FOR SHORTS OR OPENS: RECONNECT YES BULK 2 OUTPUT TO: LEADS TO CAPAC 1 TORS Cll, C22 AND C23 A. CPI!> MEASURE ACROSS 0 I SCONNECT EACH (REF PWR 7 I I: CAPAC I TOR' REMOVE Wl BUS FROM CAPAC I TOR BANK CPI& Clb-CI9 B. CPt1 CP 18 I REMovE W9 8US C24-C2& F'ROM CAPAC 1 TOR BANK A NORMAL CAPAC I TOR WI LL Ci I VE A • CAPAC I T I VE KICK' rOLLOWEO BY A RETURN TO INFINITY IN 80TH DIRECT IONS ON THE X I OHM SCALE FOR THE BULK 2 OUTPUT IN QUESTION. 01 SCONNEC T AND MEA SURE THE PROPER PRE-LOAD RES I STaRS I BULK OUTPUT 0 I SCONNECT ~ RESISTOR; (REF PWR 111: OHM VALUE; CORRECT JUMPERS ON BULK TB 2 A. Z CPI5 CP I & R5 LEADS AT W1 AND we 4.5-5.5 8. CPI1 CPI8 REFERENCE THE INS T SECT I ON OF' TH I S MANUAL TO CHECK THAT OTHER TRANSFORMERS ARE WI REO CORRECTLY ~OR THIS INPUT VOLTAGE NO RECONNECT ALL LEADS REPLACE BAD CAPAC I TOR,S I • RECONNECT ALL LEADS. PWR 20 REPLACE GO TO TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY. 1 T2A, T28, AND T2C ARE A MATCHED SET!. BAD PRE -LOAD RESISTORISI PWR 20 447460 3830-2 19 Dec 75 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1975 PWR 20 IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER ONLY FOR EARLY MACHINES (WITH CP71 ~ PWR 74 , " CP4 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 61 CP4 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 6) PWR 80 ~~////////////////////////////////////~ ~ DANGER ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES arc present ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ in the power servicing area. Z SAFETY cannot be overemphasIzed. ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ until measured otherwise. ~ CAPACITORS are potentially ~ explosive devices. ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. ~ After replacing any capacitor, ~ reInstall all SAFETY COVERS ~ before powering up machine. _~ DANGER CP 4 TRIPS. PS POWER MUS T BE 15 81AS SUPPLY PROBLEM. PWR '00.1 2, 0, ~OWN. eo. 190.200 30.240 I 250 LA8EL AND DISCONNECT ~/////////////////////////////////////..a JUMPER OR LEADS AT THE FOLLOW I NG POWER SUPPLIES: PS 4, E 1 2 . LEAD PS 5, £8 TO Fll JUMPER, PS €:I, E12ILEAD) PS 7, faTOE11 (JUMPER I NORMALLY A O~FERRED MA I NTENANCE CAl.L f\J' • SH t Of; 10 HJH C()MPON~ L OCA r IONS • SllPr'IHHblf)H!XffHt-JA! f:IHCljll ANIJ I OC;A TlONS MEASURE THE PS 15 OUTPU1S FOR A READINC OF FROM lb. b TO 24 vDC AT: TB TB TB TB 2-1 2-3 2-5 2-1 ,., '" TO TO TO Hl TB TB T8 T8 2-2 2-' 2-6 2-6 LABEL AND 0 I SCONNECT THE FOLLOWlNCi OU-TPUT LEADS AT PS 15: I-I I-I I-I I-I TB 2-1 TB 2-3 T8 2-5 TB 2-1 UNIT WILL NOT POWER UP NORMALLY AT THIS PO I NT, BUT YOU ARE LOOKING FOR A CP 4 TRIP CONDITION ONLY DANGER POWER MUS T BE DOWN. PWR 90 LABEL AND REMOYE OR BOTH JUMPER AT PS 5, E8 TO Ell. DISCONNECT LEAD AT PS 2-3 15, T8 8 T8 2-8 ONLY lOR YOU ARR I YEO HERE FROM PIR 240, PS11 PQWE R UP UNlT TB 2-3 TO T8 2-4 ONLY lOR YOU ARR I vEO HERE FROM PWR 200, PS5 I DANGER (NOTE 1,) POWER MUS T BE DOWN. DANGER POWER MUS T BE DOWN. LABEL AND DANGER POWER MU S T BE DOWN. LABEL AND REMovE LABEL AND REMOVE POWER UP UNIT (NOTE 1.) POWER MUST BE DOWN. ...JUMPER AT P5 5, EB TO Ell. 01 SCONNECT LEAD AT PS IS, TB 2-3 LEAD AT PS6, E 12, DISCONNECT LEAD AT PS 15, T82·5 POWER UP UNIT ISEE NOTE 1.1 REPLACE PS 15 PWR 20 POWE R UP UN IT (NOTE 1.1 PWR 93 Note 1: Unit will not power up normally at this point, but should remain up long enough to make the required measurement. 3830·2 IBM CONFIDENTIAL 447460 19 Dec 75 © Copyright IBM Corporation · 0:,0,,·, O , ,-',.' CP4 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 61 UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER PWR 80 1975 o 00 0 0 0 A .~ (~ ~ 0 0, 0 0 0 0 " ;t=,,\ . ~j , " ",'"" i.. 1 » ,~ ''-_.' i r "" > ( " '\.J '" " _J" :1)" ~'.. .. ,/ .." ~ .....~. f "-- ')" ( ( (/' ( ( ( (.' (~/ ( ( (/ (~ (/ ( ( ( ( (: ( (: ,. c 'CP4 TRIPS (Part 2 of 6) PRIMARY POWER CONTROL BOX YB100 K8 CP4 PS 15 Bias Supply ~~////////////////////////////////////~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ (', (,' I ~ TB 1-10 H---o~I--o:.~.::.oo--crJ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ in the power servicing area. ~ SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ until measured otherwise. ~ CAPACITORS are potentially ~ explosive devices. ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. ~ After replacing any capacitor, ~ reinstall all SAFETY COVERS ~ before powering up machine. .~ I 3 Phase I AC Input I I TB2-2 YB165 " Turn on of PS under \ control of the Pwr Sequencing klgic .. .0, Aux Contact for PS CP Trip Indicator EI2 (E9 (YBI48) PS4 (EIO P-A IA2BI2 1-'-o:~-.:.T::(B1)--2=--.:.:TB~I...:-3:'-'-~~=---4-_4-o PWR 85 YBnO turn on (-) -<:: ( -(Gnd level) (+) I ~/////////////////////////////////////...a ,- A. Comman \~\ I (~ ( PS15 BIAS SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION PS15 BIAS SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION ~ DANGER (, +7V dc P-A I EIB02 PlD Sensar (YBI45) Card • Raw Bias 12V min to Sensar 200/208V 2 ac Tap 220/230/330V ac Tap 04 235/408V acTap 3~~~----------------C 4~~~---------------,[- AC Gnd CP9, 10,6 PS 15 Bias Supply 16.6-24V de (nominal'" 18V de) (at TB2 terminals) PS 4 El$ ..c '" '"iOc < ~ < a ;:; g .. .a. ~ a < 'i ~ n < a if (9 'i -- n II a. SE2 El$ 7 8 0 72 J 1 0 •<< SeeN ote 1 a . '" !• i Sl !l a. Jl HS .Ill ~!!l!1 a $ E15$ (E9 (EIO PS6 +2.2V de 0 SE4 $E15 E2S n 0 (-) A E14 E12 -(Gnd level) turn on E14 E13 E12 Ell EIO E9 E8 E7 E6 E5 PS6 SEI E3S I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SE3 E15$ E4& E5 E6 E7 EB E9 EIO Ell E12 E13 E14 6 A (+) 0 ~ 0 ; PS5 5 Auta-tu rnon Jumpers ~ $ I I I I I I 0 ~ E3S E5 E6 E7 EB E9 EIO Ell E12 E13 E14 ~~ SE4 $E15 E2S Turn on of PS under control of the Pwr Sequencing Logic t. n ~ a. i ! ...iO ..Sla. n (9 (9 '--- SEJ So SEI -- I I I I I I I E14 E13 E12 Ell EIO E9 EB I E7 I E6 I E5 0 (+) A (E14 (-) Ell PS 7 -3V/+l.25V de J.... • This line normally has the bias voltage of + 16.6 to 24 Vdc. The minimum value in the line name (+ 12V) is what the sensar requires to consider the bias supply normal. 0 PS 7 Power Supplies are physically inverted on left and right sides Note 1: Overvoltage card not present if power supplies at EC 716230 or later. 1447460 3830-2 19 Dec 75 © Capyright IBM Corporation 1975 IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER PS15 BIAS SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION PWR 85 c CP4 TRIPS (PART 3 OF 6) CP4 TRIPS (PART 3 OF 6) ~~//////H////////////////////////////~ ~ DANGER ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ • '~ G in the power servicing area. ~ SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ until measured otherwise. ~ CAPACITORS are potentially ~ explosive devices. ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. Z Alter replacing any capacitor, ~ reinstall a" SAFETY COVERS ~ before powering up machine. _~ ~ DANGER DANGER POWER MUST BE OOWN PowER MUST BE DOWN <;?'" TRIPS REMOVE THE REGULATOR CAROtSl FROM PS NO ~/////////////////////////////////////..a • eo PWR ~ ~ PWR90 DANGER POwER MUS T BE DOWN- SEE LOC 10 FOR COMPONENT LOCATIONS . SEE PWR 85 FOR EXTERNAL CIRCUIT ANO LOCATIONS. - ISEE NOTE 31 POWER MUST BE DOWN POWER UP UN I T ISEE NOTE 21 CP 4 TRIPS THE LEAO AT PS 15, TB 2-3. CONNECT THE JUMPER AT PS 5. E8 TO Ell THEN 01 SCONNECT THE AC INPUT LEADS AT PS 15 (T8 I J • I SEE PWR 85 FOR TERM 1NAL LOCATIONS.) NO 1 OANGER POWER UP UN I T LABEL YES L ! DOWN DANGER POWER UF' UN I T POWER MUST BE DOWN ISEE NOTE 21 CP 4 TRIPS CP 4 STILL ~~~~ ~6N~~CP tH~B NO TRIPS NO P WR '91 DANGER POWER MUS T BE DOWN TO CHECK THE AC INPUT WIRING FROM PS 15 BAt;:t<. TO CP 4 9 POWER MUST BE DOWN POWER MUST BE DOWN REMOVE THE REGULATORCARD IS) FROM PS 4 ISEE NOTE 31 REMOVE THE REGULATOR CARD I 5) FROM PS 5 ISEE NOTE 31 POWER UP UN I T POWER UP .UN I T ISEE NOTE 21 iSEE NOTE 21 POWER MUST BE DOWN CHECK REPLACE PS· 15 LEADS AT PS 15. RECONNEC TALL LEAOS I JUMPERS THAT WERE DISCONNECTED ON PS 4, 5, 6, AND 1 CORRECT THE PROBLEM FOUND CP 4 TRIPS NO 1 NO ~. CURRENT IN PS 1S TB 2-1 AND B 2-2 MEASURES WITHIN SPEC t DANGER 1 DANGER POWER MUST BE DOWN RECONNECT POwER MUST BE DOWN YES YES 1 I REPLACE REGULATOR CAROtSI IN PS 4 ISEE NOTE 31 REGULATOR CAROISI IN PS 5 ISEE NOTE 31 -~ 1 DANGER POWER MUST BE DOWN 1 PS 5 ADJUST PS REGULATOR AFFECTED I PWR 20 ,"0 REPLACE PS 4 TO LEAD AT PS 15. TB 2·7. CONNECT THE JUMPER AT PS 7. EB TO Ell. CURRENT IN PS 15 t TB 2-3 MEASURES WITHIN SPEC I 1 REPLACE RECONNECT ~ ~ 1 REPLACE ALL LEADS 1 Note 3: Some power supplies have two cards (one a regulator, the other overvoltage). If there are two cards in the power supply remove them both. If the measurement comes within specifications, insert one card at a tlmp. until the shorted card is found. DANGER RECONNECT powER MUST BE DOWN 1 PWR 91 I I ISEE NOTE 21 Note 2: Unit will not power up normally at this point, but should remein up long enough to make the required measurement or observe a CPUip. 1 OANGER TO GROUND IF NO FAULT FOUND REPLACE CP 4 ISEE NOTE 1.1 POWER UP UNI T K POWER MUST BE DOWN 9 DANGER (fARD~H..t'NHd m~\m~ DANGER Note 1: For troubleshooting, a short is considered 0-1 ohm. REGULATOR CAROlS) IN PS 1 ISEE NOTE 31 1 REPLACE PS 1 ~~:~ 1 YES REGULATOR CAROlS) IN PS 6 IsEE NOTE 31 NO DANGER PS • I SCOPE IMETER RECONNECT THE LEAT AT Ps 15. TB 2·5. CONNECT THE LEAD AT PS6. EI2 REPLACE CURRENT IN PS 15 t TB 2-1 AND B 2-8 MEASURES WITHIN SPEC 1 YES 2 ! ~ REPLACE REPLACE LEAD AT PS 4, EI2 J YES YES 1 1 RECONNECT YES ISEE NOTE 21 ~ CURRENT IN PS 15 t TB 2-5 AND B 2-6 MEASURES WITHIN SPEC NO PWR 91 POWER MUST BE ISEE NOTE 21 POWER UP UN I T POWER UP UN 1T ISH NOTE 21 YB b.5 RECONNECT REMOVE THE RECiULATOR CAROtSl IN PS 1 ISEE NOTE 31 6 OANGER -(§ - - E !'r.B :,0 I TO PWR 20 3830-2 IBM CONFIDENTIAL /447460 19 Dec 75 CP4 TRIPS (PART 3 OF 6) UNTIL MARCH 26.1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER PWR 90 @Copyright IBM Corporation 1975 J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 () 0 .' . . . 0 0 , .') V ~ 0 0 0 0 ;r'~, ('. \.j "-Y r, \-..] ~, I jl :0 "'-.y /"' . .,. "...- ,. j ~1 , / ..i ~"'. JI .......!~ . ; )i \~I ~~------- ( (/ ( ( (- ( ( .. ( C (~. (-" (" ,...../ (' (" C (~- ( (~ (. (~ " C- (' ( ,. ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~W//////////////////////////////////~ ~ ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ in the power servicing area. . Z SAFETY cannot be overemphasIzed. ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ until measured otherwise. ~ CAPACITORS are potentially ~ explosive devices. ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. ~ Alter replacing any capacitor, ~ reinstall all SAFETY COVERS ~ before powering up machine. _~ POWER MUST BE OOWN POWER MUST BE DOWN LABEL. THEN 0 I SCONNECT THE FOLLOWING LEADS AT PS 5: I. E8 TO Ell I,JUMPER I 4: 2. EI4 3. E7 FRQM PS 2. E9 POWER MUST BE DOWN POWER MUST BE DOWN LABEL LABEL THEN 0 I SCONNECT THE FOLLOW INC LEAOS AT PS &: I. EI4 T~.E~~.IJUMPER). 15 THEN DISCONNECT THE FOLLOWING LEADS AT PS7 1. Ell TO E8IJUMPER) 2. El' 3. E7TO PS 15 , 3. El0. SEE lOC 10 FOR COMPONENTS • LOCATIONS . SEE PWR 85 FOR EXTERNAL CIRCUIT AND LOCATIONS. POWER UP UNIT ISEE NOTE 1.1 POWE R uP UNIT ISEE NOTE 1.1 "g'n~H~~~I,T POWER UP UNIT ISEE NOTE 1.1 ~ ~ ~~:~5 DANGER SCOPE/METER DANGER POWER MUST BE DOWN TO IN THE WIR INC TO I SOLATE A SHORT IN THE WIRING BETWEEN PS I 5, T8 2-3 AND TB 2-4 AND PS 5, E7 AND E14 PS 4, E9 AND EID RECONNECT POWER MUST BE DOWN REMOVE CHECK FOR A SHORT BETWEEN LEADS AND EACH LEAD TO GROUND ISEE NOTE 3.1 REGULATOR CAROlS} IN PS 4 ISEE NOTE 2.1 DANGER RECONNECT DANGER LEADS AT PS 4, LEADS AT PS E14, EJi I E8 YES ~llll SCOPE /METER POWER MUST BE DOWN I SOLA TE A SHORT BETWEEN PS 15, 18 2-1 AND T8 2-2 AND EI2, E9, EIO , TRIPS TRIPS ~o CHECK FOR A SHORT BETWEEN LEADS AND EACH LEAD TO GROUND ISH NOTE 3) REMOVE REGULATOR CAROlS} IN PS 5 ISEE NOTE 2.1 ~~!n SCO PE/METER , oANGER E~18h~~~ TO POWER MUST BE DOWN REGULATOR CARDIS) IN PS 6 ISEE NOTE 2.1 POWER UP UNIT ISEE NOTE 1.1 PROBLEM FOUND ~ RECONNECT YES CP 4 TRIPS ALL LEADS NO ~. PROBLEM FOUND. CP 4 TR IPS TO REPLACE REGULATOR CARDISI IN PS 4 ISEE NOTE 2.) DANGER POWER MUST BE DOWN PWR 20 POWER UP UNIT ISEE NOTE 1.1 CHECK FOR A SHORT BETWEEN LEADS AND EACH LEAD TO GROUND ISEE NOTE 3.) REMOVE REGULATOR CAROlS} IN PS 7 ISEE NOTE 21 1 DANGER REGULATOR c,~~F~b\-~ is) POWER MUST BE DOWN 5 CORRECT RECONNECT ALL LEADS ALL LEADS ~. PWR 20 DOWN REPLACE ,~ r • REPLACE PWR 20 AD.JUST PS REGULA TOR AFFECTED ~ TO PWR 20 3830-2 447460 19 Dec 75 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1915 -~ PWA 50 1 RECONNECT ALL LEADS -~ TO 1 REPLACE PS PWR 20 1 I PS 5 I POWER MUST BE DOWN REGULATOR CAROlS} IN PS 7 ISEE NOTE 2.1 REPLACE I , DANGER NO PS b PS 4 PROBLEM FOUNO YES CP 4 TR IPS TO REGULATOR CAROlS} IN PS 6 ISEE NOTE 2} REPLACE REPLACE POWER UP UNIT ISEE NOTE 1.1 1 RECONNECT TO REPLACE ORREeT PROB LEM FOUND POWER MUST BE , DANGER 1 I--""';C I SOLATE A SHORT IN THE WIR INCi 1 o CORRECT ~m~ POWER MUST BE DOWN LEADS AT PS 1 Ell t EI4, AND El J CH ECK FOR A SHD RT BETWEEN LEA DSAND EACH LEA TO GROUND IS EE NOTE 3.1 REMOVE l SCOPE/METER BETWEEN PS 15, T8 2-1 AND T8 2-8 AND PS 1, £ 1 AND E 14 RECONNECT POWE R MUST BE DOWN LEADS AT PS & , ~~'" ~ DANGER TO I SOL ATE A SHORT IN THE WIRINCi BETWEE N PS 15. TB 2-5 AND T8 2-& AND PS b. E 9, AND E I O. POWER MUST BE DOWN RECONNECT POWER MUST BE DOWN CORRECT POWER UP UNIT ISEE NOTE 1.1 PWR 91 1 LABEL I. EI2 ( DANGER THEN 0 I SCONNECT THE FOLLOW. NG LEADS AT PS 3. El0 (~- 9 DANGER DANGER ~/////////////////////////////////////M: • (~ CP4 TRIPS (PART 4 OF 61 CP4 TRIPS (PART 4 OF 6) ~ DANGER (, ('- Note 1: The unit will not power up normally at this point, but you are looking for a CP 4 trip condition only_ Note 2: SOme power supplies have two cards (one a regulator, the other overvoltllf/ll). 1fthere are two cards in the power supply, remove them both. If the CP stops tripping, insert one at a time untiI the shorted card is found. Note 3: For troubleshooting, a short is considered 0- 1 ohms. Ensure meter is zeroed before checking for shorts. IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER PWR 50 I ADJUST PS REGULATOR AFFECTED ~ TO PWR 20 CP4 TRIPS (PART 4 OF 61 PWR 91 'CP4 TRIPS (PART 5 OF 6) CP4 TRIPS (PART 5 OF 61 ~~////////////////////////////////////~ ~ DANGER ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ PWR 92 P ~ A LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ in the power servicing area. ~ SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ until measured otherwise. ~ CAPACITORS are potentially ~ explosive devices. ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. ~ A Iter replacing any capacitor. ~ reinstall all SAFETY COVERS ~ before powering up machine. _~ CHECK THE MACH I NE VOLTAGE RATING TAG TO J CHECK THE PS 15 INPUT VOL T AGE AS F'OLLOWS; r ________________ ND~YES r-----~'< MEASUREMENTS REvERSED VOLTAGE CHE:CK At: I ' ~ '" 230V 10 I I +/- lOt.I INPUT VOLTAGE AGREE 5 WITH THE MACH I NE VOLTAGE RATING TAG AND DANGER CBl TERMINALS ,...______ 0, INFORM THE USE THE PROPER CURRENT PROBE FOR THE SCOPE YOU HAVE. THE MAX I MUM CURRENT MEASURED SHOULD BE 0.7 AMPS OC A MORE THAN O. 7 PIP AC SUPER I FOR A PEAK C 0.74 AMPS. YES >-=------------, MEASURE PS 15 f S OUTPUT CURRENT AS FOLLOWS I MEASURE THE CURRENT IN EACH OUTPUT LEAD; TB 2-1. TB 2-4, TB 2-1, AGREE CHANGE THE INPUT TAPS ON PS 15. T8 1 TO YES AGREE WITH THE I NPUT VOLTAGE SCOPE/METER CUSTOMER THE I MPROPER INPUT VOL T AGE TO THE UNIT ~ ATI~gLf~gEAND t6N~fCr mN~ N~O~~VOL+~~~TTO CU WITHIN SPEC " POWER MUS T BE DOWN CONTROL UNIT AT CP 4 CHECK THAT THE 208/230Y VA loa REPLACE YES VB . . >-=----_, INPUT TO THE PS 15 OUTPUTS WITH A TB TB TB TB ~ND~I~C~V~E~S----_, .'THIN SPEC MEASURE THE ,OLLOW I NG SCOPE FOR A MAX I MUM RIPPLE OF O.IiIV PIP: THE PROPER CONNECTI ON AT PS 15, T8 I VA 1:1\1 .J III .'.Hl .J(ltl 208Y AC t 187.2V-228.8Y) OR T8 '-I TO T8 1-3230 v AC 1207.0V-253.0Y) ~/////////////////////////////////////.a • SEE LOC 10 FOR COMPONENT LOCATIONS. • SEE PWR 85 FOR EXTERNAL CIRCUIT AND LOCATIONS. I ".. ~{ PS 15 T8 I - I TO T8 '-2 DETERMINE THE INPUT .----VOLTAGE OF THIS MACHINE REFER TO THE I NST SECTI ON OF' TH I S MANUAL TO CHECK THAT THE OTHER VOL T AGE TAPS ARE CORRECT ,OR TH IS INPUT VOLTAGE TO ISOLATE THE CHANGE I N VOLTAGE ,ROM THE INPUT LINES TO PS 15 CORRECT NO POWER MUST BE DOWN POWER MUS T BE DOWN POWER MUST BE DOWN REPLACE REPLACE CHANGE THE CONNECT 1ON ON PS PS Act6~DI~c~ PS 15 15 .17TH C,EALD PAGE YB 165 RE,ER TO THE IN5T SECTION OF" THIS MANUAL TO CHECK THA T THE OTHER VOLT AGE TAPS ARE CORRECT ,OR TH IS I NPUT VOL T AGE PROBLEM F'OUND DANGER DANGER DANGER RECONNECT PWR 20 ALL LEADS PWR 90 PWR 90 GO TO PWR 20 IBM CONFIDENTIAL 447460 19 Dec 75 3830·2 UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER 'V COPYright IBM Corporation 1975 ::) 0 o o ""'-- ... (r'h "j o ~ , ' ""j ,,,~ ~J CP4 TRIPS (PART 5 OF 61 PWR92 ;''''' U ---' (- c' c C·.'" C: . CP4 TRIPS (PART 6 OF 6) ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ DANGER OANG[R DANGER POWER MUST BE DOWN POWER MUS T 8E DOWN POWER MUS T 8E DOWN POWER MUST BE DOWN RECONNECT RECONNECT RECONNECT 1 1 RECONNECT THE LEAD AT PS 15, TB 2-5 THE LEAD AT PS 15. T8 2- 1 THE LEAD AT PS 15. T8 2- r THE LEAD AT PS 15, T8 2-5 ~/////////////////////////////////////.a 1 1 • SEE LOC 10 FOR COMPON~ N1 U)CATIONS • SEE PWR 85 FOR E:.XHRNAl CIRCUIT AND LOCATIONS LABEL LABEL LABEL THEN OISCONNECT THE FOLLOW I NG LEADS AT THEN 0 I SCONNETC FOLLOW I NG LEADS PS 6: I . E9. 5. 2. E' O. 2. E1 I 1. E 14. LEAD FROM PS ONLY I THEN D I SCUNNEC T THE FOLLOWING LEADS AT PS T. I . E' 4. 2. £7 lLEAD FROM PS 15 ONLY 1. LABEL TH EN DISCONNECT THE FOL LOWING LEADS AT PS PS 4: I. E9. 5 THE AT 2. E' O. 1 1 .~ 2-1 2-2 1+' I - I TO 18 BETWEEN I ~~In"""'~ SCOPE IMETER TO ISOLATE A SHOR I DOWN 1 AND T8 ') ') AND PS~ EHANf) E 10 1 DANGER RECONNECT PS 4 LEADS POWER MUST BE El2. ~r6 AND DOWN 1 i~ ~'IM£ tB~l-t'~m , PS 15, T8 'J 3 AND fB 2 4 AND PS 5, E 7 REMOVE RESISTANCl: SHORT Hl:TWl:l:N LE ADS AND EACH HAD TO (,ROUND REGULATOR CARDtS) IN PS 4 (SEE NOTE 2 I J 1 CORRECT POWER MUST BE DOWN t REPLACE .s2 Note 2: Note 3: Some power supplies have two cards (one a regulator, the other overvoltage). If there are two cards in the power supply, remove them both. If the measurement comes within specifications, insert one at a time until the shorted card is found. For troubleshooting, a short is considered O· 1 oh m. Ensure meter is zeroed before checking for shorts. 447460 3830·2 19 Dec 75 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1975 20 PS 15, TB YES 2- I (+ I TO TB ' " 2-2 I-I BETWEEN 16.6 TO 24.0V DC REGULATOR CARD!S) IN PS 4 (SEE NOTE 2.1 L NO DANGER PS 5 LEADS E' 4 , E7, AND £8 TO EI' I JUMPERJ • POWER MUS T BE DOWN REMOVE CHECK FOR A HIGH RESISTANCE SHORT BETWEEN LEADS AND EACH LEAD TO GROUND POWER MUST BE DOWN THE FOLLOWING LEADS PS 6: ,. E9. 2. E 10. 3. E I 2 TO E I 4 REGULATOR CARD lSI IN PS 5 ISEE NOTE 2.1 REMOVE REGULATOR CARDISI IN PS 6 ISEE NOTE 2.1 REPLACE PS 4 I RECONNECT DANGER FOLLOWING LEADS AT PS 1; El' I EI4, AND ET POWER MUST BE DDWN 1 CHECK FOR A HIGH RESISTANCE SHORT BETWEEN LEADS AND EACH LEAD TO GROUND REMOVE REGULATOR CARolSl IN PS I (SEE NOH?) 1 POWEA UP UNIT !SEE NOTE U PROBLEM FOUND 1 CDRRECT CDRRECT POWER UP UNIT ISEE NOTE 1 ) PRDBLEM FOUND P()WtH UP lINIT jSEf NOH II PROBLEM FOUND 1 RECONNECT RECONNECT ALL LEADS. ALL LEADS RECONNECT YES ALL LEAOS YES t .s2 REPLACE REPLACE REGULATOR CARD IS) IN PS 5 ISEE NOTE 2.1 REGULATDR CARDIS) IN PS 6 !SEE NOTE 2.1 20 I AD.JUST PS REGULATOR AFFECTED ~ {! EE PWR 50 s2, REGULATOR CARDIS) IN PS 7 (SEE NOTE") I PWR DANGER POWER MUST BE DOWN 20 ADJUST REPLACE REPLACE NO TO POWER MUST BE DOWN POWER MU S T BE DOWN 2_~T+:5toT~B ' " 2-81-1 BETWEEN 16.6 TO 24.0V DC REPLACE PWR 20 1 1 1 AT I JUMPER I • 1 PWR I DANGER 1 TO DANGER YES POWER MUST BE DOWN ISOLATE A SHORT IN THE WIRING BETWEEN PS , 5. TB 2-1 AND T8 2-8 AND PS 7. E 7 AND E' 4 1 ALL LEADS PWR RECONNECT TO POWER MUS T BE DOWN 1 CHECK FOR A HIGH RESISTANCE SHORT BETWEEN U:ADS AND EACH LEAD Tr GROUND 1 RECONNECT Unit will not power up normally at this point, but should remain up long enough to make the required measurement. TO I SDLATE A SHORT IN THE WIRING BETWEEN PS 15, T8 2-5 AND TB 2-6 AND PS 6, E9 AND EIO CORRECT POWER UP UNIT ISEE NOTE 1.1 PROBLEM FOUND TO POWER MUS T BE DOWN RECONNECT DANGER 1 CHf.CK f- OR A HI{iH 2-7(+1 to T8 2-8(-1 8ETWEEN SCOPE/METER SCOPE/METER AND E 14 (SEE NOTE 3.1 ~NOTE31 ~ I~~:n~ ~~:n"""" I POWER MUST BE , NO YES YES DANGER IN WIRING BETWEEN PS 15. IH } P()\\Il: A UP UN' r ISH NOH 1 \ POWER UP UNIT (SEE NOTE 1 ) POWE:H UP UN' r ISEE NOTE I I P()Wl H UP UNIT ISH- NOH 1 I NO PWR 93 '9 ~o ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ in the power servicing area. ~ SAFETY cannot be overemphasized, ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ until measured otherwise. ~ CAPACITORS are potentially ~ explosive devices. ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. ~ After replacing any capacitor. ~ reinstall all SAFETY COVERS ~ bclore powering up machine, _~ Note 1: ~ CP4 TRIPS (PART 6 OF 61 ~~////////////////////////////////////~ ~ DANGER r , PS b PS REGULATOR AFFECTED - 1!E PWR 50 1 REPLACE PS T PS 5 ~ ~ TO TD PWR 20 PWR 20 IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNeLASSIFIED THEREAFTER CP4 TRIPS (PART 6 OF 61 PWR 93 POWER SEQUENCE PROBLEM IPART 1 OF 71 POWER SEQUENCE PROBLEM (PART 1 OF 7) PWR 100 ~~W//////////////////////////////////~ ~ DANGER ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ in the power servicing area. ~ SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ until measured otherwise. ~ CAPACITORS are potentially ~ explosive devices. ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. ~ Alter replacing any capacitor, ~ reinstall all SAFETY COVERS ~ before powering up machine. _~ P o CHECK FOR THE FOLLOW I NG MINIMUM BULK 1 DC VOLTAGE LEVELS AT THESE PO, NTS: MINIMUM VOLTAGE • PS PS PS PS 2 ... 5.311 3. .. 5. 3v 4. +IO.4Y 1 5 6 • TURN ALI. OR I vE START /STOP SWITCHES TO STOP ~/////////////////////////////////////~ • MEA SUREMENT OUTPUT PO 'NT TO I . . . 5.311 SEE PWR 105 FOR COMPONENT AND TERMINAL LOCATIONS PARENTHETICAL INFORMA nON BENEATH DECISION BLOCK IS LINE NAME ATTEMPT TO POWER UP THE CU WITH OPERATOR CU POWER ON SW, TCH ON METER PANEL 1I.1EASURE" FOR THE FOLLOWING LEVELS AT THE POWER SEOUENCING lOGIC BOARD PAl THE REOUESTED LEVEL SHOULD OCCUR SOll.1ETII\lE PRIOR TO THE 8 1\1 SECOND TURN Of- F PO\\'E R UP EACH TIPo.1E:. AND t\lEASURE FOR THE: REOUESTED LEVEL PRESS POWER OFF" CHECK FOR THE FOLLOW I NG MINIMUM DC VOLTAGE LEVELS AT THESE POINTS; MINIMUM VOLTAGE I. Z. MEASUREMENT OUTPUT TO POINT P53 .. DRIVES .. bl/ SECTION -3bV SECTION + 8.91/ -39.41/ "-8IT4 WITH THE POWER SEQUENCE PANEL LAMP TEST JRESE SII TCH PUSHEO TO TEST REPLACE CARD A-B2S2 P-AIOI THE LIGHT WilL EITHER STAY ON PEAMANENTL Y OR WI LL TURN OFF AFTER 8 19 SECONDS REPLACE CARD \+INOICATQR TEST SWITCHI P-A1BI REPLACE LAMP TEST SWITCH REPLACE THE FOLLOWING LEVELS SHOULD OCCUR DURING THE LAST 0,7 SECOND OF THE TIME DELAY P-AIFI J, \.7 PWR 20 P-AIEI PUSH THE CE PANEL CLOCK RESET ILAMP TEST PUSH-BUTTON REPLACE P-AIOI PWR 31 P-AIOI I SCOPE {-K2 PICKEDI MEASURE FOR THE FOLLOW I NG LEVELS AT E 'THER THE POWER SEQUENC ,NG LOG' C BOARD P-AI OR THE AI GATE. Note 1: Logic Levels For power sequence logic (P·A 1 Board YB pages) a plus (+) level equals + 2 to + 12V dc. A minus level equals ground to +O.29V dc. Any exceptions to this will be indicated in the flowchart decision block. REPLACE YOU MAY HAVE TO WA IT INt TI ALLY POWER ING ON TO SEE 'F THE OES' REO LEVEL HAS OCCURRED. P-A I C2 P-AIDI (SENSOR REF IIOL T "GE .. 5 • ql/ OC) FOR Note 2: When operating normally; this line will be minus (gnd) with power off. On pushing power on and when K8 is heard picking, the line will go plus for an instant and then go minus to turn on the power supply. When power off is pushed, the line will go plus until K8 is heard dropping, at that time the line will slowly decay to a minus (gnd) level over approximately a five (5) second period, (+TURN ON +bV 110 CHL INTE.F-........- - ' ' -_ _- , REPLACE CARO REPLACE CARD P-A1DI P-AIBI 19 Dec 75 REPLACE REPLACE P-AIEI P-AISI PWR 20 IBM CONFIDENTIAL 447460 3830-2 OPEN FROM P,A1C2B03 TO PSG EI2 YES UP TO 20 SEC AFTER POWER SEQUENCE PROBLEM IPART 1 OF 11 UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER PWR 100 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1975 /' 1 0 0 0., 0 0 0 . ~ ,'.. \.'- -:-.=~-:- rr)). l.J "- "c~·1 0 0 0'" 0"" , , " o () ~~, (,_J ',. ,,-r",,, '-. j/ j/ \ )I j' '"'-_/ "-- j' --" -'; " '- , " ( ..... (~." ,/ " C'·' (- ( . .' C" " .. , / .,.:v· ./ '. POWER SEQUENCE PROBLEM (Part 2 of 7) 3830-2 POWER SEQUENCE THEORY AND LOCATIONS 3830-2 POWER SEQUENCE THEORY AND LOCATIONS Controlled Delay in 6V Supply As long as the control unit is connected to the ac supply source and circuit breakers are normal, 24V dc and 12V dc are available at the power sequencing logic panel. The 6V dc supply to the channel interface is turned on only when: (1) bulk supply voltage outputs are normal, PS 4 is up, and all thermals are normal; and (2) approxi· mately 12 seconds delay has elapsed following initiation of start sequence. Two Step Process to Produce Final Regulated Voltages Power supply regulators PS 4, PS 5, PS 6, and PS 7 each have terminals which are used for on-off control of the individual supply. When these terminals are jumpered together, normal output voltage is produced. When the connection between the terminals is removed, output voltage goes to zero. Voltage turn on of PS4 and PS 6 is accomplished remotely by connecting the terminals together with a relay driver-type circuit located in the power sequencing logic area. Power supply regulator PS 3 differs from the other regulators in its method of turn onlturn off. In this supply, a particular terminal must be grounded to remove the output voltage. The supply is remotely turned on by opening the ground connection to the terminal with a relay driver-type circuit located in the sequencing logic area. Turn on terminals for power supply regulators PS 5 and PS 7 are permanently jumpered at the supply itself. The output ofthese supplies is dependent on the bulk supplies, which are controlled by a contactor in the ac line (K8). Power Supply Seq~encing for CU Control Storage Contactor K8 applies ac to the inputs of the bulk supplies. The output voltage of PS 7 begins to rise as its bulk voltage input rises. When the voltage reaches a certain level, a special voltage sensing circuit turns PS 6 on (-3/+1.25V dcl. 1447460 19Dec75 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1975 PWR 105 P-A1A1 TabS-[ 1-4 Conn 1 K2 The power supply area produces accurately controlled voltages in a two step process. Bulk supplies 1 and 2 produce six partially regulated dc voltage outputs at levels considerably higher than eventually required. Several highly accurate voltage regulator units (referred to in the diagrams as PS 3, PS 5, PS 6, etc.) produce final regulated voltages from the bulk voltage outputs. 3830·2 c c c-(, C'.", c c Timer Operation for Power-Up Sequence Control and Automatic Verification The principal events in the power up sequencing of the control unit are controlled by a timer consisting of two delay units in series. The timing action is initiated by the closure of the K 1-1 points. Kl0 K8 Kll TBl CP7" The first output of the timer occurs after a delay of approximately 12 seconds. This output allows turn on of the 6V supply (which supplies the channel interface area). The second output occurs approximately 0.7 seconds later. It tests for presence of all bulk supply voltages and 6V dc. This test is even more comprehensive in that the turn on of the 6V supply is contingent upon proper output of other power supplies and thermal contact conditions. The DC Ready (to control unit) light on the CE panel is also turned on at this time if voltage output and other conditions appear to be normal in the power area. • •• Conn 2 CP8 Tabs 15-18 23FD AC Control Board (Triad Anti-Recycle Latch R1 (early machines) The anti·recycle flip-flop is set each time the system power on stepper switch initiates a power on sequence. It remains set until the stepper switch contacts open. When K1 drops, it cannot be picked up again until the anti-recycle flip-flop is reset. This reset occurs only when the stepper switch contacts open. Power Sequence Box Voltage to be Expected at the Output of a Relay Driver The output of a relay driver circuit will measure: (1) ground if the driver is in the "on" condition or the relay circuit itself is open (therefore no 24Vl. or (2) 24V if the driver is in the "off" condition and the relay circuit is complete to the 24V source. Test/Reset Switch T1-TB2 - - - - - "Not on late machines. Relay Functions Kl K2 K3A Power up sequence pick relay Power up sequence hold relay Auxiliary power up sequencing complete relay, (with two channel switch addition) Facility power up sequencing complete relay EPO control relay MPL File dc relay AC to cconvenlence outlet Distribute ac to control unit MPL file K11 controller relay AC to MPL file Use Meter controller (41 V ac to use met"rI K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K10 K11 K13 Coil Logic Page Contact Logic Page Logic Card Position Function/Logic Page YB120 YB120 YB12l YB120 YB120 YB121 P-A1A1 P·A1B1 12V dc regulator (YB143) 12 and 12,7 second timers, 6V sensor (YB146) YB120 YB120 YB120 YB120 YB120 YB120 YB120 YB121 YB120 YB120 YB121 YB101 YB100 YB100 YB120 YB121 P-A1C2 P-A1D1 P-A1E1 P·A1Fl Memory power sequencing (YB144) Power sequencing condition control (YB140and 141) PLD sensor card (YB145) Indicator driver card (YB142) IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER 3830-2 POWER SEQUENCE THEORY AND LOCATIONS PWR 105 .~.,--~---.----.- - POWER SEQUENCE PROBLEM (Part 3 of 7) ~ This diagram is intended lor instruction only. VOLTAGE SEQUENCING LOGIC ~ ~~w//////////////////////////////////~ ~ DANGER ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ NOTES: 1. Cards shown on th is page are located in Frame 01, Gate-P, Board Al Q/////////////////////////////////////....0 Bulk 1 CP 12 +5.3V min to Sensor* Jl0 A2B07Bulk 1 CP 13 +5.3V min to Sensor* Jll Logic Page Al Bl C2 Dl El Fl YBI43 YBI46 YBI44 YBI40-YBI41 YB145 YB142 • B02 X J04 +5.9V Ref [ YB163* YB165** ~ ~lK* 1 o D13 Tab 14 /. +MPL PwrOn From CU (3V) Y8121 ..... A1BOa ,., I 12V Supply PC 12V de .... System Pwr-On Relay(s) (Points in Parallel) K5 Gate "Mem Thermals Conn 1-5 ~ CP Auxiliaries Conn 1-7 Pwr Supply Thermals Conn 1-3 ~ +K I Hold -K2 Picked Operation Mode Switch L....._-!-.. CE Panel ~ EC I-H KI-l Co:,~ Pwr-Off .E_C_l_-_F+-----c(LJ.-...Ct--....._+-2-<- PC 1-5 ~Meter r ~ EC4-G Pwr-On l K5-2 L AR101 B-A1E6D06' F2D12YB149 P-A 1 F2D12* * Panel EC 4-F o A2DI2 A2D06 A2DI3 JIO -Turn On 23 FD A(!DC F2D02 X~D~0~7_ _ _~_ _ _ _~ Pulse Gen r PC 1-6 o EC 3-H ***~ 11 To System No.1 PC 1-4 Step Signal System Pwr-On Step Switches (Points in Parallel) K2-3 G07 -Pwr lherm Norm P"'''-'---''.''-''-L~ AR Allow K I Pick F2D04 X D07 CU Controller Ka Tab 6 n-TB2-3 802 +3VDC Ready to CU 23FD Tob4 23FDKll AC Contlol 23FDDC Relay A A F2D13 X __D~0~7_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _- . ~-"""!-'~~ Control Circuit Board Tab 17 Goa -Control Gnd K6 K II 8 Tab 13 YB121 I-=-=:.......:....:==-!.....:..::.-=--=---~~ YB120 A1B07 Note 1 DII KI Normal YB131 F2811 A2813 8 ~ P~C.~I_--:C--+I-_E-EC_I---B- -~Y~8~10NO~~O Tab I Power-On Sequence Timer ~ ~M~-- Conn 1-12 ~J~0~7_tT~u~rn~0~n~6~V~F~o~r-.~~~ I/O Ch Inlfe F2Dl0 D07 ['0-...,1 Conn I-II I-I '----41-< -K 1 Hold Hold Relo A *Only for early mancines (with CP7). **Only for late machines (without CP7). "'2 Channel additional only. 1800 I .---------~~---~ Tab 7 Tl-TB2-4 n-TB2-3 PWR 120 Produces 2 sec Delay In Drop of K2 * KI-2 PWR~~ 120 3830-2 POWER SEQUENCE PROBLEM (Part 3 of 71 Copyrrqht IHM o o C()IIIOIdIIOJl () .. '" 1975 o o o ("\ ~I' /"'" "\ ... ,.. j "'':\ (''1 ( \.Y ~ 0 ! . (~ ,-j (-'" "y '1 ( ~ / '\ \~;i /""", i 1'-' \,-_JI ",j \""j r '''\ ~, Meter Panel Tob 9 I PWR 120 Note 1. To sequential starter card connector 51-17 (TY 135) K7 K2 r "\ ....1 () , \'-...1 J -'" ii- ., \.J ",~ .~ j PWR 110 . '), 1..1 i<' ""- Icy " "' l.... ) ,< ..... .' "'" t\ () C C .... , (~ C (j (J (- (~ (~ ,/ C-' ('" ,\ , " c C,'' ,, PWR 110 VOLTAGE SEQUENCING LOGIC PWR 110 I ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present in the power servicing area. SAFETY cannot be overemphasIZed. Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE until measured otherwise. CAPACITORS are potentially explosive devices. WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. A Iter replacing any capacitor, reinstall all SAFETY COVERS before powering up machine. Conn 1-6 YB160 Conn 1-4 YBll0 PS6 +3.5V Sense ~ Fl007 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ This diagram is intended for instruction only. N G 12 24 V dc and 12V dc Power Sequencing Voltage, AC to SCRIDS -Pwr Sup CP Normal .-----++-+--~-+--~:O':~:.;;..I."'f::::JAIDII------4~I----lORp....-~--..J:::o.j B~412~ ]OR1~ ~ G04 ...... ~ ..... ~06 J02 A1B04 J09 01 "L....L...J" J06 -Allow K2 Pick B12" ARp..::.:..::.--....:..:.::..:.:....~~:..:.:....---------------~ B1X _00_7________________F_2_00_6_ _ _ _-' Kl B02 ..... r - 805 A 807 ~RA B04r-.J. 002 "-1C2 ~ 005 ) B03 -Turn On +3.5V PS6 YB 170 K8 (AC to CUI j-.................. AC To Fans, Bulk Pwr Supplies, and Pwr Regulators Bias Supplies I I Bias Voltage, -36V Reg" PS 3, . 3V 1+ 1.25V Reg (Logic) PS 5, PS 7 I +3.5V Reg (Memory) PS 6 \------1 I I PS 7 I A2004 ~12 sec---;.~• • • • • • • •_ +6V Reg PS 3 (Channel Interface) I ................ '.~ K2 -Sensed +3.5V PS6 -K 2 Picked tSensed t6V Normal -K 1 Hold K7 Convenience Outlet System Power On Step Switch B12 C2j-:::~--.J +Memory Power On B12 ~' ~ K5 Control Unit EPO Relay OR 009 B13 .................... .. ....................... System EPO Relay 01~------~~~4-+-~rS~e~ns~e~d~6~V~N~o~rm~a~I~4-----------+-~ 24V J13 CV 01 YB185 Normal Power Up -~ -Sensed t2V Normal PS 6 LB 3-4 ~ ~ Use machine logics for troubleshooting and scoping. ~ ~ 1 K4 Sequence Complete, DC Ready to Control Unit and Sequential Status Card I_ 12.7 s e c - -....~I Test For All Bulk Voltages Present and 6V dc Supply Up rA ~ 010 -Allow K2 Pick _ l ~ ~ N o-----~~~--~~~~ C2 LB3-6 YB185 F2B05 PS 7 +1.25V Sense PWR 120 T F2002 ~ G02 A2007 ( Relay Oriver Ground Return ~ A1805 -Spare ' ~ J06 «tGate/Mem Thermals Norm , K ~ ~/////////////////////////////////////~ «-:, rPwr Supply CP Normal c'~· 1"",'1 "'~. " PWR 110 PWR 110 ~~////////////////////////////////////~ :::i: C,"\ C' POWER SEQUENCE PROBLEM (Part 4 of 7) POWER SEQUENCE PROBLEM (Part 4 of 7) ~ DANGER ~,' ~/ ;' F2B07 PS 7 -3V Sense -2.3V Min 012 po.. LB 3-2 YB185 C2 F2B08 L..- Indicator Storage Normal Power Down Reg -Indicator Reset Hndicalor Reset Switch 809;:: Gl 009 R o-~~~~~~~----------------4-+-~--------------------~~R F2B 13 I YB121 -Pwr Supply CP Normal j'lndicalor Test Switch F21l 12 -Gate/Mem Thermals Normal Fr 803 006 YB121 . S F2B02 012 -Gate/Mem Therm Fai lind FL « rPS Thermals Normal Conn 1-2 YBll0 A1B03 "' Kl DC Ready to Control Unit S G08 Np..:G~04~~___-_P~S_T_he~rm __ al~s_N~o_rm_a_I________~~00~5. 01 lS FL f\ '{:V F2B03~ 002 -PS Thermal Failure Ind F2B04 20 ms ••••I-\----t- 2 "'C' 6V Reg PS 3 (Channel Interface), PS 4, j 3.5V Reg (Memory) PS 6 B12 lS 006 ....... Power Off Signal ·24V ,----0 F2B 11 YB121 K6,Kl0.Kl1 (,f up) , .• • • • • •~·. .·11--40mS K2 K4, K8 AC to Fans, Bul k Pwr Supplies, and Pwr Reg Bias Supplies Bias Voltage, -36V Reg' PS 3, -3V/+l.25V Reg (Logic) PS 5, PS 7 006 S ·Only for early machines (with CP7) 3830-2 447460 1 19 Dec 75 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1975 . IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER POWER SEQUENCE PROBLEM (Part 4 of 7) PWR 120 " -..,~ " "~j '", .."Y " "- >' ,,- __ ,~_Ji,:' , .., !~\, '",,---J ,1' ..r~.. F~, '<, y '1>. )I " ,j j -"" t[ " " ~ -. ~~-. (- (~. (" ( (' (-. c- (- (~ ',.,.../ (~ -~.~---.- c c (" (~' (. C': (: ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present in the power servicing area. SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE until measured otherwise. CAPACITORS are potentially explosive devices, WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. After replacing any capacitor, reinstall all SAFETY COVERS before powering up machine. c:- C (: , .. ': C C' C C C PWR 130 .... ~ , ~~////////////////////////////////////~ ~ ./ POWER SEQUENCE PROBLEM IPART 5 OF 7) POWER SEQUENCE PROBLEM (PART 5 OF 7) ~ DANGER ('~. ~. PUSH CE ~ POWER ON SWITCH CHECK ~ THE INI T I AL CONOI T IONS OF RELAYS Kl AND K2 VISUALLY IMMEDIATELY ~ ~ ~ AFTER PUSH I NG PO.ER ON. I CoNORE THE NO POSSIBILITY MA Y DROP ~ our THAT THEy "Co" I N AFTER 8- 19 SECONDS. ~ ~ ~ ~/////////////////////////////////////.a POWER MUS T BE DOWN • SEe PWA 105 FOR COMPONENT CHECK FOR LOSS OF ·2411 DC THROUGH THE POWER ON PUSH THE POWER ON SWITCH. Kr SHOULD PICK IMMEDI ATELY. i~A6B8H ~~~Npb~~~Eg~F I sw I TCH PUSHED 1. I WHEN NOT AND THROUGH THE CONTACTS OF AND TERMINAL LOCATIONS. • PARENTHETICAL INFORMATION rFN\,,~Il!.rECISION BLOCK IS THE LOCAL IREMOTE MODE' sw ITCH LOCATE AND REPAIR OPEN SW. FOR LOSS OF THREE PHASE PWR THROUGH CB 2 OR K8. THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS OF K2 MUST BE OBSERvED WHILE KI IS STILL PICKED IN PATH p~~ ~;F H~~~ T~~ ~ - tt CONNECTIONS, ETC) REPA fR PROBLEM FOUND RELAY Kr 2. CLEAN AND I OR FORM THE K5-3 CONTACTS. IF IF UNABLE REP A IR. THEN REPLACE K5. FAltl.. TY COMPONENT OR LOOSE CONNEC T IONS GO TO P.R 20 PWR 20 YES CHECK CLEAN ANDIOR FORM THE K2-3 CONTACTS. I F UNABLE TO R~~~~ :CE T~~N SYSTEM 370 LOGIC TO TROUBLE· SHOOT FOR A BAD SYSTEM EPO ~~~J,A~~~'IHobOKG~'b~AT - TR I PP I NG yES Q • tRIP DANGER NO POWER MUST BE DOWN I I I I , I I I I I I I I L_ YES DANGER POWER UP UN IT POWER MUST BE DOWN PWR 142 1 , SHORT S BETWEEN 3 TERMINALS I CHECK l FOR SHORTED 1M I R tNG IN CONVEN I ENCE OUTLET BOX .r§ FOR FRAYED WfR INC;; IN PRIMARY SIDE OF T3 IWIRES ....JUST D I SCDNNECTED I ~'" .. IRING FRAYED YES TO PWR 20 IF LOGIC PAGE YA I 0 1 INDICATES EC 421442 HAS BEEN INS T ALLEO, DO NOT DISCONNECT LEADS FROM T8 2. INS TEAD, OPEN CP'S b, 9, AND 10. E REPAIR WIRING. RECONNECT ALL LEADS TO T 1 -T8 1- I AND T8 PIR 1 I - 3 ~ TR IPPED CPI THEN DISCONNECT ONLY T3 TNPUT LEADS FROM Tl-TB 1 CP 2 AND T2-T8 I 1 CHECK REPLACE LABEL REPA IR DOWN YES I DANGER POWER MUST BE DOWN CPI I I THEN 01 SCONNECT ALL LEADS AT Tl-T8 1. SEE PWR 1 40 REPLACE I I POWER UP UN I T CP 2 ST I LL TR I PPED 1 HOW POWER MUST BE ALL LEADS .~ RECONNECT ALL LEADS PREY I OUSLY CALL DANGER PREll I DUSl y DISCONNECTED REPA IR DANGER I REPA I R I I VOLTAGE DISTRISUTION POWER MUST BE DOliN TROUBLE IN USAGE METER DOWN TR IPPED SEE PWR YES CONI/EN I ENCE OUTLET J • PWR 135 PWR 30, 280 ~ ~ ~ DANGER CP10R CP2 TRIPS.(PART t OF 41 I 1 ~ TO POWER UP UNIT PWR 20 POWER-UP UN I T CP 2 ST I LL TR IPS ~ REPA I R YES REPLACE T2 <$.>'" TRIPPING NO SHORT YES CP 2 ST I LL NO TR IPS DANGER POWER MUST BE DOWN 1 YES 1 RECONNECT RECONNECT ALL LEADS PRE" IOUSLY D I SCQNNECTED REPLACE CP 2 - I ALL LEA-OS PREY I OUSL.. Y DISCONNECTED ON T t-TB 1 1 c$J Q TO B PWR 20 PWR 142 3830-2 CP1 OR CP2 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 4) (c) PWR 135 Copyright IBM Corporilctlon 1972. 1973 :)000 o o o o 0·' ,:.. . o o 0000 0 r'" ",-y ,~ V ~\ ',Y 00 o o 1'- . -". "'--;/ '" '.'-~J-I " '\ - jI ~ '", (- (\ (~' (C, (" (~': JI;:;Y C: C . ., j (~. (- ( ,"." 24V dc DISTRIBUTION CP1 OR CP2 TRIPS (Part 2 of 4) YB101 24V de DISTRIBUTION K13-1 +24V de Supply T3 common _\ _ _ _ Located on the cover of sequence box Located in power sequence box) II ~_-------------TO-b-4--<:~~--- ~~:-;~OV oc ~ ~ ....-_......._2_08_-_2_20_V_o_c_4o --< nOVac I PWR 140 41V ac (to Use Meter) I ~~~--o------e~--~~~~~--~'-~'~------~~ I I I I 2 Tab 3 . ~~--~I~I------~~ I 5 I I... _________..J.' .,I ____ ac GIld 1·5 IY811S) Use ~~Meler Usage Meter ~--Iu..l-,....J Control Tab 23 TB 11-8 +6V IPS 311Y8163 or YBl651 ~A~1~D08~~G~nd~(Y~8~1~48~)_____________________~~~Kr. __________________________ B-A1E6-D06 (AR10l) P-A 1F2D12 (in power board) ~~P~-~A~IF~2~D~08L-~------------~~B~-A~1~E~6~-D~0~8~(A~R~10~1) (i n power board) ...----------......J. +6V SCAlD Input Test Point A \ I nput to each lamp dri ver from logi c (SM951) ." 6 T1 6 FROMCB2 AC Input 5 YB100 7 .25V oc common TJ-TB 1-7 7.25Voc ~ CE-ECI-C •..•••• CE-ECl-D CE-EC2-A L--_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _---\, FROM CB2 Gnd (nornlal) CE - EC2 - D (to LB 1-2) CE - EC2 - C (t LB 1 7) 8 _ _ _-~~te~s~t )_ _ _ _~~_o_ _-_ 3V ( CEPnICheckRe~to~ Lamp Test Switch ~ TI-TB 1-5 T1-TB 1-6 7 Input to each lamp driver from logic (SM951) CE-EC2-B +6V SCRID Input CE-EC3-B Note 2 ,r-------------------------To system 2 (CPU) 2-EPO-l (YBI31) , To stem 1 (CPU) l-EPO-l (YB131 To +12V reg (YB120) Tab 5 R2 To TB 10-7 (VB200) Note 1. or TBll-4 (VB115) Note 2 To Tab 6 (YBI20) Gnd for pwr seq main circuit board To Tab 7 YB120 OV for EPO cntl rela TJ-TB 2-4 To Tab 30 (YBI21) IGnd for Jl-23FD) To connector 51-15 (VB135) dc common for sequential start card. Notes: VB200 1. Only for early machines (with Cpl). 2. Only for late machines (without CP1). 3. 60-Hz only. See YB101 for 50-Hz. 230~B 3-1 T2 (Note 3) 20- -<:~=: = ~~_ _ _ _ _--I? ~ ~ I L-K7---t--_ _ _ +6V pin 115Vac lOA (Note 31 D02 B02 SCRIDCard (drives 20 lamps) 7.25V ac Return Test Point A Component Side D02802 Ref: 5M951 common \447460 3830-2 19Dec 75 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1975 IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER Input pins . Module Located in CE pnl opposite end from hinge 24V de DISTRIBUTION PWR 140 CP1 OR CP2 TRIPS (PAIH 3 OF 4) CP1 OR CP2 TRIPS (PART 3 OF 4) ~~W//////////////////////////////////~ ~ DANGER ~ ~ ~, ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ' -"~' ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ in the power servicing area. ~ SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ until measured otherwise. ~ CAPACITORS are potentially ~ elCplosi,ve devices. ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. ~ After replacing any capacitor, ~ reinstall all SAFETY COVERS ~ before powering up machine. _~ . ~. AC liAS MISSING OR OUT OF SPEC NO X VES PUSH CE PANEL CHECK RESET iLAMP TEST PWR141 OPEN CP'S 6, 9, AND 10 (SEE NOTE 1.) 2 PWR 280 DANGER POWER MUST BE OOWN YES ~//////////////////////////////",//////.a MEASURE ACROSS Tl·T8 1·5 TO T8 17 FOR 6.5 TO 80VAC 1 ALL LAMPS LI GHT EXCEPT OC REAOY MEASURE ACROSS Tl-T8 2-3 (-I AND COMMON SIDE OF cpos b. 9. AND 1 a FOR 21.6 TO 2b.4V LABEL NO THEN 01 SCONNECT OUTPUT LEAOS AT • SEE PWR 140 FOR VOLTAG~ DISTRIBUTION. TI-T~~-~1lI T~7~-.' HOW MANY LAMPS WERE OFF ALL CHECK -3' <8>"- ~"' MISS ING NO CHECK MEASURE VOLTAGE FOR MISSING VOL TAGES' +6V DC AT CE-EC2-A, 7.25V AC AT CE-EC1-C AND EC3-B. -3V OC AT CE-EC2-C. FOR OC AT CE-ECZ-C. -3' I 1 CHECK SOMf: LAMPS ON PWR Z80 THAT THE +6V DC AND 7. Z5V RETURN I TEST PO'I NT A I CONNECTORS ARE PROPERL V SEATED ON SCR I 0 CARDS I SEE PWR 140 I. 1-7 FO~ 6.5 TO 8.0V ~'" ~ MEASURES CORRECTLY NO MEASURE PR I MARY DANGER VOLTAGES ON T1. COMPARE TO T8 I TERMINAL DANGER POWER MUST BE DOWN ASS I GNMENTS I SEE PWR 140 I. ALSO CHECK POWER MUST BE DOWN MACHINE VOLTAGE RATING TAG. DEFECT! VE CE PANEL CHECK RESET ILAMP TEST SWITCH. ALSO CHECK FOR DEFECTIvE WIRING ISEE· PWR 140). I ~'" CONNECT IONS WERE I N AGREEMENT NO DANGER YES POWER MUST BE DOWN ~ I SWAP RESEAT CONNECT IONS L I- ISOLATE AND REPAIR SHORT IN SCR I 0 CARDS OR FAULTY WIRING I SEE PWR 140). I MEASURE VOL T AGE ON PRIMARY OF TI":'T8 I FOR PROPER LEVEL. CHECK TERM I NAL 5 FOR PROPER WIRING TO AGREE WITH MACH I NE TAG. POWER MUST BE DOWN DANGER ~ POWER MUST BE DOWN POWER MUS T BE DOWN POWER UP UN I T 1 T1 POWER UP UNIT REPLACE YES REPLACE 1 CORRECT WIRING. REFER TO INS T SECT I ON FO~ OTHER POSSIBLE TRANSFORMER CONNECTION PROBLEMS. YES MEASURE ACROSS TI-T8 2-2 (+) TO T8 2-3 1-) FOR +21-.6 TO +26.4v DC CORRECT CORRECT WIRING AND SEE INST SECT ION FOR OTHER POSS ISLE TRANSFORMER CONNECT ION PROBLEMS POWER UP UNIT ~'" 142 LOAO PROBLEM .,.n NO SEATED OK LIGHT COMES ON ( PWR NO CHECK AND REPAIR SCR 10 CARDS 'SEE PWR 140).· MEASURE PROMARY VOLTAGES ON TI. COMPARE TO TB 1 TERM I NAL ASS IGNMENTS I SEE PWR 140). ALSO CHECK MACHINE VOLTAGE RAT ING TAG. MEASURE ACROSS T1 T8 2·2 (+) TO TB 2·31-\ FOR 21.6 TO 26.4V DC WERE MISSING ~ <$1 T~T,~~- I~lnlll CP I CHANGE TAPS. REFER TO INS T SECTION TO CHECK OTHER WIRING. MEA SURE ACROS S TI-T82-2 !+J TO T8 2-3 I-I FOR +21.6 TO 2b.4V DC ~~ TO 1 I REPLACE FAULTY SCR 10 CARD YES PWR 20 MEAsuRE OUTPUT OF T1 FOR 65 NO GO TO PIR 20 TO 80V DANGER r-- POWER MUST BE DOWN REPAIR F AUL TV CABLE OR CONNECTOR ~ I l PWR 142 RECONNECT ALL LEADS MEASURES CORRECTLY Note 1: CP6 used in early ma.chines. CP10 used in late machines. YES GO TO PWR 20 3830·2 I IBM CONFIDENTIAL 447460 19 Dec 75 CP1 OR CP2 TRIPS (PART 3 OF 4). UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER © COJIy,ighl PWR 141 IBM Co,po,ation-1975. :=)000 r V\ ,: .;) 0" o o 0v 0"J 0 A ,,)I V 0 0 0 0 "'. (--" le",,\ "'-.i/ \ . .--<.J. 1 ~, .'., J 0 0 r~ V ,~ ,y 0 a 0 0 '...." "-.J --.--~-- "-., J '>, ,. \"--.J' ,----- r- ~( (' ( ( <- - - - ... ------.----~. (-- ( (~ ----~,' (' ( ---- --------- ------_. (- ( (~ ( (' (' (- (~ ('- (~ C (- (~ "/ ( ( " .. > CP1 OR CP2 TRIPS (PART 4 OF 4) CP1 OR CP2 TRIPS (PART 4 OF 4) ~ DANGER ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ PWR ~' ~.~'w//////////////////////////////////~ ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ in the power servicing area. ~ SAFETY cannot be overemphasized, ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ until measured otherwise. ~ CAPACITORS are potentially ~ explosive devices. ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. ~ After replacing any capacitor. ~ reinstall all SAFETY COVERS ~ before powering up machine. ,~ 141 PWR 135 PWR ~~ PS4 IS NOT SEQUENCED ON. THIS SUPPLY IS NOT USED. IF PS14 TRIPS LOOK FOR A SHORT TO GROUN D BETWEEN THE CPAND PS4. RECONNECT T3 LEADS TO TI -T8 1 '''~ 3 AND TAB 4 AT POWER SEQUENCE PRINTED CIRCUIT BDARO • SEE PWR 140 FOR VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION, REPLACE BLOWN CAPAC I TORS I TRIPS PWR 142 DANGER RECONNECT DANGER LEAD AT Tl-T8 I :=~: A~D +~ NO POWER UP UNIT CP C'···· POWER MUST BE DOWN POWER MUST BE DOWN VENTS BLOWN .-:1 A CP ~6 ~ ~O~h~N~O 10 C 1 RCU IT LEVEL. SEE PWR 140. ,SEE NOTE I) OF BLOWN OUT VENTS THEN 0 I SCONNECT TAB C"'.'\ 135 PWR THERE I S A 24v DC LOAD PROBLEM. USE CHECK ~~bA§l T~~~ ~~ ID~~CE l 14 t G LABEL ~/////////////////////////////////////~ c (/ ',"" LABEL 1 SOLATE AND CORRECT PROBLEM THEN DISCONNECT RI AND R2 LEADS TO C2 I AT C21. POWER UP UN I T YES NO NO MEASURE ACROSS R 1 AND R2 FOR 25 OHMS EACH DANGER POWER MUST BE POWER UP UN I T DOWN DANCER ~ POWER MUST BE DOWN CHECK FOR IN T3 SECONDARY TO TAB 3 AND TAB 4 NO I I TRIPS YES ONE S I DE OF EACH OF THE FOLLOWING CAPAC I TORS; Cl, C2, AND C4. TURN ON CP'S G g, AND 10 YES I CP MEASURES CORRECTLY FRAYED WIRING RECONNECT TAB 3 AND TAB 4 ON SEQUENCE BOARD CP 01 SCONNECT MEASURE ACROSS THE CAPACITORS WITH AN OHM METER ON THE X 1 SCALE. A NORMAL CAPAC I TOR WILL TR I PS (SFE NOTF 1 I NO I ~6~EoQE8A~~C! T A~~u~~ c~o INFINITY IN BOTH DIRECT IONS. LABEL THEN 0 I SCONNECT T A8 I AND TAB 2 ON LABEL GO TO THEN D I SCONNEC T LEAD GOING TO TEST POINT A ITPAI ON SCR I 0 CARO I SEE PWR REPLACE YES WIRING FRAYED SEQUENCE BOARD PWR 20 BAD RES I STOR 140 I I NO POWER UP UNIT l REPLACE REPAIR WIRING. T3 RECONNECT ALL POWER UP UNI T LEADS <$>'" CP I TR I PS NO REPLACE USAGE METER 7 MEASURED 01\ UNBOLT OlaOES CR 1 AND CR 2 FROM HEAT SINK ASSEMBLY. MAKE SURE ARE 0 I SCONNECTEO FROM EACH OTHER I THERE I S A JUMPER BETWEEN THEMl. o lODES NO -l • c;r"'0 DANGER POWER MUST BE DOWN CP POWER UP UNIT 1 BAD CAPAC I TOR MEA SURE ACROS S DIODES FOR SHORTS AND OPENS REPLACE '"~ YES I CHECK FOR SHORTS OR BAD COMPONENTS BETWEEN TAB I TO T A8 2 AND T A8 3 TO TA8 4 I SEE PWR 1401. CORRECT PROBLEM FOUND. IF UNA8LE TO REPA I R, REPLACE BOARD. 1 TR IPS ( REPLACE NO CP TR I PS I MEASURED OK BAD DIODE REPLACE CP I YES YES REPLACE CP I ~. TO POWER UP UN I T ~ CP I TR IPS DANGER DANGER POWER MUST BE DOWN POWER MUST BE DOWN I I REPLACE REPA I R BAD SCR I 0 CARD SHORT BETWEEN T I AND SCRID CARD REPLACE TI NO CP I TRIPPING I NTERM 1 TTENTL Y POWER UP UN I T PWR 20 YES ",A., CP Note 7: GO TO CP6 used in early machines. CP70 used in late machines. 3830-2 19 Dec 75 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1975 ~ TO PIR 20 1447460 1 TR I PS PWR 20 IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26.1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER CPt OR CP2 TRIPS (PART 4 OF 41 PWR 142 ' c CP6, 9, OR 10 TRIPS (PART 1 OF ~~////////////////////////////////////~ ~ DANGER ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ CPS, 9, OR 10 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 21 2T PWR 30,280 PWR 30, 280 CP60RCP10 TRIPS (SEE NOTE 1.1 CP 9 TRIPS PWR 150 ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ in the power servicing area. ~ SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ until measured otherwise. ~ CAPACITORS are potentially ~ explosive devices. ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. ~ After replacing any capacitor, ~ reinstall all SAFETY COVERS ~ before powering up machine. _~ ~/////////////////////////////////////.a CP.~CPIO ~ DANGER DEFER ED I '",,""' MAINTENANCE ----CALL ","",A,,, CP 9 TRIPS DANGER POWER MUST BE we, ~~~~----------------------------~ DOWN DANGER POWER MUS T BE OOWN POWER MUST BE OOWN 1 TR I P CB 2 AND REMOVE CARD P-A I A I. RESET CB 2 AND MEASURE FOR LESS THAN I.OV ON TAB 19 1 y~~6-NO LEADS ON Tl-T82-1 r ~E~:o~HA~~~---------'l I ,.______________________ CIRCUIT FOR SHORTS OR GROUNDS USING PWR 140 AND APPROPRIATE LOGIC PAGES. 1 ANY SHORTS OR GROUNDS J, ~. PWR 20 DANGER INSERT CARO P-AIAI ANO MEASURE FOR + 12V DC BETWEEN T A8 19 1+) ANO TAB b \ -\ t I , .4 TO 12.6\ CHECK REPAIR OPEN CP I AND C8 2. MEA SURE FOR A SHORT OR LOW RES I STANCE (LESS THAN 1 0 • 0 OHM I TO GROUND AT TAB 19. (LOCATED AT ON PWR SEQ PR I NTED CIRCUIT SOARD.) TO GROUND. 01 SCONNECT DISCONNECT LEAOS ON TI-TB 2-2 I NORMALL Y A, L..<$> __-'___ ADJ~~I Il ~v PS _'jSEE PWR 50 FOR PROCEDURE ..J LESS THAN 10.0 OHM ~ POWER MUST BE DOWN REMOVE CARD P-AIAI 1 ~~Y~E.:S_-.,I ~ "' ~N~O~~~Y~E.:S----------__, DISCONNECT LEADS ON TAB 19. CHECK QI FOR SHORT OF HEAT SINK TO GROUND REPLACE 01 AND REINSTALL CAROS. RECONNECT ALL LEADS, PREVIOUSLY DISCONNECTED. CLOSE ALL CB' S AND CP'S J, 1 ~. MEASURE WITH A CURRENT PROBE FOR LESS THAN 1.0 AMP INTO TAB 5 PWR 20 ~ NO CP 9STILL TRIPPING QI MAY NOW BE: 1 BAD AND HAVE ~M~CEO -- YES CORRECT SHORTED HEAT SINK J, ~- REPLACE NO REMOVE THE P-AI-CARDS ONE AT A TIME, LOOK INC FOR A LOSS OF THE SHORT. (REMOVE p- A I A I CARD LAST .1 PWR 20 REGULATOR CARDP-A1Al (12V PSI AND ADJUST MEASURE FOR LESS THAN 1.0 AMP AT TAB 19 c DANGER ~Y.:E.:S LESS: : THAN ;,A r _ _. : . ; N 1.0 AMP ~ DANGER DOWN YES REPLACE: DANGER POWER MUST BE __- , POWER MUST BE DOWN POWER IIU ST BE DOWN DANGER POWER MUST BE DOWN P-A1Al AND RECONNECT ALL LEADS PREVIQUSl Y DISCONNECTED AND ADJUST (PWR 501 OANGER POWER MUST BE OOWN A~SE~~ ~S~\~6R~g, CORRECT THE PROBLEM FOUND, RECONNECT ALL LEADS, PREVIOUSLY DISCONNECTED. CHECK FOR A SHORTED 200 MFD CAPAC I TOR BETWEEN TAB 6 AND TAB 19 (SEE PWR 1551. IF CAPACITOR NOT SHORTED t ISOLATE LINE SHORT TO P-AI BOARD. REPLACE F AUL TV CARD AND RECONNECT ALL LEADS. REPLACE CP 9 LOA;~~~i;~lEM (SEE 55 TO FIND MI. CORRE BLEM FUND. Note 1: CP6 used in early machines. CP10 used in late machines. 10 ,Y -lJr ~ \;j PWR 20 PWR 20 IBM CONFIDENTIAL 19 Dec 75 © Copyright IBM Corporation CORRECT THE PROBLEM FOUND. RECONNECT ALL LEADS. ~ ~ \;j 447460 3830·2 REPLACE REGULATOR CARD P-A1Al, AND ADJUST CP6, 9, OR 10 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 21 UNTil MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER 1975 o () o .0.'" '~ o o o o ,r'" \ -',---.J! o C) o o PWR 150 ( (-. ( (' ( (- ~' ( .... "/ + 12V de REGULATOR Cpg TRIPS (Part 2 of 2) PWR 155 12V de REGULATOR Transistar ~eat sink located back of Seq Box Located; n,ide Seq Box \"'WO,,' \cated in,ide Seq Box 24V dc Distribution PWR 140 YB120 R3 40,25W Tl-TB 1-3 For 208V ac Input Only 3 Phase { AC Input Tl-TB1-l Tl-TB2-3 -------------------------------4~~ +24V de Supply YB10l YB101 Gnd ~_ _----.""" t-'-Ta;::b:...l;.;9_ _ _- - - - - - - - - - - ' + 1 2 V de reg output 01 Tab 5 :::.:n::::::t??l:I?IIi??ftj Tabs are on the power sequence printed circuit board. (See PWR 705) to all P-A 1 cards B 11 pins A1811 I +12V de Adj Pot 200mfd CAUTION Turn off main power befolfl IfIlTIOving this card. Otherwise. 07 may be damaged. SLT Card 12V de Regulator P·A 1A 1 (pwr seq logic board YB143) ~~1*-lj&~H@ttttHtm~1r~}~~rr~~t~~It~jfrttfl~lm~mlff}~~~l\j~ftmtrmrrtrrr~::~tj~j~~/:~:;:·::'· .: : ~: : :;: . Tab 6 gnd for power seouence board Gnd YB148, YB149 Gnd I I I~~~~~ ~~~:i ~~~~~ __ 3830·2 ~--~--~~ © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972,1973 ~ _ _ _ _- L_ _ _ _L __ _~_ _ _ _~ L81-1 (VB185) + 12V de REGULATOR PWR 155 ( CP15/18 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 3) CP15/18 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 3) SOLID TRIP PWR 160 ~~////////////////////////////////////~ ~ DANGER ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 1 LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ in the power servicing area. . ~ SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE until measured otherwise. ~ CAPACITORS are potentially ~ explosive devices. ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. ~ After replacing any capacitor, ~ reinstall all SAFETY COVERS before powering up machine. _ DANGER :-- PWR 30, 280 9 % I % a; NTERM I TTENTL Y POWER MUST BE DOWN ) PROBLEMI CP LABEL 15 TRIPS I THc~A'b'~~NrW SOL IDLY B lOR ---INORMALLY A DEFERRED MA I NTENANCE CALL CP 15 t+bV ROBLEM) WHICH CP TRIPS • SEE PWA 165 FOR VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION. , 0- THEN DISCONNECT LEAD PS 3, Ell ~~clg~~M16V I NTERM I TTENTL Y 18 TRIPS ]:···-I"~~' . A PWR 1 LABEL 170 (SEE NOTE 1.) I CP 15 STILL TRIPPING <$>'" I LABEL POWER MUST BE DOWN CHECK INPUT LEADS FROM CP 15TO PS3, El AND BWj~ ~~8'Fl'T1°c"Jlc~3 POWER MUST BE DOWN ISEE NOTE 1.1 BETWEEN LEADS, AND CP 15 LEAD TO GROUND, I DANGER 1 CHECK I NPUT LEADS FROM CP 18 TO PS 3, El+0A~~ ~~L~32FO=? 1 SHORTS. CHECK BETWEEN LEADS I AND CP 1 8 TO GROUND. YES CP 15 TRIPS RECONNECT RECONNECT REPA IR LEADATPS3 El~. lOR:', 9..9,I~N~.t;\ORS REMOVE PS REGULATOR CAROlS). OR REPLACE AS NECESSARY. IF NO PROBLEM FOUND. REPLACE CP 15. 3 LEAD R:~Oe~ ~~ ~ 1 1 • REGULATOR CARD (S) • NO , POWER UP UNIT ISEE NOTE 1.1 DOWN DANGER POWE R UP UN IT POWER MUST BE DOWN THEN DISCONNECT LEAD AT PS 3. E4 POWER MUST BE 1 DANGER I NO l DANGER YES NO TRIPPING 170 ~J.c,pNNDN~j:.)ORS POWE R UP UN IT THEN 0 I SCONNECT LEAD AT PS 3. E2 DANGER POWER MUST BE DOWN PWR POWER MUST BE DOWN POWER UP UNIT ISEE NOTE 1.1 DEFERRED MA I NTENANCE CALL SOLIDLY DANGER I ! LABEL CP DOWN DANGER ,---. Ct~ijJsO,~..f~Jr ¥/////////////////////////////////////~ POWER MUST BE I REPA IR OR REPLACE AS NECESSARY. IF NO PROBLEM FOUND. REPLACE CP 18. THERE I S A LOAD PROBLEM IN +bV OUTPUT LINE RECONNECT POWER UP UNIT ISEE NOTE 1.1 ALL LEADS POWER UP UNIT ISEE NOTE 1.1 1 YES CP 18 STILL TRIPPING ~ NO RECONNECT TRIPS THERE I S A LOAD PROBLEM IN -36V OUTPUT LINE I SOLATE LOAD PROBLEM: I. AI. Bl BOARD CARD _ISEE PWR 165 AREA. 2. I/O ITAIL) GATE CARD ---- b?~TRIBUTION AREA. 3. CE PANEL. ... PWR SEQ PR I NT ED C 1 RCU IT BOARD. ALL LEADS. DANGER POW"oR MUST BE DOWN CP 15 STILL TRIPS I 1 REGULATOR CARD(SI. I t ALL LEADS REPLACE PS 3 1 RECONNECT REPLACE ALL LEADS REGULATOR CARD t SI , .~ RECONNECT CORRECT PROBLEM FOUND POWER MUST BE DOWN PS 3 REPLACE I DANGER CORREC T PROBLEM FOUND. REPLACE J I ---I;SEE PWR 165 FOR VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION POWER MUST BE DOWN I DANGER ISOLATE LOAD PROBLEM TO: 10 SHORTED 50 MFD CAPACITOR BETWEEN LB 1-8 AND LB1-90 2. A 1 BOARD CARD AREA 3. PWR SEa PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD AND RELATED LOGIC CARDS 1 DANGER NO NO POWER MUST BE DOWN YES I RECONNECT TO ALL LEADS PWR 20 1 RECONNECT PS 3 OUTPUTS Note 1: The unit will not power up normally at this p oint, but you are looking for a CP trip condition on Iy. 'Only for early machines (with CP1). "Only for late machines (without CP1). I ADJUST ALL LEADS ~. ADJUST --- r:SEE PWR 50 FOR PROCEDURE PS 3 OUTPUTS --[tEE PWR 50 FOR PROCEDURE 1 ~ TO TO PWR 20 CSJ TO PWR 20 PWR 20 3830·2 CP15/18 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 3) © J 0 0 PWR 160 Copyright IBM Corporation 197Z, 1973 /) ~\ 0 ~j 0 0 ("j 0 , , ~ . ,0 'v.._Y (~ \ V' r) 0 ( ~. 0 "'y A"~" \,-y I 0 0 .~ ~} 0 ~y ". -- '~ ,c~\ ,.1 F'J! 0 r-'"i.J "- jI r~ ~j/ " 0\ ._/,) r~ ~J 1') r) (11 ~ __ ". ,j ~ 0 \,__i '." .-, .j! .t o _ O -.,.. ~j - p L (~ (~ (~ ( .' ( (~ (~- (. (- ('.. ( ( (- ( (~ (' (: (. (~ ( / --~-".------~-~ (. (~' +6V DC Pwr Seq Printed Circuit Baard PS3 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION Test +6V dc Note: Bulk 2 and the -36V section of PS 3 are used only in early machines (with CP7). Input Pins: 10IA-BIB2 10IA-BIC2 0IA-BIB4 10IA-BIC4 ,0IA-B1T4 BOa, BOB, BOS, Boa, BOB, Input Pins: 01A-AI02 01A-AI04 0IA-AIE2 0IA-AIE4 OIA-AI F2 01 A-AI F4 01A-A1G2 0IA-AIG4 0IA-AIH2 01 A-AI H4 Boa. Goa BOS, GOB BOa,GOa BOS, Goa BOS, GOB BOS, GOB BOS, GOB BOB,GOB BOS, GOB BOS, Goa , (ZA0031 I Goa GOB GOB GOB GOB I (YBI21) (YBI21) P-AIBIBI3 (YBI46) P-AIA2BI3 (YBI4S) I I Cards: Cards: ! OV 6V --;: +6V DC to 01 A-AI and BI Boards CE EC 2-A (YB131) (. ("' Input Pins: Cards: ,For the power line disIturbonce sensor card 01 B-A lD2 01 B-A 1F2 0IB-AIC2 01 B-A I E2 B08, B08, B08, 608, I I I I I I I i I Pwr Seq Logic Gnd* I P-A 1EI B08 (YBI45) P-A IA2DO~ (YBI48) i -36V* P-A IA2D09 (YBI48) G08 G08 G08 G08 Special Voltage Cable I~ab 6 Special Vol tage Cable . LB 2 I I 0IB-AID4 01 B-A I F4 I 01 B-A 1F6 I 01 B-A I E6 B08, B08, B08, B08, B08, B08, Special Voltage Cable • I I (ZAOO4I I 01 B-A I E4 (ZAOOI) 2 r-----+----+----~--4_--------+_------------4_----------------J+6V I PWR 165 Input Pins: I 0IB-AIC4 I (ZAOOI) I~ !~ II'Tab 25 (YB121) I Cards: , I (~ (tail) GateOlB-AI Baard : OV I To 23FD 1/0 1-36V Reference I _ I I I I (. PS3 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION CP15/18 TRIPS (Part 2 of 3) +6V CE Pnl (-. (~ 3 Gnd "'4 G08 G08 G08 G08 I Located on 1/0 (Tall) Gate 50uF \ f.>A,+6V -'~ 1 "'2 YB185l I IGnd I~ ILB 1 I" ~ _ _ _ _ _ _--J YB185 '-----t-'---......::..---' No Laminar Bus No Laminar Bus Voltage Connections ta OIA-A 1 and BI Baards Voltage ConnectionSL.-------""\ Located on Hinge end of OIA Gate ta OlA-B2 Baard. Located on Hinge r---''rl-\---t----+_---+----...."..,-:--4_-------------+----------------.., End of OIA Gate TB 11 ov f -36~ YB1631 7 +6V :.I S 6 5 4 3 2 I I ~--+_------_+------~~--+-----------_4----~--------~ Located on Backside of Wall that Mounts All Power Supplies PS3 300n* V' lOW E19 u9 0 ,.- E5 E6 ' 9 E7 E8 E9 EIO , Ell' E12 , E13 , E14 , :& , 0 E39 ~ Ell ~ e ~ !g ~ 100 uF Remote Turn On Controlled by Power Logic Conn 1-12 (YBI21) o + Turn On 6V for I/O Channel Interface (YBI46J P-A 1F2DIO (YBI49AJ2) P-A I BlJ07 (YBI46BJ4) See PWR 50 for adjustment procedure • Only for early machines (with CP71 ··Only for later machines (without CP7J KI Hold Delayed 12 Seconds YBI46 PWR 10 3830-2 PS3 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1973 PWR 165 (~ C - ./ CP ·14 TRIPS (Part 1 of 3) ~ DANGER ~ ~ ~ ~ Z ~ ~ ~ ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES .,e p,esent ~ in the power ..rvicing .r... Z SAFETY c.nnot be ov.r.mph.lized. ~ Con.ider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ until mellured oth.rwi... ~ CAPACITORS .r' pot,nti.lly ~ •• pIOliv. dtvic... ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. ~ Aft,r r.plKinl.ny Clpec:itor. ~ rein.tall atl SAFETY COVERS ~ befor, powerinl up mKhini. ~I CP 14 TRIPS (Part 1 of 31 PS4 IS NOT SEQUENCED ON. THIS SUPPLY IS NOT USED. IF CP14 TRIPS LOOK FOR A SHORT TO GROUND BETWEEN THE CP AND PS4. ~~////////////////////////////////////~ POWER ..us T BE DOWN. ~~mf6 c (~ ( P(~· L PWR 180 POWER MUST BE DOWN. A "A I NTENANCE CALL ~ Z Z '////H///////////////////////////////A; LABEL THEN TURN OF~ PS 4 ELECTRON I CALL Y 01 SCONNECT BULK , INPUT LEAD AT PS 4. E I ~&':Irmgs ;~ 4 t EI2 ~s I ~o "OWER U" UN IT -- UNIT WILL NOT POWER UP =e~"¢hl/ A~t ~:u ~ PO I NT , LOOK INC ~OR A C" 14 TRIP CONDITION. POWER UP UN I T i~C~ob~ ~~~t ~~~ED VOLT AGES f ROM L83~8 AND LI3-U ARE SUPPLIED TO MST CIRCUITS THAT HAVE VERY LOW RESISTANCE (OfTEN LESS THAN 1 OHMI. TO MEASURE WITHOUT CARD CIRCUIT RESISTANCE. ALL CARDS ON BOARD A-83 MUST 8E REMOVED fROM CONTACT WITH BOARD PINS_ WHEN THIS IS DONE. THE RESISTANCE SHOULD READ OPEN YES I"'" 1151 • ..uST HAVE CONTINUITY BETWEEN. ___ ALL CARDS. CORRECT PI"lIILE" I SEE PWR 1.5 1 I. L83-1 TO PS 4, £14 Z. LB3-. TO "S 4, EI3 =~f~I~. NO "OWER ..us T BE DOWN. SHORTS LB3-1 TO LB3-. DANCER AL..SO CHECK FOR HEAT DA.. ACE AT THE ABOVE POWER "UST BE DOWN. MEA9JRE THE BULK 1 INPUT VOLTAGE TO PS 4. AT PS ~ EII+I TO E?bl'4~e 3 CAUTION: SEE NOTE 1. 5~~t:~NFO~~D~~~LACE THE A""RO"R I ATE CABLE OR TER"I NAL CONNECTOR. 6:: RECONNECT LEADS AT PS 4, EIZ CHECK ~OR A SHORT IN THE CABLE FRO.. "S 4, EI NO TO ep 14 POWER UP UN I T NO DANCER POWER MUST BE DOWN. DANCER OVERVOL TACE COND I T ION PR lOR TO CU POWER I NG OOWN. 14 .7'(- , LEAOS AT PS 4: e. EW~'r'l, ~1°~~ bg R RECONNECT ALL LEADS AT PS 4 SLIP-ON CONNECTORS ~r3.EIOI E12. AND LEADS. SUPPL Y TO PS 4 FROM OV SCREW ON CONNECTORS EI t E2. E3. AND E4. RECONNECT ALL MEASURE THE BIAS +7.0v AT P5 4. £4: +1.Z83V I QVERVOL T AGE I TIGHTEN THE FOLLOWING SHORT. DOWN. OUTPuTS TO DETECT AN FOUND,RESET CP A. POWER MUST BE USE SCOPE ON PS 4- REPAIR LEAD CAUTION: SEE NOTE 1. POWER UP UN I T ALSO CHECK FOR HEAT OAMAGE AT THE ABOVE CONNECTIONS. IF HEAT DAMAGE IS FOUND. o REPLACE PS 4. PWR 65 - SEE PWR 50 FOR PROCEDURE NO POWER UP UN I T BE ISOLATE POSSIBLE LOAD PROBLEM: A. ISOLATE BY UNLOADING BOARD B3 OF MS T CA'!OS 20X AT A TIME. DANCER POWER SUPPL Y MUST BE DOWN. B. CHECK BOARD DECDUPLI Nc; CAPS. CHECK FOR SHORTS BETWEEN HEAT SINK AND FRAME OR AD.)ACENT PS' 5 I I ALSO F'OR LOOSE SCREWS, ETCI. IF SHORT IS FOUND, REPAIR. IF NO SHORT IS FOUND, REPLACE PS 4. IF REPLACINC PS 4 DOES ~~L~b~ ~~O~~r::M"ECONNECT DANCER ALL LEADS. POWER MUS T BE OOWN. RECONNECT THE REMAININC LOOSE LEAD AT PS 4 SEE PWR 50 FOR PROCEDURE PWR ZO 3830-2 447480 1- 19 Dec 75 _ C> Capyril/lt ItIM CQrporltion t871 Note 1: Neither E1, E2; or PS 4's heat sink is at ffame ground. Do not tie any measuring- instrument grounded leads to these points. PWR 80 PWR 20 IBM CONFIDENTIAL UN1"IL MARCH 26. 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER CP 14 TRIPS (Pert 1 of 31 PWR 180 CP14 TRIPS (Part 2 of 3) .PS4 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION PS4 IS NOT SEQUENCED ON. THIS SUPPL V IS NOT USED. IF CP14 TRIPS, LOOK FOR A SHORT TO GROUND BETWEEN THE CP AND PS4. PS4 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION PWR 185 Pwr Seq logic Sense PS 4 +7V output. (A course sensor, sensed output will be considered good until the +7V output drops below 2. 5V de). There could be memory problems before the sensor powers the system down J. (6K uF (block of 6 copocitors) P-A1C2DI3 +7V de PS 4 YBI44 + P-A1F2DOS Gnd YB149 P-A1F2B07 +7V de YB149 LB 3 located verticolly on hinge side of . main gote LB 3 VB185 (see LOC 161 Remote Sampling of Voltagefor Input to Memory Voltage SeqUencing Logic. Remote sampling of voltage for feedback to voltage regulator. This provides regulation of Power PWR 120 P"-AtEI J06 (YBl45) Supply Output P-AIA2B09 t'-Alczoto (YB14S) P-AIA2-D05 (YBl48) - Turn on PS 4 +7V de YB144 Sense Leads (Remote turn-on control) +7V ':::':. "3 E12 E3 E14 U3 PS4 PS4 0 0 E9 El0 TB 2-1 TB 2-2 +7V de at 10A VB170 El$ E2$ E3$ ES E6 E7 E8 E9 El0 Ell E12 E13 E14 $ ~ I I I I I I '"ii . PS 15 18V de bias YB165 ~ 0 ::::. ~ •~ 0 ;; •'8 n ~ E1S6) E4$ See PWR 50 for adjustment procedure. 3830-2 IBM CONFIDENTIAL /447460 19 Dec 75 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1975 o ,J 0··.··· . o 00000 PS4 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION UNTIL MARCH 26.1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER r~ ~y o o 0 () o 00 \'<...~.;' ~I O 'Y o () PWR 185 o I~. I f-Oll A MAXIMUM HIPPLE OF- I ()V P P CAUTI()N SFf NO!! 1 Neither £1, £2, nor PS4 heat sink is at frame ground. Do not tie any measuring instrument grounded leads to these points. 447460 3830-2 19 Dec 75 © Copyright I BM Corporation 1975 PWR IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER 20 CP14 TRIPS (.Part 3 of 31 PWR 190 c CP13 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 3) CP13 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 3) 9~"~'· ?r~'W//////////////////////////////////~ ~ DANGER ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ in the power servicing area. . ~ SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ until measured otherwise. ~ CAPACITORS are potentially ~ explosive devices. ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. ~ After replacing any capacitor, ~ reinstall all SAFETY COVERS ~ before powering up machine. . ~ MI TTENT ~/////////////////////////////////////~ CHECK 13 TR I PS THEN DISCONNECT PS 5, El FOR SHORT FROM HEAT SINK AND FRAME ALSO TO NEXT POWER SUPPL Y I LOOSE SCREWS Erc I • IF ~OUND. FIX. ! F NO SHORT FOUND, REPLACE l .~ Y CP 13 TR I PS HOW YES r A ADJUST ~ NO MEASURE BULK INPUT AT PS 5, D! 5CDNNECT LEAD AT PS5 t E I I I ALL LEADS FOR SHORT IN CABLE FROM PS5 TO CPI3 I SEE PWR 205) p WR 210 PS~. fHEN CP! 3. RECONNECT CP 13 STILL TRIPS CHECK SOLIDLY • SEE PWR 205 FOR VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION. >? j LABEL CP PWR 200 E11+) TO I E2(~) PWR ,R 9.8 TO 15.QV DC P55 i 1 65 C5J TO CAUTION see NOTE SEE PWR SO' 1 PWR 20 REPA I R SHORT. RECONNECT ALL LEADS CP 13 STILL TRIPS 1 YES VOL T AGE CORRECT C5J NO l TO NO PWR THEN 0 I SCDNNECT PS5. E3 20 Ell I I CHECK (POWER MUST BE DOWN} TERMINALS T85-4 TO T65-3 AND T85-2 TO T85-1 ARE CONNECTED TO MST CIRCUITS THAT HAVE VERY LOW RESISTANCE IOFTEN LESS THAN 1 OHMl. TO MEASURE WITHOUT CARD CIRCUIT RESIS TANCE. DISCONNECT LEADS AT A-B1C2J03 AND A-B1C2G06. WHEN THIS IS DONE. THE RESISTANCE BETWEEN THE ABOVE TERMINALS SHOULD READ OPEN -- FOR OPEN, SHORTED. AND LOOSE SENSE LEADS IPWR 205) . MUST HAVE CONT I NU I T'( : I. OIA-BIC2J03 TO PS5, EI0 2. GROUND RA r L TO POWER UP UNIT. USE SCOPE ON OUTPUTS OF PS5. LOOK I NG FOR AN OVERVOL T AGE CONO [T [ON PR I OR TO CU POWER I NG DOWN. A----· ,· I. MUS~S~E: ~S SHORTS: T85-4 TO T85-3 MUST HAVE CONT r NU I TY: 01 A-B I C2G06 TO PS5. E9 MUST BE NO SHORTS: T85-2 TO T85- 1 +1 .25V AT PS5. 0/ YE CP 13 STILL TRIPS I NO ISOLATE LOAD I SEE POR 2051 PROBABLE CAUSES ARE: 1 .MST CARDS I PULL ONL y 201. AT A T [MEl 2.DISCONNECT LEAD AT LB I TO 110 GATE. 23FD, AND CE SW ITCHES. 3.01A GATE CAPAC I TORS IN CARD POS r T [ONS A2,A5,V2. AND V5. 4.MST BOARDS YES VOL T AGE CORRECT E4: RECONNECT LEADS ALL NO 26V I QVERVOL T AGE i OV 2. - 3V AT PS5,E3: -3.03V (OVERVOL T AGE I 6 REP A lR SHORT FOUND PWR MATCHING CARD I 5 1 r N P55 AND PS1 HAVE SAME PART NUMBERS REP A I R NO SHORT AND RECONNECT ALL LEAOS ~. YES 80 TO NO QVERvOL T AGE SWAP CARD'ISI PWR PS5 TO PS1 CP 13 YES yES MAKE SU RE ALL CONNECTORS AND TERMINALS ARE TIGHT AND NOT HEAT DAMAGED ALSO LB TERMINALS HAVE SCREWS INSIDE OF GATE 1 RECONNEC- ALL LEAUS V~: __ 1 ANY THERE IS A LOAD PROBLEM IN 3v SECTION MEASURE BIAS AT PS 5, E 14(+) TO E7I-) FOR 166 TO 23.9V DC CAUTION SEE NOTE 1. RECONNECT LEAD AT PS5, j LABEL YES 20 I CHECK ADJUST PSS GO TO PWR {SEE PWR 50 I ~0 20 AO..JUST REPLACE Neither side of leads can be grounded. Do not tie to any instrument grounded lead. T he power supply heat sink is also not grounded. 447460 19 Dec 75 I. REGULATOR CARDS 2. PS5 3. CP 13 NO REPLACE SAD CARD I 5 ~ AND ADJUST PS5 I SEE PWR 50 ~ I PS5 AND -, CAN S[ SWAPPED TO DETERMINE IF ONE I S BAD. THERE MAY NOT BE NORMAL OPERAT I ON AFTER SWAPP I NG S I NeE THE VOLTAGE ADJUS TMENT LIM I TS ARE 0 I FFERENT BETWEEN THE SUPPL I ES l SEE PWR 50. I 1 ADJUST P55 IF NECESSARy { SEE PWR 50) .1 GO TO ~. TO PWR PWR 3830-2 YE AVAILABLE TROUBLE LOG A.NO REPLACE MOST LIKELy COMPONENT NOT ALREADY REPLACED '- YES PS5, REGULATOR CARD AND ADJUST (SEE PWR 50) Note 1: CPI3 STILL TR IPS I 20 20 IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIEO THEREAFTER o CP13 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 31 COPYright IBM Corporation 1975 (' ", PWR 200 ( ( f ( ( ( {/ ( ( f ( ( ( CP13 TRIPS (Part 2 of 3) PS5 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION PWR 205 YB121 PS5 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION MPL File Gnd SSOO9 -31/ -3V de .J.~=:':"'--:~i=~ \ - ,=;;';';;"_~~:--\" ... ,1 J,F="---=:::tf::=-; \ Laminar - -- - Otannel A / Twisted pair grounds from Tabs 11 and 12 II / Chan~el B .:=:::.::..----4+-----\\\ / Bus "'O:::.:.:......----+ot=-; \ JI Pin connections for I/O Gate I I ~--~~---\jl YB186 Multitog SM953 SM954 CE Switches SCRID Card - SM951, PWR 140 S . . Note' PS5 El$ ElS E5 E6 E7 EB E9 El0 Ell E12 Ell E14 ... . !l Gnd PS 9 J2 01A-B1C2(io8l. Gnd Rail J, CD ~iii" < 2- S! $ I S I I iil I c: I iii" I 8E4 $E15 uS S!CD < 0 ~ ...or ..a. .. CD n ..a. J, J2 n & ••••••••l1li1 Note 2 I I I I I I I I I I E14 Ell E12 Ell El0 E9 E8 E7 E8 E5 SEl SE2 E15Q E4$ n a. & g 'fiI a. Q SEI TB 5-2 TB 0 TB 5-1 Autoturn an jumper PS7 PS 5 Dual Regulator -3V/+1.25V de P_er Supplies are ph)lSicolly inverted on left and right sides at 70 amps Not.: 1. Overvol..... cerd not pr_nt If po_ luppll_ et EC718230 or Ie.,. 2. This sensor is remote sampl ing of voltage for feedback to PS regulator far regulating PS output only. Logic does not sense this PS for normal conditions 3. TB 5-5 terminates on gnd rail at B1C2J05 TB 2-3 TB 2-4 18V de bias PS15 3830-2 PS& VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION @Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1976 ·PWR 205 CP13 TRIPS (PART 3 OF 3) CP13 TRIPS (PART 3 OF 31 PWR 210 ~~////////////////////////////////////1.: ~ DANGER ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present in the power servicing area. SAFETY cannot be overemphaSlled Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE until measured otherwise. CAPACITORS are potentially explosive devices. WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. After replacing any capacitor, reinstall all SAFETY COVERS before powering up machine. ~ MEASURE THE FOLLOW I NG VOLTAGES: A.. +1.24 TO .\.26Y DC AT OIA-SIC2J03 TO GROUND. ~ ~~====::-7.7::-:=::1 ~ ~~LB~~~g~E~5~T~GM~XR~~X[ ~ ~?:~u¥\' T~CV~UI~~~~=~D 8. -2.97 TO -3.03v DC AT OIA-BIC2G06 TO GROUND. ~ ~5~~u~CAUSE 01' A BAD ~ =:.:..::.:..:....------.. . -----'1.----..., ~ ~ g~U~6~N~SE;' .... DIGITAL ~ ~~~D~~trjRT~~+HL~AO. ~ _~ ~/////////////////////////////////////.a • SEE PWR 205 FOR TH I S CHECKS PS 5 VOL T AGE OUT FOR A POSSIBLE OI ....ERENCE AT THE PO I NT WHERE IT IS SENSED • VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION MEASURE THE BIAS SUPPLY INPUT TO PS w WH I LE POWER I NG UP H ~~,5fo~'t6~6' TO 23.9V DC. ~6 M:~H~NEE~A¢N~O~:R CAUTION, SEE NOTE' DANGER DOWN OR TRIP CP BIAS SUPPLY INPUT PSt~r ~6: ~i~p~~ £7 VOLTAGE OF O.9V PIP CAUTION, SEE NOTE' YES ND POWER MUST BE OOWN DANGER POWER MUST BE DOWN CHECK I TI GHTEN SENSE LEAO CONNECTIONS ~ REPLACE 1.25 V A. 01 A·BIC2J03 AND GROUND RAIL B. A GATE TB5·3 AND TB 5-4IGROUND!. REGULATOR CARDISI IN PS 5 ISEE NOTE 11 PS 5 SCOPE BULK I INPUT PS 5, EI (+1 TO FRAME GROUND H FOR A RIPPLE VOLTAGE OF 1.9V PIP CAUTION· RFF NOTE? CHECK I TIGHTEN SENSE LEAD CONNECTIONS I 3V A. 01 A·BIC2G06 AND GROUND RAIL B. A GATE TB 5·' AND TB 5·2IGROUNDI. CHECK I TIGHTEN A~AT~ L2 sEco..8lR Y~ • ~f~ PWR 205. ISOLATE 018 GATE 23"D CE SWITCHES BY LIFTING LEADS AT LB I TERIot I NALS, CHECK DECOUPLING CAPACITORS IA~6 ~: 3, CHECK ~~ ~Mi~f6N~~'C~~KA~?A REPAIR OUTPUT CONNECT IONS A. CHECK "OR LOAD PROBLEM PS LOG FOR REPLACED COMPONENTS. THE FOLLOWING IS A LIST OF FAILURE PROBABILITIES: 1. CPI3 2. REGULATOR CARD ( S I 3. PS 5 ANO 0 1B BOARDS ANO RELATED CONNECTIONS. PROBLEM AND ADJUST PS 5. B. tlo hAILI GATE TB 1-5. 6. Tlo~' 9, AND CORRECT ANY PROBLEMS FOUND CHECK I TIGHTEN REPLACE MOST LIKELY COMPONENTS NOT ALREADY REPLACED PWR 20 NOTE 1: SOME POWER SUPPLIES HAVE TWO CARDS lONE REGULATOR. THE OTHER OVER VOL T AGE I . IF THERE ARE TWO CAADS IN NO ADJUST PS 5 IF NECESSARY :::~fMP2~~~. sy~P~~~ ~~~~~EIotENT t~~~TW ~~~I ~TS:E~ I~CO~+~~StHE SHORTED CARD RE .. ERENCE DRAWl NG ON PWR 205. USE DIGITAL VOLTMETER TO ISOLATE EXTRA VOLTAGE DROP IN THE DC DISTRIBUTION. CORRECT PROBLEM "OUND. AD..JUST PS 5 REGULATOR NOTE 2, SEE PWR 50 FOR PROCEDURE I S FOUND. ~AT~~R5~~'H~1t S INK IS AT FRAME GROUND. 00 NOT TIE ANY MEASUR I NG INSTRUMENT GROUNDED LEADS TO THESE POINTS. PWR 20 SEE PWR 50 .. OR PROCEDURE PWR 20 3830·2 CP13 TRIPS (PART 3 OF 31 PWR 210 ©CoPVright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973, 1976 () 0 0 o 0''.' c. '1. . ----- .. --- .. 0 ,~ 'J () 0 () 0\ 0 r~ ',."'--j ! 0V --~ ----------- 0 0 ,. ~ - ------- (~ \~jI """ \,,--) I"'t\ 0 ,1""10 ',,-Y (ll ,->, --- ------------------------' o ('~ ".y ("' ~(', (:" (- {'-: (, ( (t-- T ( (.- ( ( (- <: (-" (:.~ (, (,' ('- (" . (- (' (-" ( ( .-' ('-" CP11 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 3) (-' (~/ (- (""; (,- (;/ CP11 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 31 . " C PWR 220 ~~W//////////////////////////////////~ ~ DANGER ~ ~ ~. ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 1 LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ in the power servicing area. ~ SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ until measured otherwise. ~ CAPACITORS are potentially ~ explosive devices. ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. ~ After replacing any capacitor, ~ reinstall all SAFETY COVERS ~ before powering up machine. _~ DANGER NORMALLY DEFERRED POWER MUST BE DOWN. AI _1 1 ~:~~:N::~J2NTL ~ ~/////////////////////////////////////~ CP I I POWER MUS T BE DOWN. DANGER CP ,", TRIPS 1.4 PS 6 PROBLEM) LABEL THEN DISCONNECT BULK 1 I NPUT LEAD AT PS b, E 1 TURN OFF PS & ELECTRON I CALL Y BY REMOV I NG THE JUMPER LEAD AT TR IPS PS 6, EI2 A SOLIDLY • SEE PWR 225 FOR VOLTAGE OISTRIBUTION PWR 230' ....._ _ _ ....I~ 1 _ _ _.., I UNIT WILL NOT POWER UP NORMALLY AT THIS! POINT, BUT YOU ARE ONLY LOOKING FOR A I CP II TRIP CONDITIO~ LOOSE OR OPEN SENSE LEADS ON PS 7 CAN CAUSE AN OVERLOAD OF PS 6 VIA MEMORY AND TRIP CPI!. R POWER UP UN I T POWER UP UNIT __ THERE MAY BE A PROBLEM I N THE LOAD AREA OF PS MEASURE THE BULK I SUPPLY INPUT TO PS 6 ~jl~t6~ltH8 6 IO.OV DC CAUTION: SEE NOTE 1 NO DANGER , POWER MUS T BE OOWN. NO NO DANGER .A. I. B. POWER MUS T BE DOWN. OANGER POWER MUST BE DOWN. YES 01A-B3112GII TO 1 RA IL TO PS 1, E8 -3V oIA-83M2G06 TO PS 1, E9 CHECK RECONNECT LEAD AT PS 6, £12 MEASURE THE BIAS SUPPL Y INPUT TO PS 6. AT PS 6. E91>1 TO EIOI-I FOR 16.6 TO 23.9VDC CAUTION, SEE NOTE I RECONNECT LEAD AT PS 6. £12 ALL SHOULD HAVE CONTINUITY. FOR A SHORT IN THE CABLE FROM PS b. E I AND CP II 1 1 - OR METER THE ~~~~GE C~~C~H~O~B~~: T CONNECT IONS. NO NO YES REPAIR SENSE LEAD FOUND, RESET CP II IF HEAT POWER UP UN I T POWER UP UN 1T NO I RECONNECT THE REMAINING LOOSE LEAD AT PS b. EI PS 6 REGULATOR CARD I 5 I OR PS b SUPPLY QVERVOL lAGE r:=I PWR 20 447460 3830-2 19 Dec 75 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1975 YES ADJUST PS b REGULATOR y~ 230 ll5. SHORT. RECONNECT ALL LEADS. - ADJUST SEE PWR 50 FOR PS 6 REGULATOR PROCEDURE o DANGER GO TO POWER MUS T 8E DOWN PWR 20 REPLACE '51. Note 1: Neither E " E2 nor PS 6's heat sink is at frame ground. Do not tie any measuring instrument grounded leads to these points. POWER SUPPL Y MUST BE DOWN. ·2.0V AT PS 6, £4 TO GND AT PS 6. E2: ,Z.215 V . / \ (QVERYOLTAGEI OV 1 CP II STILL TRIPPING DANGER POWER I NG DOWN. REP" IRS. 1 ~ YES ON PS b OUTPUTS TO DETECT AN QVERvOL T AGE COND!TION PRIOR TO CU POWER MUS T BE DOWN. PS 6. B I AS SUPPLY' INPUT MEASURES WITHIN SPECIFICATION 1 , I SCOPE OANGER ~~~~~~E I ip~~~~~ IA TE g~Bb~KE O~E~~~~:~~ POWER UP UN I T OPEN OR LOOSE LEAD FOUND A.ISOLATE BY UNLOADING BOARD 0 I AB3 OF MS T CARDS 201. AT A TIMe:. S. CHECK OECOUPL I NG CAPS OR THE BOARD ITSELF. PWR REPAIR T I GHTEN t FOLLOWING LEADS IPWR ll51: MUST HAVE CONTINUITY, I. LB:i-6 TO PS 6. EI4 2. LB3·4 TO PS 6. EI3 MUST BE NO SHORTS, LB3·6 TO LB3-4 CHECK SL I P-ON CONNECTOR AT PS 6: E9. E I O. E 12 ISOLATE POSSIBLE LOAD PROBLEM: CORRECT PROBLEM AND RESEAT C AROS. SEE PWR CHECK, VOLTAGES FROM LB3·6 ARE SUPI'LIEO TO MST CIRCUITS THAT HAVE VERY LOW RESISTANCE IOF TEN LESS THAN I OHMI TO MEASURE WITHOUT CARD CIRCUIT RESISTANCE. ALL CARDS ON BOARD A-B3 MUST BE REMOVED FROM CONTACT WITH BOARD PINS WHEN THIS IS DONE. THE RESIS· TANCE SHOULD READ OPEN. TRIPS + I .25V ~: ~R05r:.8 DANGER MUST BE DOWN BULK 1 SUPPL Y MEASURES WITHIN ITS SPEC I FlED VALUES POWER MUST BE DOWN. FOR OPEN OR LOOSE SENSE LEAOS ON PS 7 IPWR 2451 • II YES POWER SUPPL y tlANGER CHECK CP CHECK FOR SHORTS BETWEEN HEAT SINK AND FRAME OR ADJACENT PS' S. t ALSO FOR LOOSE SCREWS. ETCI. IF SHORT I 5 FOUND. REPAIR. IF NO SHORT I S FOUND. REPLACE PS 6. IF PS & DOES NOT FIX PROBLEM. REPLACE CP I I. RECONNECT ALL LEADS. _ \SEE PWR -- 50 FOR PROCEDURE ~ REGULATOR ADJUSTABLE TO SPECS YES 1 ADJUST PS b REGULATOR IBM CONFIDENTIAL ISEE PWR 50 FOR PROCEDURE rJ-, \7 PWR UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER - - 20 CP11 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 31 PWR 220 ( ' .... .-----_. - - - - ._---_ .. PS6 VOL TAGE DISTRIBUTION CP11 TRIPS (Part 2 of 3) PWR 225 PS6 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION -[ For Sensing OutFlut Normal in Logic P-A IF2D08 Pwr Seq Logic Sense PS 6 +3.5V (A course sensor, sensed output will be considered good until +3.5V output drops below 2.05V de). There could be control storage problems before the sensor powers the facility down. Gild P-AIC2BI3 (YBI44 PS6+2Vdc) YBI49 P-A I F2B05 (YB 149) Remote sampling of voltage for input to voltage sequencing logic. PW.R 120 r Located vertically 6k uF . on hinge ,ide of main gate (See LOC 16) LB 3 YB185 LB3 +1.25V from PS 7 E4 Remote sampling of voltage for input to PS regulator only GE4 $E15 o r:;IO III e- ~ 0 .:!.. 0 •<< 0 . 'fil ;:; . n Q. $ StJ 0E7 SEl - Sense I I I I I I I I I I E 14 E 13 E 12 Ell El0 E9 E8 E7 E6 E5 o Leads Turn on swipe +3.5V PS6 P·A1A2D04 YB148 o E3 i"\ i"\ E13 P·A1C2B03 YB144 E14 PS6 PS6 +2V de at 60A Refer to PWR 50 for adjustment procedure. 3830·2 IBM CONFIDENTIAL 447460 19 Dec 75 © CoII¥right IBM Corporation 1975 o o o 00 PS6 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER o 00 0, ';;'-y/ ~ IJ ~ ~y ·0 0 0 () iJ !"1I V ~ /~ V ,~ "'-y () ,0 \.. .II I~ 'J 0, 0 a r", 0 ~ \ ,I ",-y 0 'J ,.. : c~ .J _.J PWR 225 0, \:.....)/ I~. ",-y ~ (---,." '<-.. .Jj ''L..'';; I (>:' P L C .. {,/ (-"~ (/ (- (- (" ( ( (", (- <- (, (" (/ (""' <,/ ( c (" (,e_ (-- (- (- ( CP11 TRIPS (PART 3 OF 3) ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ y" (' (' c'~ ..> (~ .,.\ (~ c' PWR 230 PWR 220 ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ in the power servicing area. ~ SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ until measured otherwise. ~ CAPACITORS are potentially ~ explosive devices. ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. ~ After replacing any capacitor, ~ reinstall all SAFETY COVERS ~ before powering up machine. "~ ALL MEASUREMENTS MAY HAVE TO BE MADE DURING A PARTIAL TH I SCHECK S PS 6 VOLTAGE OUT ,OR A POSSIBLE DIF',ERENCE AT THE POINT WHERE I TIS SENSED. POWER UP I BE,ORE T I ME OUT I I, YOU ENTERED HERE BECAUSE OF" A BAD OUTPUT. MEASURE WI TH DVM ,OR THE ,OLLOWI NG VOLTACES AT PS 6. £4 TO £14 ANO PS 6, ~/////////////////////////////////////..a • .- CP11 TRIPS (PART 3 OF 3) ~~////////////////////////////////////~ ~ DANGER (~ E3 TO E' 3 ,OR A MAX EACH POWER MUST BE DOWN SEE PWR l25 ,OR VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION B I I OF 195 MILLI VOLTS DANGER PW CAUT ION. DO NOT USE A DIGITAL VOL TMETER WITH A GROUNDED TEST LEAD I I I CHECK I TIGHTEN I IN SPEC I I I FOLLOWING TERMINALS AND SLIP-ON CONNECTORS. A. SENSE LEAD CONNEC T IONS ANO OUTPUT CONNECT IONS I. 2. 2V IAI LB 3-6 IBI LB 3-4 B. PS 6 CONNECTiONS ~:! E~ll3AN~4~ I ~9, E' O. ALSO CHiCK ,6R HEAT OAMAGE OR LESSI I I CHECK THE LOG ,OR REPLACED COMPONENTS. THE ,aLLOWING I S A LISTING 0, ,AlLURE PROBABIL IT IES: I ____ ...JI MEASURE WITH OVM FOR THE FOLLOWING VOLTAGE: 2.168 TO 2.305V OC 8ETWEEN LB 3·8 AND L8 3-4. aIMI~ g~~~~Tg~~~E51~~EL~Mt CONNECT IONS. IF' OAMAGE IS 'OUND. REPLACE THE APPRQPR I ATE TERM I NAL CONNECTOR OR CABLE. OR IN THE CASE 0, A PS 6 CONNECTOR REPLACE PS 6. I • REGULATOR CARD IS) l. PS 6 3. CP II POWER MUST BE DOWN REPLACE MOST LIKELY COMPONENTS NOT ALREADY REPLACED LABEL THEN 0 I SCONNECT LEAD AT PS 6, E4 YES "Gl' ADJUST PS • IF' NECESSARY LOW VOL T IS NOT LIKELY TO CAUSE CPI I SEE PWR 50 FOR PROCEDURE USE SCOPE TO LOOK AT THE OUTPUT PS 0, TO TRIP PO~~R~~~ ~~~L~THE MACH I NE MA Y POWER DOWN I MMED I ATEL Y OR TRIP ITS CP) MEASURE THE BIAS SUPPLY INPUT TO PS 6. ~~&I~M9~'i6T~ TO 23.9V OC CAUTION SEE NOTE 2 PWR 20 I SOLATE THE EXTRA VOLTAGE DROP I N THE DC DISTRIBUTION ISEE PWR 2l51. CORRECT PROBLEM 'OUND. NO POWER MUST BE 'DOWN DANGER YES POWER MUST BE DOWN REPLACE SEE PWR SO FOR PROCEDURE REGULATOR CAROISI IN PS 6 ISEE NOTE 1.1 REPLACE PS 6 MEASURE THE BULK' INPUT VOLTAGE TO PS 6. Mm~T ~aIi t8~8 ~~8=m I BY UNLOAD I NG BOARD 0' AB3 MST CARDS lOX AT A T I ME. CHECK OECOUPLI NG CAPS ON THE BOARD IN SEE PWR llS FOR 01 STR I BUTI ON eg: I~g~sC~~K A~HE V~6ARD n~~6~'tlf8 I AND RELATED CONNECT IONS. CORRECT PROBLEM FOUND. 'D.DV DC CAUTION: SEE NOTE 2 AD~UST PWR lO PS 6 REGULATOR SEE PWR 50 ,OR PROCEDURE SCOPE THE B I AS SUPPL Y I NPUT TO ~~ ,'toAt I~~ -t'F~ A MAXIMUM RIPPLE l~'-'-l' ND ¥---~--- PWR lO O.9Y PIP PWR lO SCOPE THE BULK' INPUT TO PS 6, AT FRA~E6G~giJNWFOR A MAXIMUM RIPPLE VOLTAGE OF. PWR 65 -l---",--r- Note 1: - ------~--19V PIP CAUTION SEE NOTE 2 PWR 9l 3830-2 447460 447462 19 Dec 75 5 Nov 76 @Copyright IBM Corporation 1975, 1978 Nottl 2: Some power supplies have two cards (one a regulator, the other ollflrvoltagtlJ. If there are two cards in the power supply rernOllfl them both. If the measurement comes within specification" insert one at a time until the shorted card is found. Ntlither E1 nor PS 6's heat sink is at frame ground. Do not tie any measuring instrument grounded leeds to these points. CP11 TRIPS (PART 3 OF 3) PWR 230 ( CP12 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 3) CP12 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 31 ~~W//////////////////////////////////~ ~ DANGER ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ PWR 240 PWR 30. 280 ~ ~ in the power servicing area. ~ SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ until measured otherwise. ~ CAPACITORS are potentially ~ explosive devices. ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. ~ After replacing any capacitor, ~ reinstall all SAFETY COVERS ~ before powering up machine. _a! LABEL THEN DISCONNECT PST EI FOR SHORT FROM HEAT 5 1~~!flp~::=E!u~~~ TO ILOOSE SCREWS ETCI. IF FOUND, FIX. IF NO SHORT FOUND tH~~"l:~T~ PS 1, RECONNECT ALL LEADS ~/////////////////////////////////////~ AD.JUST CHECK PST (SEE PWR 501 FOR SHORT I N CABLE FROM PST TO CPI3 I SEE PWR 2451 • SEE PWR 245 FOR VOLTAGE D I STR I BUTI ON.. DISCONNECT LEAD AT PS1, Ell PWR 20 REPAIR SHORT. RECONNECT ALL LEADS LABEL THEN DISCONNECT PWR 20 PST, E3 LEAD AT PST, Ell THERE I S A LOAD PROBLEM IN -3V SECTION MEASURE BIAS AT PS 7, E141+1 TO E1H FOR 16.6 TO 23.9V DC ISEE NOTE 1.1 DANGER POWER MUST BE DOWN ISOLATE LOAD (SEE PWR 205) PROBABLE CAUSES ARE' I, MST CARDS IPULL ONLY lD" .. AT A TIME) OlA 82.83 BOARDS 2 LBl AND LB3 TERMINALS 3. OIA GATE CAPACITORS IN CARD POSITIONS 4. ~~lEfl:lnD'l;ND V5 POWER UP UNIT. USE SCOPE ON OUTPUTS OF SatAv6~~GC~~I~~ON TERM~NALS T86·4 TO T86-3 AND TB6-2 TO TB6-1 ARE CONNECTED TO CIRCUITS THAT HAVE VERY LOW RESISTANCE ILESS THAN I OHMI TO MEASURE WITHOUT EXTERNAL CIRCUIT RESISTANCE. DISCONNECT LEADS AT A·B3A2Gll AND A·B3A2G06 WHEN THIS IS DONE. THE RESIS· TANCE 8ETWEEN THE A80VE TERMINALS SHOULD READ OPEN. CHECK FOR OPEN. SHORTED. AND LOOSE SENSE LEADS CPWR 2451. MUST HAVE CONTINUITY, I. 0IA·B3A2GII TO PST. EIO 2. GROUND RAIL TO PS1. E8 MUST 8E NO SHORTS, TB6-4 TO T86·3 MUST HAVE CONrlNUITY, 0IA·B3A2G06 TO PS1. E9 MUST BE NO SHORTS' TB6-2 TO T86·1 PRIOR TO CU POWERING OOWN. 1. "+1.25V AT PST, E4: .I\ RECONNECT ALL LEADS ----+1.26 V t OVERYOL T AGE I MAKE SURE ALL CONNECTORS AND TERMINALS ARE TIGHT AND NOT HEAT DAMAGEO. :e~~~~J~I~~'~ras,.~~VE OV 2. -3Y AT PST, E31 RECONNECT ALL LEADS "" ' lrOY _____ -3.03V lOVERVOL TAGEI SHORT AND RECONNECT ALL LEADS REPAIR NO ANY SHOIIT FOUND SWAP CARDISI PWR 20 PS5 TO PST CHECK PST AV A I LABLE TROUBLE LOG AND REPLAtE MOST LIKELY I SEE PWR SOl PS5 AND T CAN BE SWAPPED TO DETERMINE IF ONE IS BAD. THERE MAY NOT BE NORMAL OPERA Ti ON AFTER SWAPP I NG 5 I NCE THE VOLTAGE AD.JUSTMENT 1.IMITS ARE DIFFERENT BETWEEN THE SUPPLIES (SEE PWR aO.1 ~~~~~N~E~IcED I. REGULATOR CARDS 2. PS7 3. CPI2 REPLACE BAD CARDISI AND AD.JUS T PS T I SEE PWR 501 AD.JUST PST IF NECESSARY CSEE PWR 501 PST REGULATOR CARD AND AD.JUST Note 1: 3830-2 Caution Neither side of leads may be grounded. Do not tie to any instrument grounded lead. The power supply heat sink is also not grounded. 447460 447462 19 Dec 75 5 Nov 76 PWR 20 PWR 20 CP12 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 31 (G) Copyrillht IBM Corporouon 11115, 1976 () a Ii ". I,J) O 0 ·' ,.,~" fa; '," a o () 0 ,;r)',' 0',. , , () 0 ' 0" ;, ". ~ "f o C) 0 PWR 240 1"",\ \'If ",=""" '--.I () ~(/ (~e (-/ (C_ (e~ (~ ( ("'. (- c' (- c' { (- CP12 TRIPS (Part 2 of 3) PS7 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION PWR 245 PS7 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION Pwr Seq Logic Sense PS 7 -3V Output For sen51ng output { IA course sensor, sensed output will be considered good until normal in logic the -3V output rises above -1.2V del. There could be storage I logic problems before the sensor powers the facility down P-A1C2Dl2 (YB144 PS 7 -3V de) Gnd P-A 1F2D08 (YB149) P-A1F2B08 (YB I 49) YB185 2-5 2-8 2-7 ':" '+1.25V de Sense} :',: i:: TB 6-4 s. Note' Remote sampling of voltage for input to PS regulator only VB1. TB 6-5 Note 2 PS5 El$ $E4 $E1S E2$ E3$ ES E6 El EB E9 El0 Ell E12 E13 E14 $ I $ I I i I I I ! J2 J, I ! 2 If @ ~ , I n ~ 1 f.. i2 An •A- J, i' •nA$ n $ I E14 I E13 I E12 IE11 I El0 I E9 I EB I El I E6 I E5 $E7 E1S$ E4$ eEl Note 1: Overvoltege card not pr_t If po_lUppll. at EC716230 or PS7 Ii'" P-A1A2D08 Not. 2: TB 6-6 terminat.. on god rail at B3M2GOB. Power Supplies .,. physically i_ted on left and right Rmr to PWR 50 for adjustmant procedure. 3830-2 I ~~~51 e Copyright IBM Col1lOration 1976. 1978 .::: 1_. $E3 J2 PS7 Dual R..,lator -3V/+1.25V de at 70 amps YB170 i ~~~~~61 _.....I_ _ _ _...L.._ _ _.....IL-_ _ _...L._ _ _ _L-_ _ _...J Gnd (YB148) ::Bulk 1 bias PI7 VOL TME bllTRIBUTION PWR 245 CP12 TRIPS (PART 3 OF 3) CP12 TRIPS CPART 30F 31 PWR250 r~////////////////////////////////////~ ~ DANGER ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ ~ ~ in the power servicing area. Z ~' SAFETY cannot be overemphasiled. ~ ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ ~ until measured otherwise. ~ ~ CAPACITORS .re potentially ~ ~ explosive devices. ~ ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. ~ ~ After repl.cing any capacitor, ~ ~ reinst.1I all SAFETY COVERS ~ ~ before pOl(V8ring up mechine. _~ IEQUAL OR LESS I PIA 245 MEASURE WITH DVM FOR THE FOLLOWING VOL TAGE, A. -1-1.26 TO +1.28 DC AT 01A-83M2GlI TO GROUND ~/////////////////////////////////////~ 8. -2.9710 -3.03v DC AT 01A-B3M2G06 TO GROUND REPLACE REGULATOR CARDISIIN PS 7 ISEE NOTE 2.1 DANGER POWER MUST BE DOWN. CHECK FOR REPLACED COMPONENTS THE F"OLLOWINCi IS A L.ISTING OF" FAILURE PROBABILITIES, POWER MUST BE DOWN. I. CP 12 MISlllNGOR .1 LTAGE NOT TO CAUSE OTRIP. REPLACE AD.JUST PS T PS T RECiULATOR 2. REGULATOR CARD t 5 I 3. PS T LABEL, THEN 0 I SCONNECT MEASURE THE BIAS SUPPLY INPUT TO PS 7. POIlER MUST DOlIN. BE LEADS AT PS T I E3 AND E4 AT PS 7 E14(+1 TO +71-1 FOR 16.6 TO 23.9V DC. CAUTION, SEE NOTE 3. PWR 20 REPLACE Io1OST LIKELY COMPONENTS NOT ALREADY REPLACED CHECK AND I OR TI GHTEN THE F"OLLOWI NG TERMINALS AND SLIP-ON Ca..ECTORS. A. SENSE LEAD CONNECT IONS. 1. +l.2&V IA) OIA-83C2Gll AND GND RAIL SCOPE T~~l~~Lr-P~iE~IN~3 UP. ITHE MACHINE MAY POWER DOWN I MMED I ATEL Y OR TRIP ,ITS CPl. AD~ST 2. -3V SEE PWR 50 :-F"OR PROCEDURE! tAl 0IA-8_ AND GND RAIL, III A GATE TB 6- I AND TB 6-2 IGNDI. PS T IF NECESSARY NO B. OUTPUT Ca..ECTIONS. ~~I 2~5GAll ~!62-~, ~!T2A~ LB 2-1' AND LB AND LB 3-3. i- I. LB 3-2 PWR 20 C. PS T Ca..ECTIONS. I~: Ua. EIII~4,b~Tl~·tI5. ALSO CHECK F"OR HEAT DAMAGE AT ~~A~~~Ta:S tAal~EB"'AT LOOSE Ca..ECT I ONS. I I' DAMAGE l~"'='? l T~'ri~5~ NItECONNECT CHECK CHECK F"OR LOAD PR08I.EM PS T IPIR 2451 rp~9¥JcTl: ~~PLi~~Epr T. REPAIR Tt£ BIAS SUPPLY INPUT T~I P~O Ttb~!1 P~~. AEI4 ~~tXIMUil RIPPLE VOLTAGE .9v PIP --~-= '.9 M SEC PROBLEM AND AD.JUST PS T A POTENTI AL LOAD PRoa..EM. I SOLATE FOR LOAD PROBLEM BY UNLOADING 01A-B2 ANO B3 BOARD CARDS 2n AT A TIME. CHECK DECOUPLING CAPACITORS IN 01A-B2 AND B3 BOARD POS I TI ON SEE PWit 245 FOR DISTRIBUTION a ~f.tc:5 I :~'2 A~ND Vii BOARDS AND RELATED CONNECT I ONS. CORRECT PROBLEM FOUND. NO PIA 20 NotfJ 1: 00 not use a digitallioltmlltr1r with a groundtld tftt lead. ' NotfJ 2: Som/I POWflr supplilll have two cards (one a regulator, the othllr ol/llfl/Oltlll/flJ. If thare are two cards in thll power supply remove them both. If the _Ufem/lnt COflllll within lfJIICifi· c.r;ofll. IMart Ontl at. r;_ unr;1 tM shortlld card i, found. NotfJ 3: 3830-2 Nllithar E1, E2 nor PS 7'1 hllat sink is at framll ground. Do not till any measuring inltrumllnt groundtld leads to thlllll points. REFERENCE PIA 245 TO ISOLATE THE EXTR. I~~'COROP DISTRIBUTION. CORRE~~OBLEM AD.IUST ..:~=;::F"PIIIt=;;JI_L.PS_T_R_E I,...UT TO PS 1f1.Act ~O\~HN~ I ATO ~~~~~_:~TAGE PIA 20 .'.v--i-..:.=!r---- PIP 1.9 M SEC .. GUI._A_T_OR", 447460 447461 19 Dec 75 12 Mar 76 e Copyright IBM Corpomion 1975, 1976 SCOPE ICAUTION, SEE NOTE 31 THE BULK I CP12 TRIPS CPART 3 OF 31 PWR 250 (- ( (: CP3 TRIPS (FAN PROBLEM) CP3 TRIPS (FAN PROBLEM) ~~'////////////////////////////////////~ ~ ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES a re present in the power servicing ar ea. ~ ~ SAFETY cannot be ave remphasized. ~ ~ Consider ALL CIRCUIT S LIVE ~ ~ until measured otherwis e. ~ ~ CAPACITORS are paten tially ~ ~ explosive devices. ~ ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASS ES. ~ ~ A Iter replacing any capa citor, ~ ~ reinstall all SAFETY CO VERS ~ ~ before powering up mac hine. ~ ~/////////////////////////hV/////////h0 ~ PWR 260 PIR 30 ~ ~ ~ DANGER c' c (~ e ~ t DANGER POWER MUST BE DOWN. :3 TRIPS (FAN NO PROBLEM) DISCONNECT ALL FANS AT FAN CONNECTOR. --- ONE FAN MOTOR HOTTER THAN OTHER EXCESS CURRENT DRAWN BY A FAN MOTOR IS CONVERTED TO HEAT. I 5 ONE HOTTER THAN THE OTHER? YES REPEATEDLY CP 3 TRIPS DISCONNECT HOTTER FAN MOTOR AT FAN CONNECTOR , I NTERM I TTENTL Y- -- NORMALLY A DEFERRED • SEE VBllO FOR CIRCUIT DRAWINGS RESET CP 3 MA I NTENANCE CALL NOTE' POWER SUPPLY FAN NO.2 NOT USED ON LATE MACHINES. RESET CP 3 I POWER UP THE UNIT YES~NO 1 POWER UP THE UNIT NO ALL FANS DISCONNECTED TRIPS l ! YES DANGER POWER MUST BE OOWN DANGER POWER MUST 8E DOWN CHECK ALL FANS FOR PROPER OPERATION ,~ NO NOT RUNNING OR RUNNING AT REDUCED SPEED RECONNECT FANS ONE AT A TIME. IF PROBLEM FAN NOT YET ISOLATED, POWER UP AFTER EACH RECONNECTION UNTIL CP 3 TRIPS AGAIN. YES I CORRECT WIRING PROBLEM FOUND. IF NONE FOUND, REPLACE CP 3. REPLACE FAN ONE FAN MOTOR HOTTER THAN OTHER, OR CP3 TRIPS WITHIN 3MIN CHECK 208VAC INPUT WIRING TO FANS. CHECK FOR SHORTS BETWEEN LINES AND TO GROUND. NO , REPLACE FAN CAUSING CP 3 TO TRIP - IF NO ONE FAN CAN BE IDENTIFIEO AS TRIPPING ~~PCAC~H~~ 3 1 CHECK YES I DANGER , POWER MUST BE FOR OPEN IN FAN CONNECTOR. I DOWN. DISCONNECT THE FANS ONE AT A TIME AT THE FAN CONNECTOR. caNT INUE THI S UNT IL CP 3 STOPS TRIPPING. RECONNECT EACH PREVIOUS FAN AFTER IT HAS BEEN DETERMINED THAT FAN 15 NOT CAUSING CP 3 TO TRIP. POWER UP THE UNIT MEASURE EACH FAN FOR THE FOLLOWING MAXIMUM .CURRENTS: I.A1 GATE FAN-RUNNING CURRENT 1.03 AMPS AC PIP-STARTING SURGE 2.69 AMPS AC PIP. 2.1/0 (TAILI GATE FAN-RUNNING CURRENT 0.31 AMPS AC PIP -STARTING SURGE 0.33 AMPS AC PIP, 3.LEFT AND RIGHT PWR SUPPLY TUB FANS-RUNNING CURRENT 1.03 AMPS AC PIP (EACHI STARTING SURGE 2.0 AMPS AC PIP (EACH). TO MEASURE USE THE PROPER CURRENT PROBE FOR THE SCOPE YOU HAVE AVAILABLE. - REPLACE FAN CAUS ING CP 3 TO TRIP REPLACE THE FAN DRAWING EXCESSIVE CURRENT. IF EXCESSIVE CURRENT NOT FOUND, REPLACE CP 3. PWR 20 3830-2 CP3 TRIPS (FAN PROBLEM) © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1973 PWR 260 CP16 OR CP17 TRIPS CP16 OR CP17 TRIPS ::y~////////////////////////////////////~ ~ DANGER ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ in the power servicing area. ~ ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE until measured otherwise. CAPACITORS are potentially explosive devices. WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. After replacing any capacitor, reinstall a" SAFETY COVERS before powering up machine. PWR 270 PWR 30 ~ ~ ~ ~. SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ .~ ¥/////////////////////////////////////~ DC Common Bus TB 10 +11.5V dc Nominal +10.6 to 12.4V dc ~~~~------------------~~__~~~--~~ DANGER PWR 71;;: DANGER POWER MUST BE DOWN l---_o'} POWER MUST BE DOWN CHECK THE FOLLOWING AREAS FOR SHORTS, 1. T810-1 3 Phase /--___0 ::::; AC Input I '" ~I--_o'? .;.:: CHECK THE rOLLOWI NG AREAS FOR SHORTS, I. TB 10-3 TERMINAL AREA. 2. LOAD RESISTOR TB 10-3 TO TB 10-15. 3. CABLE FROM CP I T TO TB 10-3. TERMINAL AREA. 2. LOAD RESISTOR T8 10--1 TO TB 10-15. 3. CABLE FROM CP 16 TO TB 10-1. YB1j Nom'." ::'" K12-2 +24V dc YB101 I~---T~~~~ YB202t; ~~;;; I .I.!!._ ............... -M.OV do 5Q 50W PWR 140 0-:-0 -40.5 to -47.5V dc 'fJ-+-.L-----------I~ W9 ::;;; 5 1-"';"'-10 0=0 18 6 ~~~~ YB200 CP 16 SHORT CP IT SHORT J- ~ PWR 20 Note: The bulk 2 supply valtages shown on this pagtI are not required by the 3830-2. Tarminating resistors ara used to maintain balanced loads required for proper operation of the bulk supply. 3830·2 ONLY FOR EARLY MACHINES Iwith CP 71 © ~ PW R 270 Copyright I BM Corporation 1972. 1973 o o 0 0 V 0 0 0 ' . () 0 () 0 () I~ ~J o () o o o o ·~ O ,) !'~, I . ~ (- (~ 3830-2 MISSING OR OUT-Of-SPEC VOLTAGES ( c\ 3830-2 MISSING OR OUT-OF-SPEC VOLTAGES PWR 280 ~~////////////////////////////////////~ ~ DANGER ~ ~ ~. ~ ~ ~ Z ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ PWR PWR 10, 100, 130, 141 LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ in the power servlcmg area. Z SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ until measured otherwise. ~ CAPACITORS are potentially ~ explosive devices. ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. ~ After replacing any capacitor. ~ reinstall all SAFETY COVERS ~ before pOl(YI!ring up machine. _~ ~ISSING OF" SPEC IF POWER IS OROPP I NG. CHECK THE VOLTAGE OUR I NG THE THE PARTIAL POWER UP CYCLE. • 1 NOMINAL VOLTAGE VOLTAGE LIMITS I DO NOT ADJUST AT THIS TIMe) MEASURE AT GND REF AT r .25V + *+l.27V· -3V 1 • PS7 PS5 FILE CHECK POWER SUPPLY VOL T AGE. I F POWER IS DROPPING. CHECK THE VOLTAGE OUR I NG THE THE PART I AL POWER UP CYCLE. CHECK POWER SUPPLY POWER SUPPL Y 9 PS3 + 12v REG +bV + 12V +24V SUPPLY PSb t3.5V +24V THE PART I AL POWER UP CYCLE. r NOT1-usro-' I PS4 PS7 1.02V *+1.27V PS3 II .40V MIN 22.IV MIN +3.J8V MIN 6.e64V MIN 1 .251V MIN 2.995v MIN 1.262V MAX 3.030V MAX 1.265V MAX 3.055V MAX 6.180V MAX 12.60V MAX 25.9V MAX +3.14V "'AX 1. 11S11 MAX I .Z6SV MAX 3.0S5V MAX SEQ BOARD 01A·B3 A2G04 1+) 01A-B3 N2Gll (+\ N2G061-\ N2J08 (+) N2JOB 1-1 C2 JOB i+) C2 J081-1 01A-B3 P-AI LAMINAR BUS LB 2-1, 2 1+' AI811 LB 2-8 L.-J, ,I , -\ A IJ08 i+) TAB \-) TAB 1 1 THE PRESENCE OF PROPER ~A6M~~~R oS~ REMOTE TURN-ON. INPUT. AND OUTPUT G2J081 \ I N2JOB 1-1 k J 01A-B3 N2G06 1-) N2JOB U) 5.820V MIN 1+) TAB 33 1-) I I +24V 2.970V MIN 6.180VMAX TA832 OU_T_O_F~M~ _:_:_~_N_G ~ : :A:~:~:~:E:~t:~:5:~:~: : T~~ +bV + 12v • , +24V AUTOMATIC TURN-ON ~UMPER tPS5, £8 TO Ell) REMOTE TURN-ON IS OK IF GND AT PS7, Ell REMOTE TURN-ON IS OK IF +12V AT El3 AUTO TURN-ON DES IGN AUTO TURN-ON OESIGN PS5 DISTRIBUTION PS7 01 STR IBUT ION PWR 245 PS3 01 STR I BUTI ON P.R 165 PWR PWR 140 155 ___ ~O 3.030V MAX 22.IVMIN 25.9V MAX TOWER P SEQUENCE BOARD T A8 26 1 TAB 27 1-) ,+, .1 T A8 29 1+) ITAB 30 ,-, ~. OUT O~' ""ll1!':"," • ":: AT CU LOGIC TEST POINTS TO +~At' ~~~U~,k +~G~~E GO TO THE DES I REO LEVEL BEFORE POWER I NG OFF. WITH REFERENCED OISTRIBUTION PAGE iPS3, 01A-83 N2Gll (+) L-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ TURN-ON JUMPERS CAN BE CHECKED ANYTIME. REMOTE TURN-ON LOG I C LEVELS MUST BE CHECKED I N8R POWER UP CYCLE IPRIOR CHECK REGULATORS PS7 01A-B3 G2G09 1+) -3V ~;U;';T""";O;"'F""";SP;"'E;;;c"-_ _ _:rO;;;U;"T""";0;;'F""";5;"'P::;E~( Mls~sII~N~GG~ OR MISSING PWR 50 PWR 205 A2J08 \ ) I MISSING sr. I-I 1 ADJUSTMENT PROCEOURE PS5 1+1 VOLTAGE MISSING OR OUT OF SPEC OUT OF SPEC J, 16 +24V SUPPLY PS5 -3.02V 1.251V MIN 2.995V MIN 5.6Z0V MIN OIA-BI C2G06 1-) BOARD WITH IMPL SWITCH THE VOL T AGE OUR I NG 2.910V MIN OIA-BI MEASURE AT TABS ON POWER SEOUENCE - -- VOLTAGES CHECK POWER SUPPL y VOL T AGE. I F POWER IS OROPP I NG. CHECK 1 .231V MIN C2J031+) I OF SPEC NPL OPERATED ~/////////////////////////////////////.a * MUST IF +1.21V IS ADJUSTED, PS6 BE CHECKED 10 tot I 55 I NG OR OUT OR OUT MEMOR Y VOL lAGES OGle VOLTAGES VOLTAGE. PWR 9 9 e,"SSING OR OUT OF SPEC CU • SEE PWR 300 FOR VOLTAGE 01 STR IBUT ION. 'DO 10, YES PWR 50 1 PSb AUTO TURN-ON. JUMPER PS6 IEI2 TO £14) PWR 225 JpS4 B REMOTE TURN-ON I S OK IF GROUND AT PS4, E12. PWR PWR 45 185 ~----I~--~----~I--~I YES G.) TO PERTINENT POWER SUPPLY PAGE AND FOLLOW THE "INTERMITTENT CP TRIP" CHECK PATH. 00 NOT REPLACE A CP IF IT IS CALLED OUT. POWER SEQUENCING PROBLEM 9.. PS3PWR 160 ~3~~~ PSIPWR PS7PWR +12V PWR +24V PWR 447460 3830·2 19 Dec 75 220 240 150 135 IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 21, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER © Copyright IBM Corporation 1976 3830-2 MISSING OR OUT·OF·SPEC VOLTAGES ·PWR 280 -_ .. _. __ __ . _ - . ~- -.-~--. ----~ JOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO __... ,,--". (- F( L' ("~ ( (/ (' (- (~ (,. (~ ( ( (' ( (" ( (': (~ (,~ (,' (:- --- - (~ C'" ( " (~' ('~ (:: .. ",; " .JJ ----_ ..._-_._.- (" t",: e DISTRIBUTION CONTROL UNIT AC AND DC DISTRIBUTION, CONTROL UNIT AC AND DC SEE ALSO LOGIC YB012 208V jC 3 Phase i I ~ ~} -_./ PWR 300 I I I Filter (Note 3) ('~ CP's Auxiliary Po_r Manilaring Circuit r---±--+....;Co:;ntacts I ~ ~~ (~ } '. I CP's have auxiliary points. Auxiliary points open, I when tha CP opens, to set the PS Failure latch. I Auxiliary points on YB201 and 202. I I IL _ _ _ _ _ _ _I_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ CB2 Mainline L..:.--;;-.:::....I Y B 100 1 K8 CU contoctor YBIOO 1 CP1 Note 2 CP 8 CP 4 K7 c ,YB100 YBlOO '-r- Y8100 VB101 I T1 T3 IIOOU •••TIOO ~ m [J ~ YBIIO 1 Rectifier Use Meter Logic Gate I/O Gate Power Supplies -Turn on +3.5V PS6 I r=-=-i- PS 7 -3/+1. 25V Reg r.- PS 4 +7 Reg !I L. ., L :I Turn on 7V PS 4 (Not Used) YBI70 •I ----,-----~---~~--~_4~1 LU~e~ Po'o. I I r- I PS 6 +2.25V Re KII-I P~3 PS 5 Resistor Load -3/+1.25V}j +6V R e g / I Reg L-r-ir----' Resistor Load YB200 VI.• I I I I Not PlD s",_ no llT B101 YB101 B101 I SC~IDS ~I ~~t~~ ..---'-~ 24V dc 3830-2 Fans ~ CP 2 -}:-- Y .. I I I I I I L ~ ~ :~ 1000 I - L-----.-_...J I' CE Panel r---'~~ YB101 "-r-- +12V Reg ___ _ I YB120 _...J To Sol~d Logic Sequence Board +3.5V I+U5V' -3V -36V +6V I ITERF ICE LB 3 LB 3 LB .. LB I LB , LB 2 K6-2 Device Power Seq Control YB135 IOL..IN·~ERFACE MPL File DC ~ K6-3 AC A r------+6V -3V. YB101 YB121 ~K6-1 +7V CP6 !Note 1 ) CP'D'N... 21 YB131 YB121 -3V YBIOI I 3830-2 Power Seq Control t;ON +1.25V/ YB101 +24V de Sequence _ CP9 TT2 MPL File DC I "Pc FILE I (YB I 85) Note t: Only for early machines (with CP1) Note 2: Only for late machines (without CP1) Note 3: Not used on late 6(}Hz machines 3830·2 447460 ~~~~~____~J·~_19 1 __D_ec_7_5_L________L ___ - -_ _J ________L______~________L_____~ © Copyright IBM Corporation 1975 (YBI80) IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER DISTRIBUTION,CONTROL UNIT AC AND DC PWR 300 c (~ ""i DISTRIBUTION BY POWER TERMINALS (Part 1 of 2) DISTRIBUTION BY POWER TERMINALS (Part 1 of 21 T1· TB1 (Note 1) 230V -4 CP 1 -3 -1 ....... ~'./ Note 5 3 ) 4 5---> TB3 (Note 1) -1 CP2 - Line Filter (Note 61 ( Phase 1 B B 208/230 V ae 60 Hz or 200/220/236/380/408V Be 50 Hz 0 D D ,r}-t----; 50 Hz Neut E E ~ - - - - -i Note 2 Note 1 3830-2 1447460 19 Dec 75 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1975 (~). , Power Seq Control 11 ( C} YB101 W8 BTB2 H, CO"~."U ~"'.' - ~-' -3 6 7 7 L~~:o 1 I I I .... ~ ,... ..... ..... 1 ~ ........ 5 5 -6 ~ CPS 3 ~-5 0- ,....... ..... 2 ,... 9 I ,... -6 CP18 YB201 - Bulk 1 ,... ( 10 ,....... CP4 ,... 10 ~ ~ .... 10 ........ MPL File~ Control YB120 CP5 .... ...., ) ........ """ CP3 '1,J" TB1 -2,.,. CP14 CP15 (Note 5) C12 (_) 3 5 6 7 8 9 ) ' . 2 2 'C.J f=!0 1-5 -6-0) 3 } AC ( - '0 ..PL F;o, YB180 05 -- 4 5 ) 6 7 -7G£ 11 TB2 1 ~ 3 6 o ) W2 YB165 1 4 ~ .... 1 .... 3 YB100 ( 7 TB2 11 11 CP12 W4 .... " 2 CP13 (Note 11 5 " ~ --0 ~ W9 W6 ..(/) ....., -10 4 8 CP11 .... 9 0- " " 6 W9 -6 ..() ~I"" ~ ~ ( rO CP17 -2 BTBl -2 CP7 (Note 41 """ -~ ~~ 1 -2 )W8 CP16 9 ,- YB202 1 2 3 TB1 ) ) YBl60 -10 T2 , 12 ( UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER ",-. '" Bulk 2 CP15 (Note 4) IBM CONFIDENTIAL I "-". • System EPO Control v,0 OV , Notes: 1. For 50 Hz connections, refer to logic. 2. For ac gnd connections refer to logic page YB115. 3. All CB and CP points are shown in their non-tripped position. 4. Only for early machines (with CP7). 5. Only for late machines (without CP7). 6. Not used on late 600Hz machines. (YBm» 9 t}_~'OM'~' 0 :..;Ph:.::a:::; ..~3=--_--1~'J C C 60 Hz Gnd ) 0 A A Pha.. 2 YB100 -2 4J +24V Sequencing 5 ( -'1 -3.0\ ~ "5V,, -2 -3 ~ .... 7.25V ae to SCRIDs =D E- I ) .) ~ Note 4 -- 1 CP6 .,.,.... n i C} 2 s To +12V Reg .rO ~ n·TB2 ) C ~ ....... .... CP10..0- ) ) -2 CPS .... ,..., ) 208V PWR 305 1-8 -9 ~To ( 8 Fans YB110 ) 1 2 3 , 4 5 6 7 , , 8 PS15 DISTRIBUTION BY POWER TERMINALS (Part 1 of 2) ,8 B I 8 PWR 306 PWR 305 Ir" ""'\ i,,,j POWER SEQUENCING FLOWCHART IPART 1 OF 21 POWER SEQUENCING FLOWCHART (PART 1 OF 2) POWER UP SEQUENCE PWR 310 ~~////////////////////////////////////~ ~ DANGER ~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~ ~' ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ in the power servicing area. ~ SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE ~ until meesured otherwise. ~ CAPACITORS are potentiany ~ explosive devices. ~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES. ~ After. replacing any capacitor, ~ reinstall all SAFETY COVERS ~ before powering up machine. _~ PICK K2 IHOLD RELAYI ~/////////////////////////////////////~ • see PWR 2 FOR WRITTEN DESCRIPTION OF POWER SE~UENCE SEE PWR 110 FOR VOLT AGE SEOUENCE LOGIC • PICK KS (AC TO CUI TURN ON POWER ON LIGHT (METER PANELI NO YS100 YB140 AC TO BULK YES SUP~~:~Sill~~NS. I LOGIC SEQUENCEr VOLTAGE DC READY TO CU (READY LAMPI +24V TO SUPPLY BRING UP +24V POWER SUPPLY YS120 YB135 SEQUENTIAL STARTER CARD I PICK K4 YB120 1_.._..;Y..:B~12:;a SEOUENCE COMPLETE TO CPU AND SEOUENTIAL STARTER CARD, DROP KI , ALLOW NEXT CONTROL UNIT TO POWER UP BRINGUP +12V POWER SUPPLY PICKKI (PICK RELAYI ANTI· RECYCLE LATCH PREVENTS RECYCLING UNTIL POWER ON START YB140 SIGNAL IS INTERRUPTED RESET ,ANT I -RECYCLE LATCH YB146 START SEQUENCE TIMER RESET ANT I-RECYCL.E YS144 LA,TCH AllOW RECYCLE PICK K5 (EPO INTLKI RESET POWER SUPPL Y F AUL T INDICATORS YB140-141 YB144 SET ANT I-RECYCLE LATCH YB141 TuRN OFF PS4 1+ 7v I YB120 PICK K7 (CON V OUTLET) YB121 YB144 YB120 DROP K 13 IUSE TURN OFF PS11·31·1.25vl METER I OROP KZ VB120 VB1]1 PICK KI3 METER I (USE TuRN OFF POWER -ON LIGHT ANO Z4V DC TO ALLOW LOGIC TO PICK K6, K 10, K 11 123FD AC AND DCI SEQ S TART CARD VB1lO DROP KI- ·Only for early machines (with CP 7J. ~460 19Dec 75 3830-2 © Copyright IBM Co INTR 1 INTR Feature Descriptions INTR 05-07 Introduction to the IBM 3830 Storage Control, Model 2 . General Description IBM 3830 Storage Control, Model 2 Control Module Satellite Modules INTR 10 Disk Storage Subsystem Conceptual Units INTR 20 Facility Error Collection System Storage Control Unit Check 1 Errors Check 2 Errors Microprogram Detected Errors Device INTR 50 INTR 90 3830·2 Data Flow Introduction Control Storage Microprogram Controls Register Data Flow MPl File and Attachment CE Panel Controls Arithmetic logic Unit Control Interface (CTl·l) Channel Interface (CHl·l) Read Data Path Write Data Path ................. 3830·2 Data Flow INTR 100 Control Storage, MPL File (23FDI, MI"L Attachment. INTR 105 Storage Control Unit Controls INTR 110 Registers, ALU Data Flow. INTR 115 Control Interface (CTL·II . INTR 120 Channel Interface (CHL·II . INTR 140 3830·2 © Copyright IBM CorporatIOn 1972. 1973. 1976 CONTENTS INTR 1 (e ----------------- )OOOC)OOO()() 0 0 0 0 0 0 (~ J ----------- ~~~~- (0·· -;; 0. ,y ~~ ~y 0·· \. .. rr" Y..._JJ o· ...' ~- ~J. I.: 0',,--jJ t~ 1 (.~ J\ ~-,.., ~? ~- . __. ---~-------- r 1'( (/ L/ ( ( ( (- (- (~ (- ( ( ( ' f- (-'> (, (- (-- (- ( ('" (- ( (- L FACILITY ERROR COLLECTION FACI LITY ERROR COLLECTION • • This page gives a summary of the various error collection methods and where more information can be found in the MLM. Facility error information is collected on three levels; system, storage control unit, and device. SYSTEM Performance Data Collection Console Error Message Analysis EREP Descriptions OL T Descriptions MSG MSG MSG OL T INTR 50 DEVICE For details of device errors see the device MLM. Check·2 Error Collection (Controller Error} Sense Summary Control Storage Contents (Device Error Logging In) PANEL 50 SENSE 1 CTR L 650, 652 10 20 30-40 1 STORAGE CONTROL UNIT Status Information CMD 180. 181 Sense Information SENSE 1 Error Symptom Code FSI 5 Control Storage Contents CTR L 650. 652 CE Panel PANEL 10 Check 1 Error Collection PANEL 40, 41 Check 2 Error Collection PANEL 50, 51 Error Collection Diagrams (ECD) for each error are located in machine section (CHL-I, CTRL, MPL, CTL-I), Microdiagnostic Routine Summary MICRO 10 Mlcroword Formats MIC 10-18 Command Retry CMD 210 Check 1 Errors Check 1 errors are errors that prevent the microprogram from operating correctly. therefore. operation of the SCU is stopped. Check 2 Errors Check 2 errors are errors that are detected by circuits IJl the device or attachment areas of the SCU. These errors do not affect the operation of the microprogram. The microprogram collects. decodes, and transfers this information to the CPU as status and sense data. Microprogram Detected Errors The microprogram monitors Check 2 errors while using ,my of the attachments of the SCU. The microprogram dho can detect other errors that are not of a circuit failure typ., (end of file, command reject, etc.). The microprogram logs errors in control storage, decodes them into sense datd. and tlansfers them to the CPU on a Sense command. IBM CONFIDENTIAL 3830-2 UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973.1975 FACILITY ERROR COLLECTION INTR 50 3830-2 DATA FLOW INTRODUCTION 3830-2 DATA FLOW INTRODUCTION • o INTR 105 - 140 show the basic data flow oaths and functional components of the storage conti 01 unit. References are given to other diagrams for nore information. CONTROL STORAGE CONTROL STORAGE o o • o o • o • o • MICRO PROGRAM CONTROLS CE PANEL CONTROLS IAR addresses control storage during instruction cycles. DAR addresses control storage during data cycles (s tore/fetch). Backup address (BAR) register holds address on errors. Error register holds check-1 errors (CU). SA-SD registers, error register, or BAR puts data on the write bus to control storage. Microprogram decodes control the CU operations. ST (status) register and B R (branch) register control microprogram branching. • • • - CONTROL INTERFACE • • INTR 120 Four Registers, SA, SB, SC, SD are used as entry from and exit to control storage. Two Registers, ST and BR are used for microprogram branching. Fifteen Registers have exits to the A bus and A register input to ALU. All GP registers have exits to the B bus and B register input to ALU. Selected registers have entry and/or exits to the channel interface or control interface to the control module. ~BuOioo Seq 2~!..? © 2347"91- 1 Part No. (8) ! [437402A 15 Ma~.....J.._ _ _ _ WRITE DATA PATH CE panel and controls provide data entry, read out, and operation controls for maintenance. Clock and cycle controls provide the basic timing of control unit operations. Data from the channel enters the channel interface buffer trom channel bus out and is transferred to the NA register. The microprogram transfers the byte from NA to the B bus, through the ALU and D bus to the TA register. The byte is transferred to the CTL .. I buffer and onto the CTL .. I bus out lines. Perform logical AND, OR, Add, Subtract, and Exclusive OR operations. Only path for register-to-register transfers. CONTROL INTERFACE (CTL-I) F Registers are used as general purpose registers or as temporary, automatic incrementing storage buffers. Automatic mode is microprogram controlled using Special op (code) 12, and bits set in the TF-register. 3830·2 Functional or diagnostic microprograms on 23FD disk. On IMPL (initial microprogram load) operations, the attachment circuitry controls reading of data from the disk through the D bus to the S registers. The data is then transferred via the write bus to control storage. Microprogram, through the attachment, controls reading after the first record. ARITHMETIC LOGIC UNIT ALU INTR 115 • • Data from the device enters the CTL-I Buffer from CTL .. I bus in and is transferred to the MA register. The microprogram transfers the byte from MA to B bus through the ALU and D bus to the MD register. The byte is transferred to the channel interface buffer and onto the channel bus in lines. • REGISTER DATA FLOW General purpose (GP) registers store data for the use of the microprogram. • • • CE PANEL CONTROLS INTR 110 • • • READ DATA PATH o REGISTER DATA FLOW • MPL FILE AND ATTACHMENT INTR 105 4,096-byte writable control store. 2,048 or 4,096 byte control store extension feature. Four-byte read/write control storage transfEr. Addressed by the address bus. Output of instructions or data is on the reac bus. MICROPROGRAM CONTROLS o MPL FILE INTR 90 Provides a data path to and from the control Illodule(s) attached. Provides communication between the microprogram and the control module(s) for control of deVice opt!rations. CHANNEL INTERFACE (CHL-I) CHANNEL INTERFACE • • o INTR 140 Provides communication between the channel and the CU microprogram. Provides a data path to and from the channel. May be single channel, two channel, or four channel interface. IBM CONFIDENTIAL J _ _ _ _- ' -_ _ _ _L..-_ _ _- ' -_ _ _--'L...-_ _ _...J 3830-2 DATA FLOW INTRODUCTION UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER INTR 90 Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1975 :)000000000 o o o 0 ,' 0 0"," 0,,, 0';' 0:' '0 0 , " ,." " ': '.'.' , , o r, ['J o o o o o () (~: p L (~ (- (:~ (~: ( (- (- (' ( (" (' ( (~\ (-" (- () ( (~- 3830-2 DATA FLOW _c>( . , ( (J (: 3130-2 DATA FLOW I NTR 100 3130-2 DATA FLOW I NTR 100 Refer to INTR 20 for description of conceptual units. ~~------------------------~ INTR 105 through INTR 140 provide more details of the 3830·2 circuits. CONTROL STORAGE MICROPROGRAM LOAD (MPL) FILE INTR 105 Refer to referrenced sections for descriptions of circuit operations, and CMD section for 38»2 operations. INTR 105 Reod Doto •• Con~rols MICROPROGRAM LOAD ATTACHMENT Address Bus MPL INTR 105 • •• • •• ~ WRITE BUS ./) CE PANEL INTR 110, PANEL 10 CONTROL STORAGE CONTROL CIRCUITS CE Controls CE CONTROLS • For ced Address Bus INTR 110 Status Register tt••• 4 Byte, { ~ To SA, SB, SC, SD • Registers Branch Register Register Gates B Bu, L_. . . . . . . .. From SA, SB, SC, ,r SO Registers To INTR 110 SA, SB, SC, >---+..M.P.L.R.ea.diiDoiiiilo. .O.n.e.B.t.e)_ _ _.... SO Registers MPL Dr;ve Controls MICROPROGRAM DATA FLOW CONTROLS To CE Dota Bus D Bus TO Register Bits CTL-l Controls (TCi;, 7) (TB0-2) CTL-I Register to MA Regin« ts Byte 0 To A Register INTR 115 Dalo From MD, TC, C TG Dola To NA, And Branch Registers Controls CJIllElIEI_--. ST4-lndex Controls to Control Module 1[:=)111.111• • • • INTERFACE CHANNEL N N ~e=lDmmu........ To ST Reg;,ter INTR 140 T CONTROL INTERFACE INTR 120 , Bus Controls From Control Module I I I L _____ J 3830·2 IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER c .. ~~.----~--.~~~~ CONTROL STORAGE, MPL FILE, MPL ATTACHMENT INTR 105 Disk Cartridge Guide WRITE BUS Write Error Bytes 0-2 Bytes 1-3 WRITE BUS WRITE BUS WRITE BUS CHECK BIT GENERATOR PANEL 40 Address Check CTRL 200 Timing Control P 0/2 31 P 1/3 0 Read Bytes 0/2 1/3 PANEL 40 Read File Data DATA DATA SEPARATION Bit AND DETECTION Counter AC SUPPl Y Error Count 182 PANEL 40 MPL 245 MPl BYTE ASSEMBl Y 2 Bit 7 o o ....'!-..-t I'" 7 p Halt IMPl TG 0-3 LA305 TRACK SEC TOR NOT ZERO LA306 IMPl Error M 6 CONTROL STORAGE INTERFACE CONTROL STORAGE INTERFACE CONTROL STORAGE INTERFACE CONTROL STORAGE INTERFACE CONTROL STORAGE INTERFACl: r,Jl...w-..... --.--~"" •• • 3830·2 o I I• INTR 115 IBM CONFI.OENTIAL 447460 1 19 Dec 75 © CoPvright IBM Corporation MPL INTR 270 110 CONTROL STORAGE, MPL FILE, MPL ATTACHMENT UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER INTR 105 1975 o o o o '0'-'. .. · 0·.--' o 00 ,/'~ ~y () r \ .j o o o '····· 0 .J ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( STORAGE CONTROL UNIT CONTROLS STORAGE CONTROL UNIT CONTROLS • , a IMPL Addr Bits 8-13, P Forced Address Bih B-13,P Forced Address Bih 1-7,P/8-13,P 1-< TAR Bits 1-7,P .... Byte a L Bits 1-7 ~ ~:' I r--Forced --.. Address ~ Bits 1-7, P IAR Bits 1-7, P ~* 7 ~ BCBu. Bits 0-5 .... .. .,.;, ""-, I ri; 13 ~ .... Byte .IID~ - a B~h 0~3,P ~ 'gl By'e I Bi'~ 4~;>, ~ ~ ~ 8 : , .... If Bi'. 0-7, P '" lsi Byte 0 Bits D-7,P .... IS P L-- ~ors PANEL 40 Bits I, 2, 5 3'i I~J~'b<6E'S ERROR CONTROLS RL202 DE502 DE103 DE302 DE304 DE201 Format RL105 Byte 3 Bih 0-7,P RL207 Operation RA303 - Special Op DE402 .... " I SAO-7,P Byte I Bits 0-7, P CA CB CD CH Byte 2 8it. D-7,P CL CS l1li.. Bits 1-7" P/ 8-15, P RL302 SB 0-7, P ERROR r-- 0 W PANEL 40 ". W ,', STATUS REGISTER SET CONTROLS D -Bu. 'RC1I ~ ~ .3830-2 ,.... ,nd,t,on,1 15 P " Gate Error 1 Reg To Write Error Stop to Clock BU0600 Seq 1 of 2 Lo Bits O-~ , . " ... CE PANEL PANEL 10 ~ I'~- ~ I~ By'e 2 Bits 0-7,P ..., [J ~ lOR rrJ t RESET CONTROLS Byte 3 Bits 0-7, P >- 0 ,} 0 KK3031 L- RL303 RL403 0 0 Reset from Channel 0 Resets ~ Error Stop to Clock g 1 ~ j'" 000" Conditions 5 '0.« j ___ CLOCK AND CYCLE CONTROLS CTRL 300 KK201 -KK205 KK301-KK302 ,- BUS r PANFl 1 0 . BRANCH CONTROLS DE302. DE304 II ,~~,nO~7~~g 'f "" 0 , 11 '" V '" '" «- Part No. (B) I Byte 1 Bits 0-7, P ~ ~ Byte 2 Bits 0-7. P Byte 3 Bits 0-7, P' "- ,OR ,le1i. 7'1 B- Bu. 0-7,P Assembl, RllIa Bu. Bits 0-7, P I I ~ RS302 RS302 BAR Bits D-7.P/D-7.P Addr Bu. 0-;, P/B-I 5 E, Bits 0-7,P!8-15 ( Inl Comp Addr Reg Biha-7,p!8-1 P Address Reg Di.p B;t. 0-7,P '8-IS,P lOR "- " RL305 RL405 ",,- '" 437402A 437404 437405 15 Mar 72 23 Jun 72 15 Aug 72 Cl Copyri"'t 11M Corpomion 1172, 1173, 1176 - r ~-JV j I \2347193 t CTRL 200 Statu. Reg Bit, 0-7, P ~ 1r KK201 Bits 0-7,P and External Display 0-7, P r - ';~n~~ C~~d~'~ons INTR 140 L- r - C E Address Hi I-- ~"B1" DE201 I,~,,",u.-'.' Check 2 I"~ CTRL CLOCK 300 STOP ~CKTS lOR J SD 0-7,P ..., Byte 0 Bits 0-7 , p I. ,ft' PANEL 40 Bi' I Inl Comp Addr Reg Bih O-IS,P Byte I Bih D-7,P ..., 0 ". Error Reg 8-15, P ~ Late Errors Compare Equal RL407 lOR LJ SC a-7,p a Bih 0-7,P lOR LJ Error Reg 0-7. P 8 Byte J' j '--- 7 P Byte 0 Bits 4-7 INTR . 115 (!!"Isce"an~~us Eorly ; . r-- BAR Bits 0-7,P iI'" RL104 RL205 IiII.. ~ COMPARE " a Storage Address Bus Check SB 0-7,P "--- P RL304 RL404 nBAR Bits 1-7,P I~ : 1r""-- a " ... I.' ~~ 5j Bits 0-2, P By'e I Bit.I-7,P/B-13,P 7 P BACKUP ADDRESS REGISTER 41, .... I-- SA 0-7,P ,,- CTRL 220 I -', Forced Address L- CH ond CL I Branch RL , INTR 110 , , " ADDR COMP a RL200 13 P I.....- ( ( I 437408 16 Oct 72 I 437414 4 Jun 73 I 447460 19 Dec 75 • IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIEO THEREAFTER STORAGE CONTROL UNIT CONTROLS IN TR 110 REGISTERS. ALU DATA FLOW REGISTERS, ALU DATA FLOW • INTR 115 1 ~ I Read Byte O. Bits 0-7, P Read Byte O. B,tS 0-7 P (To Write Bus) B-BUS 01 0>0.. aiD.. &: ,,50 ." CI:_ ..c:~ uo -VI c: .. ci5iii CD CD " Byte O. ... Bits 0-7. P CD "0 '" I ••.IB 0> a: } Byte 1. ~Bits 0-7. P .; Byte 2. ... Bits 0-7. P 1 ~ ..,.. .. ~ Byte 3. .... Bits 0-7. P PANEL 40 Bit 6 r--- I- SA I- ~ ..... r- .... Byte I, Iilll..Blts 0-7 P . ~ I- ~~ ,......... l- .. !-• ... , ~ r-- ST jill I- .. GA L....- ~ ..-- ~ . BR I- • NA ,.....-- ,.. By'" 3. .....Blts ()-LI' iii ... . ........ J .... • • TB ~ - -• MA .. l1li • . I- ~ ~ r I- * . • III •• -' TC - ~ ,.....-- - MC ~ -.. l: U * • -.. b' RA201 RA301 ME PANEL 40 BIt 4 '--- ! S.. " RA30~ ARITH LOGIC UNIT (ALUI tOt ga1lo9 of MPL and CE data onto D-Bus. d RG601 .. • po--- MF * - '--- ~ RG602 III!.. III!.. lam • PANEL 40 Bit 5 PANEL 40 B,,6 B-R~ISTER, I) J J A-~ER '--- RG603 TF r-- III I- lID "- R"G5cii MO LV INTR RA303 r---- TE III- r-- ICarry Out Lat~ ~llltoALU - - I- RG4Oi' INTH 110 lREG TO R"G3oi -0 INTR 110 \,. ~ ~ PANEL 40 B,t 6 NF ~ RG503 , D-Bus Elfu,,1 Zero .--- I--- ~ • PANE;l40 13,,6 '--- NE ~ * NO ~ .--GF ~ RG604 -.. iG403 III!.. Il J NC ~ III!.. l ,.. r-- \... ,.....-- MB GE ~ RG504 RG404 iG3O: R"GToi - III!.. • -.. ffii'Oi ~I-~ ,.. TA r---- I--- RG'304 NB " .- - T TG R~ RS io- ~ .. GO I- ~ \... A . . SC· GC tG203l- :GT1i3 r-- ~ RG204 INTR Bvte 2, IIt.futs 0 -J. P GB R~ ~ r-- ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ R"sToi ~ J ~ .~ 10- REG RAi"Oi RA201 RA301 I li RA203 RA301 Sequentially gated . to SA. SB. SC. SD I ... Bus Out and "C::PIPr •..n 14 ~ '- • Two Channel Switch. Additional. on Iv. B To/From Channel Controls INTR 140 ~ ~ S C ---~ 1 TO/From CTL-I INTR 120 IBM CONFIDENTIAL 3830-2 REGISTERS. ALU DATA FLOW UNTIL MARCH 26. 1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER INTR 115 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1975 o C) 00 o () o o (.). '-, (). ",-. o C) o o o o ~~~~---~----- ( ~ (/ ( (-- (- ( ( (- (- (- (- ("'\ (". (---~. (~ j CONTROL INTERFACE (CTL-I) CONTROL INTERFACE (CTl-1l INTR 120 Refer to CTL-I section for details To/From INTR 115 g Cl Z ..J W "tl t:: w IX! I- - ... iii ., c:'" IX! I- <>- ". • M • N o Z co o ..J I o Co 1Il~ gc c: Z ______________~ ~ I- u iii Cl IX! ~ o o Co ~ r---....,W o - "0 J: ..," I Qj III 0" . .J ~ , tJ iii Cl 8 o ..t: ...., ~. .J tJ ., ~ 8. :G c: :3 ~c (; Ji 8 E .g .,x ~ ~ ...c 8 'E ., > l .. c ::!: ::l IX! l!l Controller J B ~ ~ " ~ \. ~ ~ ; " -=CoN.:.:.NT~R.:.;:O:.:l:..:.I.:.:.NT.:.:E:.:.R:.:..F:.:.AC::.:E~(c:::.CT.:.:l::..:.I.!..)...::C~O:!.!N..!.;TR:.!.:O:::.!:l:.!I.!.!NT.!..!E::.!.R!!.F~A~CE::...!!::(C:.!.T::l-!.!..1)....;C~O~N!.!.T.!:.!.RO~l I NTE R FACE (CTl-1) ~e r-- :; ~ ~~ ~~ al- -2 GJ ~L' ~ \ i ,,! CONTROL I NTE RFACE (CTl-1) CQNTROl INTE R FACE (C.Ih:1) Set Buffer f CONTROL I NTE RFACE~ (CT·;-;;-IL-Ill)-:C~ON-:-;;:::TRI-:::-:-IOL:7111N;-:;:T-:;:"E_IR~:IF~ AC:;:"E" ((IC:::;-T=-:-·l";-;-III)-:= CON=T-IR:"::-:-OL-:-:IN~TE:= IRI=IF:,A-=-=-=CE:-7'C=TL_-:-II:--: IIC'-:::-:-:'ONT= RIIO::-:-:"LI-:-= NTE:--:IR--: IF--:-ACE-(,.-(IC-T-Il.• -'I:)..... To/From Control Module/ Devices 3830-2 CONTROL INTERFACE (CTl-1l INTR 120 c CHANNEL INTERFACE ~CHL-I) CHANNEL INTERFACE (CHL-II I NT R 140 In and Enabled A Buffer Controls Channel Transfer Buffers Buffer Parity Chk Check 2 { Interface Chk Transfer Chk Multi Connect !.. I In and Enabled Buffer Controls Bit 0 • Chan Write In and Enabled C In and Enabled In and Enabled D See CHL·I 165 CHL·I 360 CHL·I 380 A 50 Channel Transfer Control B ~-----t Bus Out Parity Ch A Bus Out Parity Error Tag In Controls Ch B Bus Out Parity Error Ch C Bus Out Parity Error Ch D Bus Out Parity Error Seltd Service Out KA10l-l08 KB10l-l0B KC10l-l08 KD10l-l0B GK701-003 KA103 KB103 KC103 KD103 BFRDY/CUEND (CL 14) See CHL-I 140. CHL-I 145 See CHL·I 155 GK601-605 NE201-203 Two Channel Switch. Additional, Controls GK501-507 NE103 Two Channel Switch Additional Control See CHL·I 475 Two Channel Switch. Additional, Control From TB. TC. TE, TG Registers ..1. Cl From Special Operation Decodes INTR 110 To Branch Controls INTR 110 3830·2 CHANNEL INTERFACE (CHL-II o o o o () o o oo o o o 10 o 10' ',"; C) o INTR 140 00 o o o c f ( (.~- ( -------------- - - - - - - - - - - - -- --.---.-~"- -, ( ('\ ( (- ( (--' ( PREFACE TO CMD SECTION The CMD section describes operations that are controlled by the functional microcode. Although the diagrams combine information pertaining to the 3330 attachment, 3340 attachment, 3340/3340·B2 attachment, 3330/3340 Intermix, and 3330/3340/3350 Intermix, only orw of these features and its related microcode will be supplied on the SCU. The diagrams also combine versions of the microcode pertaining to the various special features available for the SCU and device strings. These features. which mayor may not be installed. include the following: (~ ( (- -----~ (~~ (- ( (~/ (" (~ (- (' (- f' ('--- f ( (- (-' -, CMD Command Summary Control Commands Sense Commands Read Commands Write Commands Search Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CMD 2 Control Commands-Descriptions CMD 5 Device Control Operation. CMD10 Two Channel Switch Two Chanflel Switch. Additional 32 Drive Expansion (provision for four device strings per CU path) String Switch (provision for two SCUs per device string; always included in 3340 SCU microcode) Control Commands-Objectives CMD15 Control Commands-Flowcharts. CMD 20 3830-2/Controllnterface Operation CMD35 Refer to MIC section for microblock and instruction format information. Search Commands-Descriptions CMD 50 Search Commands -Objectives-Flowcharts. CMD55 Write Commands-Descriptions CMD 70 Write Operation . . CMD 75 Write Commands-Objectives· CMD 71 Write Commands-Flowcharts CMD80 Write Data Transfer· CMD90 . . . . . . . Read Commands-Descriptions CMD 100 Read Operation . . CMD 105 Read Commands-Objectives . CMD 107 Read Commands-Flowcharts CMD 110 Read Data Transfer' CMD 130 . . . Command Decode CMD 183 Ending Sequence. CMD 190 Disconnected Command Chaining CMD 200 Command Retry (3330 and 3350) Seek Malfunctions Data or Command Overrun Defective or Alternate Track Data Error Correctable Data Error Not in Data Fields Uncorrectable Data Errors Correctable Data Errors in Data Field CMD 210 . CMD 220 Defect Skipping Examples (3340, 3340-82, and 3350) CMD 230 Resets . . . _ . Power·On Push Button (Manual) Selective System CMD 250 Command Retry Reorientation-CKD. Rotational Position Sensing . Read Sector Set Sector Read/Set Sector Operation Disk layout Track Layout . . . . . . . . . . . CMD 300 CMD 305 _ . . . . . . . . . . . . CMD 400 . . . . CMD 430 . Sense Commands-Objectives' . Sense Commands-Flowcharts . CMD 142 Multiple Track (MIT) Operation, End of File, Orientation. Transfer Inline Diagnostics to Control Unit CMD 165 Read Diagnostic to System . . CMD 165 Polling Idle Loop and Initial Selection. CMD 170 Status Information Status Modifier Control Unit End Busy Channel End Device End Unit Check Unit Exception' Initial Status Byte • • • • . • • • • • • • • • • • • • Pending Status Conditions :Jtatus Pending in the Control Unit Address Associated with Pending Status Status Pending in the Device Priority of Pending Status Conditions CMD 180 . . . CMD 140 . . . . . Sense Commands-Descriptions . . . . . Overflow Record. Formatting Processing . . . . . CMD 145 CMD 181 3830-2 PREFACE TO CMD SECTIOIII, CONTENTS ()Copyrlghl IBM Corpo..lion 1872, 1873,1874, 1875, 1878 (~ CMD1 PREFACE TO CMD SECTION. CONTENTS CONTENTS ( CMD1 ( COMMANpSUMMARY COMMANO SUMMARY CMD2 The charts and flowcharts in this section summarize the Storage Control Unit (SCU) commands used by the facility. They describe what the commands do and how they are controlled by the SCU. CONTROL COMMANDS Control commands are used to start operations not involving data recorded (or to be recorded) on the pack. These operations include positioning the access mechanism and selecting the head. I": For most control functions, the entire operation is specified by the command code. If the command code does not specify the entire control function, the data address field of the CCW designates a main storage location contain'ing the additional information. Command Summary Hex Code Multi· Track Command Objective Command Flowchart No Operation Seek Seek Cylinder' Seek Head Space Count Recal ibrate Restore Set File Mask Set Sector Diagnostic Load Diagnostic Write 03 07 OB lB OF 13 CMD 16 CMD 15 CMD 15 CMD15 CMD16 CMD 15 CMD 16 CMD 15 CMD 15 CMD 16 CMD16 CMD25 CMD20 CMD 20 CMD 20 CMD 30 CMD20 CMD25 CMD20 CMD25 CMD 25 CMD30 Test 110 Sense I/O Read and Reset Buffered Log Read Diagnostic Status 1 Device Release Device Reserve Sense I/O Type" Unconditional Reserve"· 00 04 A4 44 94 B4 - r.MD 142 CMD CMD CMD CMD CMD CMD Read Data Read Key, Data Read Count, Key, Data Read RO Read Count Read Home Address Read IPL Read Sector Read Multiple Count Key Data" 06 OE lE 16 12 lA 02 22 5E Write Write Write Write Write Write Erase 05 00 10 01 15 19 11 Type Command Name Control SENSE COMMANDS Two sense commands .. Sense 1/0, and Read and Reset Buffered Log .. transfer sense bytes of usagelerror log information from the facility to the using system. Sense 1/0 Type transfers device type information to the using system. Test 1/0, which is a programmed instruction and not a channel command word (CCWI,causes the status byte to be sent to the channel in the initial selection sequence. Sense • READ COMMANDS Read commands transfer information from the subsystem to main' storage of the using system. On all Read commands, the device checks (by means of correction code bytes) the validity of each area of a record as the record is read from a track. A parity bit is added to each byte as it is sent to the channel. All Read commands can operate on overflow records and, except for Read IPL, Read Sector and Read Multiple Count Key Data (CKD), can operate in multitrack mode. Read Write WRITE COMMANDS Write commands transfer data from main storage to the device for recording on the disk pack. While writing data on the disk pack, the device appends the appropriate correction code bytes to each count, key, and data field as they are written. Write commands can be grouped into: (1) format Write commands, used to establish records, and (2) nonformat Write commands, used to update previously written records. Search Page Single Track 17 lF 23 53 73 Data Key, Data Count, Key, Data Spec Count, Key, Data RO Home Address Search Search Search Search Search Search Search Home Address Equal 10 High 10 High, Equal 10 Equal Key High Key High, Equal Key ~: 39 31 51 71 29 49 69 86 8E 9E 96 92 9A CMD 107 - - ---' - CMD77 - B9 Bl 01 Fl A9 Command Example CMD 35 . g~g ~:~ CMD5 - 145 150 150 150 145 150 CMD 120 CMD 120 CMD 120 CMD 110 CMD 110 CMD 110 CMD 125 CMD 125 CMD 125 CMD 125 CMD85 CMD85 CMD85 CMD85 CMD80 CMD80 CMD85 -- Command Oescription CMD 140 - - - CMD 130 CMD 100 CMD90 CM070 CMD55 - CM055 CMD50 - C9 E9 SEARCH COMMANDS Search commands transfer a specific number of bytes from main storage to the SCU. The SCU compares these bytes with data read from a track record. When the condition specified in the search command is satisfied, the status modifier bit is set. The status bytes hold the condition of the status modifier bit until that bit is rt"set. • Supported only in 3330/3340/3350 intermix and 3340/3344 microcode loads. • "Supported only in 3330/3340/3350 intermix microcode loads. 3830·2 COMMAND SUMMARY t>CopyrighllBM Corpor.lion 1972, 11173. 1974, 1975, 111711 () ;Fl 0 0 'J 0 \~ (1l ] (1, "" ..Y If~ '0 0 10 v...J 0 0 0 0 \.Y 0 ~, 'V ~ /'~ 'r ''i...JI 0 .c 0 IJ n V 0 0 0 0 t'). ~, ,0 ~y CMD2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ~ . ('- () (~\ (-' -( ( CONTROL COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS CONTROL COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS CMD5 ERROR CONDITIONS COMMAND Dn.,\IL DESCRIPTION FUNCTION CODE DATA TRANSFERRED ACROSS CHANNEL ERROR TYPE COMMAND EXECUTED SENSE BIT SET PRESENTED DURING ENDING STATUS PRESENTED DURING INITIAL STATUS Six address bytes Seek 07 1. Move the access to the cylinder specified by the seek address. 2. Select the head specified by the seek address. CMD 20 Seek Cylinder OB Seek Head 1B Select the head specified by the seek address No Operation 03 No action. Channel End and Device End during initial status. Recalibrate 13 Move the access to cyli nder zero and select head zero Restore 17 No action. Zero initial status IS followed by final status of Channel End and Device End. CMD 25 Set File Mask 1F Set file mask to indicate permitted Write and Seek commands CMD 20 Space Count OF ~re presented When chained from a Read, Search, Write, or Space Count command this command locates the start of the next count field (including RO), spaces over the count field, and ends with Channel End and Device End in the gap before the Key field. 23 Used on disconnected command chaining channels to eliminate the need for the channel to maintain connection with the control unit while waiting for the selected record to reach the head, Diagnostic Load 53 Diagnostic Write 73 Fewer than six address bytes transferred. Command Reject. Address validity. Bus Out Parity. CMD 20 One byte of file mask data More than one Set File Mask command issued in a chain of CCWs No Command Reject Index point occurs before an address marker is read, CMD 30 Three bytes used as key length (one byte) and data length (two bytes) for the next command Angular position specified is greater than 127 (3330 and 3350 series drives) or 63 (3340 series drives) and less than 255 Transfer the specified 512-byte block from the 23FD to the control storage buffer CMD 25 One byte of control information addresses one sector on the 23F D Invalid 23F D address Transfer an inline test from main storage to the CU and executes the test CMD 30 A maximum of 512 bytes of inline diagnostic microprogram Fewer than 400 bytes Invalid Track Format. Unit Check. Channel End. Device End, Command Reject Unit Check. Channel End. Device End. No Command Reject Unit Check. Channel End. Device End. No Command Reject No - IBM CONFIDENTIAL Unit Check No Record Found. Index pc-int sensed while spacing a cou nt area. CMD 25 Copyright IBM Corporation 1912, 1913,1915 Unit Check. Channel End. Device End. None UNTIL MARCH 26. 1976, UNCLASSIFIEP THEREAFTER © Command Reject. Bus out parity. One byte specifies angular track position (0-127 for 3330 and 3350 series drives, or 0-63 for 3340 series drives) 3830-2 No CMD 25 When not chained, Space Count searches for index, spaces over gap 1, home address, gap 2, and RO count. End operation in gap following RO count with Channel End and Device End. Set Sector (Feature on 3340 series drives) Six address bytes. For 3330 and 3350 series drives, only the five low·order bits of the sixth byte al'e used for the seek address. For 3340 series drives, only the four low-order bits of the sixth byte are used. Unit Check. Channel End. Device End. CONTROL COMMANDS-DESCRtPTlONS CMD5 DEVICE CONTROL OPERATION DEVICE CONTROL OPERATION • Moves the heads to a location selected by the using system. STORAGE CONTROL UNIT II • • II CHANNEL SYSTEM Start 1/0 • Executes instruction. which addresses a channal command word (CCW) containing Seek command. Executes CCW to transfer • the Seek command to the • CONTROL CIRCUITS Decode the Seek command and control the transfer of seek address information to the CU. • Check status of the module and transfer status to the channel. storage control unit (SCU). • Control timing of the transfer of data between the channel and CU. Transfers the seek address data to the control unit. • Check parity of data transferred to the CU. Disconnects from control • unit until CU signals • Transfer control and address information to the module. • Select the addressed module. • Set up conditions to check for Device End from the module. • Perform intermediate operations until device status is received. • Transfer status to the channel when module arrives at the selected track and signal Device End. device end status. CHANNEl Device Status Inform· ation a m . . DEVICE all INTERFACE HEAD POSITIONING . . CONTROLS AND ADDRESSING SERVO . . DISK • • Control direction and amount of movement of the access mechanism (if required). • • Signal Device End to the CU when new location is reached. Transfers control. address • and status information. ':::' .,::' Seek Control Inform· ation CHANNEL CONTROLS DEVICE INTERFACE CONTROL CIRCUITS CHL·I CTRL DEV·I Seek Micro· program Provides signal for each track passed from the servo disk. • Maintain head position over the selected track. Seek Control Inform· ation SYSTEM DEVICE CONTROL MODULE • Calculate difference between present head location and the new address from the system. CHANNEL CONTROLS CMD 10 Device Status Inform· ation Mechanical Motion HEAD POSITIONING CONTROLS HEAD ACCESS MECHANISM DRV DRV Track DISK Log Data CONTROL STORAGE CTRL 600 II • III Provides mechanical movement of the head assembly. CONTROL INTERFACE • Tranfers control. address. and status information. • Selects control module and device. IBM CONFIDENTIAL 3830·2 HEAD ACCESS MECHANISM UNTIL MARCH 26.1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER DEVICE CONTROL OPERATION CMD 10 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1973,1975 () ('\ \ ;J ~ () o o o o C) o o o o O .. i c ~ 1'(. . . L (- .. CONTROL COMMANDS - (~ ( (~ (.: ( - ~ - (~ ~-.--~- (~ .. --- ( (~ ( (- ( ( {y (" (~~ ('~ OBJECTIVES (Part 1 of 2) SEEK (07) SEEK CYLINDER (OB) SEEK HEAD (lB) (:" ( ",. CONTROL COMMANDS ~ OBJECTIVES (Part I of 2)· eM D 15 RECALIBRATE (13) SET FILE MASK (IF) SET SECTOR (23) Refer to CMD 10 for subsystem components used. Refer to CMD 20 for flowcharts and CAS references. Refer to CMD 10 for subsystem components used. Refer to CMD 20 for flowcharts and CAS references. Refer to CMD 10 for subsystem components used. Refer to CMD 20 for flowcharts and CAS references. • Check for valid command. • Check for valid command. • Check for valid command. Refer to CMD 10 for subsystem components used. Refer to CMD 25 for flowcharts and CAS references. Refer to CMD 300 and 305 for descriptions of rotational position sensing. • No requirement for preceding CCWs. • No requirement for preceding CCWs. • No requirement for preceding CCWs. • Check for Set File Mask limitations. (See CMD 20.) • • Check for Set File Mask limitations. (See CMD 20.) • • If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in status. Set command reject in sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL 650.) If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in status. Set command reject in sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL 650.) Check for previous SFM in the same chain of commands. • • If no errors occur, return zero status to the channel. If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in status. Set Command Reject in sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL 650.) • If no errors occur, return zero status to the channel. • • If no errors occur, return zero status to the channel. • Transfer six-byte address from the channel. Send control data across CTL-I to cause the selected controller/device to return the access to cylinder 0 and select head O. • Transfer one byte of data from channel to the control unit. (See CMD 20 and CTRL 650.) • Check for transfer errors (Check 2). 1. If CCW > six, transfer only six bytes. 2. If CCW < six, do not execute command; present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending status. Set Command Reject in sense data. 1. If CTL-I or controller errors (Check 2) are detected, present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending status. Set Equipment Check in sense data. 3. If a Bus Out Parity Error is detected, present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending status. Set Bus Out Parity in sense data. 2. Start access motion and present only Channel End in status to the channel. • Check address for Validity. If invalid, present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending status. Set Command Reject in sense data. • Check device status and position. 1. If not at requested address, control transfer of seek address information to the selected controller/device. 2. If at requested address, present Channel End and Device End in ending status. 3. If CTL-I or controller errors (check 2) are detected, present Unit Check, Channel End, and device end in ending status. Set Equipment Check in sense data. 4. Start access motion and present only Channel End in status to the channel. Channel can disconnect while wailing for Seek operation to complete. Note: 5. Receive Seek Complete indication from controller/ device and present Device End to the channel. 6. If Seek Incomplete and/or Check 2 occurs: 3330 and 3350: Do not present Device End to the channel; go into retry mode. (See CMD 210 and Note 1.) 3340: Present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending status. Set Equipment Check in sense data. Channel can disconnect while waiting for Seek operation to complete. Note: 3. Receive Seek Complete indication from controller/ device and present Device End to the channel. 4. If no Seek Complete occurs or Seek is to an address other than cylinder 0, head 0: 3330 and 3350: Do not present Device End to the channel; go into retry mode. (See CMD 210 and Note I.) 3340: Present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending status. Set Equipment Check in sense data. Note 1: Correct access position is verified on the next Read or Search command to this deYice. If the access position is incorrect, the control unit suspends the Read or Search command and starts a retry (CMD 210). The control unit performs a Seek to the last seek address for this deyice. When Seek Complete is received from the deYice, the control unit continues with the original Read or Search command. This sequence repeats until the correct position is achieved or a retry count of 10;s reached. If retry is unsuccessful, Unit Check, Channel End, and Deyice End are presented "·to the channel. Seek E"or, with permanent bit on, is set in the sense data. 1. If a Bus Out Parity Error is detected, present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending status. Set Bus Out Parity in sense data. • Check for valid command. • No requirement for preceding CCWs. • If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in status. (See SENSE I and CTRL 650.) • If no errors occur, return zero status to the channel. • Transfer the relative angular track position byte from the channel to the control unit. If a Bus Out Parity Error is detected, present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending status. Set Bus Out Parity in sense data. • Check byte for validity: If more than t 27 and less than 255 on 3330 and 3350 (or more than 63 and less than 255 on 3340), present Unit check, Channel End, and Device End in ending status. Set command reject in sense data. If the RPS feature is not installed on the 3340, present Channel End and Device End in ending status. A No Operation command is performed, and track orientation is lost. • If byte is 255, present Channel End and Device End to the channel. Track orientation (see CMD 430) is reset. • Present Channel End to the channel. The channel should indicate chaining and disconnect. • If byte is zero, transfer control information to the controller/device to cause reselection of the channel (by request in line) before index point. • If byte is 1 to 127 for 3330 (63 for 3340), adjust the sector number to compensate for channel reconnection delay. Also, transfer control information to the controller/device to cause reselection before the requested sector. • If reselection is not accepted by the channel; Request In is dropped and is raised again on the next revolution. • If Check 2 is indicated in CTL-I or controller/device, present Unit Check and Device End in ending status. Set Equipment Check in sense data. • If operation is completed correctly, present Device End in ending status. 2. If no error occurs, present Channel End and Device End in ending status. • Use file mask byte data to control later Write and Seek commands. (See CMD 20.) 3830-2 CONTROL COMMANDS - OBJECTIVES (Part 1 of 2) C> CallYritllt 11M Cotpor8tion 1973. 1974. 1975. 1976 eM D 15 CONTROL COMMANDS - CONTROL COMMANDS - OBJECTIVES (Part 2 of 2) OBJECTIVES (Part 2 of 2) eM D 16 RESTORE (17) DIAGNOSTIC LOAD (53) DIAGNOSTIC WRITE (73) SPACE COUNT (OF) Refer to CMD 10 for subsystem components used. Refer to CMD 25 for flowcharts and CAS references. Refer'to CMD 10 for subsystem components used. Refer to CMD 25 for flowcharts and CAS references. Refer to CMD 165 for description of the use of this command. Refer to CMD 10 for subsystem components used. Refer to CMD 25 for flowcharts and CAS references. Refer to CMD 160 for description of the use of this command. Refer to CMD 10 for subsystem components used. Refer to CMD 25 for flowcharts and CAS references. • Check for valid command. • Check for valid command. • No requirement for preceding CCWs. • • If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in status. Set Command Reject in sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL 650.) Check SFM (see CMD 20) 'to see if command is allowed. • If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in status. Set Command Reject or File Protected in sense data (see SENSE 1 and CTRL 650). • • • • Check for valid command. No requirement for preceding CCWs. If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in status. Set Command Reject in sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL 650.) If no errors occur, return zero status to the channel. • If no errors occur, return zero status to the channel. • A No Op is performed. • • Present Channel End and Device End in ending status. Transfer one byte of control data from the channel to the control unit. This byte identifies the 23FD track address and sector for the selected diagnostic test. If a Bus Out Parity Error is detected, present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending status. Set Bus Out Parity in sense data. NO OPERATION (03) Refer to CMD 10 for subsystem components used. Refer to CMD 25 for flowcharts and CAS references. Control reading of selected test to buffer area of control storage. (See CTRL 650.) If MPL errors occur (see MPL 290 and 295), present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending status. Set Equipment Check in sense data. 3. If a Bus Out Parity Error is detected, present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending status. Set Bus Out Parity in sense data. • If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in status. Set Command Reject in sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL 650.) • If errors occur, present Channel End and Device End in initial status. • May cause records or parts of records to be skipped. If transfer is correct, present Channel End and Device End in ending status. • Initiate the diagnostic test. • Store 16-byte error code in control storage. (See CTRL650.) • Present Channel End and Device End in ending status. Check for valid command. • Present Unit check, Channel End, and Device End in initial status (see SENSE 1 and CTRL 650) under any of the following conditions: 1. Command is chained from any format Write or Erase command. 2. Command is chained to any format Write, Erase, or Set File Mask command. 3. Index is detected before end of the Space Count operation. 1. If CCW count> 512, transfer only 512 bytes. • No requirement for preceding CCWs. • Transfer a diagnostic test from the system storage to the control unit control storage buffer area. (See CTRL650.) 2. If CCW count < 512, transfer count specified but do not execute command; present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending status. Set Command Reject in sense data. • Reset track orientation. (See CMD 430.) • Control movement of 23FD head to the selected track. Check for valid command. • If no errors occur, return zero status to the channel. • • • • • • If no errors occur, return zero initial status to the channel. • Space Count command sequence v'aries depending on preceding conditions: If not chained from a Read, Search, Write, or Space Count command; a. Wait for index point. b. Clock over G I, home address field, and G2. 1. 2. If chained from a Read, Search, Write, or Space Count command, locate next count field (including RO count). 3. Space over count field located and receive three bytes of data (key length, and two bytes of data length) from the channel. If channel sends fewer than three bytes, use zeros for remaining bytes. Note: 4. Set end of count field orientation in control storage. (See CMD 430.) • If check 2 errors occur (from channel interface, CTLI, or controller/device), present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending status. Set Equipment Check in sense data. • If no errors occur, present Channel End and Device End in ending status. 3830·2 CONTROL COMMANDS - OBJECTIVES (Part 2 of 2) eM D 16 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1973, 1974, 1975, 1976 ,,~ 'J 0 0 v 0 " ' -.---------- () 0 () 0 C} 0 " 0V f} "'- 0 0 0 0 () 0 " 'I , ' '" (\\ 0 I) \t_' 17', \...y If"''~ \fJ,,~JI ? \:, 'J () - !(-\ (J (j "j -U"-r') . 'tf"J-O-O \;)" "C ... , " ,:, '-.--' ~' ' "-- ',:' " ,': ('" F L ('" ("': (' (': (' (" (~ (C' c c (' CMD 20 CONTROL COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Parts 1 of 31 CONTROL COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 1 of 3) Refer to CMD 15, 16 for command objectives. Refer to CMD 10 for command operation diagram. CMD 183 l:MU HIJ r-__~""''''''''''i16C FETCH CURRENT LOGICAL CYLINDER ADDRESS AND USE IT ANO THE NE. HEAD YES ADDRESS TO FORM NEW SEEK ADDRESS COIlPUTE D II'I'ERENCE BETWEEN OLD AND NE. CYLINDER ADDRESS 2-QS060 - YES 1,3,4-QP050 1,3,4-QP070 3,4-QP075 0 090 IN 't >=3;.:3;.:3.:.0_ _ _ _ _- . 1 ,3, 4-QPO 1 0 1,3,4-QP02D 1,3,4-QPIOO 1,3,4-QPoeo - - 010,...._ _ _ _.....___.........., STOP PLO FAST LOCK IN IF RESET R/. II' NECESSARY NECESSARY RESET READ/IIRITE CONVERT SEEK ADORES S I'ROM LOG I CAL TO PHYS I CAL ADDRESS I'OR THE DEVICE. THIS DEPENDS ON DEY I CE TYPE I IIOOE LOGICAL DEv ICE ADDR ~hEg~T~T~E - t - 015 FETCH CURRENT ACCESS POSITION AND ZERO SEEK ADDRESS IN CONTROL STORAGE CM[) 190 OTS CTRL 650 SEND REZERO TO IIODULE 010 RESET SEEK RETRY COUNT II' APPLICABLE I'ETCH CURRENT ACCESS PDSITION AND ZERO SEEK ADDRESS IN CONTROL STORAGE YES CONVERT LOG I CAL HEAD AND CYLINDER 2,4·QP212 2,5·QP215 5·OP313 ADDRESS TO APPROPRIATE PHYS I CAL I'IIED HEAD AND SET UP HAR r-__..&.I......o&oIJ5 -QP030 Data Address 78 Flags 000 5·QP218 (0000000000000001 ) 2.5-QPIOO - 4-OP3,8 REQUEST STATUS 0 SEND REZERO TO THE IIDDULE Specifies CPU Storage Location of the Mask Byte. 2.5-QPI30 SET CHA_L END AND OEV I CE END STATUS >=____.;..1:.;,2;;,3,4.5-QP205 1,3.4-CIF'I60 o 1,2,3,4·QP212 1,2,3-QP216 1, S-OP313 SET AND READ BACK ICHECK CAR) RESET INTERRUPT Decimal Hexadecimal 31 1F ~--~---.,tml~ 4·QP318 RAISE STATUS I NTO CHANNEL Binary ;:;,.;::::::::.;::=- For the SCU, bits 2, and 6 SET CHA_L END, DEY I CE END STATUS .A I T I'OR REZERD TO COMPLETE I-.,.....,...-r-r"';.....,r-r-I SET CHA_L END STATUS L....L....L.,;;".L...........&.....JL,.;,.L..I 4-QP020 ClIO 190 GO TO SEEK RETUIIN Not Program control interrupt (Pell from CCW PCI Mode, Used on Command Retry Operation Set File Mask Command Code CHECK VALIDITY 01' SEEK ADDRESS SET AND READ BACK I CHECK HAR AND D II'I'ERENCE COUNTERS) Count 63 36 31 32 RESET INTERRUPT ~--~---.,~g;m SET UP I'OR EXPECTED DEV I CE END INTERRUPT Set File Mask o \ SET UP ARGUMENTS TD SEEK TO THE LOG I CAL CYL INOER 0 I'OR THE LOG I CAL EMULATED OEV I CE SELECTED of the mask must be zero, If these bits are not zero, the mask is considered to be invalid and a unit check signal is gen, erated A subsequent Sense command indicates Co mmand Reject. •••••• B5 NOTES .1 I. TH I S I'LOWCHART I S USED TH THE MULTIPLE IIICROCODE VERSIONS. THE I'OLLOWING DIGITS ARE USED TD I DENT II'Y THE III CROCODE AND CORRESPOND I NG CAS PAGE REl'ERENCES I : ~Ug 8It~ : ~l~ IU:m· ~~:m~' 2348m ~ : ~Ugm:gd~W'Y~~Eiill~~A _2~1~8tfhm899T S - 3340/3344 - PIN 4168116 ~ 3830-2 REGISTER OSCILLATOR 4. I'OR A GIVEN BLOCK IN THE DIAGRAII, THE ACTUAL PAGE . . - R MAY DEPEND ON THE DEV I CE TYPE SELECTED. BO Bl Permit Write Commands 0 0 All except Write Home Address and Write Record RO 0 1 1 1 0 None Write Data or Writa Key .. Data t- Ali B3 B4 Permit Seek Commands 0 0 All 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 Seek Cylinder or Seek Head Seek Head Nona 'also no head switching 1 Inhibit Diagnostic Write command and 3340/3350 seeks to CE track Permit Diagnostic Write command and 3340/3350 seeks to CE tracks· only 447461 12 Mar 76 CONTROL COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Parts 1 of 3) CMD 20 CONTROL COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 2 of 3) CONTROL COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 2 of 3) CMD25 CMD 183 CMD 183 CMD 183 CMD 183 r-_ _...I.l",",_~5-QP030 RECEIVE ANGULAR TRACK POSITION BYTE FROM ------------CHANNEL r-__~u-~~~'5-QW200 C4 I-QP050 2,5-QP090 REGISTER INITI ALI ZAT ION FOR UNTI MED END 4-QR030 , ,2,3,4,S·as06O 1_.2.,.3.4.~= r---------------------~I,2,~:~:~:g~l~g r-____.........__ 1,2,3,4,~:g~gtg CHL-I 380 PRESENT CHANNEL END AND DEV I CE END TO THE CHANNEL SET CHANNEL AND DEVICE END IN STATUS BYTE. GO TO END PROCEDURE. RECEIVE CONTROL BYTE FROM CHANNEL r-____~~~~~:5-QS090 PRESENT CHANNEL AND DEVICE END TO CHANNEL r-__~~~~~'5-QW220 MOVE 23FD ACCESS TO THE SELECTED TRACK MPL 245 2,5-QP090 1.2.3.4.5-QW200 l:~:::g~~~g r-----., 4-QP410 AD~UST VALUE AND SEND SECTOR NUl&:R TO MODULE AND READ BACK TO CHECK U!lO EMULATION MODES CND 190 1.2,3,4,5:g~gtg ::g::ng I ,3, 1,3,4-QP110 090 r-__.....u-. . . .~,5-QW220 2,5-QS030 4-QP120 4-QP390 REJECT COMMAND. SET ~T ~~C~tv~~:~ IN ~TATUS BYTE. GO TO END PROCEDURE DELAY. 1,2,3,.,5-QS060 r-_ _~u-~~~5-QS080 NOTES PRESENT CHANNEL AND DEVICE END TO CHANNEL I. THIS FLOWCHART IS USED WITH MULTIPLE MICROCODE VERSIONS. THE FOLLOWING DIGITS ARE USED TO IDENTIFY THE THE MICROCODE AND CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE REFERENCES. MULTlPL Y SECTOR VAlue BY 2/3. ADJUST VAlue FOR CHANNEL RECONNECTION CONVERT SECTOR VALUE RECEIVED FROM CHANNEL TO ONE OF 128 PHYSICAL SECTORS DEPENDING ON LOGICAL HEAD ADDRESS. AD~UST VALUE FOR CHANNEL RESELECTION DELAY YES r-____ 4·OP315 4·QP3IS 1.2,3,4·QP212 1.2.3·QP215 5-OP2IS ...;I,.5-OP313 I - 3330 ONLY - PIN 2348805, 2348186, 2348181 2 - 3340 ONLY - PIN 2348151, 2348996 ~ : ~~~g:~~:g/~~~aR~~~ERM~'N-2~1~8~~68~148991 5 - 3340/3344 - PIN 4168816 2,5-QP130 1,3,4-QP160 ~~~~~5-QP205 SET UP FDR EXPECTED INTERRUPTS CMD 190 2. FOR A GIVEN BLOCK IN THE DIAGRAM, THE ACTUAL PAGE NUMBER MAY OEPENO ON THE DEVICE TYPE SELECTED. RESET INTERRUPT r-____.........___ SEND SECTOR NUMBER TO MODULE AND READ BACK TO CHECK READ 512 BYTES FROM SELECTED SECTOR TO THE CONTROL STORAGE ABBREVIATIONS r-______ RPS = ROTATIONAL POSITION SENSING .. ~~ ~5-QPI60 SET UP CHANNEL AND DEVICE END _----.....J.oI.ooj......I.o.:I..,5-QP 16Q1,.___.....,I""""_ _... SET UP CHANNEL END I. 1,2,3,4,5-QS060 r-_____~~. .~5-QS090 RAISE STATUS IN TO CHANNEL 3340 VALUES AREI IN PARENTHESIS ------------------CND 190 3830-2 CONTROL COMMANDS-FLOWCHART& (Part 2 of 3) CMD25 C> Copyright 11M Corporetion 1812, 1173, 1974, 19711, 18,. 00 10 ,y ,0"", o o "~ . I "-.J' o o o o 00 \ './r: 0 · '- o o o o {) 00 o \~) (- ( CONTROL COMMANDS~FLOWCHARTS (Part 3 of 3) CONTROL COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 3 of 3) NO CMD 30 YES 1,3,4-QFOIO 1,3,4-QF02O 1.3,4·QF02Ii 2,&.QFD27 3,4.QEOIO 3,4-QF028 3,4·01010 :J.QF327 1,3,4,5-QF050 1,2,5-QF010 1,3,4,5-QG010 1,3,4,5:=g,g LOCATE STAI'T OF NEXT COUNT FIELD (INCLUDING ROI YES SET CHAMIEL END DEVICE END AND UNIT CHECK IN STATUS 8Y1£. SET COMMAND I'E~TOEND 4_ 1,2,3,4,5-0M020 E. 1,2,~ :J.QM3IO S~ACE OVEI' COUNT FIELD. RECEIVE 3 BY1£S OF OATA .....OM THE CHAMIEL CHL-I ~ 1'~:::=~1g 3,4-QI(315 311 SET END OF COUNT FIELO ORIENTATION FOR USE 11TH NEXT COMMANO NOTES I. THIS FLOWCHART IS USED .ITH MULTIPLE MICROCODE VEI'SIONS. THE FOLLWING DIGITS ARE USED TO IDENTIFY THE MICI'OCODE ANO CORI'ES~ING CAS ~AGE I'EFEI'ENCES. : nu 2. I ,2,3,4'I:rsb~g ....ESENT CHAMIEL END AND DEv I CE END TO THE PRESENT CHAMIEL END AND DEV I CE END STATUS TO THE CHAMIEL : ~ 8rt~ ~~= ~U:,g~', ~un:t' 2341111 3 - 3330/3340 IN1£RMIX - ~/~ 2341102, 2341991 4 - 3330/3340/3350 INTPMIX - PIN 41.1".1 5 - 3340/3344 - ~/N 4161116 ~~A~= B'A~~~.~,Nr:"~~I~~T¢~UAL SELEC1£D. ABBltEVI AT IONS G I • GAP BETEEN I NOEX PO I NT AND RO G2 • GAP BETEEN COUNT AI'EA AND KEY AREA CHAMIEL CHL-I CIII) 190 3830-2 CONTROL COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 3 of 3) c Ca!IvrWIt 11M c:o.,cnt;on UI72, '173, 1174, '171, '976 CMD30 fl'. 0 (4~1 " r'''t\ /'''1 \,-~/ i GC CARRIY ST7 RSPON INCREMENT HAS RSPON. TIMER. WAIT INCREMENT EXIT FOR EXPIRATIOl\ POINTER. (4.4 MSEC) OR 2B44 XOl RSPON. I-- SET UP TIMER 2CBC 2C5C ~---=';:::::A:':; f-- K=10000111 I-- Q-+ST5 K=64 K!lTB+T8 - A RAISE TAG GATE K=4 K+GC->GC ST7 H ~ Check CAR; request HAR Contents: H -. . - v~ .... "!'RE RCVD AND XMITTED CAR II-. Check I-IAR; request diff cntr contents 2CEO K+~8 ~ ...........r.() MP 4f1E RCVD 2CCc A K~TA XXl II ~l~ 2cce A O-'ST Place 5 (request address) on CTL-I tag bus. The content of CAR is placed on CTL-I bus in and read out to the NO register (lNTR 115) . . . . . when Tag Gate comes up. Place 16 (read difference) ....... on CTL-I bus out (lNTR 120) GXXO 2CBC A K=10001001 '--- K=16 K+~TA o L......- l-+5TO CD- 2C80 8 O+SC-+5B 2C24 STORE NEW SEEK ARGUMENT AND GO TO SEEK START SET CONTROL 1 SET SEEK START DECODE TAG DECODE ON BUS OUT Branch to entry for next part of operation (I NTR 1101. Note: Numbers indicate sequence of branches for this operation: 2A3C CD_ II. 2A1CfJ 2CCA. 2A28 • 2A30 2A34 II II fJ Place 9 (transmit control 1) ..-0 on CTL-I tag bus (lNTR 120) HAR ERROR .xXO 2C88 8 0+S0-+58 End of sequence) GO TO EXIT DECISIONS GC~IAL GO TO NEXT ROUTINE 2A2C K=OOO10000 I-- K+~TA 2AFC E CAR ERROR A 0=0 End ~Ci) XXO 2C84 K+~TD COMPARE RCVD AND XMITTED DIFF 2A34 " - - CHK-2 ERROR EXIT A K=OOOO1000 1---4 XXl MAVSD~ RESET TAG GATE AND ERROR ALERT GATE TURN ON CTL-I ERROR ALERT X1X 2B9C GATE. ST6 F ON SAYS CHECK PARITY. LSPEC: OF SET REO DIFF ON 8US OUT AND XMITTED HAR 2A30 A Check difference; set seek start XXi A MAVSC~ I - - K=OOO10111 H Kn~ SET CTL-I BUS-IN PARITY ERROR 0=0 SET REO HAR SET UP NB WITH PROPER ON 8USOUT FMT/MSG IN CASE OF ERROR 2A2C A H..- CHK-2 K+~TD K+~B iii SET XFER -OW DIFF TAG DECODE K=1000010~1_·-........ ---=----------------_. '-SET REqC)'L_ SET REOADDR ADDR ON BUS TAG DECODE OUT 2CCO 2A28 A A .. MAVsB~ I-- K=OOO10110 H MA=CAR contents, SB=CAR input, should be eq~ MA=HAR contents, SC=HAR input, should be equal 2C51 - ' Ii. <>-+MA rI' SET XMITCYL ADDR TAG DECODE la Request CAR contents 6)--- K+~TD 2C7( 2CC4 Place 8 (read HAR) on CTL-I bus out (lNTR 120) K=10000110 1-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _.....----1 A A 2B!8 HAS RSPON. SET UP RETURN SET HAR ON SET XMIT SAVE HAR INCREMENT EXIT POINTER. ADDRESS BUS OUT HEAD ADDR XOO 2BFO XOX 2B94 2BB4 2C31 ~_ _=2CB::;C TAG DECODE L~~---!.!~-~~~~!.......---~~e-:lX=01--2==BIF:-:--~-----:-2=B3~~ A A A A A r - - - - -A ":""1 A A TA+Q-+SD I-- K=100010001-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _---a K=32 K 0011111 GA+~TA I - K+~TD K!lT8+TB 1--4 r =1 I-~ Set difference Place bit 5 (read CAR) on CTL-I bus out (lNTR 120) f-- 28CC 2814 ...:2:..:;8'-='0,C Xl0 GO TO SET HAR 2A1C Send seek start to drive to begin seek operation in the drive. ..... .- ..0 .--__ A f-- K=OOO11000 f-- O+SA~TA ST7 ON DISABLES CHK 2 TEST- \ Place 7 (transmit head address on CTL-I bus tag (lNTR 120) 2C48 A 8 D Set head address; set high-order CAR; set reverse bi t ~"Y " HA~ '0 2C4C START OF CTRL OR CYL SEEK. SET CAR ON 8US OUT. 2A3( Set difference of old and new cylinder addresses in the difference counter. .., This example is for instruction only. Use machina CAS logics for troubleshooting. . \ 2E1C A II Transfer high-order cylinder address bit, reverse Place high order CAR bit, reverse bit, and head address on CTL-I bus out (lNTR 120) Place 6 (transmit cylinder address) on CTL-I tag bus UNTR 120) Place low-order cylinder address on CTL-I bus out (I NTR 120) for . entry to CAR Assume: Initial selection complete CMD35 3830-2/CONTROL INTERFACE OPERATION 1 DIFF ERROR --cD Place 16 (seek start! on CTL-I bus out IINTR 120). When the Tag Gate comes up, the tag bus is decoded, and CTL-I bus out is decoded as Seek Start. This line starts·the servo circuits responding to the new address in CAR, HAR, and the difference counter to move the heads to a new track. 3830-2 3830-2/CONTROL INTERFACE OPERATION CMD35 SEARCH COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS SEARCH COMMANDS.,.-DESCRIPTIONS CMD50 • Status byte bit 1, modifier, is set when a search is successful. • If a Search command is unsuccessful, the search command must be reissued to continue the search. • Multi-Track bit not on -search until successful or index is passed twice. • Multi-Track bit on-head switches to the next track at index. COMMAND CODE Search Home Address Equal 39 B9 Locate a home address field selected by the system CMO 55 Four bytes (CCHHI of home address field from the selected drive and track. with CCHH from the system Search 10 Equal 31 B1 Locate a count field selected by the system CMO 55 Five bytes (CCHHRI of the next cou nt field from the selected drive and track, with CCHHR from the system Search 10 High 51 01 Locate a count field selected by the system CMO 55 Five bytes (CCHHRI of the next count field from the selected drive and track, with CCHHR from the system Search 10 Equal or High 71 F1 Locate a count field selected by the system CM055 Five bytes (CCHHRI of the next count field from the selected drive and track, with CCHHR from the system Command Reject. Bus Out Parity. Overrun. . End of Cylinder. No Record Found. Data Check. Locates the 10 from the track that is equal to, or any 10 that is higher, than the 10 from the system. Search Key Equal 29 A9 Locate a key field selected by the system CM055 Search Key High 49 C9 Locate a key field selected by the system CM055 The key field bytes from the selected drive and track, with key from the system Search Key Equal or High 69 E9 !-ocate a key field selected by the system CM055 The key field bytes from the selected drive and track, with key from the system , COMMENTS Locates any ID from the track that is higher than the 10 from the system The key field bytes from the selected drive and track, with key from the system The key field compared is key field of the next record (excluding ROI, unless chained from a Read Count or Search 10 command. If chained from a count operation the key field searched is in the same record. Same as Search Key Equal, except the key field located is any key field on the track that is higher than the key from the system Same as Search Key Equal, except the key field located is equal to or higher than the key from the system. p~r~::~r91 !" SEARCH COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS CMD 50 Copyng'ht IBM Corporation 1972, 1973 :J 0 0 0 " ERRORS Set Unit Check, Channel End, Device End MultiTrack © ''-- DATA COMPARED DETAIL DESCRIPTION Single Track 3830-2 ' FUNCTION 1""'") 0 0 0 0 0 0 .. -.---_. 0 0 0 0 (f""~1 "-Y 0 ~ () (~ J 0 i"'''"~ o r'" tf") "'", )J I ' r~ "'] a ,. ':: ('~ ,_.)1 0" 0 0 . n, V .. - - - _ ....- - - (0 (' ( (' (- (-" ( _. _- ._ .. --'" f-" (--- C- (-~ .,,/ . c,. . / (:. ( ./ ( ,. (- <- --- ---- (C"' (- (- ( SEARCH COMMANDS SEARCH COMMANDS OBJECTIVES CMD 183 FLOWCHARTS SEARCH HOME ADDRESS EQUAL (39 or .9) SEARCH m EQUAL (31 or.t) SEARCH 10 HIGH (51 or Dt) SEARCH m EQUAL OR HIGH (71 or Fl) SEARCH BY EQUAL (29 or A9) SEARCH BY HIGH (..9 or 0) SEARCH BY EQUAL OR HIGH (69 or E9) 2.3.4.6-QG040 1,2,3,4,5-QG050 , .2,3 .... S ... QG030 I,Z,3,".5-QHOIO ;:1:1:::I:J398 Refer to CMD 75. CMD 90. CMD 105. and CMD 130 for sublyttem components used (channel in write mode. CTL-I read mode). • CMD55 1,2,3,4'1:=813 IIEAD SYNC BYTE Check for valid command. • No requirement for precedinl CCWs. • If erron occur. present Unit Check. Channel End. and Device End in status. Set Command Reject in sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL 650.) • If no erron occur. return zero status to the channel. • Transfer number of bytes called for by the command (HA-4.1D-5. key-O to 256) from the channel to the control unit. Read the same number of bytes from the selected controller/ device. _---II..........~-QH030 1,2,f5-QG050 r----II......io.I.ol..... 2, ::=g~g IIEAD CCN« OF CDUNT AllEA __ -J:.&..iIi.oio~ -QHOSO _--Ju..i:...a.~-QI(IIO • Byte by byte. make comparison called for by the command. 1. Compare data from device with data from the channel. For ellample. 5 from the device and 3 from the channel constitute a hip condition. " .... , :IAA8 ~CCDUNT BYTES 1'l1li I'IELD D CHECK ECC 2. If the CCW count is less than the field lenlth. comparison is on the CCW count bytes only. . . - _ - J......i.oioa.r·-QSO• O NOTES 4. If search condition is satisfied. set status modifier bit in the status byte. r-_-J:.&..iI:...a.~-QI( 110 I. :it~T IS USED 81TH .... TI~E III VPSIIINS. THE I'OLLDIIING DIGITS U 5. If CCW count is less than field lenlth. read balance of field to check for erron. • If erron from channel interface. CTL-I. or controller/ device are found. present Unit Check. Channel End. and Device End in endinl status. 3330 only: 10 to retry mode (see CMD 210); set appropriate bits in sense data. ~ • If multitrack bit is off in the command. the search loop continues until satisfied or until two indell points have been sensed. If two indelles are sensed fint. present Unit Check. Channel End. and Device End in endinl status. Set No Record Found indication in sense data. • If multitrack bit is on in the command. the search loop 2. Search condition is not satisfied. present Channel End and device end in endinl status. Channel program should ellecute the nellt CCW (T1C·-8) and branch back to repeat the Search command. continues until satisfied or until index is sensed. If index is sensed fint. the head address is stepped + 1 and the loop continues. If the head address is advanced past the last track in a cylinder. present Unit Check, Channel End. and Device End in endinl status. Set End of Cylinder indication in the sense data. ~1~ls~C:I~:~ : IIJI i~ : ~I= 1I::m· IUU8t· 214m, • / ••0 INTERIlIX - P/f. 114•• 01, 214 ••• ' / 40/1110 INTlIIIIIX - P'N 41 •• 11 40/1144 - PIN . . . . . 1. I 4 1 - CIllO 1.0 If no erron are found and: I. Search condition is satisfied, present Status Modifier. Channel End. and Device End in endinl status. Channel program should skip the nellt CCW (TlC·8) and eucute the foUowinl CCW. -------- NIl 3. The fint unequal condition (hiP or low) encountered sets the condition for the field. • AND C'-CII _VIATIIINS &.TL -I : ECC ~~ &m"f'fNI.~TEIU' ACE • -lm"ECT I lIN CODE : ~~NT~~ 3830-2 SEARCH COMMANDS OCopy'ilht IBM Corpo,etion 1972. 1973. 1974. 1975. 1978 CMD55 WR ITE COMMANDS..,.DESCRIPTI,ONS CODE COMMAND Single Track DATA WRITTEN DETAIL DESCRIPTION FUNCTION MultiTrack ERROR Count, key, and data fieldS of next record on the track. Data for the fields comes from the system. The count field flag byte, ECC, and gap data come from the SCU. 10 - Write one complete record on the selected drive and track CMD85 Write Special Count, Key, Data 01 - Same as Write Count, Key, Data command except a 1 is written in bit 4 of the flag byte to indicate a record overflow segment CMD85 Same as that of Write Count, Key, Data command 11 - Erase remainder of track CMD85 Zeros Command Reject. Bus Out Parity. Overrun. Invalid Track Format. 19 Write Record (ROI 15 Write Data Write Key-Data 05 00 - - - - 3330 and 3350 Compatibility Modes": Write the five·byte (FCCHHI home address fieldon the selected drive and track. 3340: Write the seven-byte (SO SO F CC HHI home address field on the selected drive and track. 3350-Native Mode: Write the 9-byte home address field (SO SO SO SO FCC H HI on the selected drive and track. CMD80 Write count, key, data of RO. Change ,the data field of a record 3330 and 3350 Compatibility Modes': Five-byte (FCCHHI home address field transferred from the system. 3340: Seven-byte (SO SO F CC HHI home address field transferred from the system. 3350-Native Mode: Nine-byte (SO SO SO SO FCC H HI home address field transferred from the system. The CU skips writing an address marker, sync byte, or ECC. 3340 and 3350-Native Mode: Must be chained from a satisfied Search Home Address command (with a CCW count of 4 or morel. If not, bit 6 of the flag byte must be set to 1 to indicate a defective track. If it is not, the command is rejected. CMD80 Flag byte from HA field. CCHHRK L DL DL from system written in count field. Key and data from system. Same as Write Count, Key, Data except must be chained from a write HA or a successful Search HA Equal command CMD85 Data from the system. Write the number of bytes specified by the DL DL bytes of the count field of the same record. If file mask is violated, set Command Reject. Must be chained from a successful Search Equal 10 or Search Equal Key command. CMD85 Change the key and data f.ields of a record If file mask is violated, set Command Reject. Must be chained from Write RO; Write Count, Key, Data; Erase; or a successful Search Equal 10 or Search Equal Key command. After last Count, Key, Data command on a track, write O's to index. Same as Write Count, Key, Data. Not used for last segment of an overflow record. (Format Write commandsl Write Home Address (HAl COMMENTS Set Unit Check-Channel and Device End Write Count, Key, Data Erase CMD70 WRITE COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS Data from the system. Write the number of bytes specified by the KL and DL DL bytes of the count field of the same record. Command Reject. Bus Out Parity. Overrun. If file mask is violated, set Command Reject. Must be chained from a successful Search Equal 10 command. If KL = 0, operation is the same as Write Data. "Note: For 3350 in compatibility modes, the HA is first readinternally by the storage control to save the SO bytes.. Then the SO bytes, along with the 5 bytes (F C C H H) transferred from the system, are written on the treck. I~ I~~~5 3830-2 History © Copyright IBM Corporation 447461 12 Mar 76 CMD70 WRITE COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS 1972, 1973, 1974, 1975, 1976 00000 o t4", \" I>j ~ 0000 o o o o o o o () o o 0',:' "j, o () o ( ' ( ( '-'" ..... -' .. ( ~' ( Write data from the using system on a pack selected by the system. • • • • Executes Stlrt I/O inltruction, which Iddresses a channel com· m.nd word ICCWI cont.ining • Write comm.nd. • • CHANNEL Executes the CCW to trlnlfer the write commlnd to the SCU. Tr.nlfers the Iddre.. where d.t. is to be storld, to the storage control unit. • • • II CONTROL CIRCUITS Decode the Write command. Select the addressed module • and head. the status of the mod• Check ule and transfer the status to CHANNEL CONTROLS the channel. Control timing of transfer of data between the channel and the CU. Set up the write controls in • the module. the byte-by-byte • Control transfer of write data from Check plrity of dlta trlnsfered to the CU. the channel interface to the controller circuits. • • • Trlnsfers data from the system to the storage control unit. • (' ",,'/ ' .'". (' CMD75 DEVICE CONTROL MODULE STORAGE CONTROL UNIT II SYSTEM (0', WRITE OPERATION WRITE OPERATION • (" ( ( SERDES • Receives data serial·by-byte from the CU. • Changes byte of data to serial-by-bit data. • Sends ECC data to module. • Sends modified frequency modulation (MFM) data to the module. • Uses phase-locked oscillator IPLO) pulses to control write timing. • Controls gap configurations. • 333().1 ndicate retry status to channel If error is a type that can be retried, and set up to relocate record. GAP CONTROL SERIALIZER/ DESERIALIZER ~. . . (SERDES) Control gap types. • Set up the module to write on the disk. • Change data pulses from SERDES to currents for the write head. • Provide the CU with status of the module. • Index pulse generated from servo data and sent t.o CU. Checks subsystem for errors. Transfers ending status to the channel. • WRITE CONTROLS • READ/WRITE HEAD • Changes currents in write windings to magnetic flux. head • Selected accepts data. head • Servo provides PLO DISK SURFACES Receive and store bits of information on the magnetic coating of the disk. pulses. • Servo head and circuits hold access at selected track. ECC CIRCUITS Write Control Info SYSTEM Device Status Info CHANNEL Write Data CTL-I ",_...lo_ _" Write Data CHANNEL CONTROLS WRITE CONTROLS CONTROL CIRCUITS CTL-I CTRL 1 CHL-Il 1 . .- ~--~-----------w~--~ Seek Micro- . . ._ - -.... DEVICE INTERFACE READ/WRITE HEAD DISK SURFACES Servo Track Data program iii IJ CONTROL INTERFACE • Transfers write control information to the control circuits. • Transfers status of the control cuits and device to the SCU_ • Transfers the byte·by·byte data to the control circuits. cir- DEVICE INTERFACE • Transfers write control information to the control circuits_ • Transfers status of the control circuits and device to the SCU. • Transfers the byte-by-byte data to the control circuits. IBM CONFIDENTIAL 3830-2 UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1974. 1975 WRITE OPERATION CMD75 ( .~----- WRITE COMMANDS - -~~~~~- - --_._--------- ~~~~~~--~~~~~~.----~---- - ._-------- ~-. OBJECTIVES WRITE COMMANDS - OBJECTIVES WRITE HOME ADDRESS (19) ~ WRITE RECORD ZERO (15) Format Write ERASE (11) WRITE COUNT KEY DATA (10) Commands WRITE SPECIAL COUNT KEY DATA (01) WRITE KEY DATA (OD) WRITE DATA (05) SD information is not provided by the system. The storage control internally reads the home address field to obtain the existing SD bytes before the Write HA is executed. 2. Write RO: Start writing in gap before RO count; write flag byte, count field, gap, key field (if required), gap, data field (if required), and start of next gap. Refer to CMD 75 and CMD 90 for subsystem components used. Refer to CMD 80 and 85 for flowcharts and CAS references. • Check for valid command. • Check for chaining prerequisites. These depend on the command: 1. If the command is Write CKD, Write Special CKD, or Erase, it must be chained from one of the following: a. Write RO. b. Write CKD. c. Successful Search Equal ID or Key. (A Read Data or Key Data may be between Search and Write.) Check for Set File Mask limitations. (See CMD 20.) • If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in status. Set Command Reject in sense data. (See SENSE I and CTRL 650.) • If no errors occur, return zero status to the channel. • Write data, transferred from the channel, on the track selected by the system (plus correction code bytes at end of each field). The commands and their effects are: • If no errors occur, present Channel End and Device End in ending status. 1. Write Key Data: Start writing in gap; write key field (if required) and start of next gap. 2. Write Data: Locate gap before next data field; start writing in gap; write data field (if required) and start of next gap. 3. Erase: Operates as a Write CKD command, except: a. The data transferred from the .channel is not written on the track; and b. Zeros are written in place of the data and to the end of the track. • Format Write commands change the balance of the track: 1. After last format Write command in a chain, release the channel, write to the next index point, and reconnect after index. 5. If the command is Write HA (3340 only), it must meet either of the following requirements: a. It must be chained from a satisifed Search HA with a CCW count of 4 or more. b. Bit 6 of the flag byte, transferred from the channel, must be I, indicating a defective track. • 4. If data overrun is detected, present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending status. (3330 only: go into retry mode; see CMD 2lO.) Note: In Write Special CKD, set flag byte bit 4 to 1. b. Successful Search HA. 3. If the command is Write Data, it must be chained from a successful Search Equal ID or Key. Furthermore, the search must be on the full field from the disk. 4. If the command is Write Key Data, it must be chained from a successful Search EquallD (all five bytes). 2. Detection of Bus Out Parity Error causes presentation of Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End at end of field. 3. Detection of a data overrun causes presentation of Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End at the normal ending point of the operation, and causes Os to be written after error is detected. • Nonformat Write commands update existing records. 1. These commands change only data or key and data fields. 2. Each new record must be the same size as old record. (If CCW count is small, fill balance of field with Os.) Write HA: Locate index; write gap and control bytes (called for by the device type), bytes of data from the channel (five for 3330, seven for 3340), and start of following gap. In 3350 compatibility mode, 3. These commands can be used to update overflow records. (See CMD 400.) IBM CONFIDENTIAL 3830·2 0 0 0 r0 0 t*') i "--. ., ----~-.-- WRITE COMMANDS-OBJECTIVES UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1974. 1975 ._ .. ------_._----_.- .. - _... ~) 0 0 ," CM 0 77 3. Write CKD and Write Special CKD: Locate gap before next count field; start writing in gap; write count field (flag is same as HA flag byte), gap, key field (if required), and start of next gap. 2. If the command is a Write RO, it must be chained from one of the following: a. Write HA. I. -----.---~-~-. -_ ..... _-~ \"..y CM D 77 - () (1h 'J ., . 0 0 V 0 t""" ~J! 0 0 0 t ~ 0 '\ ("~ ,y 0-' A v (,""'''t'\ ",-y /1"~ '",; 0 ",--j :() 0 a ,0 v ( ' '-..Jl 0 0 r ""~ --.--------~ -~-~---~--~- ( ( ( ( ( (- - ( f (-- (- ( ( (~-- (' WRITE COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 1 of 2) (' ( (- ( ( ---'-- ( --- -- ( '" WRITE COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 1 of 2) j CMD80 Refer to CMD 75 for subsystem components used. Refer to CMD 77 for command objectives. • Write commands store data from the system on the disk pack of a selected module. • Format Write commands - Write Home Address, Write RO, Write Count, Key, Data, and Erase - cause the balance of the track to be changed. • • Write Data and Write Key, Data commands change only the key and/or data fields of a record to be changed. (Field length stays the same.) WRITE RECORD ZERO 115) YES '·OF325 1.3·0FD50 2.3.5·0FD25 r------t CHECK IF HA OPERATION 1.2.3.'.5-0F030 1.2.3.'.5-0F010 1.2.3.'.5-0G010 3·0G31O 1.2.3.'.5-0G03O J.OG330 SEPARATE WRITE Gap configurations may vary with device type; refer to device MLM. SEA~~~Dt~~NDS AND CLOCK OPERATIONS 1.2.3.5·0G010 3.4·QG370 FETCH DEVICE ADDRESS AND PARAMETERS 1.3.'-OM010 1.2.3.'.5·0M02O LOCATED IN GAP AFTER HOME ADDRESS FIELD. (SEE COMMAND 77). TREAT AS WRITE CKD 3350 COMPATIBILITY MODES 4-QN52D SET UP BRANCH TO CLOCK HA AND RO OPERATION. SET UP RETURN ADDRESS AFTER CLK RO '-OEOB5 '·OM023 2.5·OM020 3.4-QM320 SET UP TO MOVE HA BY WRITING LONG GAP 1.2.3.4.5·0M030 3·0M33D 1.3.'·OM040 1.3.'·OM05O 4·QF025 RETURN AFTER CLK HA AND RO. IF DEFECT IN HA AREA, SET UP TO MOVE HA BY WRITING LONG GAP. CMD 85 WRITE ZEROS 2.5-0FD21 2.5·0FD30 3·0F321 3-0F330 YES BY~~its~~[:gL BYTE, AND CCHH BYTES DEVICE '·OM055 1.2.3.'.5-0MOBO 3·0M355 NOTES I. THIS FLOWCHART IS USED WITH MULTIPLE MICROCODE VERSIONS. THE FOLLOWING DIGITS ARE USED TO IDENTIFY THE MICROCODE AND CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE REFERENCES, 2.3.'.5-0MOBO 1.2.3.'.5·0M010 1.2.3.'.5-0KI20 I 2 3 4 5 - 3330 ONLY - PIN 2348805, 234878&, 2348787 3340 ONLY - PIN 2348757, 234899& 3330/3340 INTERMIX - PIN 2348802, 2348997 3330/3340/3350 INTERMIX - PIN 41&8811 3340/3344 - PIN 41&881& RAISE STATUS IN TO CHANNEL CND 190 3830-2 WRITE COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 1 of 2) © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1974, 1975. 1976 CMD80 WRITE COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 2 of 21 WRITE COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 2 of 2) CMD85 CMD 183 WR I TE SPEC 1AL. COUNT, (~n' DATA (SEE NOTE 41 1,2,3,4,5-00010 ,....._ _ _....., 1,2.3,4,~ggm 4·QM023 1,2,3,4,5-OM02O 3-OM320 3,00330 SEPARATE WRITE, ~~l,..g~A~f.!l CL.OCK OPERATIONS WR I TE FL.AG BYTE PROPAGATED FROM PREVIOUS RECORD FL.AG TURN ON WR I TE GATE. SET UP THE SEL.ECTED MOOUL.E TO WRITE (SEE NOTE 51 CTL.-I 200 PREPARE TO WRITE KEY FIEL.D CTRL. 650 4·0MD23 1,3,4·QMOIO 1,2,3·QM02O 4,5-QM02O 3·QM320 4-QM023 1,3,4·OM010 '-------1 ',2,3,4,~:g:g~ 4·0M023 1,2,3·OM03O W~~~T~CH~ ~;~ 2,4,~g::l FETCH DEVICE ADORESS AND PARAMETERS WRITE ZEROS IN GAP (SEE NOTE 51 DEVICE YES 2,5-QFOIiO 2,5-0FOII6 2,4,5-0F070 3,4.QF3tiO 3,4·0F356 3,OF370 SET UP TO WRITE A GAP 4 BEFORE WR I TI NG NORMAL. GAP3 CHECK FOR FIRST BYTE. WA I T FOR SYNC-IN 1,2,3,4,5.QM02O 4.QM023 3.QM320 4.QM023 1,3,4·OM04O 2,5-QM020 3-OM320 3830-2 CMO 190 1,2,3,4,5-0M030 3·OM330 1,3,4-0M040 WRITE DATA FIEL.D DA'fA AS TRANSFERRED FROM THE CHANNEL. (SEE NOTE 71 1,3,4·OMOIiO 1,3,4·OMOIiO 2,4,5-OM04O 3·OM34D CHl.380 ENO OF COUNT DEFECT SKIP CAL.CULATI ONS WRITE 7 ECC BYTES 0 WRITE 7 ECC BYTES DEVICE ECC • ERROR CORRECTION CODE SO • SKIP DEFECT END OF FIEL.D PROCESSING REWR I TE COUNT FIEL.O FROM CONT:~Fi~ORAGE ABBREV lATIONS START WRITING ZEROS FOR GAP 3 OR 4 (SEE NOTE 51 CAL.CULATE SO BYTES FOR NEXT COUNT FIEL.D SET CHANNEL. END AND DEVICE END IN R~T~tU~T~l~~'!~~O THE CHANNEL. PREPARE TO WRITE DATA FIEL.D 6. 3340. FIEL.D MAY BE WRITTEN IN TWO ~~~~T5FT~I~~fPs~~~~~T. NO ECC IS WRITTEN 7. 3~~~~f~L.~OM~~I~AS&k~tcf~TO TWO 8. ~gvU:L.G~:~ =RI~A~~~~aN TYPE SEL.ECTED. HI CWO DEVICE 190 447461 I See EC History 1 447460 19 D.ec 75 1 12 Mar 76 @Copvright /~) WRITE SYNC AND ID BYTES (SEE NOTE 51 REORIENT ~T~OL~E~~DT~~~IE~~~llDA~ ~~A~Y~EM. 5t~~~~~MGQ:IT~~~S~E~~t ~~·6ATA. 190 WR ITE KEY F I EL.D DATA AS TRANSFERRED FROM THE CHANNEL. ISEE NOTE 61 2,3-Q.J070 - CWO 4·CM023 1,3,4.QM04O 2,5·OM010 2,5-OM02O 2,4,5-OMD30 3-OM320 3-OM33O WRITE COUNT-KEY-DATA MUST BE CHAINED FROM ~ 'H~c=OlgQ~C~i~F~~~r:~H EQUAL. I D, 4. THE WRITE SPECIAL. COUNT-KEY-DATA COMMAND IS THE SAME AS A WRITE COUNT-KEYDATA COMMAND EXCEPT THAT THE FL.AG BYTE BIT 4 IS SET TO I. THIS INDICATES THAT THIS RECORD IS SEGMENT OF OVERFL.OW RECORD. THIS COMMAND IS USED FOR AL.L. SEGMENTS OF AN OVERFL.OW RECORD EXCEPT THE L.AST. 5. 3340. CONTRDL.L.ER AUTOMATICAL.L.Y SEQUENCES S I GNAL.S TO THE OR I VE TO TURN ON WR I TE WRITE SYNC AND ID BYTES ISEE NOTE 51 CAL.CULATE PROPER FL.AG AND SD BYTES TO INOICATE SPLIT OR MOVED F I EL.DS WR I TE CONTROL. BYTES AS CAL.L.ED FOR BY DEV ICE TYPE : 4·0M023 1,3,4-0M03O 2,5·0M020 3·0M3 1.QM030 2,3,4,5-Q.J020 2,3,4,5-Q.J030 2,3,4,5-Q.J040 2,3,4,5-Q.J050 2,3,4,5-Q.J060 4.QM023 1,3,4.QM0Ii0 2,5-QM02O 3.QM320 1 : ~~:g s=t~ ~~= ~~::,g" ~~::~=t, 2348787 ~ - 3330/3340 INTERMIX - P/~ 2341102, 2348997 4 - 3330/3340/3350 INTERMIX - PIN 4101811 5 - 3340/3344 - PIN 4161.16 2. 7HE ERASE COMMAND I S THE SAME AS A WRITE COUNT-KEY-DA7A COMMAND EXCEPT THAT THE DATA TRANSFERRED FROM THE SYSTEM IS NOT WR I TTEN. THE BAL.ANCE OF THE TRACK I~, INSTEAD, FIL.L.ED WITH ZEROS. 3. THE WRITE COUNT-KEY-DATA COMMAND 4·QM023 WRITE 7 ECC BYTES WR ITE 12 BYTES OF ZEROS (SEE NOTE 51 THIS FL.OWCHART IS USED WITH MULTIPLE MICROCODE VERSIONS. THE FDL.L.DWING DIGITS ARE USED TD I DENT I FY THE MI CROCDDE AND CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE REFERENCES. WRITE 47 BYTES OF ZEROS (SEE NOTE 51 2,5·OM020 3·0M320 4·QM023 1,3,4·OM04O 2,5·OM02O 3-QM320 NOTES SET UN IT CHECK BIT IN STATUS BYTE, AND COMMANO RE.JECT BITS IN SENSE WRITE 47 BYTES OF ZEROS (SEE NOTE 51 CHI.-I 380 WRITE 3 BYTE ADORESS MARK GAP (NO CL.OCK OR DATA PUL.SESI (SEE NOTE 51 CL.OCK PART OF GAP UNTIL. WRITE GATE TURN-ON POINT (SEE NOTE 51 I. DATA L.EN6TH BYTES AS TRANSFERRED FR6M THE CHANNEL. SET UNIT CHECK BIT IN STATUS BYTE ANO COMMAND RE.JECT BITS IN SENSE BYTE CMD85 WRITE COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 2 of 21 IBM Corporation 1972, 1973, 1974, 1975, 1976 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .0 \J A J 0 0 f) '" . (~ '4..Y 0 n 0 "-J /~ \V r"'. ~y r"" ~Ji 0 \.3 0: r" ~y pr_"", ~.Y r", ~j rr~ V' . . i~ i~y 0 n jJ I '''--- .~ ~y (~) r:) "<- .' ~ .. ~" ••• ]1' (- ( WRITE DATA TRANSFER . • Thll exemple II for Inltructlon only. U.. machine CAS loglCl for troublelhootlnll. X'III bllnch 11III1cIJ1eI tllat the ch.n"" IntIrfM. h. plececl ...... byteln tlla NA 1II11t... • TRANSFER DATA FROM THE SYSTEM AND WRITE IT ON THE DISK SURFACE. CMD90 WRITE DATA TRANSFER T"nal.. bytel,om tlla cllannel Int"'.ce Cplececlln NAI to the T A ".IIt.. 10, ullby &ERDEI. r----~-------,~----------------~~~=---------~~::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::~-----------------------------------Q"'OSO----CDE xxooo 1001 (XXIOO) I r-----------------T IT4 T Mel XFER C2-X"on-cl Me7 Cl-X"OO-C 11III1a.1eI!h1t .... IIIIn lIicen. ' b j t e II 1T4 II automatically ~ ~~----------~ ED EF • XrER x··OO- aB 05 -xXI00 - XOOOO - - 1£20 THE BYTE I N THE 5E~5 _FER IS ACED IN T SHIFT REGISTER I .-01000000-0. I A KOTC..aIJ'C kl000 byt. 0I111d out in tho count lield IKL DL DL ' or I bytil 10' e count ".'d. o£ TURN ON LAST IYTE REQUEST --IE38 A I IXllnn_lE!Cr--' xXl00 --lE'5e K-255 A A A T1t.+O-SC 1(+\1C~C A ~A+O"T1\ QIIII040--JIII: (XOXOO) B SERVICE OUT/DATA OUT FROM THE CHANNEL SIGNAL S THE CHANNEL I NTERF ACE THAT A BYTE I S ON BUS OUT 3330 ONLY- DATA xlOOO --lEIS ~a~T=~cA~llIm8N INTERFACE PLACES THE BYTE I N THE CHANNEL BUFFER REG I STER WR ITE DATA PULSES ARE SENT TO THE DRIVE JD XIOOO --lEU A .....C I B COMMa I J4 - X1100 --lE2C I .-01000000-10 A J(Q:SR...aR B MC6 BRl LI-X"OO- LA THE CHANNEL. XUDO - I .-00110001-10 A AS IT GOES THROUGH THE SHIFT REGI STER (XI000,X1100) L2 - x1100 - LB I S'rJC XX·OO - JD >cOOOO - JB - JE XO: C0100 --1[34 '-255 A A arRO" MC7 I L3 -X"OO-LC L4 - xoooo - r,D IIR I TE cca BYTES AS PROVIDED BY ECC CIRCUITS >C0100 --lE24 A I xxon XOloo --lF44 --lE'58 '-255 A A A J(+" cnooo - Thil it • migoproerem controlled, two ~ byt., counter to write thl number 4Jf • IT4 QM020.LH£ CCB PLO VFO E6 - ... J2 - PROCESS CONTROL BYTES AS REQUiRED BY DEVICE TYPE XXIOO -IE54 '-255 A A I P'REFtELO ANALYSIS ,. SET uP APPROPRIATE OA TA COUNTS. Z. PUT CHANNEL I N WR I TE MODE. J. WA I T FOR RESPONSE FROM CONTROLLER. I " K+Mc--MC XOIOO - l E U A2 - PRESENT INITIAL. STATUS IF NOT ALREADY DONE C\-xoooo-c. STlC F.. _XX.OO _ P_NO_"_rUII....,~I_G_L_s_tP_T 1!t' OP GENERATE ,. DETERMINE WHICH GAP TO BE PROCESSED. Z. SEND WRITE DECODE TO THE CONTROLLER. INDEX I f _10' ntot byte. .. • C4 -XX'OO-CD DECREMENT LOW BYTE COUNTER XllOO !OlC DECREMENT HIGH I A BYTE COUNTER A TA+0.58 ! M¥VIL ~ A. K+M8+00eMBC crx~::~u-------------6---l T!JIIKn .-255 regi".r. Mllnt'lns sync: with the channe.. This example 15 for instructional purposes only. 13 Devic. 4.__ . -F-r~o-m~~~t~.m~~.~I~ . ______ C_h_en_n_·____ .. ~I~----~~L-___________1____~~~~~_, IntirflCl HellCl il ..lectllCl, and write circuits place data on the di.k lurface. SERDES D Tr.nsfers fullIIflnais from '0 microprogram byte CU buffer r. .stlr and with ST4 bit. Drives write circuits with PLO pul ... to .ync cIotl to di.k •.,-. Send. serial writ. ct.tl to the drive. 3830·2 IBM CONFIDENTIAL © Copyright IBM Corpa,.tion 1972. 1973, 1974.1975 UNTIL MARCH 26,1978, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER WRITE DATA TRANSFER CMD90 READ COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS CODE COMMAND READ COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS DETAIL FUNCTION OATA READ DESCRIPTION ERRORS (3330 and 33501 Set Unit Cheek·Channel End Device End CMD 100 COMMENTS Data Check Read Data Single Track MultiTrack 06 86 Transfer data area of a record from drive to main storage Data Overrun Correc· table Un correetable CMD 120 First data area after address marker or the data area of the record that was chained from the count or key area of the same record Yes Use ECC Use Command Retry CMD 120 First key, data area after address mar ker or the key, data area that was command-chained from the count area of the same record Yes Data field. Use ECC. Use Command Retry CMD 120 Next record or first record after RO Yes Data field. Use ECC. Use Command Retry Data field. Use ECC. Use Command Retry Read Key Data OE 8E Transfer key and data areas of a record from drive to main storage Read Count Key Data 1E 9E Transfer count, key, and data areas of a record from drive to main storage CMD 110 RO Yes CMD 110 Next record count field or first count field after RO Yes Use Command Retry Transfer five bytes {FCCHHI to channel CMD 110 Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Yes Use Command Retry First data area after RO Read Record Zero (RO) 16 96 Transfer RO (count, key and data) from the drive to main storage Read Count 12 92 Transfer next count field (eight bytesl from the drive to main storage Read Home Address 1A 9A Read Initial Program Load 02 - Recalibrate to cylinder 0 and head 0, search for index point, and read R 1 data from the drive to main storage CMD 125 Provide one byte of angular position information, which is used by a subsequent Set Sector command. When not chained from a Read, Write, or Search CCW, the byte transferred is the angular position required to access the last record processed on the drive. When chained, the byte transferred is the angular pOSition of the record used in the previous CCW. CMD 125 Transfer count, key, and data areas of the remaining records of the track from drive to main storage. CMD 125 Read Sector 22 - Read Multiple CKD 5E - 0 ~ Flag. 1 . Cylinder address. 2 = Cylinder address. 3 = O. 4 = Head address. Data field. Use ECC. Yes Use Command Retry If the KL equals 0 the command is executed the same as a Read Data command When chained from a Search HA or Read HA command, the Read RO command is executed immediately and does not initiate a search for index point A Read IPL command cannot be preceeded by a Set File Mask command in the same chain Causes loss of orientation Start next record until end of track (excludi ng RO) Use ECC Yes Yes 23FD Disk PINs 4168811 and 4168816 only ERRORS (33401 Set Channel End, Device End, and Unit Check in status. Data overrun, correctable data check (data field only I. or uncorrectabhl data check in sense data. For correctable data check. retry status is presented. When the command is reissued. unit check is presented. which breaks the command chain. 3830-2 IBM CONFIDENTIAL © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1973, 1974, 1975 ) 0 () () READ COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS CMD 100 UNTIL MARCH 26.1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER C) o o o O ,,:. .~ \J r~ "j! o a o o 000 o 0'· "" ' o o (- F(-' L - (' ( (': ( '" / READ OPERATION READ OPERATION Reads data, selected by the system, from the disk surface and transfers it to the system. II • B SYSTEM Executes Start I/O instruction, which addresses a channel com· mand word (CCW) containing a Read command. • .:II &I CHANNEL Executes the CCW to transfer the Read com· mand to the CU. • Transfers the • addr'c!ss of the selected data to the CU. ',: .:. ,':' • Trilnsfers data • from the CU to CHANNEL CONTROLS Controls the timing of the trans· fer of data and control information between the channel and the CU. Checks parity uf data transferred to the CU. II CONTROL CIRCUITS I DEVICE I I I SERDES I • Decode the Read command. • • Select the addressed module and head. Receives the modified frequence modu· lation (MFM) data from the module. • Recognizes gaps and synchronizes to the data. I • Changes serial·by·bit drive data to serial-by·byte data. I • Sends data to the CU and ECC. I • Uses phase·locked oscillator (PLO) pulses to maintain synchronization when not reading. I • Uses ECC bytes to check for errors. • D CONTROL MODULE STORAGE CONTROL UNIT Check the status of the module and transfer the status to the channel. • Set up the read controls in the module. • Control the serial-by-byte transfer of read data from the control circuits to the channel interface. • Check subsystem for errors. • Gap Control I I I I I I I SERIALIZER/ Read Data DESERIALIZER 100IIII.... (Serial) 1m ~~SR~ACES I : II I I I READ CONTROLS • • Set up the module to read data from the disk. • Change currents from the read head into data pulses to SERDES. • Provide the CU with status of the module. I to the channel if error occurs and is a type that can be retried, and set up tf) reo locate record. the system. I I I I I Transfer ending status to the the channel. • 3330 - Indicate retry status CMD 105 Contain bits of information on the magnetic disk coating. I I ECC CIRCUITS I I CTL·I ~-oi-'" PLO SYSTEM CHANNEL CONTROLS CHANNEL Servo CONTROL CI RCUITS CTRL 1 Track Pulses DISK SURFACES Read Data DEVICE INTERFACE CTL·I CHL-I 1 READ/WRITE HEAD READ CONTROLS I I I I I I CONTROL STORAGE I I I II I I • Transfers read control information I to the selected modlile. I Changes magnetic flux from pack to read current signals. • Selected head provides data I • Servo head provides PLO pulses . I I • Servo head and cirCUits hold access at selected track. IJ EI'SC/CONTROL INTERFACE • • • 437415 3830-2 1 2 Nov 73 © Copyrigh.IBM Corpora. Ion 1973.1975 447460 19 Dec 75 I Transfers read control inform· ation to the control circuits. Transfers control/drive status to the CU. • • DEVICE INTERFACE Transfers status of the selected module to the CU. I READ/WRITE HEAD pulse~ I Transfers byte·by·byte data from the control module to the CU. IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER READ OPERATION CMD 105 ~ ''''---; READ COMMANDS OBJECTIVES READ COM\1ANDS OBJECTIVES READ MULTIPLE COUNT KEY DATA (SE) READ HOME ADDRESS (lA or 9A) READ RECORD ZERO (16 or 96) READ COUNT (11 or 92) READ COUNT KEY DATA (IE or 9E) READ KEY DATA (OE or 8E) READ DATA (06 or 86) READ INITIAL PROGRAM LOAD (02) 6. Read data: Clock through all fields and gaps (including RO data) to the next data field; read data field; end in gap. 7. Read IPL: Seek to track 0 and select head 0: wait for index; clock all gaps and fields to the data field of record ); read data field; end in gap. If Check 2 errors are indicated, end operation and present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending status. Set appropriate sense data in control storage. • Refer to CMD 105 and CMD 130 .for subsystem components used. Refer to CMD 110 through CMD 125 for flowcharts and CAS references. Refer to CMD 400 for Read overflow operations. Read to CMD 430 for Read multitrack operations. • Check for valid command. • No requirement for preceding CCWs except that no Set File Mask command may precede a Read IPL in the same chain. • If errors occur, 'present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in status. Set Command Reject in sense data. (See SENSE) and CTRL 650.) • If no errors occur, return zero status to the channel. • Transfer data, from the disk track selected by the system, through the control unit to the channel. 2. • gaps until a count field is located (excluding RO count). read the count field data. clock gap and read key data (if required): clock gap; read data field (if required): repeat the Read operation until index. If Data Overrun or Data check is indicated. present Unit Check. Channel End. and Device End in ending status. Set Data Check or Data Overrun in sense data. READ SECTOR (21) Refer to CMD 105 for subsystem components used. Refer to CMD 300 and CMD 305 for use of the command. Read RO:If not in gap after HA, wait for index; clock gap, control bytes, HA field, and gap. Balance of operation is the same as Read CKD operation. • Check for valid command. • No requirement for preceding CCWs. • If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End. and Device End in status. Set Command Reject in sense data. (See SENSE I and CTRL 650.) 4. Read CKD: Clock through all fields and gaps until a count field is located (excluding RO count); read the count field data; clock gap and read key data (if required); clock gap; read data field (if required); end in gap. • If no errors occur. return zero status to the channel. • Transfer angular position information from controller / device to the control unit, and send one byt!' to the channel. Read Key Data: Clock through all fields and gaps (including RO key) to the next key field; read key field; dock gap; read data field; end in gap. If key CCW count = 0, this command is the same as a Read Data command. I. Normally this information is the angular position required to reprocess the last record processed on the device selected. I~ 3830-2 [) COPVrlght IBM CQrporatlon 1973,1915 1 " If no errors occur. present Channel End and Device End in ending status. 8. Read Multiple CKD: Clock through all fields and Read Home Address:Wait for index; clock gap and control bytes; read five bytes (FCCHH); end in gap. 0 ·0'" 00 • If no errors occur, present Channel End and Device End in ending status. Read count: Clock through all fields and gaps until a count field is located (excluding RO count); read eight bytes of data (CCHHRKDD); end in gap. Or'" .' If Check 2 errors are indicated, present Unit Check.. Channel End, and ,Device End in ending status. Set appropriate sense data in control storage. 2. If 3340: Present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending status. Set Data Check or Data Overrun in sense data. 3. S. • If 3330 or 3350: Entry retry mode. Note: Correction code bytes for each field are read and checked. HA. count. and key fIelds are stored in control storage for use in error correction (3330 only: retry and correct in control storage.) The commands and their e/j'ects fire: I. For 3330: if a Seek or Set Sector command has been executed. or if a device power-on or system reset has occurred, the byte is zero. If Data Overrun or Data Check is indicated. do one of the following: I. • 2. CMD 107 IBM CONFIDENTIAL RIAl) COMMANDS OBJlOCII\ I" eM 0 107 UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER o ('\ (J () o o (~ v f~ "y o 0'.' " o () o () o o () -.~-~- ( ~(C ( ( --_.. ----~ ( ( ( ~----- ( ( -~ - ------- ~ - ( ( (- -----",_.. ---"------~ --.-----~~~--.--- ( ( ( ( -- - ( ( (- (--~ ( ( READ COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 1 of 4) (- ( (~ ( ( ( (- READ COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 1 of 41 (- (- (' CMD 110 Refer to CMD 107 for command objectives. Read commands transfer data from a selected disk storage module to the system. READ COUNT (I 2 OR 92) II~g/~~ IN~~~Mf~4~1=JA ~I:::~~l. IA I T ~OA SYNC IN. READ 10 BYTE CLOCK THROUGH HOME ADDRESS AREA. 4-QH025 't~= 3.4.5-0H030 READ AND SEND BYTES TO CHANNEL ~ROM ~CCHH ~ILE 1,3,4-QG050 1,3,4-QG060 - 010 IAIT ~OR SYNC-IN. READ BYTES. --------- __ ~~5-QH090 1,2,5-QKOIO 1,2.5-QK020 I:::=~U IAIT ~OR SYNC-IN READ AND TRANS~ER COUNT DEVICE CHL-I 310 '.2,3,4.5-QK050 r-----~~----~:~:=~gg END ~ ~IELD. CHECK ~OR ERRORS. I-QKOIO 2,5-QK050 00 READ AND CHECK T2DATA C~:~k~~~'A~ LENGTH BYTES ~ROM 3,4-QK040 1,2,5-QK010 READ AND TRANS~ER DATA TO CHANNEL. 4·OH025 1.2.3.4.5-QH02O 7 ECCBYTES. 16 FOR 3340133601 ~IELD SEND CHANNEL END AND OEV I CE END TO CHANNEL. CHL-I 360 DEVICE CHL-I I-QKOIO 2,5-QK050 1,3,4-QK010 1,3,4-QK100 1,3,4-QK120 I ,3, 4-QS050 2,5-QH010 2,5-QH090 - 010 I,~:::g::~~g 1,2,3,4,5-QH030 ~~ READ AND TRANS~ER COUNT DATA TO CHANNEL DEVICE 3340J33S0 • IF HI. WAS MOVED DUE TO DEFECT SKIPPING THE CONTROLLER AUTOMATICALLY LOOKS FOR THE SYNC BYTE IN THE NEW POSITION 1.2.3.4·tg:~ DL • DATA LENGTH ECC • ERROR CORRECTION CODE KL • KEY LENGTH r-____ LOAD DATA LENGTH COUNTER. 2341991 4 - 3330/3340/3350 INTERMIX - PIN 41 1811 5 - 3340/3344 - PIN 4161116 2. ~OR A GIVEN BLOCK IN THE DIAGRAM, THE ACTUAL PAGE NUMBER MAY DEPEND ON THE DEVICE TYPE SELECTED. ABBREVIATIONS - 0 READ AND CHECK 7 ECC BYTES 18 FOR 3340J33501 CND 190 DEVICE SEND CHANNEL END AND DEVICE END TO CHANNEL. CHL-I 1,2,3,4,5-QG050 1,2,3,4,5-QG060 1,3,4-Q~030 1,3,4-~010 1,2,3,4,5-QG010 r-----~--~~~4:~:ggg~g ,5-QG060 ,4-QG310 ,4-QG330 ,4-QG350 3.4.QH32O : '-t~J~8 J.4·QFJ30 4·QF010 r-____~~~~~5-QH010 NOTES ~ r--_....J~--..., SEPARATE IRITE, READA SEARCH COMMc~oli\ AND OPERATIONS. CORRECTABLE ERRORS ARE HANDLED BY ECC AND SYSTEM EREP·S. 3330/3350· UNCORRECTABLE ERRORS ARE HANDLED BY COMMAND RETRY With 3330 device selected, if a data check is detected during a Read command, the CU uses ECC to correct the error, if correctable, or command retry if not. With 3340 or 3350 device selected, if a data check is detected during a Read command, the CU uses ECC to correct the error, if correctable and in the data field (there is no correction capability on HA, count or key fields). The 3350 uses command retry if the error is not correctable. I. THIS ~LOICHART IS USED 11TH MULTIPLE MICROCODE VERSIONS. THE ~OI..LOIING DIGITS ARE USED TO IDENTI~Y THE MICROCODE ANO CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE RE~ERENCESI I - 3330 ONLY - PIN 2341105, 2341116, 2341111 1.2.5·0F05O 2.5·QF06O 3.4·QF350 J.4·QFJ55 3.4·QF370 1.2.5·QF070 1.2.J.4.5·QG010 INDEX PROCESSING AND HEAD SIITCHING Read Count.Kev. Data; Read Kev. Data; and Read Data commands can operate on overflow records. Overflow records allow data records of more than one track in length. Overflow operations indicated bV a bit in theflag byte. CHL-I 420 CND 190 CND 190 3830-2 READ COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 1 of 41 ©Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1974. 1975. 1976 ('- .~ Refer to CMD 105 for sub-system components used. Read commands can operate in multi-track mode. Multi-track operations (high order bit of command on) allow the CU to cause automatic head switching at index time without a Seek Head command. (.-. CMD 110 READ COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 2 of 4) READ COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS IP8" 2 of 41 CMD 183 CMD 120 CMD 183 A I,. ,5-QKOIO 3,4-QK310 1.2,3 .... 5-QK030 1,2.3,4.5-QK04Q 1.2,3,4,5-QK050 BII .. 3.4-QK350 I.i,!") "QK090 r----~-~ READ DATA 106 OR 1161 1.2.5-QF050 2.5-QF06O 1.2.4.5-QF070 3.4·QF350 3.4·QF355 3-QF370 1.2.3.4.5-00010 1.2.4.5-00030 3·00310 3-QG33O SEPARATE WRITE ~6~A~~~~~~ CLOCK OPERATORS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5-QF070 4·0F03O 1.2.5-0F05O 2.5-0F055 1.3.4-QF06O 3.4·QF350 1.2.5-0F070 1. 2. 4. 5·0G010 1. 2. A. 5·0G04O 3.4·0F350 3.4·0F355 3·0F370 3.4·0F365 3·0G310 3·00330 I. 2. 3. 5-0G06O 1: ~: ~:1. ::3. t8li8!Jl 4·00040 1. 2. 3. ~: t8lig: 1.3.4·QF05O 1, 2. r-_ _ _.l.._ _..;3.:.j4-QF~F370 SET UP TO READ THE KEY FIELD 3.4-QF366 3-00310 3-00330 1,2,5-QG050 1,2,5-QG060 1,2-QH010 - 010 WA IT FOR SYNC IN. REAO 10 BYTE. 1,2,5-QKOIO 2,5-QK015 2,5-QK011 1,2,5-QK020 3,4-QK310 3,4-QK030 3,4-QK040 END OF FIELD. CHECK FOR ERRORS. ~QF06O SET UP TO READ THE DATA FIELD SET UP TO CLOCK KEY FIELD 1.2.3.4.5,OF05O 2.5·0F055 1.2.3.4.5·0F06O 3.4·0F350 3.4·0F355 3·0F370 1.2.3.4.5-0F070 1.2.3.4.5·00010 3·0G310 1.2.3.4.5-00030 3·00330 1.2.3.4.5.QG040 1.2.3.4.5.QG060 I,Z,3,.,5-QHOtO I ,2,3,4, 5-QHO I 0 .-____~____....."'4-QF350 . -____~~~~~5-QF350 LOAD DATA LENGTH COUNTER LQAD KEY-LENGTH COUNTER LOAD KEY-LENGTH COUNTER 1,3,4-QH020 1,2,3,4'g:g:::m '. READ AND TRANSFER COUNT FIELD TO CHANNEL ~~ QKIIO r-____~~~~~,5-QH030 . -____~~~~~\5-QH030 READ KEY FIELD AND TRANSFER KEY FIELD CLOCK THROUGH KEY AREA DATA DEVICE CHL-I 360 DEVICE 1:~:~!a.t8;gKo50 1,2,5-QKOIIO 1,2,5-QKIIO .-____~__. .~~350 READ DATA FIELD AND TRANSFER DATA TO CHANNEL 1,2,5-QKOIO DEVICE 3,4-QK310 1,2,3,4,5-QK030 CHL-I 360 1,2,3,4,5-QH030 1,2,3,4,5-QK040 1,2,3,4,5-QH090 r-______~I~,2~,3,;:~:~~gg 1,2,5-QK090 - 100 NOTES END OF FIELD CHECK FOR ERRORS I. 2. END OF FIELD. CHECK FOR ERRORS ~~~~0~~C~:~ll~S~S~~W~6~L~~~APLE DIGITS ARE USED TO IDENTIFY THE MICROCODE AND CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE REFERENCES. I - 3330 ONLY - PIN 234111105, 234111116, 234111111 ~ : ~~;g/~~ IN~~=Mf=4~1~JA ~~:::~~ 23411991 4 - 3330/3340/3350 INTERMIX - 416111111 5 - 3340/3344 - PIN 416111116 4·0H035 4·0H085 3·0H330 3·0H380 1.3.4,OHOBO 1.2.3.4.5·QH09O 1.2.6·QK010 3.4·QK310 1.2.3.4.5-QK03O 1.2.l.4.5.QK040 3.4·QK350 1.2.3.4.5.QK05O 1.2.5-QK09O 1.2.l.4.5.QK 110 ~~ :C¥~XENp~~~~~A~I~~~ ON THE DEVICE TYPE SELECTED. .-____~:.&.o.~~~5-QK 120 SEND CHANNEL END AND DEVICE END TO CHANNEL CHL-I END OF FIELD CND 190 3830-2 READ COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS IP8" 2 of 41 ©Copyright IBM Corporation 1912. 1973. 1974. 1975. 1976 o o o o o CMD 120 -------------------------~----------~------------------- () o 'J' '''\ . r". \~ /f"'~ I \~J 0 r~. V r~ ;J (-~ ~j (.-'- p(~. L . (" (-. ( ( ( (- ( READ COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 3 of 4) ( ( READ COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 3 of 41 ( CMD 125 .I,3,4-QKOIO r-____~. .~~~-QK050 IPL BUTTON PRESSED READ AND CHECK ECC BYTES I-QK 110 2,5-QF055 1,2-Q~0IgI0 TA, I~6 ~g, TO, REGISTERS ARE RESET BY SYSTEM ~ESET SEARCH FOR SYNC BYTE BEFORE NORMAL COUNT FIELD 1,2-QH020 - 020 START 110 FORCED IN CPU READ FLAG BYTE - 0 LOAD KEY LENGTH COUNTER 1,3,4-QH030 r-____~~~~.,-QH070 CLOCK THROUGH KEY AREA I ,2-QH030 - 030 READ DATA AND TRANSFER DATA FIELD TO CHANNEL SET FLAG IN STORAGE CONTROL TO CONTINUE 3340,3344,3350 NATIVE 4-QP395 4-QP390 4·QP090 4·01'395 r-____-J~~~~-QP090 DEY ICE CHL-I 360 1,3,4-QKOIO r-____-J~~~~-QK050 READ SECTOR NUMBER FROM THE MODULE TO THE SCU r-___...r.~~~090 READ SECTOR NUMBER FROM THE MODULE TO THE SCU READ AND CHECK ECC BYTES RE~~6NgA~~U~TtL~~Y' UNTIL INDEX DCCURS 3350 COMPATIBILITY MODES READ THE TRACK USED COUNT FROM THE DEVICE ANO CALCULATE THE EQUIVALENT 3330-1/3330-11 SECTOR VALUE. FOR THE LAST RECORD PROCESSED READ ANI.> TRANSFER COUNT, KE~IEt~ ~aTA CHANNEL DEVICE CIllO 170, INITIAL SELECTION 1,2-QH030 - 030 CLOCK THROUGH COUNT AREA AND STORE KEY ANO DATA LENCiTH BYTES DEYICE 3350 LOAD DATA LENGTH COUNTER .-______ PRESENT STATUS TO CHANNEL , ,2, NOTES RESEEK OPERATION IS PERFORMED INTERNALLY FOR THOSE 334413350 IMULATION DEVICES THAT ARE ALLOCATED TO THE INNER CYLINDERS ON THE PHYS I CAL SP ....IDLE. CU ISSUES RECALIBRATE TO DRIVE INSTEAD OF SEEK. SEEK TO CYLINDER 00 AND HEAD 00. CMO 190 I. THIS FLOWCHART IS USED WITH MULTIPLE MICROCODE YERSIONS.THE FOLLOWING DIGITS ARE USED TO IDENTIFY THE MICROCODE AND CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE REFERENCES. I - 3330 ONLY - PIN 2348805, 2348786, 2348187 2 - 3340 ONLY - PIN 2348151, 2348996 3 - 3330/3340 INTERMIX - PIN 2348802, 2348997 4 - 3330/3340/3350 INTERMIX - PIN 4168811 5 - 334013344 - PIN 4168816 2. FOR A GIVEN BLOCK IN THE DIAGRAM, THE ACTUAL PAGE NUMBER MAY DEPEND ON THE DEY ICE TYPE SELECTED. AB8REY 'AT I ONS ECC 8 TRANSFER SECTOR NUMBER TO THE SYSTEM UPDATE RESTART DISPLACEMENT COUNTER AT END OF DATA FIELD CONVERT TO LOGICAL SECTOR VALUE DECODE COMMAND AS READ IPL 1021 4-0P025 1.2.3.4.S.QPOIO 3.4·01'400 r-___...I~. .~....5-QP090 ~~~~5-QS060 PRESENT CHANNEL END ANO DEVICE END TO THE CHANNEL CHL-I CMD 190 SENO CHANNEL END AND DEYICE ENO TO CHANNEL AT END OF TRACK ERROR CORRECTION CODE 3830·2 READ COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS IPart 3 of 4) C)Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1974. 1975.1976 CMD 125 --- 00 00 (~ ",j ~~----- () (~, ~JJ ----~~----~-~----------~-~----~--~-----------~~ () o () - o f"''\ <-~) (~ \.y r~ 0 ,~) r~'\ \_j (Fj "'--_/" r~ ',)/ ( ""- ( F l ( ( ( ( ( ( (~' ( ( ( (: ( ( ( ( ( (,' ( ( ( ( ( -- ( ( ( ( ( THE DATA OR I YES THE YFO TO SYNC' THE SERDES TO THE 0 I SK SPEED. TURN ON XFEN "'AHCH TO SIGNAL W' CROPfIOCiII'" THAT lID I S NEADY I'OR NEXT aYTE DEYICE ~ch ,~{: : : :t.f byte from the drive i. de.e".llled in SE ROES and piKed in the MA regiuer j~~~:;:;" in the CU, the ST register btt 4 is turned on ?" ~:::- ~~ml.::~!..cc IS!OHI'::!:~"""~ I NCO WAIT FOR FilE AND CHANNEL IIC' SENDX~:;~E ~O £4 -KOOOO- IIOO.--Ull DATA FROM SHIFT REGI STER I S PLACED IN SERDES REGISTER UNDER CONTROl. OF THE alT RING I':£AO ,.,.EPA,IUTION laYPASS IF 011 I ENTEDJ ,. STAlIn F'LO LOCK-IN TO SE"'WO TRACK. STt II This IS DATA FIELD CONTINUE IX010G--IU4 1-.uS I " .·Me.......:: microprogram controUed. two byte. counter to read the number of bytes c~led out in the count field (Kl 0< DlDll. PLACE FlLL BYTE IN lolA REGISTER Z. SELECT T> 'QNSE FRDOI CONTR"- WOOUl.E. CHANNEL INTERFACE RAISES SERYICE IN/DATA IN TO THE CHANNEL _Jr IX~~~c --lS:" ,------, " k.Go .... n OlIGD) traub/mooting. C These blocks s.ve the bytes read. for storage in control storage buffer. DAft !'Tflfl I L~-J[l"OI)-L' DEY CE CO-'HS. 2. ,AIT FaA ECC • ERROII COIIRECT I ON CODE PLO • PHASE-LOCKED OSCILLATOII .,. READ/WRITE 'iFO • VAft.ABLE FREQUENCY OSCILLATOR JfI-X~O':lO COUNT-KEY CONTINUE ORE INTO BUFFER No.: This ,x.mpl, i. for inltroctidn on/y_ U•• ,"""hi". CAS /ogiC$ for DEYICE THE M I C,.QPftOGlUM IIOYES THE BYTE FRDOI lolA TO lID ABBREYI ATiONS ST}C DECREMENT LOW COUNTER TO'THE CONTROl. WClOILE. PREFIEl...O ..HALYSIS 1. 'SET uP APPfitOPR I 14. TE 0.0\ TIi STZ J4-···00-JD LOCK YF'O TO PLO. DP C,£HUATE I. O£TERWINE .... ,CH GAP TO BE ST3C IS RESET IF ON LAST 3 BYTES ECREMENT OUNTER I ._ns A a.. ..a.MC YICE 3. D~~R~~·~N{°lOW gECRo~~ENT HIGH COUNTER CHAN. S REG IS ,COUNTER AUTO LOADED I IX!!~~~-I~ WITH THIS BYTE A •• ",,-= SEPARATE DATA FRDOI YFO IS PLACED I N SH I FT REGISTEN. CQWMAICl DECQD£ (READI ~ING CMD 130 Transfer byte read to the MO register in the CU. The channel Interface transfers the MD register contents to the buffer register wtlen the byte is needed . • STATUS II' { II Read data from the disk and transfer the data to the system. "IIUEHT I N I TI AL , ( ( READ DATA TRANSFER READ DATA TRANSFER • ( DONE -COUNT OR KEY ~:~::O~!lh.---------------------------------t---------------------------------------------+--------------------------------~3-4X~:::~---I~!·r TURN OFF THE SET UP CONDITIONS THIS PAGE TRANSFERS BYTES FROM FilE TO CPU. THE BYTES READ ARE AUTOMATICAllY LOADED INTO THE SA. SB. SC or SO REGS DEPENDING ON THE STATE OF MC BITS 6 AND 7 cr.=::0l··' _ u ... _ •• DONE - BUFFER MCI-3 X~:~I~'I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ ON THISEND. PAGE ISSETALERT. BY SYNC IN, CHECK ORST4 ERROR -~ . MB. MC = DATA COUNTS PRE DECREMENTED GB = ID BYTE C'-' ST1 NB. NC. NO = MClt. 2. 3 -X"oo-oc ST2 = t IF DATA FIELD/DO NOT STORE NO CHAN XFER ST3 = 0 IF ON LAST 3 BYTES CHECK FOR CLOCKING OR TRUNCATION ~ II Transfer bytes read from MA register to a buffer register and bu. in to the channel. Maintains sync with channel. ~ ~ ~ ....... ~ ~ SCU ~ ~ ~ ~~:~~~ :~~~::~ ~~ule ~ number of bytes re~ to end operltion. ::~@jm:m'ft:::::tl:1:m:{t;f~:~mr:::a;::\r cr.:!:o:-:i:1I ( . . o•••• u ... III DRIVE CONTROL MODULE Transfen controls to set up the drive circuits to read dlta. Thi •• xampl. is for instructional pur· _only. .. Control ond CONTROL CIRCulTI H..d i...Ioct.d. """ reid circuits send ell.. to the SERDES DrlW , Locks to the data from drive and ct. serializes the data. Transft" fufl by_ from buffer register to MA ntgister in CU. Seu ST 4 bit when byte i. ,"ady. 3830·2 READ DATA TRANSFER eCopyrighllBM Corporation 1972. 1973, 1914. 197&. 1971 CMD 130 C ~------------~ ---------------------.---~------ ------------- --- SENSE COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS SENSE COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS Errors Code Command CMD140 Function Detail Description Data Transferred Set Unit Check-Channel and Device End Comments Single Track Multi-Track Test I/O 00 - Determine the status of a device on a channel. CMD 145 One status byte. Command Reject. Bus Out Parity. Status byte is normally zero. Sense I/O 04 - Determine the type of error or unusual condition that caused the last unit check. CMD 145 24 bytes of sense information. Command Reject. Bus Out Parity. Sense data is reset after transfer. Read and Reset Buffered Log A4 - Supply usage or error statistics on the addressed drive. CMD 145 24 bytes of statistics on the drive drive. Command Reject. Bus Out Parity. Data is reset after transfer. Read Diagnostic Status 1 44 - Determine the type of error(s) found on running a diagnostic test (part of a diagnostic write command). CMD 150 16 bytes of error code message. Command Reject. Bus Out Parity. Overrun. If the command is not preceded by a Diagnostic Write or Load command, 16 bytes of data from the error code. message area are transferred. ,' Transfer a diagnostic test from the storage control unit to the system (after a diagnostic load command). Device Reserve - B4 512 bytes of diagnostic test data. CMD 150 24 bytes of sense information. Command Reject. Bus Out Parity. If command is not the first one in the chain, Command Reject will be set in sense data. CMD 150 24 bytes of sense information. Command Reject. Bus Out Parity. If command is not the first one in the chain, Command Reject will be set in sense data. Determines the I/O device type and model number. CMD 145 7 bytes of sense information. Command Reject. Bus Out Parity. Supported only in 3340/3344 Intermixmicrocode (PIN 4168816) and 3330/3340/3350. Intermix microcode (PIN 4168811 at EC 442498 or later.) Aesets bits in control storage and in controller to cancel reservation for addressed device for another path. It then sets bits to reserve addressed device via this path. CMD 150 24 bytes of sense information Command Aeject. Bus Out Parity. Equipment Check. Supported only in 3330/3340/3350 Intermix microcode (PIN 4168811at EC 437464 or laterl. Set bits in control storage and in controller (with String Switch feature) to reserve addressed devices. Transfer 24 bytes of sense data to the channel. I Device Release - 94 Store null value in control storage and in controller (with String Switch feature) to cancel reservation for devices addressed. Transfer 24 bytes of sense data to the channel. Sense I/O Type E4 Unconditional Aeserve 14 - 3830·2 SENSE COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS CMD140 OCopyright IBM Corporation 1872. 1873. 1874. 1875. -t8M () 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 () 0 (~ v...y t'r-""I 'J (~ ",-y r~ V (--., I "-_J ' r~ ',,~ ('~ ""j ("'"), "'--' a () f""" V (~ ,y -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 . ? If~ I ,,'-lL (- ( (- SENSE COMMANDS - '" -. (- (- ( SENSE COMMANDS-OBJECTIVES OBJECTIVES TEST I/O (00) READ AND RESET BUFFERED LOG (A4) • If no errors occur, return zero status to the channel. DEVICE RESERVE (B4) Refer to CMD 145 for flowchart and CAS references. • Transfer data from control storage to the channel. • • Test I/O is not part of a CCW from the channel. • Test I/O is an immediate command and has only one status byte. Refer·to CMD 165 for subsystem components used. Refer to CTRL 650 for layout of log data in control storage. Refer to CMD 145 for flowchart and CAS references. Refer to SENSE 1 for environmental data meanings. • The initial status byte presented is normally zero. • • If status for the selected device has been stacked or is pending (see CMD 181), present it to the channel. Log data is information pertaining to the operation of a given device. • Data transferred is the same as sense format 6. • 1. If limits are exceeded, a Unit Check is presented, Sense data in control storage is not changed unless a Unit Check occurs on the Test I/O command (Bus Out Parity, Command Reject). 2. If the CPU program calls for the data (that is, the end-of-day routine) with a Read and Reset Buffered Log command, the sense data is set up and transferred to the channel. To clear the complete log, the command must be repeated for each device attached. Refer to CMD 145 for flowchart and CAS references. Refer to SENSE 1 for sense data layout and bit meanings. • Sense data was set up, in control storage, in the proper format. This was done by the end procedure routine of the command that presented the unit check. (See CMD 190.) A Unit Check status on a command sets up a contingent connection state (see CMD 181) on the selected controller/ device. The Unit Check also forces a busy condition to other addresses. • Check for valid command. • No requirement for preceding CCWs. • If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in status. Set Command Reject in sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL 650.) • If no errors occur, return zero status to the channel. • Transfer 24 bytes of sense data from control storage to the channel. Fewer than 24 bytes are transferred if the channel truncates the operation. • Reset the sense data in control storage. • Present Channel End and Device End in ending status. b. If CCW count < 512, transfer CCW count and set Command Reject. and a Sense I/O command will transfer format 6 data. SENSE I/O (04) • 1. If the command is chained from a preceding Diagnostic Write CCW, transfer 16-byte error code message. Sixteen is maximum; if CCW count is less than 16, transfer CCW count only.) 2. If the command is chained from a preceding Diagnostic Load CCW, transfer 512-byte block of data (diagnostic test). a. If CCW count> 512, transfer only 512 bytes. • Check for valid command. • No requirement for preceding CCWs. • If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in status. Set Command Reject in sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL 650.) • If no errors occur, return zero status to the channel. • Set up sense data format 6 in control storage. Normally, this data is in coded form in log area of control storage. • Transfer 24 bytes of data to the channel. (Twenty-four is maximum; transfer fewer bytes if CCW count is less.) • Reset log area for the selected device. Reset sense data area of control storage. • Present Channel End and Device End in ending status. READ DIAGNOSTIC STATUS 1 (44) Refer to CMD 160 and CMD 165 for use of command and subsystem components used. Refer to CTRL 650 for layout of control storage error code message data. Refer to CMD 150 for flowchart and CAS references. • Check for valid command. • No requirement for preceding CCWs. • If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in status. Set Command Reject in sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL l?50.) 3. If no diagnostic Write or Load command, transfer 16 bytes from error code message area. (Data is invalid.) If CCW count is less than 16, transfer CCW count only.) • • Used with SCUs with more than one channel .. attached or with the string switch feature installed. (See Note 1.) ,. Check for valid command. • No requirement for preceding CCWs, except that the command must not be preceded by a Set File Mask command in the same chain. • If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End, and device end in status. Set Command Reject in sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL 650.) • If no errors, return zero status to the channel. • Check addressed controller/device: 1. If Bus Out Parity Error or Command Reject is indicated, present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending status. Set appropriate bits in sense data. If no errors occur, present Channel End and Device End in ending status. UNCONDITIONAL RESERVE (14) • Used with SCUs with the string switch feature installed. (See Note 1.) • Check for valid command. • Must be first command in chain. • If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End, and device end status. Set Command Reject in sense data (see SENSE 1 and CTRL 650). • Balance of operation is the same as a Sense I/O operation. If controller is out of service (powered down Interface Disabled, etc.), set up to present condition code 3. (See Note 2.) 2. If device is reserved to other channel or control unit, set Pending Device End indicator. 3. If device is available, set Reserve indication in the control unit and/or the controller. • Balance of the operation is the same as a Sense I/O operation. DEVICE RELEASE ('4) • Used with SCUs with more than one channel attached or with the string switch feature installed. (See Note 1.) • Check for valid command. • No requirement for preceding CCWs, except that the conunand must not be preceded by a Set File Mask command in the same chain. • If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End, and device end in status. Set Command Reject in sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL 650. • If no errors, return zero status to the channel. • Check addressed controller/device: • If no errors, return zero status to the channel. • Check addressed controller/device: I. If controller or device is 3350 operating in 3330·1 com· patibility mode, set Command Reject. 2. Force reset of Reserve indication to addressed device on other channel and set Reserve indication for addressed device in control unit and controller. 1. If controller is out of service (powered down Interface Disabled, etc.), set up to present condition code 3. (See Note 2.) Notes: 1. Refer to device MLM for circuit description of string switch feature. 2. On SCU with 3330 feature and without string switch feature, the command is executed. 3830·2 SENSE COMMANDS - OBJECTIVES C>CopvrighllBM CofPCll"81ion 1972.1973.1974.1975.11178 eM D 142 eM D 142 ( SENSE COMMANDS - OBJECTIVES (Continued) 2. If device is reserved to other channel or control unit, set Pending Device End indicator. 3. If device is available, reset Reserve indication in SENSE COMMANDS - OBJECTIVES (Continued) CM D 143 SENSE COMMANDS - OBJECTIVES (Continued) CMD 143 the control unit and/or the controller. • Balance of the operation is the same as a Sense I/O operation. SENSE I/O TYPE (E4)* i. Refer to CMD 145 for flowchart and CAS references. • Check for valid command. • No requirement for preceding CCWs. • If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End, and device end in status. Set Command Reject in sense data. (See SENSE I and CTRL 650.) • If no errors, return zero status to the channel. • Transfer 7 bytes of sense data to the channel as follows (Hex): B te 0 'FF' y Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte ... • I 2 3 4 5 6 " 38 } Control '30' Unit '02' T e Device T No. Device T No. Device Model No. Present Channel End and Device End in ending status. *For microcode PINs 4168811 and 4168816 only. 3830·2 C>Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973.1974.1975.19'" ()OOOO r~ V 0 0 . . ~, IV I~ ~ 0 0 tfF~. J 0 t"~ ~j /'.......,. '",,-)I A'~ 0. , 0 r) "'- 0 0 .1 ~' Ij ~' 0 '- (') I . ~ 0 0 OOOOO(~ --------_ (' F l (- {' (" ('- ( (~ (-' (, (C (," (- (' (~ ------- .. (- ( ( .. ( (: ( (,~' ('\ (' f (- (- ( (~ (- ( SENSE COMMANDS--FLOWCHARTS (Part 1 of 21 SENSE COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 1 of 2) • (~ ("'\ (~ CMD 145 Execution of Sense Commands transfers sense and status information to using system, • SenSe information summary referenced on SENSE 1. CMD 183 ~----~~~,~~.. ,-".I.I READ AND RESET BUFFERED LOG IA41 1,2,3,.,5-QEObO 1,2,3,.,5-0E080 1,2,3,4,5-QE090 I,Z,3,4,S-QROIO .-______-W~~~~5-0R020 TRANSFER SENSE BYTES TO THE CHANNEL CHL-I 31>0 1,2,3,.,5-QQ090 ~ 1,2,3,4,5-00095 ____~~~~~5-00120 SET UP THE USAGEIERROR DATA FOR TRANSFER TO THE CHANN I.. CTRL 1>50' CHL-I 360 TRANSFER USAGEIERROR DATA TO THE CHANNEL C"D 190 CU TRANSFERS 7 BYTES OF SENSE INFORMATION TO THE SYSTEM TO IDENTIFY DEVICE TYPE, ----- 1.2,3,4,5-00010 1,2,3,4,5-00020 1,2,3,4,5-00030 1,2,3,4,5-0001>0 1,2,3,4,5-00390 1,2,3, •• 5-0EQ10 THIS COMMAND IS USED TO DETERMINE THE CONTROL UNIT TYPE AND DEVICE TYPE OF THE SELECTED DEVICE. 1.2,3.4,5-QR020 r-______. .~~~5-0S01>0 PRESENT CHANNEL END AND DEVICE END TO THE CHANNEL 4.5-0EOI0 4.5-0E06O 4.5-0EOBO 4.5-0E090 4.5-00010 4.5-0R040 4.5-QR010 4.5-0R020 TRANSFER 1 BYTES OF INFORMATIOo/ TO THE CHANN E L. 4.5-0S06() 4.5-0S090 PRESENT CHANN EL END AND DEVICE END TO THE CHANNEL. CHL-I NDrES I, THIS FLOWCHART IS USED WiTH MULTIPLE vER510~S, THE FOLLOWING DIGITS ARE USED TO IDt:NTIFY THE MICROCO"F AND MIC~~CODE COR~ES?~~OING I 2 3 4 5 - CAS PAGE CMD 190 REF~~~NCE5: 3330 ONLY - PIN 2348805, 2348186, 2]4e787 3341 ONLY - PIN 234d157, 2348996 3330/33 4 0 INTER~IX - PIN 2348802, 234~99r 3330/3340/3350 INTERMIX - PIN 416881 I 3340/3344 - PIN 4168811> 2. FOR A GIVEN BLOCK AC rUAL PACE Nt..:,",Sf R DE~lCE ~30·2 CMD 190 CMD 190 "FOR MICROCODE PIN. 416aSll ANO 416aS16 ONLY. IN THE DIAGRAM, THE M.~ '( DEPE"'O ON THE TYPE 5£LECTEO. SENSE COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 1 of 21 CMD 145 ( o () 0 0 000000 ---- ( F L (- (- (~ ( (- (' ( ( ( ( ( (" (" (' ( ( (- ( ( (- (-'\ .. r- SENSE COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 2 of 2) ( ( ( ----- ------- (' ( ( (' ( II (- (,- CMD 150 SENSE COMMANOS--FLOWCHARTS (Part 2 of 21 CMD 175 NO 1,i!,3,4,5-0D040 1,i!,3,4,5-0D042 r-____~~~~~5-QEOI0 SET UNIT CHECK STATUS (COMMANDREJECT AND INVALID SEQUENCE) THOSE DEvICE ADDRESSES THAT ARE BUSY WITH OTHER CHANNEL WILL HAVE RESERVE PENDING lNOICATOR SET. SENO ZERO STATUS TO CHANNEL YES CHL-I 420 I,2,3,4,5-0E010 1,2,3,4,5-QE060 1,2,3,4,5-0£0110 1,2,3,4,5-QE090 1,2,3,4,5-QR010 SET UP TO TRANSFER 512 BYTES OF DATA FRO... CONTROL STORAGE TO THE CHANNEL: TRANSFER DATA ORllO OR120 RESET SWITCH. RESET ASSIGNMENT. DESELECT DRIVE. SELECT DRIVE. NOIRELEASE CO...... AND I CTRL 650 4.as120 4.5-Of'JI] 4-0f'311 YES r-______~~~~~5-QR020 SET UP TO TRANSFER 16 BYTES OF ERROR IoIESSAGE DATA TO THE CHANNEL 1.1.J·OP111 YES 4-05120 4·OPJI] 4-OPJ1S 1.2.3-OP212 SET CHANNEL END AND DEVICE AND 1,2,3,4,5-QP030 STATUS RELEASE DEVICE ORl30 ----- RESERVE DEVICE CLEAN UP CONTROL STORAGE r-______LL~~~5-QS020 r-______~~~~~5-QW210 kET~I.)AVAIL_. ~-___,r__---I SET COIol ... AND REJECT, CHANNEL END, DEVICE END, AND UN IT CHECK IN STATUS 1,2,3,4, !i-QRO I 0 r-____~~~~£;5-QR020 SEND 24 SENSE BYTES TRANSFER 16 BYTES OF DATA TO THE CHANNEL 1,2,3,4,5-QS060 r-______~~~~~5-0S090 CHL-I 360 1,2,3,4,5-QR020 1,2,3,4,5-05060 r -______LL~~~5-QS090 CTRL 650 CHL-I 360 PRESENT STATUS TO CHANNEL PRESENT CHANNEL END AND OE¥ICE ENO TO THE CHANNEL PRESENT STATUS TO CHANNEL QR140 NOTES I. THIS FLOWCHART IS USED WITH ...ULTIPLE IoIICROCOOE VERSIONS. THE FOLLOWING DIGITS ARE USEO TO IDENTIFY THE 1oI1CROCOOE ANO CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE REFERENCES: I 2 : 5 - 3330 ONLY - PIN 234111105, 234111116, 234111111 - 3340 ONLY - PIN 23411151, 23411996 : ~~~g~~~:g/~~~~R~~~ERIoI~~N_2~1~II~f611~~iIl991 - 3340/3344 - PIN 416111116 2. FOR A GIVEN BLOCK IN THE OlAGRAloI, THE ACTUAL PAGE NU ... BER IoIAY DEPEND ON THE OEvICE TYPE SELECTEO. CHL-I ~ C/oID 190 EXIT TO RESERVE DRIVE SET UNIT CHECK ST A TUS (COM· MAND REJECT ANO INVALID COMMAND!. CIoiD 1'10 CIoiO 190 CMD 190 See 3830-2 -r447461 EC Hist~ Mar 76 C!;)Coo,!,igh. IBM C~.pvation 447463 L 16 Dec ~ 1911. 197J, 1974. 1975,1976 SENSE COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 2 of 21 CMD 150 ( TRANSFE.H INLINE DIAGNOSTICS TO CONTROL.UNIT TRANSFER INLINE DIAGNOSTICS TO CONTROL UNIT • Diagnostics stored in system diagnostic library can be sent to SCU to test subsystem . • CMD16,O STORAGE CONTROL UNIT CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT After diagnostic is run. error code is returned to system. To provide maximum facility availability. the SCU can execute diagnostic tests on a drive concurrent with normal system operations on the remaining drives. This mode of operation allows the customer engineer to diagnose and repair most drive failures while the facility continues to operate other attached drives. The SCU provides a transient block of 512 bytes (128 words) of c.ontrol storage to allow temporary residence for a specific diagnostic test. The transient area is loaded under control of the Online Test Executive Program (OL TEP). A special command. Diagnostic Write. loads a selected test into control storage and instructs the CU to execute the test. Loading and execution can also be initiated from the CE panel. After the test. error message information or test results are transferred from the SCU to main storage by a Read Diagnostic Status 1 command. If the CE panel is used. the test results are displayed in the CE panel indicators. 4 • CONTROL CIRCUITS Decode the Diagnostic Write command. • Set up and control the transfer of data from channel interface to the control storage diagnostic buffer area. 1 • • SYSTEM 3 Executes a Start I/O instruction that addresses a Diagnostic Write command. After receiving Device End status. executes a Start I/O instruction that addresses a Read Diagnostic Status 1 command. SYSTEM ..... .... y Store 16·byte error code in the control storage buffer area if errors are found. • Send Channel End and Device End status to the channel. Decode Read Diagnostic Status 1 command. • Transfer error code from the control storage to the channel on Read Diagnostic Status 1 command. • Checks parity of data trans· ferred to the SCU. • Send Channel End and Device End status to the channel. CHANNEL ..... ...... CHANNEL CONTROLS CONTROL CIRCUITS ... ...... CHl·ll ~ Error Message Data • • Ir Status and Run inline diagnostic. • Controls timing of data to and from the channel. ..... Address. Command ...... and Diagnostic Program Data CHANNEL INTERFACE • CTRll ~ ~ ,, Diagnosti c Program Control Out Diagnostic Program Data In Address Control ...... 2 CONTROL STORAGE CTRL 600 CHANNEL • Transfers address and corr" information to the seiecte subsystem. • Transfers status of subsysrc to the system. • Transfers diagnostic data the subsystem. 5 t. CONTROL STORAGE • Stores main microprogram to control Diagnostic Write and Read Diagnostic Status 1 commands. • Transfers error code from subsystem to the system. • Stores diagnostic from system in a buffer area. • Stores error code for any errors found. 3830-2 G~qX:~25~f02-r ~;;1~ot~J L~~~~s.~-r~[ ~i;~~~~l ~;~~~~:T-©C"py:t ..;i··18"l () a 0 0 (,lfPI,f.H;"n a 197'2. 1'313, 197-', 197~. 19,,) () 0 (~ 0 (~ \....Y - ._ L--'=r~__=r~=J (~~ \""J! () 0 0 C) ('!; ',y TRANSFER INLINE DIAGNOSTICS TO CONTROL UNIT ~ i',J) ~ "'J ( \..J! ~ \.) 0 'r"'"J (. ...., '''-_.Y r\ i . \,J ('l ".J (~ \.....Y ('''1 ~ f"i \.J rl "'--.j C) 0 - (''1 \;."J CMD 160 0 r' v ,0 "--.Ji r',,-. -------~-- c p('; (' L. C' C: (- (,C, (" ( (-" (~'. (, ( (-. (~ -- "--~ -----_. --~-.----.-- c: (- (' (' (. (' (- (,-' (~' C" ~-~ (~\ (:~ (-' • Diagnostic tests resident in diagnostic library stored on the CE diagnostic 23FD disk (MPl file) can be read to CPU of using system . • Execution of Diagnostic load CCW followed by Read Diagnostic Status 1 transfers 512 bytes from 23FD to CPU. 4 Any diagnostic test stored on the CE 23FD disk can be selected by the using system. To transfer the diagnostic test, the using system must execute a Diagnostic Load CCW followed by a Read Diagnostic Status 1 command. The Diagnostic Load command transfers 512 bytes (containing the specific diagnostic) from the 23FD to control storage. The Read Diagnostic Status 1 command then transfers the 512 bytes from control storage to the using system main storage. Refer to CMD 25 and CMD 30 for description of the command operations. 5 23FD DRIVE (e,;, (~. CMD 165 23FD INTERFACE • Provides drive for disk. • Starts 23FD drive motor. • Provides for movement of head from track to track. • Moves ahead to track selected by the Diagnostic Load commands. Picks up data signals from disk via read • Moves disk into contact with the head. head. • Reads 512 bytes of data from the disk. • (~' ,,~ READ DIAGNOSTICS TO SYSTEM READ DIAGNOSTICS TO SYSTEM SCU CPU 1 (" SYSTEM • Executes a Start I/O instruction that addresses a Diagnostic Channel command. • After receiving Device End status, executes a Start 1/0 instruction that addresses a Read Diagnostic Status 1 command. Address Data Command Data SYSTEM .... 3 ..... CHANNEL .... ~ .... I CHANNEL CONTROLS CHL-11 ~ . ....... Transfers address and command information to the selected subsystem. • Transfers status of subsystem to the system. • Transfers diagnostic from subsystem to system storage. Diagnostic Data 23FD INTERFACE MPL 245 Diagnostic , Data .... .... ~ l Servo Drive ~ ~ Servo Control Read Control Powe r On Control CTRL 1 ~ , Diagnostic Data In .4~ Diagnostic Sense Data 7 Out, and Diagnostic Microprogram • ...... CONTROL STORAGE CTRL 600 CHANNEL • , CONTROL CIRCUITS Address Control 2 23FD DRIVE MPL 1 • Controls timing of data to and from the channel. • Checks parity of data transferred to the SCU . ....... Status and Diagnostic Data CHANNEL INTERFACE CONTROL CIRCUITS Decode the Diagnostic Load command. • Send Start, Seek and Read control lines to the 23FD interface according to the control byte sent with the Diagnostic Load command. • Transfer diagnostic data from 23FD to the control storage. 6 CONTROL STORAGE • • Stores microprogram to control the operation of subsystem. Transfer Channel End and Device End to the channel after data is read into control storage. • Decode Read Diagnostic Status 1 command. • Stores diagnostic data read from 23FD by the Diagnostic Load operation. This data is then transferred by the Read Diagnostic Status 1 command. • Control transfer of data from control storage to the channel. • Transfer subsystem status to the channel. Reads diagnostic data out to CU on diagnostic sense operation. • Control transfer of data (512 bytes) from control storage to the channel. • • Send Channel End and Device End status to the channel. 3830-2 READ DIAGNOSTICS TO SYSTEM ©Copyright IBM Corporation 1972.1973,1974.1975,1976 CMD 165 (' (~ POLLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 1 of 4) • • • • • POLLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 1 of 4) Poll for interrupt conditions. Check for channel selection. Check for inline operations. Handle request in conditions. Logically connect this control unit (and addressed controller and device) to the channel so that commands, status, and data may be transferred. CMD 170 4,5-QB334 - 034 DROP TAG GATE 5-08424 4-08324 1,3-08025 5-08428 4-08330 1,3-08027 INITIALIZE POLLING. RAISE TAG GATE. 5-0B253 4-QB319 SET BSCA TO HIGHEST AVAILABLE CONTROLL.ER WITH AVAILABLE DEVICE. SET BSDA TO LOWEST AVAILABLE DEVICE ON THIS CONTROLLER. SET TAG BUS TO STRING SWITCH CONTROL 07 2-QB026 SET BSCA TO HIGHEST AVAILABLE CONTROLL.ER WI TH AVAILABLE DEVICE. SET BSDA TO LOWEST AVAILABLE DEVICE ON THIS CONTROLLER. STORE BSCA AND BSDA IN INTERRUPT BUFFER. USE TO BUFFER REOUE:;'" INISI. PERFORM TAG SEOUENCE 5-08425 4-08325 3-QB025 4,5-0B337 ~~~-~037 UPDATE CHANNEL. POINTERS NO 5-08425 4-08324 1,3-08026 UPDATE CHANNEL POINTERS TO NEXT CHANNEL 5-QB435 4-0B335 - 035 UPDATE TIMERS 5-QB435 4-QB335 ,...._ _....I.l.o.iIo...I~'035 NO INITIALI ZE TIMERS RAISE TAG GATE TO POLL. NEXT STRING 5-08426 NOTES 4-08326 1,3-QB026 5-QB337 4-QB337 - 037 1,3-QB034 UPDATE CHANNEL - 4 RAISE SUPPRESSIBLE I NTERRUPT FOR THIS CHANNEL SET FLAG TO ALLOW CONTROLLER DISABLE NO - 067 RESET LONG CONNECTI ON AND ALLOW DISABLE IF FLAG IS SET I. THIS FLOWCHART IS USED WITH MULTIPLE MICROCODE VERSIONS. THE FOLLOWING DIGITS ARE USED TO IDENTIFY THE MICROCODE ANO CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE REFERENCES: I - 3330 ONLY - PIN 2348805, 2348786, 2348787 2 3340 ONLY - PIN 2348757, 2348996 : : ~~~g~~~:g/~~X~R~A~ERM~'N_2~1~8~~68~~18997 5 - 3340/3344 - PIN 4168816 2. QBOXX REFERENCES BECOME QB3XX IF TWO CHANNEL SWITCH ADDITIONAL IS INSTALLED. 3. SET BSCA. RAISE SUPPRESSIBLE REQUEST IN. STORE INTERRUPT IN BUFFER AND BUFFER REQUEST IN. 4,5-QB319 EXIT TO INLINE ROUTINE RAISE TAG GATE TO POLL. NEXT STRING BU"FER STATIC I SUPPRESS IBLEl INTE'IPUPTS FOR TH I S CHANNEL INITIALIZE TIMERS .-______ 5-08424 4-08324 1,3-08026 STORE BSDA AND BSCA IN INTERRUPT BYTES ALLOW DISABLE UNFREEZE CHANNEL SWITCH 5-0B435 4-QB335 ,...._ _....I.l.o.iIo...I,;;j-1IIII 035 UPDATE STR ING TO BE POLLED. (START WITH HIGHEST! ~g~U~LG~X~ ~RI=A~~~~RS='THE DEVICE TYPE SELECTED. ABBREVIATIONS BSCA BSDA OCC EDI ODE PCH RAISE UNSUPPRESSIBLE I NTERRUPT FOR TH I S CHANNEL 5-08427 4-Q1132B 1,3-08026 ALLOW CHANNEL UNLOCK NEXT CHANNEL. o I SABLE. • • • • •• BIT SIGNIFICANT CONTROLLER ADDRESS BIT SIGNIFICANT DEVICE ADDRESS DISCONNECTED COMMAND CHAINING EXPECTED DEVICE INTERRUPT OUTSTANDING PACK CHANGE DEVICE ENO ....______________-., A9 383C)..2 POLLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 1 of 4) CMD 170 C)Copyright IBM Corporation 1912. 1913. 1914. 1975. 1976 JOO f) ~' 0 0 ",----,,' 0. 0 J (, " \, ~':", ,'- ,~ I \'--}: o o o o ,0, \~ o o 00 (,):' " o o o o o o 00 ,j 4~ ------- ----- r- (- (- (' (-- (-~ (- (- ( (-- c- (- ( (~ ( (- (- ( (~;- (- (~-' (- (- c- ( (- (-- POLLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 2 of 4) POLLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 2 of 4) (--' (-' (' CM 0 173 CMD 170 08 SET BUSY 13340AND ONLINEI IN STATUS 5-QB450 1,2,3-QB100 4,5-QBtOO 1,2-QB050 3,4-QB050 NO 1,3-QB053 - 3 RAISE OP IN ANO ADDRESS IN PROPAGATE SELECT OUT ISP OP lEI I -> ST2 IF SUPPRESSIBLE OR UNSUPPRESSIBLE INTERRUPT 5,QB340 4,QB343 - 040 DECODE DEVICE ADDRESS SET OFF-LINE FILE STATUS 2,3,4, BUFFER STORE DEVICE AND STATUS. CURRENT ADDRESS BSDA 5-QB450 4-QB350 1,2,3-QB050 INOTE 21 - 100 SET STRING SWITCH AS.SIGNMENT RAISE OPERATE IN AND ADDRESS IN 4,5-QB320 - 020 SAVE OEVICE LIMITS. CHECK FOR RPS FEATURE ON 3340 SELECT MODULE SET CUEND FLAG CND 170 ENABLE LONG CONNECTION '----... NO NO NOTES I. THIS FLOWCHART IS USED WITH MULTIPLE MICROCODE VERSIONS. THE FOLLOWING DIGITS ARE USED TO IDENTIFY THE MICROCODE AND CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE REFERENCES. ~ : ~~~g g~~ : ~l~ ~~:A9g~~'2~~:=~:6. 2348787 ~ : ~~~gl~~:g!~~~~R~~~ERM~'N_2~1~8~~68~~t8997 ~ NOTES RESET THE AVAILABLETO-OTHER-CHANNEL INDICATION. SET EXPECTED DEVICE INTERRUPT FOR THIS CHANNEL IEDII. 5 - 3340/3344 - PIN 4168816 1,3-0B054 PRESENT CU BUSY STATUS r-_ _"--.Iio.o.II~4 SET FILE STATUS TO ZERO AND 1-> ST3C 2. ~~~ ~c¥0XENp~~~C~U~~E~HijA~I~~~~~6 ON THE DEVICE TYPE SELECTED. 3. QBIOO FOR 3330 WITH STRING SWITCH 4. ~:~+~H ~~gf¥lo~~~3:SI~N!~~LE~aNNEL ABBREVIATIONS BSDA= BIT SIGNIFICANT DEVICE ADDRESS CE = CHANNEL END DE DEVICE ENO EDI = EXPECTED DEVICE INTERRUPT RPS = ROTATIONAL POSITION SENSING NO 5-08260 4-08059 1.3-08060 2-08260 START 1/0 ENABLE LONG SELECTION. CMD 175 CMD 175 I. THIS FLOWCHART IS USED WITH MULTIPLE MICROCODE VERSIONS. THE FOLLOWING DIGITS ARE USED TO IDENTIFY THE MICROCODE ANO CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE REFERENCES. I - 3330 ONLY - PIN 2348805, 2348786, 234S7aJ 2 - 3340 ONLY - PIN 2348757, 2348996 ~ : ~~~gl~~:g/~~~~R~~~ERM~'N_2~1~8~~68~~t899J 5 - 3340/3344 - PIN 4168816 2. QB060 FOR 3330 WITH STRING SWITCH 3. QB065 FOR 3330 WITH STRING SWITCH 4. FOR A GIVEN BLOCK IN THE DIAGRAM, THE MAY DEPEND ON THE TYPE SELECTED. ABBREVIATIONS MCI= MISCELLANEOUS CONTROL INFORMATION PLO= PHASE-LOCKED OSCILLATOR 3830-2 POLLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 2 of 4) @COPVri9htlBMCorporation 1972. 1973. 1974, 1976, 1978 1,3,4,5-QC020 ____~____~~-QB2.0 CMD 173 ( POLLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 3 of 4) POLLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 3 of 4) CMD 173 RESET MCI BYTES 2 AND 3 RESET FILE STATUS BITS 0, I. CMD 175 FAST PLO LOCK IN 2 CM0176 CMD 176 8,----...1 G ,..------' I-QB060INOTE ,.----...-....;('--lII0I........, UNIT CHK STATUS. MICROPROGRAM DETECTED ERRORS. EXIT TO UNTIMED END PROCEDURE ~ ______~~~~., GET STRING SWITCH STATUS 4-08061 1·08052 3·08060 MODIFY RESERVE OR RELEASE TO PERFORM SENSE OPERATION. 1->ST2 IF DEVICE END OR PACK CHANGE OUTSTANDING ,-L~~~~'5-QBIOO SET LONG CONNECTION IN STRING SWITCH INCLUDE BUSY IN STATUS MODULE SELECT r-______.. .. ~ ~5-QBIOO GET 3-0F-b CODE AND STORE DROP ADDRESS IN WA IT FOR RESPONSE FROM MODULE r-______~~~~5-QSObO r-______~-w-w~~5-QBOeO REQUEST MODULE STATUS EXIT TO UNTIMED E~g ~~~~~~¥RE STATUS 4·08060 3·08660 RESET BRb, BRT '1 GNORE ALL FILE STATUS BITS EXCEPT ONLI NE GET 3 OF b CODE. CHECK ~Ht~ED~m~~ LlMI TS COMPARE RETRY CCW 4·08060 3·08660 ~ ________~~~4~,5-QBOeO CMD 190 FETCH FILE MASK TO SA ERROR LOGGING DECISIONS. EXIT TO UNIT CHECK SUBROUTINE (QS040). SET MCI :) BYTE UPDATE MCI BYTES 2 AND 3 CND 210 CZJ C/IO leJ CMD DECODE 3830-2 CMD 175 POLLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 3 of 4) © Copyright I BM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1974. 1915. 1976 /-" ,,,-Y ,~~" ;4"'\ '"",.J1 \;;.~_~V tf""" .,)' /') ,~J; (") .....P t<'1,,\ '",... J; i :~." ':.\ "" JiI (' ( ,,""" F(" L '., ( POLLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 4 of 4) (' (~ ( "-, ,-- c POLLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 4 of 4) ( "'" .,.y ( " CMD 176 CMD 175 IGNORE ALL FILE STATUS BITS EXCEPT OIoLINE RESET FILE STATUS BITS 0 AND I SET ST2 IF NOT SENSE COIoIMAND _ - - -......,,;;r.;;j. . .,IIO GET STRING SWITCH STATUS ,...._ _...........,II/iIi,IIO YES ,...._ _........,iiI,;,l. . .IIO SET UN I T CHECK ANO DEY ICE END IN STATUS. GO PRESENT STATUS SET DEY ICE END STATUS . . -_ _...I... . .iIoOI!IIMi,n SET LONG CONNECT I ON IN STR I NG SWITCH CMD 175 CMD 175 3830-2 POOLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 4 of 4) CMD 176 " STATUS INFORMATION (p.,t 1 of 2) STATUS INFORMATION (Part 1 of 2) • II The status byte (eight bits) notifies channel of the condition of the CU and the selected drive. STATUS MODIFIER • Set when a Search High, Search Equal, or Search High or Equal command is completed and the condition satisfied. • Status is presented twice (initial and ending) for all SCU commands except Seek, Set Sector! if RPS installed), and the immediate commands. • Status is presented three times by Seek Cylinder commands (which cause access motion). 1. Initial. 2. Channel End after data transfer from the CPU. 3. Device End after the device has stopped seeking (gated attention). • Status is presented once (initial) containing Channel End and Device End on immediate commands (NoOp) except when chained after a Write command. In this case a second status byte (ending) is also transmitted. No-Op is processed as an immediate command only if the control unit is not writing or erasing. Channel End and Device End are indicated in the initial status byte (one status byte only). If the unit is writing or erasing, 0 is transmitted in the initial status byte. Channel and Device End are indicated in the ending status byte when SCU finishes writing or erasing. CMD 180 • Indicates CU Busy when on in conjunction with the Busy bit. When on with Channel End, Device End and Unit Check, indicates retry of last channel command. The CU and drive are ready for immediate retry. • Indicates retry of last channel command when on in conjunction with Unit Check bit. When on with Channel End. indicates retry of last channel command. The CU and drive are not ready for the retry procedure. • II • Set when the channel portion of the operation is completed. Control Unit End The CU has finished an operation Busy Access mechanism in the addressed drive is moving. Also used in conjunction with status modifier to indicate CU busy. CONTROL UNIT END • Set when a CU Busy was generated previously and the busy condition is terminated. II BUSY • Set when a new command chain is initiated while the CUis causing a track to be erased following a Format Writ(l command or an Erase command. • Indicates CU busy if on in conjunction with the status modifier (bit 1). 6 Unit Check Indicates that an unusual or error condition has been detected. With status modifier. it means command retf'{ is requested. 7 Unit Exception End of file DEVICE END • Set when a device is ready after a Seek is completed. • Set when the record is ready to be operated on after a Set Sector command (if RPS installed). • Set when an attached device goes from a not ready to a ready condition. Indicates that an access mechanism is free to be used • Set in response to any command except Test I/O if there is outstanding status for the device. Indicates that only the selected device is busy if the status modifier is off. II The CU has received all the data needed to do the operation called for and the channel is free • Set when a new command chain is initiated while the selected access mechanism is still in motion because of a previous seek command. • CHANNEL END • Set simultaneously with Channel End at the end of all other commands. • Indicates that an access mechanism is free to be used. iii UNIT CHECK • Set whenever an unusual or error condition on the selected drive is detected in the CU. • Indicates command retry requested if on in conjunction with status modifier. • Indicates a system interrupt condition if status modifier is not on and Channel End (bit 4) and/or Device End (bit 5) is included in status. The sense bytes provide detailed information about the condition. II UNIT EXCEPTION • Set when the data length in the count field is zero. • 3830-2 437417 l447460 1447461 115 Apr 74 [19 Dec 75 12 Mar 76 Indicates that an End of File was detected during a Read IPL, Read RO, Read CKD, Read KD, Read 0, Write KD, Write 0, or Search KD command. It is not set for Read count, Write CKD, Search Key or Search 10 commands. The key field, if any. is transferred. STATUS INFORMATION (Pan 1 of 2) CMD 180 eCapyright IBM Corpor.tion 1974, 1976, 1976 8-00000 000 o a o o 00 A I. .U ~ o o o o o o . O 0·,·· . o c (-:: ( ( .. (:: (. " "" (. STATUS INFORMATION (Part 2 of 21 STATUS INFORMATION (Part 2 of 2) 6. Inittal status indicates command retry. INITIAL STATUS BYTE The initial status byte is zero'for all non immediate cn .... mands and Test I/O unless one or more of the following conditions exist. If more than one condition exists, the first condition listed determines the initial status byte: 7. Invalid parity is sensed in the command byte. Unit Check occurs. 8. The command is rejected. Unit Check occurs. (Not all command rejects occur in initial status however.) b. An operation is still in progress after a Halt I/O occurs. c. The CU is disconnected during command chaining with writing in progress or with a CU error recovery pro· cedure in progress. d. The CU is executing a microprogram diagnostic test. e. A status condition is pending in the CU for other than the addressed device. Note that status cannot be cleared from the CU by a Test I/O if the CU is busy to the interface. f. A system reset sequence is in progress. g. The CU is maintaining a contingent connection to some device other than the addressed device. Status is pending in the CU if: 1. An interface disconnect was signaled after a command was given but before Channel End was accepted by the channel for the command. The ending status for the operation is pending when the operation is conplete. 2. A status condition, pending in the CU, is associated specifically with the addressed device or is not associated with any specific device. In this case, the pending status is presented as initial status, and the busy bit is included in the status byte if the command byte is other than Test I/O. The busy bit indicates that the device is busy because of the outstanding status. The pending status is cleared unless it is stacked by the channel. After the status is cleared, the device must be readdressed to determine if the device is available. 2. Status containing Busy, Channel End, or Unit Check was stacked by the channel, or blank status in response to a Test I/O was stacked. The stacked status is pending in the CU for the device with which the stacking occurred. 3. Control Unit Busy was presented to the interface. Control Unit End is pending for the interface and is included with other status pending in the CU, if any. 3. The device is busy to the interface, in which case the busy bit appears alone in the initial status byte. The device is busy to the interface if Channel End occurred without Device End for the device, and Device End has not yet been generated; or if the device is attached to a controller with the-string switch feature and is reserved to the other side of the switch. Discussion in this paragraph does not apply to cases where busy (pending sta~us) occurs with other status bits. When busy occurs with bits other than status modifier, the device is defined to be busy because of the included status, which is outstanding. 4. A Unit Check was detected associated with an operation where Device End has already been cleared. Unit Check and Control Unit End are pending in the CU. Address Associated with Pending Status All status conditions in the device are associated with a specific device address, except for Control Unit End. However, when in the contingent connection state, Control Unit End is associated with a specific address, and that address is the last address presented on the interface by the CU. When no con· tingent state exists, the Control Unit End is associated with the smallest numerical device address on the highest possible controller address which is not command chaining on any interface. 4. Status pending in the device. The pending status is present· ed as initial status, and the busy bit is included if the command is other than Test I/O. The pending status is cleared unless it is stacked by the channel. 5. A Unit Check condition exists at the device or CU. Unit Check occurs in initial status.' Valid commands in the sense group (xxxx0100) are an exception and receive zero status so that the commands may be executed. This permits transferring of the sense indicators. © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1974. 1975. 1976 A pending status condition may exist in either the device or the CU. A status condition pending in the CU, other than Control Unit End, causes the CU to appear busy for all devices except the device for which the status condition e.xists. The condition causes the Request In signal to rise if the CU is not busy to the interface, Select Out is down, and Suppress Out is down. A pending Control Unit End may cause the CU to appear busy to all except one device address on the interface for which it is pending. Status pending in the CU is cleared when it is presented and accepted. a. Writing is still in progress after chaining is terminated. I~Historv I~~~5 PENDING STATUS CONDITIONS Status Pending in the Control Unit 1. The initial status indicates Control Unit Busy (Bit 3) if selection occurs and if: 3830-2 (" 447461 12 Mar 76 CMD 181 Status Pending in the Device A status condition pending in the device causes Request In to rise on the interface if the device and CU are available (not busy), Select Out is down, and no contingent connection exists in the CU. Status pending in the device is cleared when status is presented and accepted. Status pending in the device cannot be cleared by a Test liD if the device or CU appears busy to the interface. The only status condition which can be pending in the device is Device End. When Unit Check occurs with Device End (and not Channel End) it is not generated until the Device End is presented on the interface, and the Device End and Unit Check conditions then become pending in the CU if stacked. Status is pending if: 1. Channel End occurs alone for an operation. Device End is pending. 2. Busy status (busy bit alone) is presented. Device End is pending on the interface. 3. The device has gone from the not ready state to the rcady state. Device End is pending. Priority of Pending Status Conditions The priority of pending status conditions when presented via polling is: 1. Status pending in the CU, other than Control Unit End. 2. Unsuppressible status conditions. 3. Suppressible Device End status. 4. Control Unit End status. Note: During the contingent connection state, Control Unit End status assumes highest priority in the preceding table. The microcode supporting 3350 Control Unit End is associated with the smallest numerical device address on the last controller used by a control unit which is not command chaining on any interface. In the non· contingent case status can be cleared by addressing any device attached to the control unit. STATUS INFORMATION (Part 2 of 21 CMD 181 COMMAND DeCODe COMMAND DECODE • • • CMD 183 Decode the command byte from the channel. Check if valid command and command sequence. .Break out to individual command flowcharts. B3 1,2,3-QEOI - 0 CMD 175 CMD 1~ 2:~:~~~ 2,5-QPIIO r-____3,4-QP535. w.&;.!oIIji310 I,Z,3,4,5-QPI30 r-__....;u..""'...~5-QPII0 READ CAR, HAR PL.O L.OCK-IN OPERATION UP 01 WRITE,SEARCH KEY-DATA OPERATION 2,3,4,5-QP235 2,5-QP230 r-____. . ~~~-QPIIO STORE CHANNEL. COMMAND AT L.DC , 1600' SENSE STATUS 2 TO SET DOD TRACK BIT 1,2,3,4,5-QP130 r-_ _ _u..""'...~5-QPI 10 SEL.ECT HEAD 2,5-QP235 - 00 NO SET FL.AG IN Mel BYTE FETCH DEVICE LIMITS - 1,2,3,4,5-QPI30 2,5-QPZ50 2,5-QP260 2,5-QP235 0 SET ST2 IF SEARCH. CHECK IF WRITE r-___~~~~~5-QPII0 r--_.....~a.;;.toI~5 READ GATE ON READ I OF I CODE (PHYSICAL. ADDRESS. AND CHECK CONVERT PHYSICAL. ACCESS POSITION TO L.OGICAL. POSITION AND STORE E4 I,2,5-QE070 I,2,3,4,5-QE060 0 l:~!~Gg .;;;...,I.-_ _ _ _ OK 1,3,4-QP230 I,3,4-QPOTO 1,3,4-QP110 I-QP230 1,2,3,4,5-QP135 1,2,3-QD050 ~9 2, 5-QD060 I,2-QF050 3,4,5-QF05 1,2,-QE050 - 050 STORE CURRENT PHYSICAL. ACCESS POSITION I,2!3-QDg30 RESET INITIAL. STATUS. WAIT FOR COMMAND OUT TO OROP. SEPARATE READ, ~~l..g~A~~, I,3,4-QP200 r-____1,3,4-QPIIO CL.OCK OPERATIONS ~~~235 15 USEC DEL.AY. COMPLETE READ PREPARATION READ STATUS IN DECODE HA/RO COMMAND RESEL.ECT CND 120 I,2,5-QE010 - 090 TEST 110 COMMAND FETCH PERMANENT POINTER COMMAND BREAKOUT I NOTES _ _ _..w..a;;*'....'0 I,2,3-QEOIO ,..._ _.................0 COMMAND BREAKOUT READ I OF I CODE (PHYSICAL ADDRESS. AND CHECK r-_____ EXIT TO SENSE ~of..~::gt- eM 0 55. 80. 110. 120. 125. 126 RAISE STATUS IN CND 145 PRESENT STATUS DISCONNECT FROM CHANNEL. 1 _ ~~~gl~~:g/~~~~R~~~ERM~~N_2~1~1~~6~~~~991 5 - 3340/3344 - PIN 4161116 2. FOR A GIVEN BL.OCK IN THE DIAGRAM, THE ACTUAL. PAGE NUMBER MAY DEPEND ON THE DEVICE TYPE SEL.ECTED. ABBREVIATIONS CAR CYL.INDER AODRESS REGISTER CEB COMMAND EXECUTION BYTE CKD • COUNT-KEY-DATA HA = HOME ADDRESS HAR HEAD ADDRESS REGISTER IPL. • INITIAL. PROGRAM L.OAD PL.O PHASE-L.OCKED OSCIL.L.ATOR RO RECORD ZERO CMD 10 CND 15 ! I-QN200 2,5-QS040 2,5-QS060 2,5-QS090 - 100 I. THIS FL.OWCHART 15 USED WITH MULTIPL.E MICROCODE VERSIONS. THE FOL.L.OWING DIGITS ARE USED TO IDENTIFY THE MICROCODE AND CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE REFERENCES. I - 3330 ONLY - PIN 2341105, 2348116, 2341111 Z - 3340 ONLY - PIN 2341151, 2341996 ~~~~;5-QE090 ,~:::=g~, 447461 3830-2 ~2 Mar 76 COMMAND DeCODe CMD 183 ©Copyright IBM Corporation 1972.1973.1974.1975.1976 a o o o 000 o (~ ~ o 00 o 000 "r~ 0 r~ V A ~\ "y J ~) \, "'- .~ 'v ~ O()OO 1 ,'. lo', . ' I", ..;'\ ,. '" 0 0, . . : , . " .~ ,~, .' O···~··· :, o c [~') --... ' !C' L~: ("~ (," C (- (- (- (--- (- (' (- (: (~... (: ENDING SEQUENCE (- f"; .,.,f' ENDING SEQUENCE (~ ,;Y CMD 190 OBJECTIVES • • • • • • Present ending status to the channel. Check if chaining. If oriented and chaining, perform timed initial selection routine. Complete read/write housekeeping functions. Update interrupt and available bytes. Make exit decisions. t,2.3,QS180 - 180 TEST FOR CHANNEL END IN LAST STATUS TRANSFERRED 1,2,3,4,5-QQ010 1,2,3,4'g:ggg~g PAD ZEROS TO INDEX ZERO OUT OPERATE BYTE CONSTRUCT SENSE BYTES AND STORE cwo f~A~'~~o 55'f~A~,,~IO,120 A UPDATE AVAILABLE AND ASSIGNMENT BYTES 1,2,3,4,5-QQXXX ANALYZE SENSE BYTES RESET R/W RESET OP IN 01 SABLE CU BUSY6E~~~~LECT 1,3,4-QS120 125 CMD 110 FETCH DEYICE BINARY ADDRESS r-____~~~~~5-QC020 CWO 210 cwo 215 r-____ FETCH OPERATION BYTE AND SET TO ZEROS ClIO 110 RAISE OP IN AND ADOR IN ~~~~~15-QS090 CHAINING ALLOWED I STO •• I NOTES r-____~~~~~5-QS090 RESET RII INDICATOR SET STATUS STACKED IST2.11 AND UNTIllED ENDING ISThll r-____~~~~.,-QSI20 NO CHAIN BRDKEN ISTO.OI RESET STO, 4,5,6,7 TURN ON R/W INDICATOR CMD 1113 r-____~~~~~5-QS090 RESET ST2 AND 3 r-____~~~~~5-QS090 RESET STATUS IN 3830-2 r-____~~~~,-QSI20 I. THIS FLOWCHART IS USED WITH MULTIPLE MICROCODE VERSIONS. THE FOLLOWING DIGITS ARE USED TO IDENTIFY THE MICROCODE AND CORRESPONOING CAS PAGE REFERENCES. UPDATE DCC ONLY UPDATE DCC AND AVAILABLE AND ASSIGNMENT AND BYTES I 2 : 5 - 3330 ONLY - PIN 234111105, 234111116, 234111111 - 3340 ONLY - PIN 23411151, 23411996 : ~~~g:~~:g/~~!~R~~~ERM~'N_2~1~1I~~&II~~111991 - 3340/3344 - PIN 416111116 2. FOR A GIVEN BLOCK IN THE DIAGRAM, THE ACTUAL PAGE NUMBER MAY DEPEND ON THE DEVICE TYPE SELECTED. AB8REV lATIONS CE DCC EDI ODE PCH R/W CHANNEL END DISCONNECTED COMMAND CHAINING EXPECTED DEVICE INTERRUPT OUTSTANDING DEVICE END PACK CHANGE READ/WRITE STORE OPERATION BYTE ENDING SEQUENCE © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1974. 1975. 1976 CMD 190 ------~--~-- 0, 0, 0' " " ' 0 0,", 0'-1' ,0'" r<~ 0,', "V'~ '0,'", 00 OOOOOO()O(~, (~' (" ~( f ( ( ( ( ( (' ( ( ( ( ( (" ( (:" ( ( ( f ( ( DISCONNECTED COMMAND CHAINING ( ( ( ( ( ( DISCONNECTED COMMAND CHAINING ( ( (" CMD 200 • Allows the CU to disconnect from the channel on commands that require long delays because of mechanical motion or searches. The channel is free during the delay period. • Disconnected command chaining enables multiple requesting, which allows up to 16 (32 if 32-drive expansion feature is installed I separate command chains to be active in the facility. Disconnected command chaining allows the CU to disconnect from the channel after an opera· tion, such as Seek or Set Sector, has started even though chaining is indicated. Since burst mode is not forced during the execution of Seek or Set Sector commands, the CU can disconnect between Channel End and Device End. The disconnect function reduces the CPU interrupts needed to overlap channel data transfers with mechanical motion of the devices. The CU retains the information necessary to control a disconnected CCW chain for each drive in the facility. In effect, the CU is capable of simultaneously executing up to 32 CCW chains (one per drive). Note: This is also referred to as multiple requesting. During a Seek operation, the ,CU attempts to reconnect after mechanical motion is completed. During a Set Sector operation, the CU attempts to reconnect when the desired rotational position is detected. In either case, the channel is made available during access motion and rotational delay periods. Disconnect is also allowed on command retry procedures (3330 and 3350) and for format write padding of Os. Control Module Circuits STORAGE CONTROL UNIT 1 DRIVES I~OOUlE I Perform seek from Channel-AControl servo motion_ Interrupt CU when seek is complete. Disconnected command chaining byte (DCC). Module 0 DCC Bvte Two examples of disconnected command chaining: Disconnect command chaining can involve two or more channels, or one channel may have several CCW chains. CHANNEL A 1. Issues Seek command to module O. 2. Disconnects until Device End (seek complete I is received. CCW Chain Example- Module 0 1. Seek-Locate cylinder Disconnected 2. Set Sector-Locate area on track. Disconnected Search I0- Locate a record. TIC-8 Write Data-Write data field CHANNEL B 1. Issues Seek command to module 7. 2. Disconnects until Device End (seek completel fn module 7 is received. 3. Issues Set Sector command to module 3. 4. Disconnects from this chain until Device End from module 3 (sector is ready) is received, CCW Chain Example-Module 7 1. Seek - Locate cyli nder Disconnected 2. Read Home Address-Read Home Address field. CCW Chain Example-Module 3 Seek-Locate cylinder Disconnected 3. Set Sector- Locate record. Disconnected Search ID-Locate record. TIC -8 4. Read Key Data-Read key and data fields. 3830·2 C> Copyright IBM Corporotian 11172. 1973, 1974, 1975 DCC Bvtes (one for each modulel CONTROL STORAGE CHANNEL A To 2nd SCU (with Readl Microprogram Write Perform set sector from Channel-B. Check for sector requested. Interrupt CU when sector is ready. Data CONTROL CIRCUITS CTL-I .---y-+" (Microprogram) To 2nd Module Control CHANNEL B Two Channel Switch Feature Multiple requests (on two drives). Controls each operation as it is received from the channel. Maintains status of disconnected command chains in DCC byte in control storage. 1 Brings up unsuppressible status for those modules with a bit in the DCC byte as their Device End is received. Perform seek from Channel-B. Control servo motion. Interrupt CU when seek is complete. IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER DISCONNECTED COMMAND CHAINING CMD 200 ( COMMAND RETRY (3330 AND 33501 (Part 1 of 31 COMMAND RETRY (3330 AND 3350) (Part 1 of 3) Command retry permits error recovery withoJt requiring intervention from the using system. The CU resorts to command retry for the following conditions: m SeEK MALFUNCTIONS The SCU will attempt to recover from seek errors when home address is clocked or because of a Seek Incomplete condition. If, during a Seek operation, a Seek Incomplete condition occurs or a Seek Error is detected while reading home address or processing a count field, the CU sets the command execution byte (CEB) to recalibrate and seek. The CU then retries the Seek. Unit Check and Status Modifier indications are present in the sense information. The retry is attempted up to ten times and a permanent seek error is posted to the system, where error recovery procedure (ERP) can be invoked. m DATA OR COMMAND OVERRUN B1I If data or commands are not processed in a normal sequence at the proper time, they can be lost. When the CU detects a defective or alternate track condition before data transfer starts, command retry will be invoked. The CU determines the location of the defective/alternate track and seeks to the appropriate track. After the Seek is completed, Device End is presented and the command is reissued. The CU processes the command normally, verifies the correct access, and continues with the user's command chain. Note: If 3350 command retry pages differ from 3330, they are shown in parentheses. m DATA DEFECTIVE OR ALTERNATE TRACK CMD 210 ERROR Correctable Data Error Not in Data Fields (3330)* If a data error is detected at the completion of a Read or Search in the count or key fields, and it is correctable, CU signals retry status to the channel. Then the CU reorients on the failing track and signals Device End to the channel to begin retry. The failing field, which was buffered in control storage, is corrected by the CU. Processing a reissued Read command in the count or key fields causes the corrected data from control storage to be transferred to the channel; the CCW then continues. For a search in the count or key fields, the CU executes a compare against the corrected data in control storage and continues with the CCW. When clocking in a count field, the corrected data is used only by the CU. *For 3350, data errors in all fields except data fields are treated as uncorrectable. CHANNEL QU I ET ROUTINE Uncorrectable Data Errors If a data error is detected at the completion of a Read, Clock. or Search operation and it is uncorrectable. the CU signals Retry Status to channel with Unit Check and Status modifier. Then the CU reorients on the failing track location. and signals Device End; the channel reissues the command. The retry is attempted up to 28 times and Unit Check is posted to the system where ERP can be invoked. Command retry is not used for uncorrectable data errors occurring during the clocking of a key field. When an error is determined as uncorrectable, the CU attempts to recover by offsetting the read heads from normal track position on 3330 only. There is no offsetting for 3350. SENSE CODE OF OPERATIDN I NCOIIPLETE After the head shift is made. the CU orients on the record and tries to read it. If. after any retry. the error becomes correctable. the CU proceeds as if a correctable error were detected. Correctable Data Errors in Data Fields Correctable data errors in the data field are corrected by the system ERP using correction information sent to the channel in the sense data. (See SENSE 1.) F"ETCH AND STORE SECTOR/CYLINDER ABBREVIAT IONS Cfa :: CO.... AND EXECUT ION 8YTE Me I :: '" SCEllANEOUS CONTROL INF'ORMATION GO TO CONTROL ROUTINE TO SEEK TO AL TERNA TE DR OEF"ECTI YE P\..US I TRACK IBM CONFIDENTIAL 3830-2 UNTIL MARCH 26. 1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER COMMAND RETRY (3330 AND 33501 (Part 1 of 31 © Copyright IBM Carpoqti... 1872, 1873, 1874, 18715 0·· ." ~ ., o o 00 o (J': : \ j o o o o f)· .· ~ o r.r). ,'" oo o ~'.). ~" o CMD 210 o "~ C .01 . .. _ - - - - (,' F (' (,\ (" (": (~ ("'~ (" (~ (," -~------ ( (" (" ("" <- L " ,",,,- ('" ('-' ( (' r"' (" ( ( " ",,',"' ("" COMMAND RETRY (3330 AND 3350) (Part 2 of 3) COMMAND RETRY (3330 AND 3350) (Part 2 of 3) DATA CHECK ( YES ~______~~~IQN5001 CI CMD 215 ~____~.w~~O~NLYI OFFSET ACTIVE IN WR ITE AM/SYNC CHECK NO ( NOTE: IF 3350 COMMAND RETRY PAGES DIFFER ~:~~N~~~g~S:HEY WILL BE SHOWN IN SET REQUIRED LOGGING SAVE SECTOR AND RETRY COMMAND CODE r-____~~~~~.5001 FETCH AND UPDATE RETRY COUNT SET SENSE INFORMATION STORE HIGH AND LOW DISPLACEMENT SET SECTOR r-____~~~~q5001 SET MCI 2 DO ECC ANALYSIS r-____~~~~~,5001 SET APPROPRIATE MESSAGE AND SENSE CODES. SET SENSE r-____~~~~wq.5001 SET UNIT CHECK IN MCI 3 DO SET SECTOR DETERMINE COUNT FOR HEAD SHIFT DECISIONS 3330 SET COMMAND FOR HEAD SHIFT MLM0002 447460 :~J?-=~~~:~ MDC __ ABBREVIATIONS AM ECC MCI PCI __ ..JFL_6/3/75 o UN IT CHECK AND STATUS MODIFIER = ADDRESS MARKER = ERROR CORRECTION CODE MISCELLANEOUS CONTROL INFORMATION PROGRAM CONTROL INTERRUPT IBM CONFIDENTIAL 3830-2 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1974. 1975 UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER COMMAND RETRY (3330 AND 3350) (Part 2 of 3) CMD 215 (~ c COMMAND RETRY (3330 AND 3350) (Part 3 of 3) COMMAND RETRY (3330 AND 3350) (Part 3 01'3) CMD 220 COMMAND RETRY REORIENTATION-CKD Error Revolution SECTOR SECTOR SECTOR N-2 N-1 N-3 SECTOR N AM COUNT • KEY DATA Second Physical Address Byte While reading or clocking the count field of each record, the controller freezes the drive target register and resets the reorient counter. Assume sector value = N. Uncorrectable Error 'Detected By ECC IN Key Field 1. Send retry status (Status Modifier. Channel End, and Unit Check) to channel. 2. Drop Operational In to disconnect from the channel. 3. Execute a Read Sector operation and store sector value N in working storage location of '00'. Also store sector value N·3 in location '1900: 4. Execute a Set Sector operation with sector value N·3. 5. Wait for Record Ready from drive. Retry Revolution f i AM COUNT Record Ready Received From Drive Record Ready Received From Drive 1. Raise unsuppresslble Request In. 1. Read controller; reorient counter range. 2. Do Read preparation functions. 3. Compare reorient counter range against 2. Send Device End status to channel. Channel reissues failing command. • KEY DATA "Normal" reading resumes; specific type of reading depends on channel command issued. Read or clock the count field and read key. high side of sector value N. 4. Execute a Read G3, Timed AM Search, operation prior to AM. 5. Wait fo; ~T4 lAM found by controller). 3. Execute a Set Sector Operation to sector value N·l. 4. Wait for Record Ready from drive. IBM CONFIDENTIAL 3830.2 UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER COMMAND RETRY (3330 AND 3350) (Part 3 of 3) © Copyright IBM Cor_ion 1972, 1973, 1974, 1976 :1000000 () 0 o 1" ~ o o o 00 000 0000 CMD 220 o 0 l;' J 0 C ',. , ~~'- (" ( (:/ ( ( (". ( (-. (' ( ( (- ....,. (- (' c ( DEFECT SKIPPING EXAMPLES (3340 ONL VI DEFECT SKIPPING EXAMPLES (3340 ONLY) CMD 230 Note: 3350 is similiar, however, there are 3 sets of SO bytes. Three defects per logical track may be skipped. In this case, a field could be moved more than once or moved and split. EXTENDED GAP Index point 1 4 - - - - - - - - - - - - Displacement from index -----------------------------------------------------+1 ~ - G1 Home address RO count 1-= Displacement from end of RO count field ~ --.....,..---.. -------" SD=O Rt count .... RO data \ F :: Flag 01234567 "-10 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 SD ::. Skip Defect L Rt key I Flag bit 2 = 1 => Data field affected; SO = 0 => Defect Extended I (G2+G41 R1 data (moved) Track gap~ Field moved (or preceding gap extended) so = 0 in all count fields that lie beyond the defect SPLIT FIELD Index POUlt. i ' 4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - Displawment from index - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -.....-1 ~Length of lst segment~ R t key (lst segment I Gl Horne RO count RO data G4 ~ R1 count .... Defect Key (2nd segl R1 data i.1ddrt~ss ot 234 5 6 7 ' " 1010000001..) Flag bit 1 = 1 => Key affected; SO '" 0 => Split field IBM C{)NFIDENTIAL 3830-2 UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER © Copyright IBM Corporation 1973.1974.1975 DEFECT SKIPPING EXAMPLES (3340 ONLVI CMD 230 .). . O' 0.· 0, O.-, ~ 'J,.' 01 .~ f)-I ~ aoo()OOOOOOC)OO (- .- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _ .. (-- (- (- ( -. r- (- ( '.-' -. ( '" (- r'- .. _ - - _ . _ - - _ .. RESETS (Part 1 of 3) RESETS (Part 1 of 3) • • ( Set up machine to start microprogram control. Store error information for later use on a sense-type command. Refer to CTRL 650 for control storage layout. 4,5-QB3011 0011 4,5-QB3011 (NOTE .;.._ _....1.....""";&.;,10111°011 NB REGISTER TO SA REGISTER There are four types of resets: CMD 250 STORE S REGISTERS AT '0654' POWER-ON RESET Power-On Reset is automatically actuated during any power-on sequence of the subsystem. After reset, the instruction address register (iAR) contains address '0000'. Depending on the Mode switch setting, the SCU either remains stopped or starts on Initial Microprogram Load operation. 4,5-QB3011 0011 4,5-QB306 - 6 STORE ERROR CHECK REG I STER AND FAILING INSTRUCTION ADORESS (BARI AT TC REGISTER TO SB REGI~TER 4,5-QB3011 - 0011 176 TO SA. lERO TO SB '0641' •• 5-QB3011 - 001 PUSH BUTTON (MANUAL) RESET TG REGI ~TER TO SC REGISTER If the Mode switch is in any of three CE modes, pressing the Reset pulh button resets the lubsystem. The subsystem clock remains stopped until restarted. 4,5-QB3011 - 0011 STORE S REGISTERS 4,5-QB301 - 001 SELECTIVE RESET RESET THE SELECTED DEVICE (IF ONE IS SEL.ECTEDI When the using system actuates the Selective Reset line, the IAR is forced to hex address '0040'. This address is the start of a store routine which will save the check 1 error latches and the backup register (which contains the address of the last executed instruction). The selected device, if any, is reset. Unit Check is presented in response to the next Start I/O instruction. lERO TO SO REGISTER 4,5-QB3011 - 0011 RESET TG REGISTER TO ZEROS QQOIO QQ020 QQ030 4,5-QB3011 r-_ _~~~~001l 4,5-QB306 - 006 STORE S REGISTERS AT '064C' SET UP AND STORE REMAINDER (4-7) OF THE SENSE BYTES IN '0644' SET UP SENSE CONTROL BLOCK S~c2~6 f~3~8' ON..YI SYSTEM RESET 4,5-QB306 - 006 When the using system actuates the System Reset line, the IAR is forced to hex address '0000'. This address is the start of a reset sequence that returns the subsystem to a zeroed condition. STORE S REGISTERS AT '0614' 4,5-QB301 001 FETCH CHECK 1 REGISTER DATA FROM STORAGE (SC AND SOl RESET CHECK 2 CONDITIONS (IF ANYI 4,5:QB~g: TRANSFER SC TO ~a: ~~E¥OStO AND 50 TO ZERO. RESET OPERATE BYTE SP OP 04-GATE READ ERROR PATTERN TO NB REGISTER. SP OP 05-RESET STORAGE ERROR REGISTER NOTES S.ored Data Available.o System on Sense 1/0 Command (See SENSE 201 By.e. 8 and 9 By'e 10 (201 By.e 11 (211 Check 1 Register Check 1 Register CND 170 I. QBOXX REFERENCES BECOME QB3XX IF TWO CHANNEL SWITCH ADDITIONAL IS INSTALLED, ABBREV I ATI ONS BAR IAR z BACKUP ADORESS REGISTER = INSTRUCTION ADORESS REGISTER 85M Low Error 85M High Err", 23F 0 No. Ready Zero 3830-2 RESETS (Part 1 of 3) @Copyrigh.IBMCorpora.ion 1972, 1973, 1974,1975, 1976 CMD 250 (~ C· - - - - - - - - -------- ------ ------------------- -- ---------~~------~- RESETS (Part 2 of 3) RESETS (Part 2 of 3) CMD 255 SYSTEM RESET ___ PERFORM TAG SEQUENCE AND RETURN .w.~_1i!i3 SET TAG ANO BUS TO SE~ECT MODULE SET ST2 ___ r-____~~.w~~5-QBOI0 =I .w..a.;;~I.\i0 _ _ _............."'\0 ENABLE CU BUSY lTC • 04) .....______..&.I.........a..a;-QBO PERFORM TAG SEQUENCE AND RETURN r-____~~~~~5-QBOI7 RESET SYSTEM RESET CONTRO~ STORAGE AREA ICTR~ 650) SAVE BIT SIGNIFICANT DEVICE ADDRESS THAT HAS PCH INTERRUPT r-______~~~~~~-QBOI7 SET TAG BUS TO '06' ISTRING SW CONTROL) UPDATE ADDRESS TO RESET RESERVED. SHIFT ADDRESS SAMP~ER ~EFT I PDS IT ION SECOND~V~~tRRUPT. BYTES FOR CHANNE~. RESET DCC BYTE • I0 SA REGISTER 11TH BIT SIGNIFICANT DEVICE ADORESS OF OEVICES NOT BUSY TO CHANNE~ PERFORMING RESET FI~~ , - - _...........---'1 0 r-______~~~~5-QBOI7 UPDATE ADDRESS TO OTHER CHANNE~ INTERRUPT BYTES PERFORM TAG SEQUENCE AND RETURN .....____~~.w~~5-QB010 INITIA~I ZE ADDRESS SAMPLER 5T:?: I I F PACK CHANGE RESTORED TO OTHER S I DE OF SWITCH STORE DEVICE TYPE IN PERMANENT STORAGE IEXAMP~E: '030C' FOR DEVICE 0, STRING 0) SET TAG AND BUS TO REQUEST STATUS PACK CHANGE HOUSEKEEPING: ZERO PHYSICA~ AND ~OGICA~ SEEK ADDRESS STORAGE AREAS NO FETCH DRIVE ADDRESS AND RETURN ADDRESS FROM 'OFOO' CMD 256 MOVE STATUS BACK TO MA FROM ND REG SET TAG AND BUS TO RESET INTERRUPT r-______ _ _ _"..::II,;;,IoI1IMifI5 - RESET SEARCH AREA OF STDRAGE FETCH ORIVE ADORESS AND RETURN ADDRESS FROM 'OFOO' SET PACK CHANGE TO OTHER SIDE OF STRING SWITCH. CT~-I BUS OUT = '90'. SET STO I .w~-QB008 r-______~~~~~-QSI80 I ,3,4-QBO 17 PERFORM TAG SEQUENCE AND RETURN SAVE STATUS IN ND REG I-QBOIO .. ~ UPDATE PACK CHANGE BYTE WITH PACK CHANGE INDICATOR RESET DIAGNOSTIC MON I TOR CONTRO~ INDICATOR PERFORM TAG SEQUENCE AND RETURN SET UP RETURN ADDRESS AND EXIT TO: I.SE~ECT MOOU~E 2.READ FI~E STATUS 3.RESET INTERRUPTS 4.RESET CONTROL~ER 5.DEVICE CONTROL RESET r-____~~~~~5-QBOI7 SET AVAI~AB~E TO OTHER CHANNE~ INDICATOR RES~T 008 r-______~~~~~-QSI80 OISAB~E CU BUSY HARDWARE AND WAIT FOR ANY BUSY SEQUENCE IN PROGRESS TO END = CND 256 ......- _......a..tiI'"""t.5 SET TAG AND BUS TO READ DEVICE TYPE SET TAG AND BUS TO TRANSMIT CONTROL AND RESET INTERRUPT CMO 170 NOTES I. THIS F~OWCHART IS USED WITH MULTIP~E MICROCODE VERSIONS. THE FOL~OWING DIGITS ARE USED TO I DENT I FY THE MICROCODE AND CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE REFERENCES: ~ : ~~~g ~~-_P~7N2~;~:~li,2~;~l=~£ 2348787 ~ : ~~~g~~~:g/~~~~R1~~ERM~'N_2~1~8~~£8i~48997 5 - 3340/3344 - PIN 4168816 2. ~I8X~H:~~E~~¥c~i~T"~~~ I~ INSTA~~ED. 3. QBOXX REFERENCES BECOME QB4XX IF 3340/3344 IS INSTA~~ED. 4. FOR A GIVEN BLOCK IN THE DIAGRAM, THE ACTUA~ PAGE NUMBER MAY DEPEND ON THE DEVICE TYPE SE~ECTED. ABBREVIATIONS OCC • DISCONNECTED COMMAND CHAINING PCH • PACK CHANGE 3830·2 RESETS (Part 2 of 3) CMD 255 C> Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1974. 1975, 1976 o o o C) o o r~_ IJ () o o r~ \- U "'--' o ,~ ~~} .\,4'"-~ -- .:', ~ r~ ~y 0 O f - - .- (J ---- [I F (' (~' ( (" (- (- (- ( ~, ( (- (~ (- ( ( ( (- (' (-' ( ( ("' (-' (- (- ( ( " (- (- (-'~ (" ('. L RESETS (Part 3 of 3) RESETS (Part 3 of 3) CMD 256 SYSTEM RESET (continued) CMD 255 SET UP RET'-"N ADDRESS AND EXIT TOI I.POLL INTERRUPTS. 2.SELECT MODULES. 3.READ ~ILE STATUS ST2=1. SET TAG AND BUS TO DO SET RETURN ADDRESS ~ORCE ~~~~~~~~E~~~~~~' 2/5 ___ SET TAG AND BUS TO POLL INTERRUPTS SET TAG AND BUS OUT ~DR ~ILE STATUS PACK-CHANGE HOUSEKEEPING. ZERO PHYSICAL AND LOGICAL SEEK ADDRESS STORAGE AREAS. ~&..lIt,;;WI:.I..J,O PER~ORM TAG SEQUENCE AND RETURN UPDATE AVAILABLE BYTES 3,4-QB019 (NOTE 21 _-_...1.1I.00:I,;;-_,,,7 PER~ORM TAG SEQUENCE AND RET'-"N REQUEST MODULE STATUS RESET INTERRUPTS SET TAG AND BUS TO MODULE SELECT SET PACK CHANGE INDICATOR DO CONTROL RESET ___ SET TAG AND BUS TO DO STRING SIITCH CONTROL (UNLOCK SWITCHI 3340,3350 PER~ORM SENSE TAG WHICH WILL RESET ANY PAR I TV ERRORS ON 3340 INTER~ACE INTER~ACE ST2= I: SET TAG AND BUS TO XMIT CONTROL 1 AND CONTROLLER RESET 3,4-QB240 ,...._ _w..:a.;;,w ........0 PER~ORM TAG SEQUENCE> AND RETURN ...I.L.o.i:~OIIIIiIIO PER~ORM TAG SEQUENCE AND RET'-"N SET TAG AND BUS OUT TO RESET INTERRUPT SET PACK CHANGE TO OTHER S I DE OF STRING SWITCH RESET PACK CHANGE, PER~ORM TAG SEQUENCE AND RET'-"N DROP SELECT HOLD. GO RESET PER~ORM ON NEXT DEV I CE PR~~~G~~~~U~~IN STRING SWITCH PER~ORM TAG SEQUENCE AND RET'-"N REQUEST STRING SWITCH STATUS. o -> ST2. ClIO 255 RESET LONG CONNECTION NOTES DESELECT DEVICE UPDATE AVAILABLE BYTES SET TAG AND BUS TO RESET STRING SIITCH ASSIGNMENT, AVAILABLE c~~~RV:ltR~~TPP~ CURRENT DEV I CE BE I NG RESET SET ~LAG ~OR LATER USE I~ MULTI-TAG ClIO 255 CMD 255 r--_.w..l,;;llc.u,0 PER~ORM TAG SEQUENCE AND RET'-"N 3830-2 \437417 16 Apr 74 C>Capyright IBM Corporation 1974. 1975.1978 1447480 19 Dec 75 12 Mar 76 1447461 I. THIS ~LOW CHART IS USED WITH MULTIPLE MICROCODE VERSIONS. THE ~OLLOWING DIGITS ARE USED TO IDENTI~Y THE MICROCODE AND CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE RE~ERENCESI 1 - 3330 ONLY - PIN 2341105, 2341716, 2348717 2 - 3330 ONLY - PIN 2341757, 2341996 : : ~~~g:~~:g/~~~~R~~~ERM~'N_2~1=1~~'llf11997 5 - 3340/3344 - PIN 4161116 2. QaOXX RE~ERENCES BECOME Qa3XX I~ TWO CHANNEL SWITCH ADDITIONAL IS INSTALLED. 3. ~OR A GIVEN BLOCK IN THE ~~Mi\A~~~P~:I DEVICE TYPE SELECTED. RESETS (Part 3 of 3) CMD 256 ("", (~ ,j .-~ When the desired angular position (which has an adjusted reselection delay factor) is reached, the SCU signals Device End. The channel can then connect to continue the command chain. If the channel does not respond, connection is tried on subsequent revolutions. The facility provides rotational position sensing (RPS). On devices without RPS, the channel and storage control maintain connection while a record search is in progress. RPS allows the channel and storage control to be released during most of a record's search time, thereby increasing their availability for' other operations. Two commands have been added for the RPS function, Read Sector (CMD107, 125) and Set Sector (CMD 16, 25): --~-.------------ ROTATIONAL POSITION SENSING CPa,. 1 of 2) ROTATIONAL POSITION SENSING (Part 1 of 2) • Standard on 3330 and 3350, feature on 3340. .. CMD 300 READ/SET SECTOR OPERATION In 3350 compatibility mode, the sector value from the channel is adjusted by 2/3 to ensure that the desired record is not passed, SET SECTOR GIVEN DEVICE END CHANNEL RESELECTION DELAV RECORD READ OR WRITE • Initial selection • Channel End • Disconnect Angular position, relative to the read/write heads, adjusted for reselection delay. If channel does not respond, connection is tried on subsequent revolutions. If channel reconnection is establ ish ed, the record is ready to be read or written. READ SECTOR The Read Sector command transfers one byte of in· formation from the SCU to main storage. This byte provides the sector number (angular displacement from index) of the last record processed. If the last record processed was an overflow record, the sector number returned is that of the first segment processed in the current command chain. Execution of a Read Sector command causes loss of the previously established record orientation. Therefore, if further processing of records of the same track (or cylinder) is desired, a search- for the desired record must be made. In 3350 compatibility mode the angular position number is not retrieved from the target register in the drive. It is calculated from the track· used counter. It is valid only if the Read Sector command follows the command processing the record of interest. If the Read Sector command follows the Set Sector command, the byte transferred to the channel has no relationship to the Set Sector command argument. SET SECTOR The Set Sector command transfers one byte of data from mai~ storage to the SCU. This byte specifies one of 128 (3330 and 3350) or 64 (3340) possible angular positions per logical track. The byte value is checked for validity by the SCU. If the value is proper, the SCU generates Channel End and allows the channel to disconnect. 3830-2 ROTATIONAL POSITION SENSING (Part 1 of 2) © Copyright IBM Corporation 1974, 1976. 1976 0000 ,~, ,1 '0 o 000 o o () 0 () o0 1 o CMD 300 000 o () (~- (-- ( (- ( ( ( ROTATIONAL POSITION SENSING (Part 2 of 2) Note: 3330 figures are followed by 3340 figures in [ (-- (ROTATIONAL POSITION SENSING (Part 2 of 21 f CMD 305 J. • Rotational positional sensing IRPS) minimizes time lost by the channel. • RPS circuits are in the control module of the selected device. • Number of sectors and timing vary with the device type. • Rotation time 16.7 [20.2] milliseconds. • 128 sectors [per physical track or 64 sectors per logical track]. • Sector time 130 [158] microseconds. • Sector argument from the system is from 0-127 [0-63]. For 3350 compatibility modes, the end-of-track virtual index can occur in the range indicated depending on the number of records written on the track. [Odd Logical Tracks 0-63) 1 When record is written, the sector number may be stored in the system by a Read Sector command. Example: Record 22 is written. Sector 126 [62] is stored by use of the Read Sector command. The sector can be calculated by the system if the record size is fixed. TRACK LAYOUT Index [Even Index) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 I 10 I 121 [57) 122 [58) 123 [59) 124 (60) 125 [61 ) 126 (62) 127 (63) (0) 2 Assume: When sector counter and target register compare, CU raises request in to the channel. Channel can then do a Search 10 for record 22 with a minimum loss of CPU time. Head is at this point when a Set Sector command is received Ise~tor 126) [62]. Sector 124 [59] is set in target register of selected module when a record starting in sector 126 [62] is to be searched. Target always set two [three] less than desired sector. IBM CONFIDENTIAL 3830-2 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1973. 1974, 1975 UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER ROTATIONAL POSITION SENSING (Part 2 of 21 CMD 305 OVERFLOW RECORD OVERFLOW RECORD • Allow logical data records longer than one track. • Formatting controlled by the system. • Reading and nonformatting Write operations controlled by the CU. CMD 400 Flag byte bit 4= 1 First segment of overflow record ---------------------~ Index [Odd] FORMATTING R2-D (Segment 1) Thp.se segments are written using Write Special Count·Key-Data (CKD) commands. Flag byte bit 4= 1 R 1-0 (Segment 2) Command sequence: Set Sector Search ID (R 1 ) TIC'-S Write Special CKO (1st segment) Seek Head (next track) Search 10 (RO) TIC'-S Write Special CKD (2nd segment) -Seek Head (next track) Search ID (RO) TIC'-S Write Special CKD (3rd segment) Seek Head (next track) Search ID (RO) TIC'-S Write CKD (4th segment I _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _..... Rl-D (Segment 3) Flag byte bit 4=0 [Even] t Rl-0 (Segment 4) R2-D Last segment of overflow record - - - - - - - - - - -......-1 PROCESSING CU switches to the next head on all overflow records (flag byte bit 4 = 1) of Read and nonformatting Write commands. Command Sequence: Search ID (Rl),TIC*-8. Read Key-Data, Read Data, Write KeyData or Write Data (read or write segments 1, 2, 3, and 4 with auto head switching at index, controlled by the CUI. 3330 and 3350. Errors on the first segment (excluding- correctable data field data checks) are retried by the CU. 3340Errors on any segment of the overflow record are handled by the system error recovery procedures. An error on the second or subsequent segments (Data Check, defective track, etc.) causes sense byte 1 bit 7, operation incomplete, to be set. A restart CCW is provided to the system error recovery procedure (ERP) in sense byte 3. After the E RP has corrected the problem, the restart CCW is senno the CU to resume the operation. aoooo110 106) A Read command was in progress. 00000101 15) A Write command was in progress. See SENSE 35, byte 3 IBM CONFIDENTIAL 3830·2 UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER © o t"',--"l\-" ~ OVERFLOW RECORD CMD 400 Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1974. 1975 a" () o o I,; t,:' o () o 000 o o o ,;'I) ~-"'" o o o ,.--... I ~,\, 'I ~ C) o C) (- (\ (\ (~' (- (-- ( ( MULTIPLE TRACK (MIT) OPERATION • Bit 0 of the command byte identifies a MIT operation. • Effective only on Read and Search operations. • If MIT bit is on in a chain of commands the head is switched to the next track at index time, providing the command is issued between the last record and index. (If the CU has issued a Read Gl head switching operation to the controller, head switching occurs 39 bytes past the index.) • ( ( ( MUL TlPLE TRACK (M/TI OPERATION, END OF FILE, ORIENTATION CMD 430 ORIENTATION • Microprogram keeps track of relative position of the head and the format of the track. • Microprogram uses the orientation information to determine when to start an operation called for in a command. • Orientation is maintained by the microprogram in the command execution byte (CES). • As an operation is performed, the CES is updated as each field of a record is passed. Command Execution Byte (CEB) Eliminates the need for Seek Head commands in a chain of Read or Search commands. Index ~r-l.I_R_N_-_C....LI.....l..I_R_N_-_K....LI......l_ _ _R_N_-_D_ _....L_....l....JtL Head address is advanced plus one by the CU. Bit 2 3 4 Use HA Count Key ~--- I l Orientation Bits 5 --.....,..,.'0 ~O-D HA I I RO-C Ready for new Read ~.LI_---l_ _ _.1..-J.L-_ _.l..--.J_ _ _.L_~ Search command. . Head switching does not occur: If bits 3 and 4 of file mask are both on (file protected), or if head address would advance past last cylinder (end of cylinder). ~ Programming note: MIT Search chains should be started with a single track Read HA or Read RO to prevent missing the record if the record has passed the head when the MIT Search is started. CURRENTCEB Defines the end of a logical group of records. • Identified by a count field data length (D LD L ) of zero. • Data field consists of one byte of zero plus ECC bytes. • Signals the system with Unit Exception status (status byte, bit 7) on Read IPL, Read RO, Read CKD, Read KD, Read D, Write KD, and Write D commands. o 0 0 0 0 X X 00001 XX 000 1 1 1 X X 000 1 0 0 X X 000010XX o o o o o o o o I X X 1 1 DL \ DL \ 3830·2 0 1 0 X X X X X X 0 0 o X X X X o 0 1 1 - ECC Data X X 000 X X 1 1 1 X X 1 1 \ ECC o I ECC I. • 1 X X o 0 X X R Data x Rx Key \ KL 1 1 100 0 X X o 0 X X R Count x R o 0 o 0 1 0 o lOX X o 0 X X 0 o 1 X X 0 0 o X X o o F}clcIH\H\ 0 0 000 1 0 ,, NEXT CEB Q. 01234567 END OF FILE • ~:::I o o o 0 X X X X X X Process Data Process Key Process Count Process Count Process Key End Process Data Process Key (Datal End End Clock Clock Clock Clock Clock Clock Clock Process Next Record Clock Data Clock Key (Datal Process Data Process Key (Datal Process Key (Onlyl Clock Key Data Key Count Key Count Count Count Clock/Truncate Data ClocklTruncate Key ClocklTruncate Count Clock/Truncate HA Clock/Truncate Key ClocklTruncate Count End End End End Clock/Truncate Data Clock Key (Datal Process HA Clock HA Clock HA Clock HA End Clock RO Read·Write RO Search ID RO Count Clock HA Clock HA Clock HA Clk RO CT/K, Pro Data Clk RO CT, Pro K/D Clk RO CT, Pro Key o 23456 7 o X X X X 0 0 0 0 000 0 Read or Write Read or Write Read or Write Read, Search, Space Count Search Only NEWCEB 1 0 0 0 0 X X 100011XX o 0 0 001 0000 o 0 0 0 000 X X 1 XX 000 OXX Read or Write Read or Write Search Only 67 Command 0.0 Search 000 o 0 100 o 1 0 010 o (J 0 0 o u x X 1 o Read 01 Write X X 1 1 Space Count 1 1 X X 1 1 X X o 0 .X X Bit 1 Means RO Count Bit 1 Means RO Count lOX X o o 0 X X 1 X X MULTIPLE TRACK (MITI OPERATION, END OF FILE, ORIENTATION C>Copyright IBM Corpor.tion 1972. 1973. 1974. 1976 COMMENT CMD 430 TWO CHANNEL SWITCHING CONCEPT AND COMMANDS TWO CHANNEL SWITCHING CONCEPT AND COMMANDS DEVICE RESERVE AND DEVICE RELEASE Note: If 3340 microprogram is installed in the SCU, the two channel switch, additional, feature cannot be installed. Reservation of a device is done by execution of a Device Reserve command. Release of a device, previously reserved, is done by execution of a Device Release command. In addition, 24 bytes of sense data are transferred to the channel when either command is performed. The two channel switch feature enables two channels to share the SCU and allows individual drives to be reserved for the exclusive use of either channel. The channels may be attached to the same or different CPUs. Channel switching and device reservation are made under control of the system(s) programs. Channel A Channel B A flowchart that lists the general microprogram steps and CLD . page references for either command, is on CMD 150. CHANNEL SWITCHING AND DEVICE RESERVATION CONCEPTS r-======;:::=====;r;:-,~ Refer to CMD 142 for command objectives. The string switch feature modifies these commanas; see the device MLM. COMMAND CPU A B See INTR 140, CHL-1475 First channel to raise Select Out • • • • • • •~ switches interface logic to that channel. The other channel will get Control Unit Busy if it tries to Storage Control Unit raise Select Out. Switch will go back to neutral when channel disconnects unless coo Unit Check occurred (contingent connection). CHANNELA I A device address reserved to one channel or being used by one channel presents Device Busy status to the other channel if selection is attempted - Disk Storage -- -- CODE FUNCTION B4 1. Set bits in control storage ('0690' = channel-A; '0694' = channel-B) to reserve addressed devices_ 2. Transfer 24 bytes of sense data to the channel. 3. Send ending status to channel 94 1. Store null value in control storage ('0690' channel-A; '0694' = channel-B) to cancel reservation for devices addressed. 2. Transfer 24 bytes of sense data to the channel. 3. Send ending status to channel. ERROR TYPE - CHANNEL B Device Release I CHANNELAINTERFACE OD042 If command is not the first one in the chain, command reject is set in sense data and Unit Check is set in initial status_ CHANNELBINTERFACE TIE BREAKER I Reserve command sets indicators in these words to reserve a drive for the exclusive use of one channel. All drives are reservable_ The Release command resets the reserve indicators to a null value. Device Reserve \ / N /. CMD 450 ALTERNATE PATH RECOVERY (APR) This function uses an Unconditional Reserve (UR) Command to break device allocation to the interface that has become inoperative, and establishes a path on an operable interface. UNCONDITIONAL RESERVE If a storage control attached to a string of drives with string switch feature and Alternate Path Recovery stops operating while an interface is selected or an assignment register position is set, no operation to the string or effected drive is possible from another storage control. SEE CTRL 650 CONTROL STORAGE LOCATION '0690' CONTROL STORAGE LOCATION '0694' I I I I I I I I I I DISK STORAGE Module 1 I Drive A ~ij Drive B . . .. DISK STORAGE Module 2 I DriveC ~ O,i" °~ i. .. .: ~: DISK STORAGE Module 3 I Drive E~ · F Dnve ~ [ij. o . ·· . · .. :. .. DISK STORAGE Module 4 I DriVeG~ D· H nve ~ ~ ~ . .. . To eliminate this condition the select latch and assignment register position can be reset through the uSd of the Unconditional Reserve (UR) command. Once the select latch and/or assignment register position for the desired drive have been reset, the string is reserved for the storage control through which the UR command was issued and normal operation may continue on the functional interface. Refer to CM D 150 for a flow chart that lists the general microprogram steps and CLD page references. Refer to CMD 142 for command objectives. Refer to device MLM for more detailed information. &: ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ~_....J ONLY ONE STRING SHOWN CONTROL MODULE SATELLITE MODULES 3830-2 ClCopyright IBM Corpor.tion 1972. 1973. 1974.1976 () o TWO CHANNEL SWITCHING CONCEPT AND COMMANDS o"--Y I ,I o /.) ~... o o r.···~': IJ () o o CMD450 0 ----~- (" (" p( ( (- (~ (C ( (- (- ( (- ( ( ( (- ( (- ( ( ( ( (0 ( ( (' ( (-" ( (:' (" (~' L CONTENTS CONTENTS M Ie 1 MIC Microprogram Introduction Microblock Format Sample Microprogram Routine Command Decode Sense Microcode Versions Microcode Features Additional Reference MIC2 Micro-Orders • • • MIC3 Reference Data, Register Assignments • MIC5 Microword Format Summary MIC6 Microword Format A MIC 10 Microword Format B MIC 11 Microword Format C MIC 12 Microword Format D MIC 13 Microword Format E MIC 14 Microword Format F MIC 15 Microword Format 1 MIC16 Microword Format 2 MIC 17 Microword Format 3 MIC18 Microprogram Instruction Examples MIC30 Microprogram Routines MIC35 Register Expansion Feature MIC40 383()'2 CONTENTS @ Copy,;gIIl IBM CorporMfon 1172, 1974, 1976 M Ie 1 (~- - ---- (~ MICROPROGRAM INTRODUCTION MICROPROGRAM INTRODUCTION MIC 2 SAMPLE MICROPROGRAM ROUTINE COMMAND DECODE - SENSE • Control of the control unit (CUI and modules is performed by use of an internally stored program. • Each microprogram instruction is decoded in the control unit when read out of the control storage. • • Decoded lines cause the control unit circuits to perform an action. Microprogram controls actions of the channel interface, MPL file, control interface, and the modules by placing bits in registers that have outputs to the other units. • Information or data is available to the microprogram by use of registers in the control unit with inputs from other units. • Because control storage contents are lost when po_r is off, the microprogram is permanently stored on the MPL file (23FOI. • An initial microprogram load IIMPLI operation transfers the microprogram to the control storage on po_r up. • Microprogram is listed on condensed logic diagrams (CLOsl. • • • Each block represents an instruction. A group of instructions that performs a given operation is called a routine. Exclusive OR a constant of 4 with the contents of the BR Set MO register to zero. Branch high: Set IAR bit 12 to 1 if ST register bit 2 is on. l,:r:eg:i:st:e:r:a~n~d~p;la;ce;;r;e;su;l;t;o;n;o;.;bu;;S';;;;;;;;;;;i~~It================~~ii~============~liP~~~~~~~~~~~~::::::::~~ I I Address ofthis block. Note that when addre.... are the same, only QD04Z.CHE (lXl00) • • • OX100,.l.--1284 .,OX10/0_12CA4. I D ;. O-MD 1--11T6 • TSTZ ---------1-0-1 It • AND constant of 240 with contents of SR register and place result on O·bus. 0-._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ QD030.QDI----------...;;~-...::;;;,....-------__;;;;.....--....., one instruction will be in storage. Which instruction is used depends on which feature is instelled. Branch low: SetiARbit13toi (OX100) IXOOOO--l0A20 : .............................r~A O+IIA-oD : .....................-~~ if BR register bit 3 is on. r :;-::::::.:::;. ;:::~::::.::.'Iod. Page and block (EHI that line carne from. • ST regi.ter control: Turn on ST bit 2 if D-bus is not zero in this block. !. . . . . . e83 J. -~z:...XX.OO-CB ~4-XOXOO-CD ":' . f:= La-o I r.:;:;:"':---C)-.l!~':. ~:.-I::: _ .........................- '1'1118 8 Z-XXOOO-EB CHIICK CO_D FOR ALL ZEROS I OX.OO-IC C8BCK THAT BIT 5 OF COIIIIAND IS 011 13 PAGE DECODES '1'IIE SIIISI AND 'rEST AND CHBCKS THAT '1'IIIY ARE VALID ~DS Branch low: Set IAR bit 13 to 1 if D-bus __ zero in preceding block. COJIHAIID SIIISI I/O DIAGNOSTIC SIIISE SIIISB I.OG ST2 • 1 To perform an operation called for by a channel command word (CCWI, the microprogram uses a series of routines (MIC35I. ITS • 1 CCZII lXXXOO--12~C. COII'I'ROL ~ 8 ST2 I E7-X.XOO-EG IIjX~~~~6--11~4 A K.Ba.D I C DNSTZI M A .,lXl00 _ _ l1:C. 882 aRl I ES-XOOOO-E CHICK TYPE OF SENSE COMIWID ·-QII060--£HB ixiooo)I £8-Xl000-EH ~ TO RAISE STATUS Page that line is X1XOO--l1CB going to A ·-QD070--GBE (10100) I 00000100 01000100 Oi000100 IIIVALlD COIIIIAIID A C8-X1XOO-CH ' -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ QS070_CGB (XXXOO) XOXOO--llCO ":]0 • _ _ Leg selector: • ·controlled by branch conditions. Selects one of fou r blocks for next instruction. X1XOO--1ZDC ·-QD080--CHI (X1XOO) L.._c_S__x_.x_O_O_-_C_E_ _ _ _ _ _ _...I E4-XXXOO-B SBT COIIIIAND INTO 8R REGIS'l'ER QD042 __ CBE (XX100) G6-1Xl00-GF DIAGNOSTIC SBRSE G8-10100-GH CMD REJCT Leg identifier: shows which block to use as a result of branch in block preceding. ~, Page number alpha position o : indicate. major routine. MIC 35 MICROBLOCK FORMAT LEG IDENTIFIER I AR Bits 11 thru 15: Bits 12 and 13 .how status of branch conditions specified in line 6 of preceding microblock. t_1Xl00-LF 1 = low branch condition satisfied ~ I ! i I ALUSTATEMENT - - - - - - - - - - - (Except modes 2,3, and C, external function I (MIC 101 MODE (Format code, MIC 10 - lSI MICROCODE VERSIONS ADDITIONAL REFERENCE DATA STATEMENT OR STORAGE (DARI ADDRESSING Four hex bytes that will be stored at this address IIARI, (3330 Series) ,:::!:~:::!=~:::~:::!~~::::!...!~ or address that will be set into DAR. ~~::::!:::!:::::::!=!=~=!::::!:!~I ,... DATA CONTROL Fetchlstore data 00 - Basic 02 - String Switch Attachment 04 - String Switch with 32 Drive Expansion _--------------~CD.~I~:li:~:~:~:~~~11 ! i . ! ! ! ':t::1 ~:c::~~:nspecifiedbYCLfield(MICI0). I BITCONTROL ST register set/reset statement B (MIC 131 ;.......!::!::!::~~!-.!:::!:::!:::!::~. Branch condition specified by CH field (MIC 101. If condition is setisfied, IAR bit 12 is set to 1. ! ~HEX Of thisADDRESS block (contents of IARI 1 = h'Igh branch cond'Itlon . satls . f Ied K-CK EMIT VALUE - - - - - - - - - - - _ Constant to A·bus (may be decimal or binary I. HIGH BRANCH _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ -Xll0_llBC I D A O+IIA-oD ORSTZI If condition is satisfied, IAR bit 13 is set to 1. L....L...L.-::!~~!::!:~i~...!......~I I • [ .I-i.-Li . ~l...1 ----CO... FEATURE CODE Feature, if any, that provides this block. MICROCODE FEATURES (L ine F of microblock) 1 4 - More details of microprogram instruction decoding shown on: MIC35 MIC 10-18 CTRL500 MIC 30-31 CTRL 230 CTRL 240 START 100 Major routine layout. Microblock layout. Format field descriptions. Sample microblocks. Addressing circuits. Addressing circuits Manual microword decoding. Single or Two Channel Switch Two Channel Switch Additional BOX SERIAL NUMBER _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (alphal LEG SELECTOR Setting of IAR bits (11-151 for next microblock. Symbol • denotes that bit value (0 or 11 is determined by a branch condition. BOX PRINT POSITION - - - - - - - - - - . . . Page coordinates (row-columnl for textual reference to this block. 3830-2 @Copyright IBM Corporation 1912. 1913. 1914, 1918 ~) 0 o o o o o () o o o () 0 0 Q MICROPROGRAM INTRODUCTION MIC 2 o o o 00 o c ( ( ( if ( C :t :f- C C C !t I~ • :( :( if C e ( c MICRO - ORDERS The micro-order is a coded statement that appears inside the microblock. It specifies Field This page lists the typical micro-orders encountered in the microprogram routines and BI gives a brief functional defi.nition. Also listed are page references to the MLM and & Ell ., rID tID & Micro-Order or Reg Used DNST21 STO 0- STl 0- ST2 0- ST3C 0- ST4 0- ST5 0- ST6 0- ST7 1 - STO 1 - STl 1 - ST3C o· 0010 1100 1001 1010 1011 1000 1101 1110 1111 0100 0001 0011 1 - ST5 1 - ST6 l-ST7 0101 0110 0111 GA GB GC MA MB MC MD 1001 1000 0001 1111 1110 0111 0110 NA 1011 NB NC NO 1010 0011 0010 TA 1101 TB TC TO 1100 0101 0100 BR 01110 GA 00101 GB 00100 GC 01101 GO 10010 MA 01011 MB 01000 MC 01111 MD 01100 MLM NO 10100 SA 00000 CFEALD SB 00001 RB10l SC 00010 SO 00011 ST 10001 TA 01001 Set ST register bit 2 if the 0 bus is nonzero Reset ST register bit 0 Reset ST register bit 1 Reset ST register bit 2 Reset ST register bit 3 Reset ST register bit 4 Reset ST register bit 5 Reset ST register bit 6 Reset ST register bit 7 Set ST register bit 0 to 1 Set ST register bit 1 to 1 Set ST register bit 3 to 1. Th is bit takes value of carrv out of ALU if "C" is added to D bus statement Set ST register bit 5 to 1 Set ST register bit 6 to 1 Set ST register bit 7 to 1 CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL 240 CTRL 240 CTRL 240 CTRL240 RB10l RB101 RB101 RB101 GP register with outgates to the A bus GP register with ou tgates to the A bus GP register with outgates to A bus GP register usually used for device read data GP register usually used for byte counter high GP register usually used for byte counter low GP register with outgates to the A bus usually used for channel bus in GP register usually used for CU address and channel conditions. GP register with outijates to the A bus GP register GP register outgates to the A bus, used for CTL-I error input GP register usually used for CTL-I bus out bits GP register usuually used for CTL-I gates. GP register usually used for CTL-I controls GP register usually used for CTL-I tags CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL 235 235 235 235 235 235 RG104 RG204 RG304 RG102 RG202 RG302 CTRL 235 RG402 CTRL 235 CTRL 235 CTRL 235 RG103 RG203 RG303 CTRL 235 CTRL 235 GP register with outgates to the B bus; ingates from the 0 bus GP register with outgates to the B bus; i ngates from the D bus GP register with outgates to the B bus; i ngates from the 0 bus GP register with ou tgates to the B bus; i ngates from the 0 bus GP register with outgates to the B bus; i ngates from t.h e 0 bus GP register with outgates to the B bus; ingates from the D bus GP register with outgates to the B bus; i ngates from the D bus GP register with outgates to the B bus; i ngates from the 0 bus GP register with outgates to the B bus; ingates from the 0 bus 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 CTRL 235 CTRL 235 CTRL 235 00111 10101 Cont. Page References Function NA NC lID register assignments. Field Bits Field Bits 10110 MIC 2 for a description of the fields and edge characters that are associated with each Field Micro-Order or Reg Used NB CFEALDs for quick reference to the hardware involved in the micro-order. Refer to 5 for ( C MICRO-ORDERS a function to be performed during the microprogram. micro-order and M IC ( RB10~ RB10l RB10l RB10l RB101 RB101 RB10l RB101 RB10l DE201 TB 00110 TC 10111 TO 01010 TG 01001 0 10000 ADDRO/ MC6 ILACT/ BOPAR BRO BR2 BR4 BR6 CARRY 1101 0111 1000 1001 1010 0010 CHK-2 INUN 1011 1001 RG403 COMMO 1100 RG10l RG201 RG301 RG401 SECTR 1000 SUPPO/ XCHAN STO ST2 ST4 ST6 0 1 BRl BR3 BR5 BR7 BTRDY 1110 lID RB103 CTRL 235 RG104 CTRL 235 RG204 CTRL 235 RG304 CTRL235 RG404 CTRL235 RG102 CTRL 235 RG202 CTRL 235 RG302 CTRL 235 RG402 III CUEND/ BFRDY RSPON/ CHANB 1111 0011 0100 0101 0110 0000 0001 0111 1000 1001 1010 1000 1110 1111 Page References Function GP register with outgates to the B bus; ingates from the D bus GP register with outgates to the B bus; i ngates from the D bus GP register with outgates to the B bus; ingates from the D bus GP register with outgates to the B bus; in gates from the D bus GP register with outgates to the B bus; ingates from the D bus GP register with outgates to the B bus; ingates from the D bus GP register with outgates to the B bus; i ngates from the D bus GP register with outgates to the B bus; ingates from the D bus GP register usually used for status indications GP register with outgates to the B bus; i ngates from the 0 bus GP register with outgates to the B bus; i ngates from the D bus GP register with outg ----_.- (-"", ~ -------------------------- - - - - - C) ('"-~ \J \,-/ 0 'J ,r'l 0 ,...--""" :,-) ('--'" - \ '~ 01 ;-~"'" 'v 0 01 "'-JI ,....---'\-., \c...# r~'\ '--pi ('"-'\ 0 ;r""" '"j C) ! I ~~ \ i -"'-.J ('! I i "-- ---/ ~-.,.." ( ) "'-- p' (~ "'-/ ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( { ( ( ( ( ( ( MICROWORD FORMAT A (FM=1, NO AND NB"'11) MICROWORD FORMAT A (FM = 1, NO AND NB • General purpose use. • Cannot be used to modify status bit settings. +11) MIC 10 Format A Example Iil... XXXO 0 - - 08 ~'t'K=llOOlOOO FORMAT DECODE • Faur bits af the microword are decoded to determine the format. (Some formats decode a fifth bit.) • Six configurations of these four bits are callectively known as format A (see CTRL 500): • ( ~R I N6-XX*OO-NF In the example, the format is decoded as: FM 1 KK 1 :r......:r Always 1 in format A ND 0 NB o ..,... T Allows gating of CK field to A-register. (If 0, allows gating of GP registers to Aregister and CV field to IAR). Allows gating af 0bus to GP registers. (If 1, blocks gating of D-bus to GP registers). CK FIELD (BYTE O. BITS 0 - 7) • Specified by KK = 1. • CK field is gated to the A-register. K=l o K~GA I' Allows gating of GP HSTO registers to B-regis· ter. (If 1, blocks gating of GP registers FM to B-registed. Th is Address o 8 3 C 0 1 2 BYTE 0 3 4 6 6 7 P 0 1 2 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 ICK II BYTE 1 3 4 0 1 5 1 6 1 7 P 0 1 07'--OleXOIO--QG NB 0 2 BYTE 2 3 4 5 0 0 0 1 6 1 I CB/CD --p5P B 7 0 P 1 CX ID II OP FIELD (BYTE 1. BITS 0 - 2) lip • Decoded to specify the ALU function to be performed. • In the example, 001 is decoded as A·B~. CB/CD FIELD (BYTE 1. BITS 3 -7) 1;1 • o o Decoded to select a GP register to serve as B-entry and/or destination register. • • 1 2 3 456 0 0 0 100 Next Address 0 or 0 NB and ND bits determine the function of the CB/CD field. 8 8 6 6 8 C if D;O!O if D=O In the example, 01110 indicates that the BR register is to be used for both B-entry and destination registers. CX FIELD (BYTE 2. BITS 4 -7) • II Gated to bits 8-11 of IAR. CH FIELD (BYTE 3. BITS 0 - 3) • Senses a hardware condition to determine a branch. • If satisfied, sets I AR bit 12 to 1. • In t~e example, 0001 sets IAR (12) to 1 unconditionally. CL F'IELD (BYTE 3. BITS 4 - 7) • • • Senses a hardware conditian to determine a branch. If satisfied, sets IAR bit 13 to 1. In the example, 0010 sets IAR(13) to 1 if the D-bus is zero as Bits 4-7 of IAR B Entry and Destination Bit 3 0 ST GD =1 Bit 3 = 0 SA SB SC a result of the ALU function performed in the preceding , microprogram step. .!! >- ... < 1; trl' .t:J 0 m ~ • .E Specified by KK=O. • De!=oded to select a GP register to serve as A-entry register. • In the example, CA is not specified. ~.,u a. Vl TE CV FIELD (BYTE O. BITS 4 -7) • Specified by KK=O. • Gated to bits • In the example, CV is not specified. 4-7 of IAR. ., >.. ... .t:J 0 0 " :c :c M CA FIELD (BYTE O. BITS 0 - 3) D 0 u I .= Glc: ., to: 0 I M .= Glc: to: CII 0 GC MF BR ME MC ·During IMPL BR2 replaced by SECTR • ·During IMPL BR3 replaced by BTRDY ···Following Spec Op 7, BR4 replaced by INUN •••• Following Spec Op 7, BR5 replaced by I LXEQ 3830-2 MICROWORD FORMAT A (FM = 1, NO AND NB "'11) © Copyright I"M Corporation 1972, 1978 MIC 10 MICROWORO FORMAT B (FM, KK, NO, NB= 1011) • MIC 11 MICROWORO FORMAT B(FM, KK, NO, NB = 1011) Format B Example Register to register transfer, FORMAT DECODE Decoding offormat B (FM, KK, NO, NB = 1011) sets up the following controls (seeCTRL 500): • ,. Blocks ingating to A register. Allows gating of GP registers to B register. • Allows gati~g-of D bus to G~registers. • Allows gating of ev and ex fields to IAR. CD FIELD (BYTE 0, BITS 0 - 4) • Decoded to select a GP register to serve as destination register. • In the example, 00011 selects the SO register. CV FIELD (BYTE 0, BITS 5 -7) • m II Gated to bits 5-7 of IAR. op FIELD (BYTE FM 1, BITS 0 - 2) • Decoded to specify the ALU function to be performed. • In the example, 011 is decoded as A+~. • The A bus entry is always zero for this mode. BYTE , 3 0 , 5 4 0 6 0 KKI NO NB BYTE 2 7 pi 0 1 0 01' 0 2 4 3 0 II CB FIELD (BYTE 1, BITS 3 -7) • Decoded to se Iect a GP register to serve as B entry register. • In the example, 00100 indicates that the GB register is to be used for B entry. ........, --L- CX FIELD (BYTE 2, BITS 4 - 7) • IAR /0 Gated to bits 8-11 of IAR. fo If satisfied, sets IAR bit 12 to 1. • In the example, 0001 sets IAR(12) to 1 unconditionally. 0 1 3 0 4 1 5 1 6 7 8 9 0 0 o 0 e 10 11 1 1 3 Format B Bit Assignment Chlrt BYTE 0 Cl FIELD (BYTE 3, BITS 4 - 7) • Senses a hardware condition to determine a branch. • If satisfied, sets IAR bit 13 to 1 • • 2 Senses a hardware condition,to determine a branch. • m 1 2 Next Address CH FIELD (BYTE 3, BITS 0 - 3) • 6 1 ex IlIB II . 5 0 0 2 3 4 CD Hex Value in Field Destination Bit 0=1 Bit 0=0 1 In the example, 0001 sets IAR (13) to 1 unconditionally. 1 0 0 1 ST Ifg ~ " NO Ne NB TC 5 6 7 ; Ig~ NF A B NE gIre E F 5 BYTE 2 BYTE' 6 7 ev Bits 5-7 of IAR 0 1 2 OP ALU Control AOB .. D A. B.. D A\fB+O A+ B+O IA + B+ C"DC A - B+ C"DC A + B.... DC A - B+ I-DC SA SB ~g GB GA TB NA 5 4 3 6 eB B-Entry Bit 3 I = 0 Bit 3 ~ NF ~: MA NE MA Tf ~~ ME Me ME 4 0 1 1 ex Bits 8-11 of IAR KK FM NO NB 5 6 0 7 1 2 3 eH Branch High liAR Bit 12) 0 1 Carry STO ST2 ST4 ST6 BRO BR2' NA TO BR 3 GA: TB NB TC W 2 ~GB ~~ TE W =0 BYTE 3 1 SA SB ST GO TG ~: ~g 0 1 7 TO BR MC 4 5 6 7 eL Branch Low liAR Bit 13) 0 1 0=0 Index.STl 0 1 2 3 ST3C ST5 ST7 BRI 4 5 BR3" 6 7 8 BA4*** BRS··*· 9 BR6 CHK·2 COMMO AOORO/MC6 sUPPO/XCHAN ILACT& oev/ BOPAR BR7 SELTD/MC7 A B C 0 HLTIO/XFER SERVO/MULTI CUENO/BFROY RESPON/CHANB E F 'During IMPL BR2 replaced by SECTR • 'During IMPL BR3 replaced by BTRDY "'FollowingSpec Op 7, BR4 replaced in INLIN •••• FollOWing Spec Op 7, BR5 replaced by ILXEa 3830·2 MICROWORO FORMAT B (FM, KK, NO, NB © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1978 r~. , j ,r\ /',\ , ,-~/ ~ , / /--" r '\ / // "- ./ ~ / /"-" '. ,,"'\ '" ./ ,,.<-'~, , " \ / /\ / '~ ./ " /:----'\ /'~, " MIC11 =1011) / "'"'\ '- / I r'\ r--", /~ " « c ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( MIC 12 MICROWORO FORMAT C (FM. KK, NO, NB -11111 MICROWORO FORMAT C (FM, KK, NO, NB • =1111) Format C Example Long addressing (module switching). F FORMAT DECODE 01XOIJ_06C C Decading of format e (FM, KK, NO, NB = 1111) sets up the following controls (see CTRL 5OOi: c Jfm"~" • Allows gating of GP registers to B-register. • Allows gating of O-bus to GP registers. Allows goting of ew, • '1'0 338B • Allows gating of CW field to A-register (4-71. • ( ev, and ex fields to IAR. CW FIELD (BVTE 0, BITS 0.3) • Gated to bits 0-3 of IAR and to bits 4-7 of the A-bus. CV FIELD (BVTE 0, BITS 4 • 7) • III Gated to bits 4-7 of IAR. OP FIELD (BVTE 1, BITS 0.2) 1M • FM CB FI ELD (BVTE 1, BITS 3· 7) • Selects a GP register to be gated to the B-register. • II 1 2 10 0 1 1 No ALU statement is allowed for this format; however, the o.bus may be nonzero atter this block IS executed. II 10 BYTE 0 3 4 5 In the example, 10000 does not gote a GP register. 0 0 ew ev II II 6 7 p 10 1 2 1 1 1 10 0 0 ,;- NB BYTE' 3 4 5 6 7 plo , 2 BVTE2 4 3 o 0 o 0 0 1 1 1 1 I1 1 c~ 5 6 7 pT 0 1 2 o 0 0 010 0 0 . • Gated to bits 8-11 of IAR. II • In the example, 0001 sets IAR (12) to 1 unconditionally. II Set IAR (12) '" 1 Ir 7 P 0 0 Set IAR (13) ., 0 J I 1 I IAR Senses a hardware condition to determine a branch. If satisfied, sets IAR bit 12 to 1. II I I • eL I CH FIELD (BVTE 3, BITS 0·3) • eH ex CX FIELD (BVTE 2, BITS 4·7) BVTE3 4 5 6 3 1 0 o 0 Next Address 0 1 0 0 2 1 3 3 1 4 5 0 0 6 1 3 7 1 B 9 1 0 10 11 0 0 12 13 14 15 100 8 0 8 CL FIELD (BVTE 3, BITS 4 -7) • Senses a hardware condition to determine a branch. • If satisfied, sets IAR bit 13 to 1. • In the example, 0000 sets IAR (13) to 0 unconditionally. Format C Bit Assignment Chart Hex Value in Field No effective ALU ( Suppress o Busl • During IMPL BR2 replaced by SECTR • ·During IMPL BR3 replaced by BTRDY ···FallowingSpec Op 7, BR4 replaced by INLIN ····FollowingSpec Op 7, BR5 replaced by ILXEQ 3830-2 @ Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1978 MICROWORO FORMATC (FM. KK, NO, NB =1111) MIC 12 ( MICROWORD FORMAT 0 (ME, FM ·00 AND NO, NB ~11) MICROWORO FORMAT 0 (ME, FM = 00 AND NO, NB:/: 11) m • Format D ExamDle General purpose use with ability ta rnadify status bits. m... ,xXXOO--07 -~I<=II FORMAT DECODE • Five bits af the micraword are decoded ta determine the format. Iil"'i • Six configurations of these five bits are collectively kn_n as format O. .. • I ~~~I~-= KK 1 I NO N8 0 1 __ AII_s gating of CK field to A register_ (If 0, allowS gating of GP registen to A register) I • Gated to bits 0-3 of the A register or to bits 4-7 of the A-register, depending on CX(7). • In the example, 0100 is gated to bits 4-7 of the A-register_ _ Blocks gating of D bus to GP registers (If 0, allows gating of D bus to GP registers) BYTE 0 ST(4) is set by hardware only; it cannot be set by the CS field. • The example (0010) is decoded as ONST21. This result sets ST(2) to 1 if the D bus is nonzero following execution of the ALU function in line A of the microblock. 0 1 Decoded to specify the ALU function to be performed. I 2 3 4 0 0 0 0 0 01000-- 07A8 K"OOlOOlOO-A A -I O K¥S~D B ST2 I L2-X·000-LB 01l00--07AC K=II A A K-+SB I 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1111010 7 A 7 A 7 A 7 A BYTE 0 The high-order (ME) bit of the C8/CO field is always 0 in format O. N8 and NO bits determine the function of the C8/CO field. • In the example, 00001 indicotes that the SB register is to be used as B entry and that the D bus is to be suppressed_ Format Confi gurat ians • Gated to bits 8-11 of IAR. • The low-order bit CX(7) determines the gating of the CK field to the A-register. • In the example, CX(7)=0; therefore CK is gated to A-register bits 4-7. ~ Hex Value InField t 0 1 ~ 4 • If satisfied, sets IAR bit 12 to 1 • 5 • In the example, 1110 sets IAR(12) to 1 if SUPPO (Suppress Out) Is up. 6 7 ; CL FIELD (BYTE 3, BITS 4 - 7) • Senses a hardware condition to determine a branch. • If satisfied, setJ IAR bit 13 to 1. A B --C 0 E In the example, 0100 tests for ST(3) being on. F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 71 0 1 2 OP CS CA OP CA CS CS OP CA CS CK OP CK CS OP OP CS CK Ck gated to A-Aegister per byt.2, Stotus bit 7 A-Entrv. SetjReset ALU Control L---I 12 13 14 XXO 0 4 8 C o if if if if NOT SUPPO and ST(3)=O NOT SUPPO and ST(3)=1 SUPPO and ST(3)=0 SUPPO and ST(3;,J B D=O I G2-01*OO-GB r-. 0 GC ~g ~g MO MC ~: NB NA IS TA MB MA AOB... O A.8.... 0 I-STl A'Q'B...O ~NS~~. _S C A+ 8 ... A+ B+ C ..~ A-8+C"OC A + 8 ... 0C I--ST6 I_ST7 A - B+ I-DC ~=~~g g::: ~~t 0--ST2 0 3 4 oi o I 0 o I 0 o I MEl 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 5 6 ,\ 0 0 oI 0 I0 CB/CO \ CX CD 1 CX \ o : 0 :0 CB 0 CX 0 11 \ 0 o I 1 10 C8/CO 0 CX 1 CD CX o I 1 10 CB 0 CX 1 1 1'0 I'M KK NO NB Bi ts 8-11 of IAR S entry and Destination u ....5 SA SB <: g ~~ G8 GA TB NA Specified by KK=O. • Decoded to select a GP register to serve as A-entry register. II >.. .!! r: -.! >- ..t> ..t> ~ 1i 0 ... 0 '? 0 "M l! l! i I O--ST3C TO MA ;: :0 :0 a--~~o ~g .~ :EII I;: ;: I;: Q. BR MC 0 '" ;: 2 3 CH CH CH CH CH CH Branch High (lAR Bit 12) 0 1 If format specifies CK field for A-Bus 0 entry: I CX(7)=-O if K<16. Carry This directs CK STO field to A-Aegister bits 4-7 ~U ST6 CX(7)-1 ifK)15. BRO This directs CK BR2* BR4*** field to A-AeBR6 gister bits 0-3 _CHK-2 COMMO ADDRO/Me6 SUPPO/XCHAN ILACT II OEVI C II 0 BOPAR I CA FIELD (BYTE 0, BITS 0 - 3) • 0 -£ 0-- 5 0--ST6 O--ST7 BYTE 3 BYTE 2 BYTE' 4 5 6 7 CL CL CL CL CL CL Branch Low (lAR Bit 13) 0 I 10Index. =0 STl I~}~C: ST7 BRI BR3** BR5···· BR7 SELro IMC7 HLTIO/XFER SERVO/MULTI CUEND/BFRDY RSPON/CHANB 0 I 2 3 T 5 6 7 8 9 A B C 0 E F 'During IMPL BA2 replaced by SECTA "During IMPL BR3 replaced by BTRDY "'FoliowingSpec Op 7, BA4 replaced by INLIN ····FoliowingSpec Op 7, BA5 replaced by ILXEQ 3830-2 MICROWOROFORMATO(ME.FM=OOANDNO,NB~11) @ '\ I 1 0 1 11 Format D Bit A.ignment Chart II Decoded to select a GP register t& serve as B-entry and/or destination register. III CH FIELD (BYTE 3, BITS 0 - 3) 1lII. Senses 0 hardware condition to determine a branch. D 1 0 In the example, 010 is decoded as A"'It8-+0. • • o o 0 0 0 Next Address or or or II CX FIELD (BYTE 2, BITS 4 -7) III BYTE 2 :) 4 2 6 7 P 0 o 1 1 0 IAR II CB/CD FIELD (BYTE 1, BITS 3 - 7) • 4 5 0 0 T II' OP FIELD (BYTE 1, BITS 0 - 2) • 3 0 ST2 J2--x*000 -JB NB Decoded to set or reset specific status (ST) bits. • • KKI NO BYTE' 012 010 K0\'6D~D I FM MEjO 01234567P 010000101 00100--07AII K-00100100-A 1 ---1 11, D=o. E2-01.00 -EB b AII_s gating of GP registers to B registers (I.f 1, blocks gating of GP registen to 8 register) . . CS FIELD (BYTE 0, BITS 4 -7) III. !i T T lrL_-'~====,~------,I 1pI. CK FIELD (BYTE 0, BITS 0 - 3) 1;1. Specified by KK=1 . iii. I suppa B o" oO FM 0 o r-------~==T~T Always 0 in format 0 Always 0 in format 0 00000--07AO K-II A A K~B I PaW/C DNST21 In the example, the format is decoded as: ME MIC 13 Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 197B ~'\ I / / / I" / , '", . , .. I MIC 13 (~, \~ ) ( ( ( { ( ( ( MICROWORO FORMAT E (ME, FM, KK, NO, NB • ( ( ( ( ( ( f ( =00011) ( «- ( MICROWORO FORMAT E IME, FM, KK, NO' NB= 00011) Indirect addressing (64-way branch) with address update capability. ( ( MIC 14 Format E Example FORMAT DECODE Decoding of format E (ME, FM, KK, NO, NB the following controls (see CTRL 500): = 00011 ) sets up • Allows gating of GP registers to A register. • Allows gating of GP registers to B register and to IAR (8-13). • Allows gating of 0 ous to GP registers. I E1- CA FIELD (BYTE 0, BITS 0 -3) • Decoded to select a GP register to serve as A entry register. • In the example, 1001 selects the GA register. CS FIELD (BYTE 0, BITS 4 - 7) • Decoded to set Or reset specific status (ST) bits. • ONST21 sets ST(2) if the 0 bu.s is nonzero. e ST(4) is set by hardware only; it cannot be set by the CS field. ", e The example (0000) does not set or reset any status bits. m op FIELD (BYTE 1, BITS 0 - 2) FM e Decoded to specify the ALU function to be performed. e In the example, 011 is decoded as A+B~O. BYTE 0 This Address 0570 0 1 2 3 4 5 KKI NO BYTE 1 6 7 POI 2 3 4 1001000010110 1 CBICD FIELD (BYTE 1, BITS 3 - 7) NB BYTE 3 BYTE 2 5 1 6 7 P 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 3 4 0 5 0 6 7 0 0 P 1 0 0 1 2 0 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 7 0 0 P 1 &B/CO e Decoded to select a GP register to serve as a B entry and destination register. GC REG e The initial contents of the selected register (bits 0-5) are also placed in the low-order byte of the IAR. e 2 10 3 4 5 6 7 In the example, '01101' selects the GC register. IAR 0 o Next Address 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 5 6 8 0 1 0 5 X X X X X 0 9 12 13 14 15 X X 0 0 10 11 X Format E Bit Assignment Chart BYTE 0 0 1 2 CA A Entry Hex Value in Field 4 5 0 GC NO NC TO TC MO MC 7 CS Status Set/Reset A B NB NA l .... STl ONST21 I .... ST3C I .... STO I .... ST5 I .... ST6 I .... ST7 0--:'14 O--STl 0--ST2 0-- ST3C E F MB ~~ g=:H~ ~ 4 5 6 7 ; g g~ MA BYTE 2 BYTE' 6 0 1 2 OP ALU Control 0 .... ST6 0 .... ST7 3 0 ME 4 5 6 CB/CO 7 0 1 2 1 0 0 FM KK NO 3 BYTE 3 4 1 5 6 7 0 1 2 Ignored 197:l, '973,1978 4 5 6 7 Ignored NB ADB-O AeB·O A'\tB·O A+B.O A+B"'C-OC A-B+C·OC A+ B.OC A-B + I-DC. SA S8 SC SO g~ TB NA ~.: TO MA ~~ BR MC MICROWORO FORMAT E IME, FM, KK, NO, NB = 00011) © CopyrightlBM Corporation 3 B Entry and Destination 1 0 1 3830-2 3 MIC 14 MICROWORO FORMAT F (ME, FM, KK, NO, NB· 00'11) IXXOOO--2B~8 MICROWORO FORMAT F (ME, FM, KK, NO. NB = 00111) MIC 15 A ~TG • Accomodates special operations required by CCU or user hardware. ! Format F Example FORMAT DECODE f::::f;;:l::::::'! Decoding of format F (ME, FM. KK, NO, NB = 00111) sets up the ~:i:t: : : : : ft:·!r}: {@,!m(}· lmr!{){tl':W!t:@r:::r}L-xxl following controls (see CTRL 500): • Blocks ingating of A register and outgating of D bus. .... • Allows special Op fields to be decoded. • Allows gating of CX field to IAR (8-11) : - ,O~8q C O~Sl'7 ': , : _ y :(' ~ 1'sPl;C:OE I ) SPECIAL OP FIELD (BYTE 0, BITS 2, 3 AND BYTE 1, BITS 4·7) • Decoded to activate' of 64 special operation controls. DNST21 00 - EC .. XX100 --2BIC K=3 A K-+'fG .'.:Y :: ..' ST7 Dl""b-XX.OO-Gll G3'-'XX:(OO-GC • The 3830 Model 2 utilizes 24 special operation codes. • In the example, 001110 selects special operation 14. Gate check 2 conditions to NA Register. CS FIELD (BYTE 0, BITS 4.7) • II Decoded to set or reset specific status (5T) bits. I • DNST21 sets ST(2) if the D bus is nonzero. FM KKIND • 5T(4) is set by hardware only; it cannot be set by C5 field, • The example (1111) resets 5T(7). Note that 5T(7) is reset after its status is tested (item F). BYTE 0 BYTE 1 01234567P012 34667PO 00001111100.00111000 : II CX FIELD (BYTE 2, BITS 4 • 7) II CH FIELD (BYTE 3, BITS 0·3) • Gated to bits 8·11 of IAR. • Senses a hardware condition to determine a branch. • If satisfied, sets IAR bit 12 to I. • In the example, 0001 sets IAR(12) to I unconditionally. NB BYTE 2 3466 000 ~WI 2 BYTE 3 3 4 6 6 i II CL FIELD (BYTE 3, BITS 4·7) • Senses • If satisfied, sets IAR bit 13 to I. • In the example, OliO sets IAR(13) to I if 5T(7) = I upon enterin9 this microblock. Q hardware condition to determine a branch. ~:;. SpOpO Sp Op 1 SpOp2 SpOp3 SpOp4 Sp Op5 SpOp6 SpOp7 Sp Op8 SpOp9 Sp Op 10 Sp Op 11 Sp Op 12 Sp Op 13 Sp Op 14 Sp Op 15 Sp Op 16 Sp Op 17 Sp Op 18 Sp Op 19 Sp Op 20 Sp Op 21 Sp Op22 Sp Op 23 Sp Op 24 Sp Op 26 Sp Op 28 SpOp30 Pgm-Stop Statement Chk-Stop Statement Not Used Error 2 Reset to User Gate Read Error Pattern to NB Reset Storage Error Register Set Address Compare From SA & SB INUN Online) Branch in CE Mode and ILXEa (Data Entry) Branch in CE Mode Stop MPL Operation Start MPL Operation Gate MPL Data to SD Reg via D Bus Not Used Not Used Load ND Register Gate Check 2 Conditions to NA Reg Set CI Bus In Parity Error CI Response End CI Recycle/Load CI Buffer from TA Gate Alternate Branch Condition Set Inline Active Latch/Set Dev Branch Reset Inline Active Latch/Reset Dev Branch Unfreeze Channel Switch Allow Disable A Allow Disable B Gate Comparison Assist Latches to MB Freeze Channel Switch Selective Reset After Check-' Propagate Select Out - Format F Bit Assignment Chart He" Value in Field D ADDRO/MC6 sUPPO/XCHAN ILACT & DEVI E F ·During IMPL BR2 replaced by SECTR • .During IMPL BR3 replacad by BTRDY .··Following Spec Op 7, BR4 replaced by INLIN •• ··FollowingSpec Op 7, BR5 .&placed by ILXEQ 3830·2 MICROWORO FORMAT F (ME, FNI, KK. NO, N8,-001111 MIC15 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972,1973, 197B " !'~" '., .:/ ('\ <,---j ('\ "- r'\ '----_.// 1'-",\ , ) '-~/ ,""' -"" '-, r '"" \, / (~ \~"- .:/ I' "- '\ / '\ j , .; " c' j / y / "- '- I ,/ (/'",\ \ " . .:/ ( '" ;,'~ , !- ~ '--" / (''",\ \ / '. '---_./ j c ( ( ( ( ( { { ( c ( { MICROWORO FORMAT 1 (ME, FM, KK, NO, NB = 10100/10101/10000) MICROWORO FORMAT 1 (ME, FM, KK, NO, NB Format 1c ~ Fetch/store, with data address update capability. • FORMAT DECODE • Format I a (lOIOO)--four-byte fetch. The four bytes of data ot the oddress specified by DAR(0-13) ore fetched ond placed in storage registers SA, SB, SC, SD. Format Ib (IOIOI)--four-byte store. The data in SA, SB, SC, SO is stored at the address specified by DAR(0-13). • • Format I c (lOOOO)--one-byte fetch. The four bytes of data at the address specified by DAR(0-13) are fetched, but only the one byte indicated by DAR(l4, 15) is placed in the SA register. The contents of SB, SC, SD remain unchanged. • Following the fetch or store operation, the djlt" .,-ldress is updated by the ALU function K+B~B. ' Decoding of format la, Ib, or Ic sets up the following controls (see CTRL 5001: • Allows gating of CK field to A registed4-71. • Allows gating of GP registers to B register and to DAR(S-15). • Allows gating of 0 bus to GP registers. • Allows gating of CX field to IAR(8-1I). • • II'!I 11;1 Sets zeros in DAR(I-4). • Ii' • ST(4) is set by hardware only; it connot be set by the CS field. • The example (0000) does not set or reset ony status bits. ML FIELD (BYTE 1, BITS Gated to bits 5-7 of DAR. III • 0 - 2) II I ME.Lr----.L-~F":":M---::K~K~1 ND Th is Address 10 0 0 7 C 10 II r:I _ III The initial contents of the selected register are also placed in the low-order' byte of DAR. • In the example, 10110 selects the NB register. • If no register is selected, zeros are placed in the low-order byte of DAR. • BITS BYTE 1 3 4 5 1 0 1 2 0 -ML 4 -7) Gated to bits 8-11 of IAR. CH FIELD (BYTE 3, BITS 0 - 3) • Senses a hardware condition to determine 0 branch. • If satisfied, sets IAR bit 12 to I. • In the example, 0001 sets IAR(12) to I unconditionally. CL FIELD (BYTE 3, BITS 4 - 7) • Senses a hardware condition to determine a branch. • If sotisfied, sets IAR bit 13 to I. • In the exomple, 1000 tests for BR(3) being on. 3830-2 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1978 C / FTCH4 E5-XXXOO-EE 6 7 pi 0 1 0 010 Format Configurations BYTE 2 1 1 2 3 0 1 4 0 5 6 7 0 0 0 plo CX o o 3 0 4 0 567 000 .-- '\ ',,- . - (-'\ \.... ~C' "" \.. -" \ ~ ./ " -") MIC17 ( r \... / ' ..... ,./ ./ \.. " ,( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( (- ( ( ( MICROWORD FORMAT 3 (ME, FM, KK, NO, NB = 10010) • One-byte fetch. • Entire address is provided by the microword. • ~Iocks gating of O-bus to • Allows gating of CX field to IAR (8-11). GP registers. • Sets zeros in DAR (1-4). • Allows gating of ML field to DAR (5-7). • Allows gating of NL field to DAR (12-15). NH FIELD (BYTE 0, BITS 0 - 3) • Gated to bits 8-11 of DAR. CS FIELD (BYTE 0, BITS 4·7) • Decoded to set or reset specific status (ST) bits. • ONST21 sets ST(2) if the O-bus is nonzero. • ST(4) is set by hardware only; it cannot be set by the CS field. • The example (0000) does not set or reset any status bits. II' ML FIELD (BYTE 1, BITS 0·2) .. • Gated to bits 5-7 of DAR. NL FIELD (BYTE 1, BITS 4·7) • II Gated to bits 12-15 of DAR. CX FIELD (BYTE 2, BITS 4.7) • III ( ( MIC 18 iI Ii m1J~"==~rc11 1I D 0608-DAR C f'TCHl i j------------,--------I Et-tf_moc+~ IL _______ m m --.J I I I I I MEl Th is Address 10 35DC 10 1 0 2 3 BYTE 0 4 5 6 7 pI 0 0 000 0 0 1 r"v I II I a a I 1 1 l' FM BYTE 1 3 4 5 1 1 0 2 0 7 6 o0 plo 1 Ia KKiND BYTE 2 1 a iii 3 a I 4 a 5 6 7 1 1 a I 8 9 10 11 a a 0.6 a a 5 6 7 pi 0 1 1 a 1 II a 1 a Ia 2 a ml CX - 3 a BYTE 3 4 5 a a I I IAR a 1 10 a 8 Next Address 2 1 3 1 I 4 a 3 5 ,6 7 1 1 a I 10 11 1 1 1 a 8 5 7 pi a '1 I I I I CL 11 I 0 I I~et IAR(13) = 0)1 1 12 13 14 15 1 a a a 6 a ml CH Iset' )1 IAR(12) = 0 DAR 2 a 4 1 3 II -~ 1 a 2 1 I NB NL ML II 9 I I I I 12 13 14 151 a a a 01 0 E ~ '---------Format 3 Bit Assignment Chart Gated to bits 8-11 of IAR. a CH FIELD (BYTE 3, BITS 0·3) • Senses a hardware condition to determine a branch. • If satisfied, sets IAR bit 12 to 1. • ( ( Format 3 Example Decoding of format 3 (ME, FM, KK, NO, NB = 10010) sets up the followina controls (see eTR L 500): Allows gating of NH field to A-register (4-7) and to DAR (8-11). ( MICROWORO FORMAT 3 (ME, FM. KK, NO, NB =10010) FORMAT DECODE • c ( In the example, 0000 sets IAR(12) to 0 unconditionally. CL FIELD (BYTE 1, BITS 4.7) • Senses a hardware condition to determine a branch. • If satisfied, sets IAR bit 13 to 1. • In the example, 0000 sets IAR(13) to 0 unconditionally. Hex Value inField l BYTED 1 2 3 4 5 6 NH CS 7 DAR bits Status Set/Reset 8-11 and A bus bits 4-7 1 --STl 1 DNST21 2 I __ ST3C 1 --STO I--ST5 5 I-.ST6 6 I--ST7 o + + 9 g=:~~j B 0-- ST2 0-- ST3C o g=:H~ A C E F 0-- ST6 0-. ST7 a 1 2 ML DAR bits 5-7 BYTE 1 3 4 1 ME 5 6 NL DAR bits 12-15 7 a a FM 1 a KK 2 1 NO BYTE 2 3 4 5 6 a CX N8 7 Bi Is 8-11 of IAR a 1 2 3 BYTE 3 4 5 6 7 CH Branch High (lAR Bit 121 Branch Low 0 a 1 1 CL (lAR Bit 13) a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Carry D~a STa IndexeSTI ST2 ST4 ST6 BRa ST3C ST5 ST7 BRI BR2' BR4'" BR6 CHK·2 COMMO AOORO/MC6 sUPPO/XCHAN ILACT & DEV/ BOPAR SR3" BRS .... BR7 SELTD/MC7 8 9 HLTIO/XFER SERVO/MULTI CUEND/BFRDV RESPON/CHANB C A B 0 E F "During IMPL BR2 replaced by SECTR • • ·During IMPL BR3 replaced by BTRDY. "" "Following Spec Op 7, BR4 replaced by INLIN • •• ". Following Spec Op 7, BR5 replaced by ILXEQ. 3830-2 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1978 MICROWORD FORMAT 3 (ME, FM, KK, NO, NB =10010) MIC 18 ( MICROPROGRAM INSTRUCTION EXAMPLES (Part 1 of 21 MICROPROGRAM INSTRUCTION EXAMPLES (Part 1 of 2) • • Add 4 froM emit field to contents of NC. Place results in NC register. Update address for next data Examples of the standard microprogram block operatienare given. Examples of some more difficult to understand microprogramming techniques are given. XXXOO--2F08 ,X1XOO--2F~ 8 K=7 04SA K~GB * * I Set the SA register to all zeros. * 02(NC)~DAR STORLi • Set the SA register with the complement of 70 (185). , XX100--1LilC Kz 255 A from 5A, in control storage. XXXOO--1LiAC K=-l A A K+MC4MCC , Y.X100--13~4 A O-O+C-+GCC I C * O-+STlI B n, I ST7 I JLi-XX*OO-JD ..;...;...:.::.:.:.:...;....• A and B registers = O. B register is complemented to = 255. If ST3C = 1, GC register is set to 0 and ST3C is set to 1. If ST3C = 0, GC register is set 255 and ST3C is reset to zero. I X0100--2LiLiLi K=18 A K-SC+14D ;~ B '_A_R::.0:T_3_'G': ........... . :.:.;.:.:.:.:.;.:.:-:.:.:.:.::::::~:::.:.:.:.:.: ! OOXOO--OBLiO K=O D A I XOXOO--2F20 I N9-X'lOO-NJ TEST IF DEVICE INTERRUPT TO RESET G6-XX·00-GF Add 255 from emit field to the contents of the MB reg· ister plus a carry of one if ST3C=1 and place results in MB. If ST3C=O an entry, MB is decreased by 1. If ST3C=O on entry and MB=O, ST3C Is not turnad on. If ST3C=1 on entry, MB is not changed. ST3C is turned off if there is no carry. ST3C is turned an if there Is a carry. ,XXXOO--17EO , A 1IIA-SD+14D ST3=1 C DNST21 B STO B CARRY F 2 JLi-X*XOO-JD INT~;RRUPTS GONEDELAY BEFORE SN4PLING 1-1 <+0."." I L4-X·XOO-LD DUMMY WORD TO FORCE CARRY Cor~PARE Add the complement of the contents of SO to the contents of NA register plus a forced carry in of 1 . Place resu Its on the D bus. Add one to contents of GA register and place result in GA. Loop in this block until carry out sets CARRY. XXXOO--1Li9Li K=-O ! Add complement of zero (255) to zero plus carry of 1 (ST3C = 1) and set ST3C to 1. This is done to force a carry branch in the next block. If 0 bus is not zero ST2 is set to 1.. If D bus is zero ST2 is unchanged. X1XOO--2FSC A XXXOO--2F70 * 2 QLi-XX100-OD OR BIT SIG ADDRESS OF PACK CHANGE' INTERRUPTS OR contents of GA and NB registers. Place results in NB register. OR gives a 1 output if either input is 1 . XXXOO--OC38 ! K=OOOOlOOl-A I I D 02 (GD)4DAR * C FTCHl 02C8-+DAR * C O-+ST3C FTCHl F 2 F 2 F 2 GLi-XX100-GD UPDATE ADDRESS TO RESET RESERVED BUSY TO, AND INTERRUPT BYTES FOR RESETTING CHANNEL. E6-XXXOO-EF FETCH BUSY TO BYTES L7-XXXOO-LG FETCH BUSY TO CHANNEL A BYTE A K¥GD-+GD TOGETHER AND contents of GA ard SA registers. Place results on the 0 bus. 0 = 0 branch checks the result in the next block. AND gives a 1 output if both inputs are 1. o is placed in ST2. XOXOO--OC80 K=l A K+GA-+GA 0~ST5 Add an emitted zero to zero. Set MC register to zero. Turn off ST3C as there can be no carry out (MC"C"). XXOOO--2F78 1 C 07-01XOO-OG ZERO STATUS A GA.!1. NB4NB * I I BR3 L5-0X*OO-LE WRITE CHECK FILE MASK FOR ALLOW NO WRITE , D I A K+04MCC * to contents of SC register and place results on 0 bus only. "C" causes ST3C to be turned on if there is a carry out of ALU. B STLi ST4 is turned on by the data transfer circuits when a new byte is ready or wanted. Loop in this block until ST4 = 1. K=32 I *- I XX100--105Li A K+SC-+DC CARRY is ~et by~~~rry out of the ALU. If turned on in a block it stays on for the first part of the next block for branching. ST3C is set by a carry out of a ALU operation if "C" is added to D bus statement. ST3C stays on until reset by 0~ST3C or no carry out of ALU wifh "C" statement. For both CARRY and ST3C, branch condition is result of conditions set up before entering block. I A I , • 0=0 B Add the contents of GA register to the contents of GA and place results in GA register. (GA has outputs to both A and B bus.) the DAR to address control storage on 0 doto cycle. Address is hex 02xx, "xx" is contents of NC register on entry to this block. K+MB+C~MBC I * N4-XXXOO-ND SHIFT SAMPLER register to zero. No input from. A or B register to the ALU. Set branch low candition if the D bus was zero in the last block. I XX100--2F!4 A GA+GA-+GA ·1 1 L4-XXXOO-LD RESET MPL FILE E8-XXXOO-EH Set the GB register = 7 from the emit field (K). 1 A K+NC-+NC * 1 N3-XX*00-NC XXXOO--2F80 !K-4 A O+O-+TG D=O B N6-xXXOO-NF t XXXOO--04!O , OXXOO--1Li8C K=-70 A K-+SA A MIC 30 * I 1 I I "2" Indicates that this block is used on two channel sw itch feature on Iy . Exclusive OR nine from emit field with contents of GO register. Place results in GO register. Exclusive OR gives a 1 output if one and only one input is 1. In this example bits 4 and 7 of the GO register will be inverted. 3 Address control storage at hex 02C8. ST3C is set to O. Read four bytes out of control storage. Place the byte selected by the two low order bits of DAR in the SA register. 3830·2 © Capyright IBM Corporation1g72, 197B MICROPROGRAM INSTRUCTION EXAMPLES (Part 1 of 21 (,\, ~ ./ ". /,r-" (' ",----/1 ". \ J ./ ,,; ./ ( "\ \. /' /--, MIC30 ~~~~~---~ -.r.:,.". "'-/ 1'(' (~"" <: (' L ( ( (~ (- f ( (. (- ( ( (-- (' ( (- (- ( ( ( (- I XXXOO--2FA40 . AI K~GC C2-XXXOO-CB SET SAMPLER ADDRESS Set up GC register to use it as Q counter. • r~:'l\1 IU; :,:::~ GC· GA~D I XXXOO--2F4D4 .---i C3-XXXOO-cc TEST FOR ADDRESS COHPARE Check counter (GC) with contents of GA (only one bit is on), Stoy in loop until equal (0 bus I 0). GC+GC+GC ","" y HS~,~,'J,,'D=O I ClI."."...,'l TD DROP OP-OUT 053C RAISE OP-OUT SPEC I 15 UNFREEZE CHANNEL. SWITCH INDICATE FIRST PASS 0550 05CO 0534 I->STO RAISE OP-OUT 05B8 0574 D 0554 5-_...:.I-.;>~T~E;.;7_ _-I CHAN D AL.L.OW DISABL.E DROP SEL.ECT-OUT AND HOL.D-OUT 05F8 04DO OIIOP OUT - TA(;S EXCEPT OP-OUT 043C BRANCH TO SUBROUTINE AND DECREMENT SUBROUTINE ADOIIESS 123&4777 I C80400 1 of 2 _ Seq ,."N_ ROUTINE 80 'Part 1 of 2) MICFL 20 ROUTINE 60 (Part 20f 2) IJOUTINE 80 (Par:t 2 of 2) MICFL 25 BRANCH TO '01500' RA I SE OP-OUT PLACE OVERLAY IN 0000 TO RETURN IF SELECTIVE RESET CAUSES A SYSTEM RESET BRANCH TO '2000' I->TOO 1->T0!5 RAISE OP-OUT AND SI.I'PRESS-OUT YES O->TOO DROP OP-OUT 44 I->TOO RA I SE OP-OUT 3830-2: ROUTINE 80 (Part 2 of 2) o o 00 0'. '\ 0'-'" .. . o o ()OOOOOO o MICFL 25 000 000000000 .--~---.~- (- (- ( ( ( -, -------~---~~-~.- (- ( --- (-- ( ( ( ( ( (" (~ (~ (-' ( (~- (~ ( ROUTINE 82 ROUTINE 62 (Part 1 of 2) (- (~ '''rt 1 of 21 ( (- (- " ," MICFL 30 RA I SE HOLD OUT 04F"C O->TG CHAN A 18 DIIOP REQUEST-IN o C O-.TE CHAN C 10 DIIOP IIEQUEST IN 0414 2210 DESELECT AND PROTECT NA REGISTER 2214 0411 I->TDO ENA8LE CU-ENO B RA ISE OP-OUT AND RESET OUT-TAGS 041C 2218 O-.TC I ->TEO RESET IN-TAGS CHAN 0 RAISE REQUEST-IN 4 221C SPEC.03 1->T80 RESET CHECK-2 ENABLE CU-ENO C RA I SE SELECT OUT 0424 CHAN AlB DROP REQUEST-IN 2231 SPEC. 15 2240 1->TC3 \»FREEZE CHAMEL S.,TCH O->TE RAISE OP-IN CHAN C 10 DROP REQUEST-IN 2220 ENABLE CU-ENO 0 2248 ~Cro WICFL 35 MICFL MICFL 35 35 MICF"L 35 3830-2 ICB0500 .... 1of2 I~~ I ~1~~8~37~04~~~7~2~______~______~______~______~______~____ --J ROUTINE 82 '''rt 1 of 21 MICFL 30 ("- (~ ROUTINE 82 (Part 2 of 2) ROUTINE 62 (Part 2 of 2) ERROR COOE ERROR CODE 6284/6285 62"0/62"1 ERROR CODE ERROR CODE 6288/62119 102116162"9 ERROR COOE ERROR CODE 62"C/62AD 6290/6291 1->T85 ENA8LE CU-ENo C ERROR CODE 628C/628D 1->T80,1 RAISE SELECT-OUT "NO HOLD-OUT ERROR CODE 62CCl102CD ERROR CODE 62CO/62CI 22DC 22E8 ERROR CODE ERROR CODE 102C411o2C5 ENA8LE CU-END 8 6294/6295 10280/6281 62911/10299 ENA8LE CU-END 0 ERROR CODE 10200/10201 ERROR CODE 102Clll1o2C9 ERROR CODE ERROR CODE MICFL 35 2204 228C ERROR CODE 10284/6285 MICFL 30 MICFL 30 MICFL 30 ROUTINE 82 (Part 2 of 2) ) f"''''' ~;; 0-·' 0·· ·,'· \. "'-- {, " o o ('"0·' .,. o 00 o 00000 () o o MICFL 35 00000 o 000 "--- .~\ ---~-- ~( (- ( (- ( ( (-- ( ( (- (- (:-- (- ( ( (- ("- f- (-' (- ( (- (- ( ROUTINE 64 (Part 1 of 3) A (' (-- (- ("-- (-- --{"\ (" MICFL 40 AI SINGLE CHANNEL O->NA START ROUTINE 64 IHOUSEKEEPING) RESET 8US-OUT INA REGI I RAISE HOLD-OUT TWO CHANNEL SWITCH ADDITIONAL MACHINE 0530 SINGLE CHANNEL MACHINE O->TA SELECT CHANNEL ISH) ERROR CODE ZERO BUS-OUT 6404/6405 042C 05C4 AlB O->TG SPEC: 03 CHAN AlB DROP REQUEST-IN RESET CHECK-2 049C I ( ROUTINE 64 (Part 1 of 3) TWO CHANNEL ADDITIONAL CID ( RAISE OP-IN 04AC t O->TE SPEC: 15 CHAN CID DROP REQUEST-IN UNFREEZE CHANNEL I 04AO 04CC t O->TB DROP SELECT-OUT AND HOLD-OUT. PROTECT NA REGISTER GA->IAR BRANCH TO SUBROUTINE AND DECREMENT SUBROUTINE ADDRESS 04A4 I CHAN AlB DROP REQUEST-IN ERROR CODE 6418/6419 0430 048C ~ I->TDO RAISE OP-OUT 0538 0468 I->TEO 01--..;.....;.;;.;.----1 CHAN 0 RAISE REQUEST-IN 041C ICFL 45 _F4-M ICFL 45 4-FO-M ICFL 50 _ _...J._ _ _. , '5_EC-M ICF L ~_F8-M O->TE CHAN CID DROP REQUEST-IN ERROR CODE 641C/641D 0438 -3 1 0474 5'1l0~ O->TC I->TBO RESET IN-TAGS RAISE SELECT-OUT 05A8 ERROR CODE 6420/6421 2580 ERROR CODE 6422/6423 1 0488 O->MD ZERO BUS-IN IMD REGI I WILL BE CHECKED LATER 05AO Part No. (8) © CHECK FOR SELECT-IN UP AND SAVE 258C 2354779 3830-2 INDEX -- Copyright IBM Corporation 1975 I IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER ROUTINE 64 (Part 1 of 3) MICFL 40 ROUTINE 64 (Part 2 of 3) F8 ROUTINE 64 (Part 2 of 3) ICFL 40 MICFL 45 40 04F8 l l 1->TC3 SELECT CHANNEL 15T6.7) , t ->TG3 CID CHAN A RAISE SUPPRESS REQUEST-IN 1.1!. O->TG CHAN BRAISE SUPPRESS REQUEST-IN CHAN AlB DROP REQUEST-IN 0504 1..Eo L..E. SPEC. Q->TE 1->T87 CHAN C RAISE SUPPRESS REQUEST-IN CHAN C I 0 DROP REQUEST-IN ENABLE NA REGISTER 1-~TEt 25E4 1 REQUEST-IN UP INDII YES NO -, ( ERROR COOE 6424/6425 0510 ) 0584 25EO INCREMENT BUS-OUT 2534 NO ,r ERROR COOE 6426/6.27 ) NO 25EtTH PASS 2514 2524 YES COMMAND-OUT ,UP ICOMMOI YES INCREMENT BUS_IN I +T"->T" I 05FC 2560 DROP ADDRESS-IN 1->T80 RAISE SELECT-OUT BUS-IN EQUALS ZERO IFROM HOUSEKEEP I NG I tTA=NAI 0->TC4 ADDRESS-IN UP IND21 YES 0574 2560 2530 REQUEST-IN 050C PROTECT NA REGISTER DATA SENT EQUALS DATA RECE I YEO 2504 0528 CH~MR~~pE I " NO II I • BUS-OUT PAR I TV ERROR I BOPARI YES 1->TE3 I ERROR CODE 642C/642D RAISE COMMAND-OUT 0520 0508 ( 257C I I->TGI YES NO 'RAISE ADDRESS-IN AlB "'\ ./ 25E8 1->TC4 SELECT CHANNEL IST61 0500 ERROR CODE 642A/642B I 0518 I..!. ( BUS-OUT EQUALS ZEROS IFROM HOUSEKEEP I NG I RAISE OP-IN 2510 NO -, f ERROR CODE 6428/6429 ) 2578 A8 Q->TC5 DROP STATUS-IN 2520 0550 0->TC6 0:->TC7 RAISE DROP COMMAND OUT SELECT-OUT AND HOLD-OUT MICFL 40 051c I I ->TC3 1->lBI , 1 ->Te4 RAISE OP-1N AND ADDRESS-IN RAISE HOLD-OUT T 2424 2434 2510 0500 AlB O->TG CHAN c/o DROP REQUEST-IN 2408 3830-2 437408 447460 16 Ol:t ,72- 19 Dec 75 IBM CONFIDENTIAL CHAN A I B DROP REQUEST-IN 2400 ROUTINE 64 !Part 2 of 31 UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER MICFL 45 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1975 j) '" '" ' --~-O"-O' 0, "', 0 0 0 () o 0' '~ " o o CJ" r)', ~) r", ~j r)' "" I"'"~ i"-Yi C) () o 0 (/'",,! ~ (~ "--.Y () (- (- (- (- (- ( ( ( ( ROUTINE 64 (Part 3 of 3) f ( ( MICFL 50 ROUTINE 64 (Part 3 of 3) 45 MICFL40 AI RAJ SE SUPPRESS-OUT ZERO ADDRESS 1- ___ 280C O-SR < ZERO SWITCHES ERROR CODE MA->SO 6464 2810 SAMEAS~ FIRST ~ ERROR CODE ) 64_6_2_ _, STORE CU ADDRESS IN 0603 2414 SELECT SEQUENCE ADDRESS IN GB REGISTER 2830 SAVE FIRST ADDRESS X'40' ... BR SAVE FIRST ADDRESS K=8 K + GB-GB SET SELECTED 2908 8/0 SWITCH 'ON' 2970 2910 BUMP ADDRESS X'80' ... SR SET SELECTED AIC SWITCH 'ON' 2960 ERROR CODE 6401 ERROR CODE 6466 STORE CU ADDRESS IN 0603 STORE CU ADDRESS IN 0&02 2414 ERROR CODE 6468 MICFl 40 O->TC4 DROP ADDRESS-IN 3830-2 437408 1 16 Oct 72 447460 19 Dec 75 MICFL 40 MICFL 40 IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26,1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1975 646A 646E 646C MICFL 40 ERROR CODE ERROR CODE ERROR CODE 248C ROUTINE 64 (Part 3 of 3) MICFL 50 ROUTINE 66 (Part 1 of 2) ~START lobROUTINE IHOUSEKEEPINGI RUNNING CHANNEL A/C IST-71 M YES SD->TA SC->TA PLACE CHAN A/C ADDRESS ON BUS-OUT , O->TC YES bbOC/6600 BUS-OUT PARITY ERROR I BOPAR I 0440 0478 NO ERROR CODE 6610/6bll 0418 YES 1 1->TD4 RAISE ADDRESS-OUT 0488 NO I \. 0560 J SPEC: 03 COMMAND-OUT UP I COMMO I RESET CHECK-2 0494 YES 1->TC3 RAISE SELECT-OUT AND HOLD-OUT RAISE OP-IN 0534 ADDRESS-OUT UP IADDROI 0424 HALT-I/O UP IHLTIOI YES r \. ERROR CODE 6604/6605 SELECT-IN UP I INDEX 1 0426 0424 NO NO YES ERROR CODE 6618/6619 ADDRESS SENT EQUALS ADDRESS RCVD IMA=GB) 0454 04CO YES NO \ RESET BUS-OUT REGISTER r NO \. ERROR CODE 6624/6625 NA REGISTER PROTECTED NO 0470 YES DROP ADDRESS OUT 0430 AODRESS-IN UP IND2) I NO 0590 0498 61028/6629 ALLOW NA REGISTER 058C 04EO 049C 1 cv MICFL 60 IBM CONFIDENTIAL 437408 il447460 1 ~6 Oct 72' 19 Dec 75 ROUTINE 66 (Part 1 of 2) UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER 1 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1912, 1915 o o o o b63C/663D 1->TB7 ERROR CODE 0450 0410 0 , 0 J,4"'" 1,. ERROR CODE \ tNA=G8J 1->TB7 3830-2' 04AO 0590 O->NA ERROR CODE 661C/661D ALLOW NA I ERROR CODE 6638/6639 0590 0460 YES 0490 .r 0->TD4 ERROR CODE 6608/6609 0428 NO 0468 04EO NO WAS NA REGISTER PROTECTED .NA=OI r YES 04CO NO BRANCH TO SUBROUTINE AND DECREMENT SUBROUTINE ADDRESS II RAISE COMMAND-OUT PLACE 'FF' ON BUS-OUT 043C 'CO'->TB GA->IAL SPEC: tFF'->TA 0458 OS88 ! 1 ERROR CODE 6614/6615 D43C 'CO'->TD 0544 IA FREEZE CHANNEL SWITCH 0488 R A I SE OP-OUT AND RESET OUT-TAGS O->TB , SPEC: 1 DESELECT AND PROTECT NA REGISTER ) 044C RAISE ADDRESS-IN DROP SELECT-OUT AND PROTECT NA REGI STER 0408 052C 0538 ERROR CODE b61A/b61B 1->TC4 O->TBO 0->TB7 O->MD SPEC: 03 \. 0444 ZERO DEVICE ADDRESS RESET CHECK-2 r YES 0478 cu SELECTED .SELTDI RESET BUS-OUT REGISTER 0528 ERROR CODE 0438 O->NA DROP IN-TAGS \. CU ADDRESS SENT EQUALS ADDRESS RECEIvED INA=GBI 041C 04FC I I NO NO PLACE CHANNEL B/D ADDRESS ON BUS-OUT 100 A ADDRESS-OUT UP .ADDROI NO 04FC YES MICFL 55 ROUTINE 66 (Part 1 of 2) \, 0 \J () I" " """~ ( 'I ~ ;f'"~ I ) '- 0 0 0 \ '/r'l ,0 ~y (""'~ ~y r) \... I •, " 0 0 F-~ U ;r"'. () "'- I) " () ~-E) /, :F.~ [ , ",-y ,,,,,~ I y "-.. 0 .. (, ('"'l\1 0 0, j MICFL 55 ,f"',!\ iJ ,c~ ; ./ ~, I 1"-__ ./,, ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( { ( ROUTINE 66 (Part 2 of 2) ROUTINE 66 (Part 2 of 2) YES O->TC3 ERROR CODE ERROR COOE MICFL 60 DROP OP- IN bb56/bb59 bb40/bb41 2b46 0480 0->TD4 O->TDb ERROR CODE 6646/bb49 DROP ADDRESS-OUT ANO COMMAND-OUT bbbC/b66C YES 2626 NO 2bE4 ERROR CODE 6676/6677 ERROR CODE bb2C/bb2D ERROR CODE RAISE ADDRESS-OUT NO ERROR CODE ERROR CODE bb5C/bb5D RAISE SERVICE-OUT 6610/6671 2748 2b5C 26AO YES ERROR CODE RESET CHECK-2 2668 ERROR CODE DROP HOLD-OUT 6b4C/664D 2624 6674/6675 26E8 0>TD5 DROP SUPPRESS-OUT Q 0>TD6 ERROR CODE ERROR CODE b642/bb43 DROP SELECT-HOLD 6b50/6b51 2634 -AA- BUS- IN ON bbbO/bbbl MICFL 55 2b16 LOAD ERROR CODE 2728 2664 272C RAISE ADDRESS-IN DROP STATUS-IN 2bllC ERROR CODE ERROR CODE RAISE STATUS-IN bbb4/bbb5 6652/bb53 2666 2b36 ERROR CODE ERROR CODE ERROR COOE 6644/6645 b6b6/bb69 bb54/bb55 2608 2640 2610 RAISE SUPPRESS-OUT 3830-2 437408 16 Oct 72 447462 5 Nov 76 ROUTINE 66 (Part 2 of 2) MICFL 60 ROUTINE II ROUTINE 68 START ROUTINE 1>11 I HOUSEKEEPINGI INCREMENT ADDRESS COUNTER +11> ZERO CU ADDRESS COUNTER MICFL65 ERROR CODE 1>808/1>1109 0418 SPEC: NB->TA 15 UNFREEZE CHANNEL SWITCH LOAD ADDRESS TO BUS-OUT 1>800 04EC 0444 RAISE OP-OUT AND DROP OUT-TAGS 0438 RESET IN-TAGS PLACE ADDRESS COUNTER ON BUS-OUT 0410 ERROR CODE b81 0 Ib81 , 04A8 O->TB 04BC 1->TD4 DROP SELECT-OUT, RAISE ADDRESS-OUT PRO~~~~-~~TRE~7~TER 04CO I->TBO ,'->TBI RAISE SELECT-OUT AND HOLD-OUT 0484 CODE 6804 BRANCH TO ';UBROUT I NE AND DECREMENT SUBROUT I NE A~ORE S~, 0548 MLM0002 437408 MICFL-b5_R -----bl!Er---JFL_" 127172 -----bl!X----JFL_" 437408 16 Oct 72 3830-2 121172 447462 5 Nov 76 ROUTINE 68 0 0 0 0 0, ~ 0 'J r~ ::,' ',,-y ! 1""-' " 0, \,J/ ~' 0 0 0 r""\ ~ 0 0 0 ---- - - ---- 0 " 0 0 ~ U r~ J r~ ,,-y r~ ''J I~I ~ r'\> v J 0 0 0 0 MICFL 65 ,~ ~jJ 0 {"-"" Vi 0 ,.,r"\., ' \ ~y (- (- ( (- (~ (- ( ( (-- ( ( ( ( ( ROUTINE 6A (Part 1 of 3) ROUTINE 6A CPart 1 of 3) JP' II 04F"C START ROUTINE loA (HOUSEKEEPING) J 1->TC5 O->TBO O->TBI RAISE STATUS-IN DROP SELECT-OUT AND HOLD-OUT <>-~ UNF"REEZE CHANNEL SWITCH 0->TD4 OROP ADDRESS-OUT ST7 = I 04AO RAISE OP-OUT AND RESET OUT-TAGS ! 04E8 YES SC->TA O->TG PLACE CHANNEL BID ADDRESS ON BUS-OUT A/C ADDRESS ON PLACE CHANNEL UNBLOCK CHANNEL SWITCH BUS-OUT 0424 0418 1->TD4 RESET CHECK-2 ERROR CODE 6AOC/6AOD 04A4 '\ NO STATUS-IN DOWN INDOI 0518 0414 YES 0514 1 CHAN A RAISE REQUEST-IN A RAISE OP-IN 0440 , 0450 CID CHAN BRAISE REQUEST-IN B l ...... 045C 1->TC3 1->TGO ~ RAISE SELECT-OUT AND HOLD-OUT 1->TG2 l 0594 C RAISE ADDRESS-OUT L 050C SD->TA 041C <$> 'CO'->TB CHANNEL 0594 I 04E8 SPEC, 15 , 75 B4 1->TC5 SELECT CHANNEL 0444 RAISE STATUS-IN 054C AlB 1 1->TE2 O->TG 1->TD6 CHAN C RAISE REQUEST-IN C CHAN AlB DROP REQUEST-IN RAISE SERVICE-OUT l I 0448 0460 05A4 1 t SPEC. 'CO'->TB RESET BUS-OUT 04A8 RESET CHANNEL CID TAGS UNF"REEZE CHANNEL SWITCH RAISE SELECT-OUT AND HOLD-OUT 04BC 15 051C 0430 1 RESET IN-TAGS 04AC STATUS-IN UP INDO) BRANCH TO SUBROUTINE AND DECREMENT SUBROUTINE ADDRESS YES O->TB I NO \ ERROR CODE 6A04/&A05 DESELECT 0504 052C DATA RECEIVED EQUALS DATA SENT IGB=IIAI NO ERROR CODE 6A08/6A09 05E4 0500 I 0->TC5 CHAN 0 RAISE REQUEST-IN 0 CHAN C/O OROP REQUEST-IN DROP STATUS-IN 044C , - 1->TB6 0438 I 0488 I '20'->110 DROP SERVICE-OUT 05AO CU-END UP I CUEND I NO 0541: 0->TD6 PLACE CU-END STATUS ON BUS-IN C CHAN B ENABLE CU-END B 0468 I r<$> OROP IN-TAGS 0508 04B4 O->TE l O->TC DESELECT AND PROTECT NA REGISTER I->TEO CHANNEL 1 ;:':'1 .!...~ ...... MICFL 70 YES .~ 05A4 IIICF"L 75 05AO YES ... RESET CHANNEL TAGS 04B8 I r 3830-2 i 1->TB5 1437408 16 Oct 72 I ERROR COOE 6AI0/6Ali CHAN C ENABLE CU-ENO C 0454 0548 I->TB~ CHAN 0 ENABLE CU-END 0 I 0458 l ROUTINE 6A (Part 1 of 3) MICFL 70 ROUTINE 6A (Part 2 of 3) ROUTINE 6A (Part 2 of 3) MICFL 75 ICFL 70 ERROR CODE &AI4/&AI5 UNFREEZE CHANNEL SWITCH 0534 INDICATE SUBROUTINE F4 RUNNING 0554 RAISE OP-IN SC->TA PLACE CHANNEL AIC ADDRESS ON BUS-OUT 0484 PLACE CHANNEL BID ADDRESS ON BUS-OUT 0480 RETURN TO HOUSEKEEP I NG A 'OE'->TG CHAN B,C,D BLOCK CHANNEL SWITCH 2A24 B 1->TD4 RAISE ADDRESS OUT FREEZE CHANNEL SWITCH 0420 'OO'->TG ERROR CODE I>AIC'I>AID sE~~~ ~~~~EL SWITCH 0558 05CO 2A20 C 'OB'->TG SET 'Fa' IN GA REGISTER RAISE SELECT-OUT AND HOLD-OUT FREEZE CHANNEL SWITCH sE~~~ ~~~~L SWITCH 0570 2A2C D MICFL 70 'Ol'->TG INDICATE BEGINNING SECOND PASS 0570 ERROR CODE &AI8/1>AI9 CHAN A,B,C BLOCK CHANNEL SWITCH NO -IO'->T8 ND RAISE LONG SELECT AND DROP SELECT-OUT 055C SC->TA LOAD CHANNEL BUS-OUT 2A30 AIC ADDRESS ON LOAD CHANNEL BID ADDRESS ON BUS-OUT 2A34 DROP IN-TAGS 057C ~I 3830·2 o '0 o I ROUTINE 6A (Part 2 of 3) 00 O 0 , 0""" C--) ': }, )'f·" ': ~' oo 000 () o o o MICFL 75 0' ,0 0, \~ " ' , ,,', o Jtf""" r\;,.,-, ( ( (-- ( ( (-- ( ( ( ROUTINE 6A (Part 3 of 3) ROUTINE 6A (Part 3 of 3) MICFL 80 y:::' '" O->I'IA RESET BUS-OUT REGI STER 2AFO PLACE "FF" ON BUS-OUT 2A48 RAISE COMMAND-OUT E,RROR CODE bA40/bA41 2A5C ERROR CODE bA44/bA45 2AbO MICFL 70 3830·2 43'7408 1 © 16 Oct 72 Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1975 ! 447460 19 Dec 75 IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER ROUTINE 6A (Part 3 of 3) MICFL 80 ROUTINE 6C (Part 1 of 8) MICFL 90 START ROUTINE~ MICFL !IIi IoC • MICFL 110 IHOUSEKEEPINGI cy AlB ROUTINE 6C (Part 1 of 8) 84 MI~r T fc);ICFL 120 M~~ 2C54 ~ SELECT CHANNEL 1STIl I SELECT CHANNEL 15T',71 CIO O->TCi CHAN AlB DROP REQUEST-IN 0!10 1-- CHANNEL ISTIo,71 1->TCiii! CHAN A RAISE REQU£ST-IN 12- 0->TCi2 CHAN A DROP' REQUEST-IN I 01120 01120 , 1->TCiO !---i c~~~urs~~I~E 1 0"5T4 '01 '->TB DESELECT AND ALLOW NA RECi !---i I "--Iii I lrU'I 1->TEii! CHAN C RAISE REQU£ST-IN 051C 'CO'->TO RAISE OP-OUT AND DROP OUT-TAGS 0514 ~ ~ 01l2S , ...E. OlllC 052S ( 2000 RETURtlorFROM SUBRO INE '07'->MO SET GB REGISTER FOR TEST CC 1->TCl RAISE OP-IN 2004 1->T07 RAISE DATA-OUT LOAD SECOND BYTE INTO BUFFER A 2024 200C 2020 011110 YES CHECK SERVICE-OUT SET TEST PATTERN 200C 'CO'->TO RAISE OP-OUT AND DROP OUT-TACiS 01l5C 20011 2010 '01'->MO LOAD SECOND BYTE INTO BUFFER B 2034 SPECIOl RESET CHECK-2 COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUTINE MICFL 115 0564 COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUTINE MICFL 115 LOAD FIRST BYTE INTO BUFFER B 'A4'->BR 2D2C ----------- 052C P0' 2_F8- MICFL 3_F4- MICFL 4_FO- MICFL EC - MICFL _E8MICFL ,-E4- MICFL _EO- MICFL II DC - MICFL r- - o 90 95 100 105 105 110 110 110 ROUTINE 8C (Part 1 of IN UNTIL MARCH 26,1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER 00 0 0 0 ~ COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUTINE MI CFL I 15 ~ © Copyright IBM Corporation lin. 1975 000000 2008 COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUTINE MICFL 115 IBM CONFIDENTIAL '21 1 447460 19 Dec 75 U7401 SET TEST PATTERN 2010 GA->IAL BRANCH TO SUBROUTINE AND DECREMENT SUBROUTINE ADDRESS. FC I . I 1. Oct 'FO'->MO LOAD FIRST BYTE INTO BUFFER A SET TEST PATTERN O->TEO CHAN 0 DROP REQUEST IN I 'CO'->TB RAISE SELECT-OUT AND HOLD-OUT 0554 3830-2i 01124 0->TE2 CHAN C DROP REQUEST-IN I I->TEO CHAN 0 RAISE REQUEST-IN I O->TCiO CHAN • DROP REQU£5T-IN YES SET CHANNEL READ MODE SET TEST PATTERN O->TE CHAN CIO DROP REQUEST-IN 120 2CCC 54 2C84 MICFL 85 o o () 0 o o o o o MICFL 85 0000 (- (- ( (- ( (- ( ( {' ( ROUTINE 6C (Part 2 of 8) ROUTINE 8C (Pert 2 of 8t III ICFL 120 2CB4 CCO 1->TD6 RAISE SERVICE-OUT ND->IID LOAD FIRST BYTE INTO BUFFER B YES 2CB4 MICFL 90 120 RESET CHECK-2 20511 1->TC5 RAISE STATUS-IN 20011 20311 CHECK SERVICE-OUT 20311 INDICATE START SECOND PASS 2044 0->ST3 RESET SECOND PASS INDICATOR I->TCI SET CHAN READ IIODE 2014 'oe'->BR SET TEST PATTERN 'AA'->MD LOAD FI RST BYTE INTO BUFFER A 2054 1->TC4 RAISE ADDRESS-IN DROP STATUS-IN 2D5C ZCBII DROP ADDRESS-IN SET TEST PATTERN SET GB FOR SECOND PASS 20411 COIlMON ERROR CHECK ROUTI NE IIICFL 115 SET TEST PATTERN SET TEST PATTERN SET TEST PATTERN RESET CHECK-2 COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUTINE IIICFL 115 2098 2018 LOAD ADDRESS OF NEXT TEST COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUTINE IIICFL II" 1->5TO 'A4'->BR SET TEST PATTERN COIIMON ERROR CHECK ROUTI NE IIICFL 115 ' 20911 COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUTINE IIICFL 115 SPECI03 RESET CHECK-2 20911 RAISE COMMAND-OUT COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUTI NE MICFL 115 . 2DEC 2D7C RAISE DATA-OUT 2064 RESET COMMAND-OUT 2D6C 3830·2 ROUTINE Ie (Pert 2 of 8t MICFL 90 - - - - - .... - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ROUTINE 6C (Part 3 of 8) ROUTINE8C (Part 3 of 8) MICFL95 120 RESET CHECK-2 SET TEST PATTERN 2058 2080 LOAO SECOND BYTE INTO BUFFER B 1->TC5 RAISE STATUS-IN 2008 DROP STATUS-IN RAISE ADDRESS-IN LOAD LAST BYTE INTO BUFFER B RAISE SERVICE-OUT 2DC4 2CB4 O->TCb RESET COMMAND-OUT 2D5C I->STO '82'->BR SET TEST PATTERN '08'->BR SET TEST PATTERN 2DbC SET CHANNEL WRITE MODE 2054 YES 2EI0 • IF' ->TA RESET CHECK-2 LOAD FIRST BYTE IN BUFFER A 2E04 2DCO 0->TC4 DROP ADDRESS-IN COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUTINE MICFL 115 SET TEST PATTERN 2E2C I->STO 'E5'->BR SET TEST PATTERN COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUTINE MICFL 115 SET TEST PATTERN 2E08 2E30 RESET CHECK-2 RESET CHECK-2 2098 2098 RAISE COMMAND-OUT COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUTINE MICFL 115 I->STO '8C'->BR SET TEST PATTERN 2DFC COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUTINE MICFL 115 RAISE DATA-OUT 2DbO RAISE SERVICE-OUT 2E34 1->TD7 RAISE DATA-OUT SET GB FOR TEST 94 2098 A 2E28 I->STO 'A4'->BR COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUTINE MICFL 115 SPECI03 RESET CHECK-2 LOAD SECOND BYTE IN BUFFER 2Dce I->STO 'A4'->BR SET TEST PATTERN COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUTINE MICFL 115 MICFL 85 COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUT( NE MICFL 115 3830-2 () I~B:!t~ I,=~ I ;r . -~'. \J r-", 'J LI437_16_o_408_ct_7_2..a.1_ _ _...a..._ _ _"--_ _--'_ _ _..L-_--..,._..L-_ _---I a 000 () () 0 () oo o MICFL 95 ROUTINE 8C (Part 3 of 8) 0- 0 0 ' . .: ~, , ,'I J, !. ", o '.J'. "'-.- I ." o () 0 0 0 0 0- 0 0 0 0 ," \ :.- '". .:, 'I' ,',';: .-:' " :',,' ;; ,,' o (- ( ( (- ( ( (~ (0 (" ( ( ( ROUTINE 6C (Part 4 of 8) ( (- ROUTINE 6C C"'rt 4 of 8) (0- MICFL 100 ~ 120 120 2CIIC YES· YES SET CHANNEL WRITE 1I0DE 2E58 'AO'->BR SET TEST PATTERN ·SET TEST PATTERN 2E24 COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUTINE IIICFL 115 COIlllON ERROR CHECK ROUTINE IIICFL 115 ° INOICATE BEGINNING SECONO PASS 2E48 'S2'->BR '08'->8R SET TEST PATTERN SET TEST PATTERN 2E54 SPECIO] RESET CHECK-2 LOAD ADDRESS FOR SECONO PASS TEST 94 2E50 SET TEST PATTERN 2E4C COIlIiON ERROR CHECK ROUTINE IIICFL 115 2E5C LOAD FIRST BYTE INTO BUFFER A RAISE SERVICE-OUT 2E10 RAISE DATA-OUT 2EII0 2E14 LOAD SECOND BYTE INTO BUFFER A 2E18 RAISE DATA-OUT DROP SERVICE-OUT 2EII8 COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUTINE IIICFL 115 COIlIiON ERROR CHECK ROUTINE IIICFL 115 2C10 SET TEST PATTERN COli liON ERROR CHECK ROUTI NE IIICFL 115 RAISE SERVICE-OUT DROP DATA-OUT COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUTINE IIICFL 115 2E60 'eO'->GB LOAD ADDRESS OF ·TEST 80 INTO GB REGISTER SET BUFFER 2E1C 2EII4 I->STO 'At'->BR SET TEST PATTERN SET TEST PATTERN 1->STO '91'->BR SET TEST DOWN, COIlIiON ERROR CHECK ROUTI NE IIICFL 115 RAISE DATA-OUT 2EA4 COIIMON ERROR CHECK ROUTINE IIICFL 115 I->STO '92'->BR SET TEST PATTERN I->TDII RAISE SERVICE-OUT RAISE SERVICE-IN 2E90 YES COIIMON ERROR CHECK ROUTINE IIICFL 115 I->STO '8C'->BR SET TEST PATTERN I->STO 'C1'->BR SET TEST PATTERN 2E44 COIlIiON ERROR CHECK ROUT I NE IIICFL 115 3830-2 I->STO o'C1'->BR SET TEST PATTERN COIIMON ERROR CHECK ROUTINE IIICFL 115 COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUTI NE IIICFL 115 MICFL 100 ROUTINE 6C (Part 50f8) ROUTINE 6C (Part 5 of 8) MI MI SET TEST PATTERN (";"l.ICFL 20 \.1.: 2C511 RESET CHANNEL WRITE MODE 2ECO MICFL 105 LOAD 'FF' TO BUS-OUT SET CHANNEL WRITE MODE 2EB4 RAISE SERVICE-OUT RESET CHANNEL FREEZE 2FDO 2FOC 2FOO 1'->SlO '20'->BR RAISE DATA-OUT COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUT I NE MICFL 115 YES SET TEST PATTERN MICFL 115 2F20 SET TEST PATTERN I->STO 'OO'->BR SET TEST PATTERN RAISE DATA-OUT 2F24 I->TCO 1->TC2 SET CHANNEL WRITE MODE AND LAST BYTE TRANSFER. 2F40 COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUT I NE MICFL liS COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUT I NE MICFL 115 YES COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUTINE MICFL liS '5C·->GB LOAD ADDRESS OF TEST.5C TO GEl REGISTER 2EBO SET TEST PATTERN, COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUTI NE MICFL 115 COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUTI NE MICFL liS I->STO '1I2'->BR SET TEST PATTERN 2E?C 2E94 GB-4->GB DECREMENT TEST ADDRESS TO SKIP NEXT TEST 2F44 'SO'->GB LOAD ADORESS OF TEST 50 INTO GB REGISTER. SET TEST PATTERN SET TEST PATTERN SET TEST PATTERN CDIIIoION ERROR CHECK ROUTI NE MICFL 115 I ->STO 'A I '->BR SET TEST PATTERN I->TCO I->TCI FREEZE CHANNEL CONTROLS COMMON ERROR CHECK ROUT I NE MICFL liS COMMON ERROR CHECK'ROUTINE MICFL liS 3830-2 ROUTINE 8C (Part 5 of 8) 00 a o ( 1'. J o o ~, \ .;;) '-J 000000 o C) o o o MICFL 105 00 0 0 0 0 ~--"~ -\ ~-,- (' ( ,,-, (" (, (, ------- ( (- ( ( (-- ( ( (-- ( (- c- (- (: (- (- ( (- ( ( (- { ( (- ------------------------------ ROUTINE 6C (Part 6 of 8) ROUTINE 6e (Part 6 of 8) MIC,FL 110 MICFl85 EO 2CEO Common error. Check routine MICFl115. No r-----~~~~~----~ 'FF' - >MD load' F F' to Buffer A 2COC 1->TD7 'FF'->MD Common error. Check routine MICFl115. 2F48 Error Code 6C44/6C45 2F54 Increment subroutine address (GAl to rerun subroutine 2F4C 0- >STJ Reset second pass indicator 2F14 load address of test 44 into GB register 2F50 Error Code 6C48/6C49 2F58 1 - >SR7 Indicate second pass subroutine EO DC 2F5C MICFl115 MICFl85 3830-2 1447460 1 447461 1 1437408 16 Oct 72 19 Dec 75 12 Mar 76 ROUTINE 8C (Part 8 of 8) MICFL 110 ROUTINE 6C (Part 7 of 8) ROUTINE Ie IPart 7 of 81 MICFL 115 OO,I-__T;.;';:.-..;>.;;"~C_ _-I ~ SAVE DATA SENT RA I SE ADDRESS OUT 2F98 2820 1->BRl INOICATE BEGINNING OF SECOND PASS MICFL 00/1 I SAVE EXPECTED Ita 00 DATA ZFF8 0->T81 PROTECT NA REGISTER 0->T9 2848 DESELECT ANO PROTECT NA REGISTER SAVE BUS-OUT REC IEVED 11 282C RESET BUS-IN REGISTER NICFL 120 SET EXPECTED DATA 2BF8 I ->TC2 SET LAST BYTE TEST PATTERN SR REGISTER 0= 1 1:1: I Z=I 3= I 4= I 5=' 6=1 7= I XFER UP EXPECT 8US-OUT =0 SERVICE-IN UP XFER CHECK UP DATA-IN UP COMPARE DATA BFROY UP L.AST BYTE 5TO: 1 SERVO UP 383().2 C) ~" y ("\ '--, la ''-..' 447480. 447461 19 Dec 75 12 Mar 76 ROUTINE 8C IPart 7 of 8) -=-rItIht 11M ~ 1tn, 1975, 1976 ~) ~, ' a 'J ,0 \,~J! (~, "',", r~, \~ A"·"" I , ''''''-~ ,.4',"", '"J! ,E). ~j) ,~ '",,-,j! ,0 ,,-,J) 0" \1,,); ,~ ',-,j I'f'~ ,j) !~ ",Y ,r~ ~j' 10 '>C,); !0, •.,f'~" j/ )/ "'- ,4"-", ,j /""l,,, '""J) (',..~\ '"'- ,Ii ;7). I ,;r", ',,: \';'.,jii """ f ....' " ""-,,J/ MICFL 115 "'' ' ' C"j) ......""'" 'ct)! !J ( ( ( .~. ROUTINE 6C (Part 8 of 8) C· c (~' ~/ MICFL 120 ROUTINE 8C (Part 8 of 8) K = X'3F' K'TC -> TC K= X'Bl' KOTC"'TC RESET CHANNEL READ/WRITE MODE SET CHANNEL WRITE MODE ANDCTL·I WRITE MODE 3034 2CD8 K = X'40' KnTC"'TC X'20' -+TF SET CHANNEL READ MODE READ CONFIGURATION DATA NO K= X'OI' KOTD->TD K = X'40' KG TD"'TD TURN ON DATA OUT TURNONTD REGISTER BIT 1 300c ERROR CODE 6C56 K = X'02' KO TD-+TD TURN ON SERVICE OUT NA+O-+D SPEC:03 3008 RESET CHECK-2 CADECODE NA SWITCH TO SERVICE·IN NO K = X'FC' K·TO-+TD ERROR CODE 6C58 DROP OATA-OUT RESET DATA OUT & SERVICE OUT 3010 AND SERV I CE-QUT 2804 ERROR CODE 6C5A NA+O"'D GB-> I AR 0->T06 0->T07 CA DECODE NA SWITCH TO DATA IN 8RANCH TO TEST ADDRESS. THEN DECREMENT TEST -4 DROP DATA-OUT AND SERVICE-OUT 2808 NO 2C24 BRANCH TO NEXT LOWER SUBROUTINE WitH E.o;CH PASS". CC-MICFL 85 C8-NICFL 85 C4-MICFL 85 CQ-MICFL 90 BC-MICFL 88-MICFL B4-MICFL BO-MICFL 90 90 90 90 AC-MI CFL 95 A8-MICFL 95 A4-MICFL ~5 AO-MICFL 95 9C-MICFL 95 96-MICFL 95 94-MICF"L 95 9Q-MICFL 100 lC-MICFL 100 18-MICFL 100 74-MICFL 100 10-MICFL 100 be-totl CFL b8-tot) CFL 64-MICFL 6Q-MICFL 100 105 105 105 105 S8-MICFL 105 54-MICFL 85 50-MICFL 105 4C-MICFL Be-tot I CFL 88-M I CFL 84-MICFL BO-tot I CFL 5C-MICFL ERROR CODE 6C56 105 48-MICFL 110 44-MICFL 110 40-MICFL 110 3030 O->ST3C SPECIAL OP3 I-+ST3C SPECIAL OP 03 100 100 85 SET SWITCH 'ON' RESETCHK·2 100 MICFL85 RESET SWITCH RESETCHK·2 3018 2EDO t 437408 3830-2 ~6 © Copyright IBM ~ation 1972, 1975 Oct 72 _1 447460 19 Dec 75 IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 28,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER ROUTINE 6C (Part 8 of 8) MICFL 120 ( I-~ R:UT~:E~:- ROUTINE6E MICFL 125 f::) I """T START ROUTINE 6E IHOUSEKEEPINGI AI I CIO SELECT CHANNEL r<9> CHANNEL ' AlB <$.? 0470 O->MBC 1->ST3C RAISE OP-OUT FORCE CHECK - I RAISE OP-OUT OFDO AlB O->TG CHAN AlB DROP REQUEST-IN CHANNEL DROP SUPPRESS-OUT SAVE ST REGISTER .F) 0586 0530 ~ T04F4 0434 '20'->SA SC->ST O->TG 1->TG2 CHAN AlB DROP REQUEST-IN ~ CHAN A RAI SE REQUEST-IN 0470 I L...o O->TE 'C4'->TO CHAN CID DROP REQUEST-IN RAISE OP-OUT AND SUPPRESS-OUT 0530 TURN ON BIT 2 OF ERROR BYTE FOR SECOND PASS OF TEST RESTORE ST REGISTER CHAN CID DROP REQUEST-IN ~ 0458 SPEC. 07 O->TDO I->TGO 'CO'->TD CHAN BRAISE REQUEST-IN RAISE DP-OUT YES 0504 0438 _1O->TE 04F8 UNFREEZE CHANNEL SWITCH DROP OP-DUT RESET COUNTER GATE INLINE EXECUTE SWITCH 04F4 l 05F4 l 1 O->TB DESELECT AND PROTECT NA REGI STER 1 ~ 1->TE2 L I;; I 1 'CO'->TB RESET CHECK-2 I RAISE SELECT-OUT AND HOLD-OUT 0584 FREEZE CHANNEL SWITCH 0524 '05DO'->IAR RAISE OP-OUT 0438 0418 1 FC 2 F8 1->TC3 DISPLAY COUNTER IN CE PANEL LAMPS RAISE OP-OUT BRANCH TO '0500' 04E4 0040 DROP SUPPRESS-OUT 0598 0424 F4 ERROR CODE 6E04/6E05 RAISE OP-IN l 04DC SPEC. Ob BRANCH TO SUBROUTINE AND DECREMENT SUBROUTINE, ADDRESS 2-\ 1 ADD 1 TO COUNTER 05F8 053C ~ SPEC. 03 YES GA">IAL CHAN 0 RAISE REQUEST-IN 0518 1->50 IA 0538 l->TEO DROP IN-TAGS 0520 SPEC. CHAN C RAISE REQUEST-IN 0588 O->TC 0534 Olll4 IBM CONFIDENTIAL 3830-2 UNTIL MARCH 26.1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER ROUTINE 6E MICFL 125 @ Copyright IBM Corporation 1912, 1975 o - - - - -_. __._- ~(-- (- (- ( ( ( "-_._---_.- --------- ----~-- (- (,- ( (~ ( (- -------,---.-~~--- (- ( (- ( ( ( ( (._-. (- {'" (-. f-' ( (- (- ( ROUTINE 96 ROUTINE 96 (-' ._--- (-. ( (~'. MICFL 150 IbO START ROUTINE 96 NF -> GC SET MF-O TO 0 SAVE NF-X FOR DISPLAY I • NF -> NF '80' -> TF ADD I TO NF-X SET TF REGISTER FOR ADDRESS MODE, x=o 9bl4 GF -> GC SET ADDRESS REGISTER VALUE =0 971C SAVE GF-X FOR DISPLAY 'CO' -> TF SET I • GB -> GB TF REGISTER =SEMISTEP MODE, REGISTER =0 ADD I TO REGISTER CHECK WORD 9164 911.4 o -> ST CLEAR STATUS REGISTER SET ADDRESS REGISTER VALUE =0 9628 SET TF ADDRESS REGISTER, X = 0 SET REGISTER CHECK WORD = 0 9604 91B8 MF -> GC SET CHECK WORO = 0 SET CHECK WORD 0 = GB SAVE MF-X FOR DISPLAY ADD I TO MF-X GF -> GF + GF -> GC SET ADDRESS INTO GF-X 9690 SAVE GF-O FOR DISPLAY GF -> GC SAVE GF-X FOR DISPLAY 9718 GB SET TF REGISTER FOR ADDRESS REGISTER X = 0 NF -> GC NF -> NF + SET ADDRESS INTO NF-X 9608 SAVE NF-X FOR DISPLAY SET NF-X INTO SFLF 9700 SPEC: OC I + GB -> GB ENABLE TF ADDRESS MODE ADD I TO CHECK WORD GB MF -> MF + SET ADDRESS INTO MF-X 9634 SET GF-O TO 0 SET GF-X INTO SELF 9704 I + GF -> GF '9F'-TF -> 0 I + GB -> GB ADD I TO GF-X SET CHECK FOR ALL REGISTER CHECK ADD I TO ADDRESS VALUE 9610 I + TF -> TF ADD I TO TF (ADDRESS REGISTER) I + I + TF -> TF ADD I TO TF ADDRESS REGISTER '9F' - TF -> 0 SET CHECK FOR LAST REGISTER GB -> GB ADD I TO ADDRESS REGISTER VALUE MF -> GC SET MF-X INTO SELF SAVE MF-X FOR DISPLAY 91DC NF -> GC SAVE NF-X FOR DISPLAY 9744 9708 9b6C SET NF-O TO 0 SAVE NF-O FOR DISPLAY '9F' -TF -> 0 SET CHECK FOR LAST REGISTER SAVE MF-O FOR DISPLAY 9754 GF -> GC I SAVE GF-X FOR DISPLAY 9684 447460 3830-2 19 Dec 75 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1975 + TF -> TF ADD I TO TF ADDRESS REGISTER 9158 IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER ROUTINE 96 MICFL 150 ('~ ROUTINE 96 ROUTINE 96 GB -> GB 1 + ADO MICFL 160 SET GF-O INTO TA TO CHECK REGISTER 1 NF -> GC 91E4 SAVE NF-X FOR DISPLAY GF -> GC TURN OFF AUTO STEP MODE SAVE GF-X FOR DISPLAY SET 'FF' TA INTO 9&04 9&A4 1 + ADD 1 TO REGISTER CHECK WORD OR'40' -> TF TURN ON AUTO STEP MODE ,. GB -> GB RESET TF ADDRESS REGISTER TO 0 MF -> GC SAVE MF-X FOR DISPLAY MF -> GC SAVE MF-O FOR DISPLAY SET NF-O INTO TA 91F8 RESET MF-O TO 0 9&AC 150 CHECK CB AND CO OF MF-X STEP TF ONCE SET REGISTER CHECK WORD 0 = TF -> GC SAVE TF FOR DISPLAY 9614 SET REGISTER CHECK TO 0 ERROR CODE 96Cl 9698 IBM CONFIDENTIAL 447460 3830-2 19 Dec 75 UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER ROUTINE 96 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1976 O 0·', 0·, 0'.'" 0"··' 0,· 0, 0··,,, 0 ., . ~ ,~ '. 'K:/ '" ; (, '4. 0 \~ (~ ,y A ,,-,;i 0 "'-' r\, ~;) 0 0 0 0. , 0 0 . --'--~'-~-- ,y 0 0 0 0 r~ 'I a f) ~. . MICFL 160 0 0 0 0 0 () 0 \ ' " -~---~.--~ c -,", p L (' (' (~c (> (' (~. (' (- (- (-' (-- (- (' ("C_ (- (- (" (' (-~ C (-- (~- LAMINAR BUSES (LBs) 1/0 Gate LOC 14 Logic Gate LOC 2 Power Supplies LOC 2 CAPACITORS DC Filter LOC 6 Laminar Bus LOC 16 Cl through C4 LOC 12 C12 through C23 LOC 6 (- (-- (-' (-- (" LOC 1 TA LOC 10 TB LOC 10 TC LOC10 Tl Power Sequence Box LOC12 T2 Convenience Outlet LOC2 T3 Power Sequence Box LOC 12 01A-Al LOC 2 O1A-Bl LOC2 01A-B2 LOC2 01A-B3 LOC2 01 B-A 1 1/0 Board LOC 14 Power Sequence Board P-A 1 LOC 12 Sequential Starter Card LOC 16 MPL FILE (23FD) LOC 2 Laminar Bus LOC 16 Wl through Wl0 LOC 6 ( TRANSFORMERS LOC 16 LOGIC BOARDS BUS ( COMPONENT INDEX COMPONENT INDEX BLOWERS (\ (' TRANSISTORS Ql LOC 12 TRIAC POWER CONTROL BOX Power Control Box LOC 12 POWER SEQUENCE BOX LOC 12 LOC 12 USE METER LOC 2, PANEL 1 CIRCUIT BREAKERS (CBs) CB2 POWER SUPPLIES LOC 12 CE PANEL LOC 2, PANEL 10 CIRCUIT PROTECTORS (CPs) CPl through CP10 LOC 10, LOC 12 CPll through CP18 LOC 6 CONNECTORS EC1-EC4 LOC 2,14 1/0 Cable LOC 14 Pl, P2 (CTL-I) LOC 16 PCl LOC 2 PC5-PCa (EPO) LOC 16 Sl, S2 LOC 16, PWR 132 1, Power Sequence Box LOC 12 2, Power Sequence Box LOC 12 CONVENIENCE OUTLET LOC 2 DIODES Bulk Supply CR l-CR36 LOC a CR 1, Power Sequence Box LOC 12 CR2, Power Sequence Box LOC 12 Blowers LOC 2 Bulk 1 LOC 6, LOC a Bulk 2 LOC 6, LOC a PS3 through PS7 LOC 4 PS15 LOC 10 Regulators LOC 4 24V dc Sequence Supply LOC 12 RELAYS Kl through K13 LOC 12 K21, K22, K31, K32 LOC 16 RESISTORS Rl through R7 LOC 6 Rl through R2 Power Sequence Box LOC 12 SWITCHES Enable Disable PANEL 1 Indicators Test/Reset LOC 12 Mainline CB2 LOC 12 Multitag PANEL 1 LOC 2, PANEL 1 Power OnlOff, Sequence Box TABS LOC 12 FILTER DC Power Supply LOC 6 Laminar Bus LOC 16 Power Line LOC 2 HEAT SINKS HS 1 through HS6 LOC a +12V dc LOC 12 INDICATORS GatelMemory Thermals PS Failure LOC 12 PS Thermal LOC 12 LOC 12 TERMINAL BOARDS (TBs) BTBl Bulk-l LOC 10 TBl 1/0 Gate LOC 14 TBl Power Control Box LOC 12 BTB2 BUlk-2 LOC 10 TB2 Power Control Box LOC 12 TB3 Power Control Box LOC 12 TB5 Gate A LOC 16 TB6 Gate A LOC 16 TB10 LOC 16 TBll LOC 16 Tl-TBl Power Sequence Box Tl-TB2 Power Sequence Box IBM CONFIDENTIAL 3830-2 UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1913. 1915 COMPONENT INDEX LOC-' f: C FRONT AND REAR VIEW FRONT ANO REAR VIEW Pwr Supply (YB110) LOC2 MPL File (23FD) .lRlny",r. Power Sequence Panel (See PANEL 11 See MPL Section for Details Area Bilhi!\d Gete A (Seq Star.ter Card) LOC 16· PS3-7 (DC Regulators) 4 LOC CP1-CP10 LOC 10 ~'1itti- ____ EC1-EC4 (See PANEL 11) ........;--...+i------- CE Panel See PANEL 10 and PANEL 11 PS-15 Bias Supply LOC 10 ....,.....---iTiiTi----- Gate A (OlA) CP/Thermal Indicators LOC 12 Bulk 2 Pwr Supply· LOCS Line Filter* (YB 100) """'~~i----- Gate A -----H-b._ Blowers CP11-CP18 Asm LOCS Hinge end of LOC 16 Gate A Bulk 1 Pwr Supply LOCS ..m------ 11/0 Gate B Board) LOC 14 Bulk Transformers LOC10 Front PCl • Not used in late production machines View 383()"2 IBM CONFIDENTIAL © ~I '" j o Rear View (. . ~ y o 0. , a··· \ ., 0 ,'J FRONT AND REAR VIEW UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER Copyright IBM CorporatIon 1972. 1973. 1975 ,a···· ." o o 0 0 00 () o 00 ()OOOO o LOC2 000 (- ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( (' (- ( ( ( ( DC REGULATORS (PSI DC REGULATORS (PS) LOC4 Power Reyulatol Card IPS -- 31 Note 3 Air Duct or PS-6AO Front View PS-6 Regulator Asm 3.5V (YB170) Note 1 PS-3 Regulator Asm -3€V/+6V(YB1631 Note 1, Note 2 PS-4 Regulator Asm +7V (YB170) Installed but not used Note 1 ------------------------ir---------rr~------------------4_~~~ -------------;;------;i"t-----------+-+-~~ • • I . ...!..-!~_+-~I·+------------------PS-7 Note 1 Notes: 1. PS-5 Regulator Asm .---------------ii'-----.;;-+-----------+--i-~ -3V /+1.25V (YB 1701 Note 1 Regulator Asm -3V /+1.25V (YB170) s.e PWR 50 for locations of regulator/ ollervoltage cards and for location of the IIoltage adjustment potentiometers. 2. -36V not present in late production machines. 3. This configuration will be on late production machines only. All others will appear as shown in assembly. IBM CONFIDENTIAL 3830c2 UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIEO THEREAFTER © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973, 1975 DC REGULATORS (PSI LOC4 BULK SUPPLY FILTER CAPACITORS FILTER CAPACITORS LOC6 Bulk 2 Resonants (YB202)* ,....----W8 Bulk 1 Resonants (YB201 )"""'II:=S~~~--------,.Ic:. Bulk 2* (YB202) Front View 3 ~ R2 Bulk 1 (YB201) Rl Bulk 1 (YB201 ) Wl~~~ W2 W4 W3 W5--______________ W 6 - - - - - - -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~~~~~~~ ~ __ ~~ C12 +7V Bulk 1 R4 (not shown) ShuntsC12 (YB201) This configuration will be on late production machines only. All others will appear as shown in assembly. *Not used in late production machines. 3830-2 IBM CONFIDENTIAL © l', \\j ':' 'I ,tt')., "'-.J for Heat sink and CP Panel Breakdown UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1975 rr)) ~J' F\ i '\., ""-J 1 I~) tf"'), "',.J :~ 'J [t ( '. ....Ji -" ( .... \,,-'" 0 v' t<.~ ,[~ '~y ,3' j), ;¢fl, '·.'.1 \~\jl ..f""" v~J (''''-''\ ',,--; ,-r"'"'\" 'it....J ~ ,Y "..~'" '~j FILTER CAPACITORS /'~""" J/ :$"'. \,,~y .~ ,Ii !r~ \q, .. )1 ,.~J! [~ ",-y ,f')- ,,-.J) n. \~,j LOC6 ,.,..,."\ "~.j' (" (~ ( (' ( ( ( (-~' ( BULK SUPPLY DIODES, HEAT SINKS, AND CP PANEL BULK SUPPLY DIODES, HEAT SINKS, AND CP PANEL LOC8 CPll CP12 CP13 CP14 Front View CP15 HS4 (YB201) CR19-CR24 CP16* CP17* T---1ri.....----i~-CP18* HS6 (YB202)* CR3l-CR36 Heat Sinks 1, 2, and 3 Diodes CR1-CR18 3830-2 * Not used in late production machines IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER Heat Sinks 4, 5, and 6 Diodes CR19-CR36 BULK SUPPLY DIODES, HEAT SINKS, AND CP PANEL LOC8 BULK TRANSFORMERS. BIAS SUPPLY. AND CPS 1-10 BULK TRANSFORMERS, BIAS SUPPLY, AND CPS 1-10 LOC 10 G-CP9 G-CP1 a CP6 CP6 - Early Machines Only Front View ~CP1 ~CP2 ~CP3 ~ CP4 ~ CP5 D CP7 o PS-15 Bias Supply (YB 165) Bulk 1 Transformers (YB201) ,... I TA - A TB [3- CP8 Bulk 2Transformers (YB202) , 4_-CP7 - Early Machines Only D ~ TC TB1 TB-2 ·Not used in late production mllChitlft_ IBM CONFIDENTIAL 3830-2 © tf~ ~ Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1973,1975 0 0 --- -- -- r~ l~ t""-", UJ 0 BULK TRANSFORMERS. BIAS SUPPLY. AND CPS 1-10 UNTIL MARCH 26. 1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER r~ ~! r1l \,.JI 0 J f"'\ V ("'~ ~J ~ '",--;I t"~~ \Y ~) ~'" !'~ 0 () 0 0 0 () ""-\L !'~~ (' (~' (' ( , " ( ( , CONTENTS CONTENTS \ INST 1 INST Unpacking And Locating ......... . INST 5 Cabling-Control Module To 3830 Storage Control INST 5 Control Unit Power Check (6o-Hz) . INST 10 Control Unit Power Check (50-Hz) . INST 15 Channel Interface Cabling INST 15A . . Addressing . . . . . . . . INST16 Control Unit Microdiagnostics . INST 26 System Test. INST26 . . Cover Installation INST26 Records INST 26 . . .. .',. 3830-2 CONTENTS INST 1 ~ Y 0 '-~ 10 ,r~ \ "'- \",""yi )/ ("'1 ",,-y ('"'''\ ~"", .~. ··,-_Y 1 1""""j '" r",\ 'v. Y I r""'"" \. Y i l"-'" '\ ) r'" y 'V n :/ '", r~ , Y \ 0 ("'1 ,:' ''- -' (I: \",Y ("~ \c.)i n" f~ "--- .1/ r---"" "- .0, ." "0'. ." ;/ n 0 \. !~ ) \ ) 0 fl, ('\ ( ( ( ( ( f { ( ( (' ( ( ( ( ( ( ( INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION: Part Number Digitec* Voltmeter Tektronix** 453 Scope MPL File CE Disk SLT IMST Maintenance Tools INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 453585 453047 *Trademark of United Systems Corp. "Trademark of Tektronix. Inc. Check When Complete ...,... CABLING-CONTROL MODULE TO 3830·2 STORAGE CONTROL These instructions are for cable plugging at the 3830-2 only. Refer to device installation instructions for cable plugging of attached devices. I __ 1 Follow each installation step in sequence to ensure correct operation. 1 __ 2 UNPACKING AND LOCATING INST 5 DANGER Do not connect 3830-2 ac power cable until instructed. Position CTL-I cables from Control Module(s) to 3830-2 Bus on top Tag on bottom Do not connect until Wrap Test is complete. Terminate with two (2) Bus Terminators (PN 5440649) in the bus and tag CTL-I connectors of the last cabled controller. Position EPO cable from Control Modules(s) to connector in 3830-2. Do not connect until step 4. Channel Interface Cabling. II Area Behind A Gate fJ Check When Complete ~ --1 Remove packing and check for damage. (See Packing/Unpacking instructions taped to cover.) --2 Do an inventory of the parts in the shipping group. __ 3 Remove the covers as necessary. --4 Adjust leveling jacks. IICTL-1 Connectors {P1 IBus) P2 ITag) 3830-2 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS INST 5 ( INS'ALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (60-Hz Machines Only) INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (60-Hz Machines Only) 3 CONTROL UNIT POWER CHECK (60 HZ) For 50Hz machines, go to step page. __ 12 3 WORLD TRADE on next __ 13 ~INST 10 Measure the dc voltages with Digitec voltmeter, and adjust as necessary using the procedure on PWR 50. When finished go to INST 15A. Check When Complete ....... ___ 1 Open power control and sequence box covers. ___ 2 Turn off 3830·2 mainline CB-2. then connect 3830-2 power cable to ac outlet. ___ 3 Measure ac line voltage at input to CB-2 and determine if it is 208 or 230V ac. If line voltage agrees with the voltage tag on the 3830-2, proceed to step 5. ___ 4 If customer's voltage does not agree, remove ac power connector and rewire the following transformers as shown on YB026. Then reconnect power cable to ac outlet. Terminal Block Transformer Tl SCRID and seq T2 cony outlet Bulk 1 supply Bul k 2 supply (Note 1) Bias supply Tl-TBlll TB311 BTB11iJ BTB2(1 PS15 TBl m ___ 5 For power sequencing, verify that EPO jumper plug is in PC-' (See Figure' for EPO jumper plug wiring). ___ 6 Turn all drive start/stop SWitches to Stop if drive cables previously connected. __ 7 ___ 8 Turn off CB2 in 3830-2. m Connect 3830-2 power cable to ac outlet and turn on 38'30-2 mainline CB2. Check that all CPs in 3830:2 are on. __ 9 Set operation mode switch on 3830-2 CE panel to CE Mode. __ 10 Operate Power On switch on 3830-2 CE panel. Power will sequence up in the control unit. __ 11 Check operation of cooling fans in 3830·2 m a. Regulator. G. MST logic gate. c. I/O tailgate (01 B). OJ 0 Figure 1: EPO Jumper Plug Wiring ~ llflJ Note 1: Onlv for early machines (with CP1). ~ I NST INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (60-Hz Machines Onlv) ' " 3830-2 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1975. 1976. 1978 ---~ 10 ( ( ( ( ( ( c ( ( ( ( ( f ( f ( ( ( ( ( ( ( INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS"I (5O·Hz Machines Only) , . INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS NST 15 (50Hz Machines Only) 3 CONTROL UNIT POWER CHECK (50HZ) (World Trade) __ 12 Measure the dc voltages with Digitec voltmeter, and adjust as necessary using the procedure on PWR 50. __ 13 When finished go to INST 15A. Check When Complete U __ 1 Determine type and level of voltage at ac .outlet: delta (A) 200, 220, 235 or wye (Y) 380/408. __2 Refer to the chart on logic page YB026 and verify that the following terminals are wired correctly: Terminal Block Power Component Primary Power Jumpers T111 T2 Cony Outlet Transformer TB3D1 T1 SCAlD and Seq Transformer T1-TB111 Bulk 1 Supply·Transformer BTB1 m Bul k 2 Supply Transformer (Note 1) BTB2 (I Bias Supply Transformer I PS15 TB 1 OJ __ 3 If wiring of 3830·2 agrees with ac power source, proceed to step 5. __ 4 If wiring does not agree with power source, refer to YB026 and rewire terminals listed in table above. __ 5 For power sequencing, verify that EPO jumper plug PC·11D (See Figure 1 for EPO jumper plug wiring). __ 6 Turn all drive start/stop switches to Stop if drive cables previously connected. __ 7 __ 8 Turn off CB2 in 3830-2. __ 9 Connect 3830·2 power cable to ac outlet and turn on 3830-2 mainline CB2. Check that all CPs in 3830-2 are on. Set operation mode switch on 3830·2 CE panel to CE Mode. __10 Operate poweroOn switch on 3830·2 CE panel. Power will sequence up in the control unit. __11 Check operation of cooling fans in 3830-2: a. Regulator II b. MST logic gate . . c. 1/0 tailgate (01 B) 0 Figure 1: EPO Jumper Plug Wiring ~ llfiJ Note 1: Only for tIIIriv mllChines (with CP7) Jill NST 15 3830-2 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (50·Hz Machines Only) , . © Copyright IBM Corporation 1975, 1976, 1977, 1978 r""\ \ ~ \ "'--. / ( ,/-''', '" ,/ "'- "" / ! / '\, ~, '" / ) ,/ " j /'~ f\ "- " / / ,'- "- , \, (~ ,/ "- / " 1"""/ (" "\ / '" ,/' '" ( "- ''\ ,/ ", ('\ (~ / c « ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 4 I/O Connectors (Channel Interface) CHANNEL INTERFACE CABLING _4 Check When 11 0 Complete ~ _1 _2 Power down 3830-2 from CE paneL If last device on channel, plug bus terminator (PIN 5440649) and tag terminator (PIN 5440650) into bus out and tag out receptacles for that channeL Tag In Tag Out Bus In Bus Out 0 .....-.;..~--IO 'Tag In-Tag Out Bus In Bus Out 0 1-.;....;.;.....;;..;...;........ 0 Tag In Tag Out Bus In Bus Out 1--.;....;....-...0 Tag In Tag Out Bus In .= Channel C> co D ------ I~~ Chan nel C 1- .= Channel :; 0 C> co ~ :; 0 .= C> co ~ .= ~ C> co ~~ -~ :::l Channel D al :; '" B Chan nel A Ira ~ I" Channel .= A Ira C> ~ :; 0 ------ If Two Channel Switch, Additional, feature is installed, also connect jumpers for channel C and D priorities. Cards are located at A-A 1D2 and A-A1D4, respectively. (See logic pages CR10l :::l 0 Channel 0 '" ~ C> ~- Channel _e.J .= Relay andDR101.) B BG 0 AH~ BH . . ~GH BJ ... 'eGJ AJ . . OGK Ch Ch Ch Ch A: B: C: D: B-A1ES (AR101l B-A1FS (BR10l) A-A1D2 (CR10l) A-A1D4 (DR10l) :::l 0 __ 5 '":::l '":::l :::l'" :::l'" al al al Relay If Two Channel Switch feature is installed, also connect jumpers for channel B priority. Card is located at B-A 1 F6. (See logic page B R 101.) 0 INST 15A PRIORITY CARD TYPE 7552 High priority is shown. For lowest priority, connect the following jumpers: AH-BG, AJ-BH. and GJ-GK. :::l 0 01 -.= .= .. .. .. . -- 110 al --- --- - -- - - - 1 :; :; '":::l :::l'" al al C Bus Out Go to INST 16 next. al~ : : J[ Early Machines ,, Late Mechines __ 3 0 Establ ish channel priority by connecting Select Out jumpers. Card is located in I/O gate at B-A1E6. (See logic page AR101.) Use jumper assembly PIN 816645 or 815925. ( PCl mTI PC2 ]JJ I I I I I I I I PCl PC2 Remove EPO jumpers from PC-1. Connect CPO cable(s) from CPU or channel(sl to PC-1, PC-2 (2 Channel) and PC-3 - PC-4* (2 Channel Additional) . Connect Drive EPO sequence cables - PC-5 (first string), PC-6 (second string), PC-7 and PC-8 (third and fourth string - 32 drive expansion feature only) Remote Switch Feature - Connect remote switch cable(s) to PC-10 and PC-11 if remote switch feature is installed. * * * PC-3 and PC-4 are located on bracket below 01 B gate. ** PC-10 (Channel A and Bl and PC-11 (Channel C and D) are located below 01 B gate and to the left of PC-3 and PC-4 bracket. \447465 3830-2 15 Dec 78 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS © Copyright IBM Corporation 1978 INST 15A ( INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS INST 16 ADDRESSING START ~ In a 3830 subsystem, address plugging must be carefully performed to ensure correct subsystem operation. _ 3350 Attachment Feature 6. Obtain the subsystem addresses assigned to this YES Example 3830-2 with three Controllers attached (the 3350 A02/ A2F and C02/C2F are considered as one controller for addressing purposes). 3830 by the customer. Note: 3B30 addressing restrictions require that addresses supplied by the customer must totalB, 16, 32, or 64. _ Controller is a term used to define a 3333, 3340A02, 3350A02,or3350A2F attached to this 3830-2. yes microcode diskette shipped with this 3830. NO r -- is supplied for your machine configuration. Refer to chart on FEALD Volume 001, page AA002 for disk selection and INTR 005 for feature reference. _ ----, ether Functional microcodedl :disk PN (16 Drive Addressing~ CAUTION: Verify that proper 3830-2 functional disk ~--o---~ INST 16J INST 16H 8. Use the following flowchart to locate the page Storage Control If additional addresses are assigned by the customer for controllers to be installed later select the path as if those controllers were being installed. 7. Obtain the part number of the functional Alternate Controller 3350 C02/C2F Controller 3350 1 - - - - - 1 A02/A2F 3830-2 Controller 3340A02 Controller 3333 YES applicable to the specific combination of DASD units to be installed. Yes Note: Additional information on addressing theory may be found on I NST 17, 17A, and 178. _ 9.----------------------~ Yes INST t6A 3344 Attachment Feature INST 160 'ThreeOr FOUr - - - I Controllers Attached , r I I t..f4-3i!!~- -.J NO INST 16B ThreeorFour Controllers Attached -, I L..a~O"-'-d- ..J INST 16F INST t6C INST 16G INST 16E INST 16K \447465 3830·2 15 Dec 78 I © Copyright IBM Corporation 1978 ('" "\ I" i \.. f '\, \ ./ ('\ " ./ ( '\ ",. ..c! INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 1"' ~ /"-~ I. / (' " ", ,// \ r~ ." / ( "\ ..... -'" f''\ ./ , ./ r'\ \.. ) ('\ "'-.. I" \ , /' ~, r / " " "- / ! '" '\ r-" ~, " \. i " .C·--'" (/~ \ ,( i ./ \.. '\, / () '- / INST 16 f' f f ( (- ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( (' ( ADDRESSING ADDRESSING _ 4. This page is to be used for a 3830 with 16 addresses assigned, and at least one of its attached 3350s will operate in 3330-1 compatibility mode. _ 5. When 3350s are to be operated in 3330-1 compatibility mode, the 3350 operates as two 3330s and requires two logical addresses per spindle, a primary and a secondary. _ _ 2. 3. Figure 2: ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S) PLUG CHART Plug the cards at A1S2, A1T2, A1U2, and B1G2 according to the card diagrams on this page. ADDRESS RANGE Go to I NST 18, entry C. A-A1S2 If the addresses you were given do not appear in Figure 2, return to INST 16 and retrace your path in the flow diagrams. If this is the correct page and you still cannot match addresses, verify them with the customer. See INST 17 for additional information. 1. A-A1T2 lI ,.. Single Channell1 Plug One ~ More than one 060 060 06'?> 060 000 000 06'?> 060 30 00-2F 00-07 OS-OF 20-27 28-2F 000 060 060 06b 060 000 060 000 06b 060 28 08-3F 08-0F 1S-1F 28-2F 38-3F 000 ObO 060 060 060 600 000 000 060 060 30 10-3F 10-17 18-1 F 30-37 38-3F 000 060 060 060 060 000 600 000 060 060 28 Single Channell1 More than one 40-77 40-47 50-57 60-67 70-77 000 060 060 600 060 060 000 000 600 060 30 """",I~ 40-6F 40-47 48-4F 60-67 68-6F 000 060 060 600 4S-7F 48-4F 5S-5F 68-6F 7S-7F 000 060 060 600 060 600 000 000 30 50-7F 50-57 5S-5F 70-77 78-7F 000 060 060 600 060 000 600 2S SO-B7 SO-S7 90-97 AO-A7 BO-B7 000 060 060 060 600 066 000 000 060 600 30 SO-AF SO-S7 SS-SF AO-A7 AS-AF 000 060 060 060 600 000 060 000 060 600 2S 8S-BF SS-SF 9S-9F AS-AF BS-BF 000 060 06b 9O-BF 90-97 9S-9F BO-B7 BS-BF 000 060 060 CO-F7 CO-C7 00-07 EO-E7 FO-F7 000 06'?> 060 CO-EF CO-C7 CB-CF EO-E7 ES-EF 000 060 060 CB-FF CB-CF OS-OF ES-EF FS-FF 000 060 060 OO-FF 00-07 OS-OF FO-F7 FS-FF o ,0 '-0 I- 00 2. Plug the Address Select Card(s) as indicated in Figure 2_ (See Figure 1 for Card(s) location chart.) Each channel must be plugged according to the allocation of addresses for that channel. They may or may not all be plugged the same. If different add resses are requ ired see Note.1. ....I- Il- I-- CARD TYPE BA89 o TRANSFER BUFFER CONTROL CARD TYPE BH98 A-B1G2 SECONDARY 00-27 10-17 A-A1T2 PlugOne L - -- -, A-A1U2 I-- I- 000 060 060 o CHANNEL FEATURE CHNL LOCATION Single Channel A A-A1Q2 Two-channel Switch A B A-A1Q2 A'A1P2 A B C A-A1Q2 A-A1P2 A-A1K2 A-A1J2 Two-channel SWitch Additional (Four Channels) 0 ADDRESS SELECT CARD LAYOUT --ooj'~ 1447461 12 Mar 76 " Note: Anytime the jumpers are changed on this card, Re-IMPL the functional microcode disk. ..---" r \ '", .) r "-. "\ I (' t" ./ \, j r ,, 7~ (''\, \ '"'.~ j ('" / \, bOo 060 000 600 obO 30 28 30 2S 30 2S / '···1-··,···1.· ·I···~···I··· [JO [JB UO[J II- 0 Note 1: For multiple channels the } indicated jumpers must be plugged identically on each of the address select cards_ CHANNEL TRANSFER CONTROL CARD TYPE BA82 I 1 447465 I 15 Dec 28 ,, / / I "- obO DO Do O!d [p ADDRESSING © Copyright IBM Corporation 1976, 1978 !~ 000 060 000 600 I CARD TYPE Z512 3830-2 -..-- oliO oliO 600 600 000 000 060 600 oliO 600 000 600 000 066 600 600 bOo 060 000 000 600 bOo 600 bOo 000 060 000 600 600 bOo bOo 6'?>0 000 000 600 600 600 600 000 600 000 600 bOo ...... o Figure 1: CARD LOCATION CHART MICRODIAGNOSTIC CHANNEL WRAP PARAMETER PLUG ADDRESS SELECT CARD AS SHOWN BELOW 00-37 5. Go to IN5T 18, entry C. A-A1S2 VALID ADDRESS COMBINATIONS PRIMARY Plug the cards at A 152, A 1T2, A 1 U2, and B 1G2 according to the card diagrams on this page. 1. Match the customer supplied addresses to the _ Figure 2: ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S) PLUG CHART wrap parameter value (shown to the right of the plugging column in Figure 2) on the label attached tp the shroud of the address card. This information will be used later during checkout. If no label is available write this information in Notet on MICRO 200, Step 11 and MICRO 210, Step 4. When 3350s are to be operated in 3330-1 compatibility mode, the 3350 operates as two 3330s and requires two logical addresses per spindle, a primary and a secondary_ "" \ 1/ r ')" r \ ") r··~ '',. \ " \ INST 16B \. ,/ ;r "'\ /. I '\~ '- " \1 / .... (' .. I " " \ \.. " ( INST 16B ( ( ( ( ( ( (' ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ADDRESSING This page is to be used for a 3830 with 64 addresses assigned, and at least one of its attached 3350s will operate in 3330-1 compatibility mode. _ When 3350s are to be operated in 3330-1 compatibility mode, the 3350 operates as two 3330s and requires two logical addresses per spindle, a primary and a secondary. _ 4. 6. _ _ 2. 3. Plug One L ". Single Channell1 More than one ,.£"b CARD TYPE BA89 o A-A1U2 A-B1G2 r- A B C D A-A102 A-A1 P1 A-A1K2 A-A1J2 Two-channel Switch Additional (Four Channels) 3830-2 1447461 12 Mar 76 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1976, 1978 40-7F 40-47 4S-4F 50-57 5S-5F 60-67 6S-6F 70-77 7S-7F 000 o n o c!1. 6),0 o &b 000 000 000 no SO-BF SO-S7 SS-8F 90-97 9S-9F AO-A7 AS-AF BO-B7 BS-BF 000 o 6"b o Ob 06), &b 0 000 000 000 oOb t'bo CO-FF CO-C7 CS-CF DO-D7 D8-DF EO-E7 E8-EF FO-F7 F8-FF 000 066 &b 0 000 000 000 &b \. ,, o n Ob 0 0;) CHANNEL TRANSFER CONTROL CARD TYPE BA82 Note: Anytime the jumpers are changed on this card, Re.fMPL the functional microcode disk. 06), Ob 0 0 "I I ,, I I I , I / I I 4Jb-r-· 00 -,_. -1-· Old -1-· 4J -1-·· [Jo [Jd [Jo [J ADDRESSSELECT ___~~ CARD LAYOUT • -1-· ., .. -1-· 0 I I II- I I~----~I V U LOCATION A-A102 A-A1P2 o Ob o 6"b - 0 A B 000 ,_. -1-· Figure 1: CARD LOCATION CHART Two-channel Switch 000 TRANSFER BUFFER CONTROL CARD TYPE BH98 0;) 0 A-A102 000 .... 0:::> A o Ob o Ob o &b o &b I- Mark the plugging and the microdiagnostic channel wrap parameter value (parameter value =38) on the label attached to the shroud of the address card. This information will be used later during checkout. If no label is available write this information in Note 1. on MICRO 200, Step 11 and MICRO 210, Step 4. Single Channel 000 00 Plug the Address Select Card(s) as indicated in Figure 2. (See Figure 1 for Card(s) location chart.) Each channel must be plugged according to the allocation of addresses for that channel. They may or may not all be plugged the same. CHNL 20-27 2S-2F 30-37 3S-3F '.0 o~ SECONDARY 00-07 OS-OF 10-17 1S-1F 'h,"~IJ o PLUG ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S) AS SHOWN BELOW VALID ADDRESS COMBINATIONS oo-3F A-A1T2 A-A1S2 Match the customer-supplied addresses to the address range in Figure 2. (Address range is the lowest and highest address supplied. These are not consecutive addresses.) Use the valid address column to determine if the primary and secondary address assignments are valid. Any 3350 not in compatibility mode and any 3340 or 3330 use a primary address only. CHANNEL FEATURE ADDRESS RANGE Go to I NST 18, entry C. If the addresses you were given do not appear in Figure 2, return to INST 16 and retrace your path in the flow diagrams. If this is the correct page and you still cannot match addresses, verify them with the customer. See INST 17 for additional information. 1. Figure 2: ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S) PLUG CHART Plug the cards at A 1S2, A 1T2, A 1U2, and B1G2 according to the card diagrams on this page. PRIMARY CAUTION: Addresses shown in Figure 2 are the ONL y valid combinations that can be used. _ INST 16C ADDRESSING I~ ____~I I~ ____~I II- ~ I- l- CARD TYPE Z512 447465 15 Dec7~ I ADDRESSING INST 16C INST 160 ADDRESSING ADDRESSING ~. This page is to be used for a 3830 with eight addresses assigned, and all attached 3350s will be operated in native mode or in 3330-11 compatibility mode. CAUTION: Addresses shown in Figure 2 are the ONL y valid combinations that can be used. _ 5. Figure 2: ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S) PLUG CHART Plug the cards at A 1S2, A 1T2, Al U2, and B1G2 according to the card diagrams on this page. Go to INST 18, entry B. If the addresses you were given do not appear in Figure 2, return to INST 16 and retrace your path in the flow diagrams. If this is the correct page and you still cannot match addresses, verify them with the customer. See INST 17 for additional information. _ _ 1. 2. _3. A·A1S2 Match the customer-supplied addresses to the address range in Figure 2. (Address range is the lowest and highest address supplied.) A·A1T2 Single Channell1 Plug One~ More than one 'hO"O'l Plug the Address Select Card(s) as indicated in Figure 2. (See Figure 1 for Card(s) location chart.) Each channel must be plugged according to the allocation of addresses for that channel. They may or may not all be plugged the same. If different addresses are required see Note 1. Mark the plugging anJd the microdiagnostic channel wrap parameter value (parameter value = 00) on the label attached to the shroud of the address card. This information will be used later during checkout. If no label is available write this information in Note 1. on MICRO 200, Step 11 and MICRO 210, Step 4. <: o ,6b 1,,"0 l- I- CARD TYPE BA89 o TRANSFER BUFFER CONTROL CARD TYPE BH98 A·A1U2 A·B1G2 o~ o~ o~ Figure 1: CARD LOCATION CHART CHNL Single Channel Two-channel Switch A-Al02 A A-Al02 A-A1P2 A Two-channel Switch Additional (Four Channels) B C D 'U' CHANNEL TRANSFER CONTROL CARD TYPE BA82 A-Al02 A-A1P2 A-A1K2 A-A1J2 OS-OF 000 060 060 060 060 600 060 060 060 060 10 - 17 000 060 060 060 060 060 600 060 060 060 1S -1F 000 060 060 060 060 600 600 060 060 060 20 -27 000 060 600 060 060 060 060 600 060 060 2S-2F 000 060 600 060 060 600 060 600 060 060 30 - 37 000 060 600 060 060 060 600 600 060 060 38-3F 000 060 600 060 060 600 600 600 060 060 40-47 000 060 060 600 060 060 060 060 600 060 4S-4F 000 060 060 600 060 600 060 060 600 060 50-57 000 060 060 600 060 060 600 060 600 060 5S -5F 000 060 060 600 060 600 600 060 600 060 60 - 67 000 060 600 600 060 060 060 600 600 060 6S -6F 000 060 600 600 060 600 060 600 600 060 70-77 000 060 600 600 060 060 600 600 600 060 7S-7F 000 060 600 600 060 600 600 600 600 060 SO -S7 000 060 060 060 600 060 060 060 060 600 SS-SF 000 060 060 060 600 600 060 060 060 600 90-97 000 060 060 060 600 060 600 060 060 600 9S-9F 000 060 060 060 600 600 600 060 060 600 AO-A7 000 060 600 060 600 060 060 600 060 600 AS-AF 000 060 600 060 600 600 060 600 060 600 BO-B7 000 060 600 060 600 060 600 600 060 600 BS-BF 000 060 600 060 600 600 600 600 060 600 CO-C7 000 060 060 600 600 060 060 060 600 600 CS-CF 000 060 060 600 600 600 060 060 600 600 00-07 000 060, 060 600 600 60 600 060 600 600 OS-OF 000 060 060 600 600 :500 600 060 600 600 EO- E7 000 060 :500 600 600 p60 060 600 600 600 ES- EF 000 060 600 600 1000 FO - F7 000 060 600 600 100 0 :50 600 600 600 600 000 0:50 600 ~o 1000 600 600 600 600 Note: Anytime the jumpers are changed on this card, Re-IMPL the functional microcode disk, ...., fsoo 0:50 600 600 600 1000 I \ I- - '- Db Ot] O'!d rp( [Jg kJ o D [J - I Note 1: For multiple chann.els the } indicated jumpers must be plugged identically on each of the address select cards. U I \ ( \. / 0 1 447465 ADDRESSING © Copyright IBM Corporation 1976, 1978 "\ ./ I ""I"'I"'I"'I"'I~I'"I'''I''' ADDRESS SELECT _ CARD LAYOUT 12 Mar 76 .15 Dec 78 f , I \ CARD TYPE Z512 1447461 3830-2 000 060 060 060 060 060 060 060 060 060 FS - FF 0:>' 0 LOCATION A B II- 00-0'7 0 'U' CHANNEL FEATURF. PLUG ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S) AS SHOWN BELOW ADDRESS RANGE / ( -" INST 160 ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( (' (- ( ( ( ADDRESSING ADDRESSING FIGURE 2: ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S) PLUG CHART 4. Plug the cards at A 1T2, A 1U2, B1G2, and A 1S2 according to the card diagrams on this page. This page is to be used for a 3830 with 16 consecutive addresses assigned and only two controllers attached. All attached 3350s will be operated in native mode or 3330-11 compatibility mode. 5. Go to INST 18, entry B. ADDRESS RANGE CAUTION: Addresses shown in Figure 2 are the ONL y valid combinations that can be used. _ _ _ 1. 2. 3. A-A1T2 A-A1S2 If the addresses you were given do not appear in Figure 2, return to INST 16 and retrace your path in the flow diagrams. If this is the correct page and you still cannot match addresses, verify them with the customer. See INST 17 for additional information. '" Single Channell1 Plug One L. More than one l- I- Match the customer-supplied addresses to the address range in Figure 2. (Address range is the lowest and highest address supplied.) 0' CARD TYPE BA89 A-Al02 Two-channel Switch A B A-Al02 A·A1P2 A B C A-Al02 A·A1P2 A-A1K2 A-A1J2 TRANSFER BUFFER CONTROL CARD TYPE BH98 A-B1G2 0;) lI- © Copyright IBM Corporation 1976, 1978 1447461 12 Mar 76 447465 15 Dec 78 10 -17 1S -1F cC'J (')9; (~~ r,/>.; ,)0.1 20 - 2F 20 - 27 2S - 2F 000 oo?, 600 050 01)0 r) ') 0 30-3F 30 - 37 38 - 3F 000 060 600 060 40 - 4F 40-47 48-4F 000 060 060 50 - 5F 50-57 5S - 5F 000 060 060 600 060 60 - 6F 60 -67 68-6F 000 060 600 70 - 7F 70-77 7S -7F 000 060 600 600 SO-SF SO-S7 SS-SF 000 060 060 90-9F 90 -97 9S - 9F 000 AO-AF AO-A7 AS-AF 000 0[;0 600 060 600 000 060 600 060 600 BO-BF BO- B7 BS - BF 000 060 600 060 600 000 600 600 060 600 CO-CF CO-C7 CS-CF 000 060 060 600 [;00 ouo 060 060 600 600 DO-OF 00-07 OS-OF 000 060 060 600 600 000 600 060 600 600 EO - EF EO - E7 ES - EF 000 060 600 600 600 000 060 600 600 600 FO- FF FO - F7 FS- FF 000 0[;0 od CHANNEL TRANSFER CONTROL CARD TYPE BA82 Note: Anytime the jumpers are changed on this card, Re-IMPL the functional . microcode disk. 0 -- 060 />. r:.. 0 . ' ','"j f) 060 n, 060 ,,0/ r)00 600 ') rSO 060 060 060 600 060 060 600 000 600 060 060 600 060 000 060 060 600 060 600 060 000 600 600 060 060 000 060 600 600 060 uoo 600 600 600 060 060 600 000 060 060 060 600 060 060 060 600 000 600 060 060 600 600 600 600 000 600 600 600 600 ~ \ \ I \ I r------'~~~-+--T-~,~--~I~~~~~/ ° 'U ° 'U CARD TYPE Z512 3830-2 10 - 1 F ° 0' LOCATION 00 - 07 ' OS-OF L -_ _ _ _ _.....I- 0' A b I- PLUG ADDRESS SELECT CARD AS SHOWN BELOW VALID ADDRESS COMBINATIONS 00 -OF l- Figure 1: CARD LOCATION CHART Single Channel = c;o A-A1U2 Two-channel Switch Additional (Four Channels) \0 tool \00 Mark the plugging and the microdiagnostic channel wrap parameter value (parameter value = 08) on the label attached to the shroud of the address card. This information will be used later during checkout. If no label is available write this information in Note 1. on MICRO 200, Step 11 and MICRO 210, Step 4. CHNL ~ 00., Plug the Address Select Card(s) as indicated in Figure 2. (See Figure 1 for Card(s) location chart.) Each channel must be plugged according to the allocation of addresses for that channel. They may or may not all be plugged the same. If different addresses are required see Note 1. CHANNEL FEATURE 'h'""" ~£> ° INST 16E 00 OoOid[p ,_. -, ... ,.. ·1-· ., .. ADDRESS SELECT CARD LA YOUT - -.....~ Note 1: For multiple channels the } indicated jumpers must be plugged identically on each of the address select cards. ·'~I ... ,.. -, ... [Jg~D[JD[J I I 0 I ADDRESSING INST 16E ADDRESSING ADDRESSING This page is to be used for a 3830 with 32 addresses assigned. and all attached 3350s will be operated in native mode or in 3330·11 compatibility mode. 4. Plug the cards at A 1S2. A 1T2. A 1U2. and B 1G2 according to the card diagrams on this page. 5. Go to INST 18. entry B. ADDRESS RANGE CAUTION: Addresses shown in Figure 2 are the ONL Y valid combinations that can be used. 1. 20-3F A·A1T2 A·A1S2 Match the customer·supplied addresses to the address range in Figure 2. (Address range is the lowest and highest address supplied.) _ 2. Plug the Address Select Card(s) as i!1dicated in Figure 2. (See Figure 1 for Card(s) Iqcation chart.) ," " i _ 3. Mark the plugging and th~ microdiagnoslic channel wrap parameter value (parameter value = 18) on the label attached to the 'shroud of the address card. This information will be used later during checkout. If no label is available write this iAformation in Note 1. on MICRO 200, Step 11 and MICRO 210, Step 4. Single Channell1 Plug One"':::' More than one 40-5F Channel~ -- C ~,~ o ... 6O-7F "0 S0-9F r- C') 0' ~ AO-BF, --Jr- L..-_ _ _ _ CARD TYPE BA89 o CO-OF TRANSFER BUFFER CONTROL CARD TYPE BH98 EO-FF A·A1U2 PLUG ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S) AS SHOWN BELOW 00-07 08·0F 10·17 18·1F 20·27 28·2F 30·37 38·3F 40·47 4B-4F 50·57 58·5F 60·67 68·6F 70·77 78·7F 80-87 SS·SF 90·97 98·9F AO·A7 A8·AF BO·B7 BS·BF CO·C7 C8·CF 00-07 DB-OF EO·E7 E8·EF FO·F7 F8·FF OO·lF ,,'\ If the addresses you were given do not appear in Figure 2, return to INST 16 and retrace your path in the flow diagrams. If this is the correct page and you still cannot match addresses. verify them with the customer. See INST 17 for additional information. _ VALID ADDRESS COMBINATIONS A·B1G2 INST 16F 000 o Ob oOb o Ob o Ob 000 000 o Ob o Ob o Ob 000 o Ob dO 000 000 Ob 000 o dO o dO dO 0 o dO 000 000 o tb Ob 0 o Ob 000 o dO Ob tb 0 o dO ,*00 000 Obo tb 0 o Ob. o Ob o Ob 0 0 0 o dO o dO \ I. 000 o dO o Ob o Ob dO 0 000 000 o tb o Ob dO 0 000 o Ob Ob 0 000 000 tb 0 000 o dO o Ob tb o Ob Ob 0 0 o dO dO 0 Ob 0 000' 000 o Ob dO 0 dO 0 0 tb 0 00(> 000 dO 0 tb 0 , o 000 cn- dO'o dO 0 dO '0:) o:? CHNL Single Channel Two·channel Switch Two·channel Switch Additional (Four Channels) 3830·2 A·A102 A B A·A102 A·A1P2 A B C D A·Al02 A·A1P2 A·A1K2 A·A1J2 ...... ) 0 '<.i o. LOCATION A I I- 0' Figure 1: CARD LOCATION CHART CHANNEL FEATURE r0' ...,. { I U I ... Po ,_. -,_. -,_. 00 -,_. -I·· Old -.-. -1-· -1-· [JJ -1-·· [Jo [Jd [Jo lJ II- ~I·· I Note: Anytime the jumpers are changed on this card, Re-IMPL the functional microcode disk. CHANNEL TRANSFER CONTROL CARD TYPE BA82 I ADDRESS SE LECT CARD LA YOUT - -.....~ ~ H I U , I~----~I CARD TYPE Z512 ,.. " '. I~ ____~I 447461 1447465 1 12 Mar 76 15 Dec 78 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1976, 1978 ( ( .....\ / '. "\ / ADDRESSING /' '\ :-. I ". ./ / / "- " /' / " "\ / / \.. ,,~- J \ " " "\ ,?--\ / 0 I /" '\ (' '" ,/._-.""\ '- / L'.~ \ . J r" '- I ,- " , "" ... / " ,.,-.--~\. I~ .. I ____·~I INST 16F / ''\ ; ,r .'" , {" ( ( ( ( f ( ( ( f ( ( ( { ( ADDRESSING ADDRESSING This page is to be used for a 3830 with 64 addresses assigned, and with 3344 Attachment Feature (Functional Microcode diskette PN 4168816). _ 4. CAUTION: Addresses shown in Figure 2 are the ONL Y valid combinations that can be used. If the addresses you were given do not appear in Figure 2, _ _ _ 1. 2. 3. CARD DIAGRAMS Match the customer-supplied addresses to the address range in Figure 2. (Address range is the lowest and highest address supplied.) Plug the Address Select Card(s) as indicated in Figure 2. (see Figure 1 for Card(s) location chart.) Mark the plugging and the microdiagnostic channel wrap parameter value (parameter value = 38) on the label attached to the shroud of the address card. This information will be used later during checkout. If no label is available write this information in Note 1. on MICRO 200, Step 11 and MICRO 210, Step 4. ADDRESS RANGE A-A1T2 000 0.0 ot1> on o t1> 000 000 000 o t1> o 40-7F 000 on on ~o 000 000 000 000 t1>0 o t1> aO-BF 000 otb on on tb 0 000 000 000 on &0 0 CO-FF 000 ot1> ot1> t1>0 bb 0 000 000 000 &0 &0 0 PlugOne L "- Single Channell} More than one 0 'M"MI~ 'U> -- o~ ,.60 0 '() 'U> l- I the jumpers are changed on this card, Re-IMPL the functional microcode disk. Single Channel~ A A-Al02 A B A-A1Q2 A-A1P2 O'~ Two-channel Switch Two-channel Switch Additional (Four Channels) A B C D A-Al02 A-A1P2 A-A1K2 A-A1J2 / / Do 00 Old qJ [Jo [Jd [Jo [J f • • • ,- • ~ _I •• -I· • -,- • -,- • -, .'. -,- •• I ••• ,- •• 0 I I - I~____~I I~____~I L~____~J Figure 3: ALTERNATE PLUGGING IF 2151 AND 6111 FEATURES INSTALLED A-B1G2 A-A1S2 • A-A1U2 LOCATION ", - CARD TYPE Z512 'l9 o o o / / ADDRESS SELECT CARD LA YOUT - -.....~ A-A1U2 CHNL / ) II- I- Note: Anytime 0 .----.-~-+--+---+---<~__:_~--,..----t-"-., 'U> o~ 00 ,, II- 0 'U> 0 o TRANSFER BUFFER CONTROL CARD TYPE BH98 CHANNEL FEATURE .n, 0O-3F A-B1G2 o Figure 1: CARD LOCATION CHART PLUG ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S) AS SHOWN BELOW Go to INST 18, entry C. ,return to INST 16 add retrace your path in the flow diagrams. If this is the correct page and you still cannot match addresses, verify them with the customer. See INST 17 for additional information. _ INST 16G Figure 2: ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S) PLUG CHART PlugthecardsatA1T2,A1U2,andB1G2 according to the card diagrams on this page. Note: If 8K (2151 feature, see INTRO 5) is installed use Figure 3 to plug A-B1G2, A-A1U2, and A-A1S2 and the card diagrams to plug A-A 1T2. 5. (- ( ( ( o 0:>0 ~ ~ 'l9 'l9 0 o U o o o e'b o o o CARD TYPE 0792 A CHANNEL TRANSFER CONTROL CARD TYPE BA82 CARD TYPE Z512 o CARD TYPE BA89 If 2151 feature (Expanded Control Store, 8K) and 6111 feature (register expansion) is installed and using 3344 microcode diskette PIN 4168816, plug A-A 1S2, A-A 1U2 and A-B 1G2 as shown above. 3830-2 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1975,1976,1978 ADDRESSING INST 16G ADDRESSING ADDRESSING b. If 6K (2150 feature) and Register Expansion (6111 feature) are installed use figure 4 to plug A-A1U2, A-A1T2 and A-B1G2. This page is to be used for a 3830 with 16 addresses assigned, no 3344s or 3350s in the system, and using one of the following microcode diskettes: PIN 2348786 or PIN 2348805 or . PIN 2348787 or PIN 2348757 or PIN 2348996 Figure 2: ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S) PLUG CHART A-A1U2 _ _ _ 1. 2. 3. 4. A-A1T2 0 Plug One L 0 0 0 Go to INST 18, entry A. 0 0 0 If the addresses you were given do not appear in Figure 2, return to INST 16 and retrace your path in the flow diagrams. If this is the correct page and you still cannot match addresses, verify them with the customer. See INST 17 for additional information. _ d"b OO-OF 000 o~ o c0, o c0, oc0, 000 o c0, o c0, o c0, o c0, 10-1 F 000 6b o c0, o c0, o c0, 000 c0, ~""'l 20-2F 000 o c0, c0, 0 06), o tb 000 o 6b tbo o tb o c0, .Db 30-3F 000 6b 0 o 6b o 6b 000 6b 40-4F 000 o 6b o c0, 6b 0 o 6b 000 o 6b o tb tbo o 6b 50-5F 000 tb o c0, tb 0 o 6b 000 tb 60-6F 000 o 6b 6b 0 6b 0 o c0, 000 o 6b 6b 70-7F 000 6b 0 6b 0 o 6b 000 6), 0 80-8F 000 o c0, 06), o~ 6b 0 000 o 6b otb 0&0 6b 0 90-9F 000 6b 0 o 6b 0&0 6b 0 000 6b 0&0 6b 0 AO-AF 000 o 6b 6), 0 o 6b 6b 0 000 o 6b tbo o 6b 6b 0 BO-BF 000 6b 6),0 o 6b 6),0 000 6), 0 o 6b 6b 0 CO-CF 000 o 6b o 6b 6b 0 6b 0 000 o 6b o 6b 6b 0 tbo DO-OF 000 6b tb 0 &bo 000 &b o&b tb 0 6b 0 EO-EF 000 o 6b 6b 0 c0, 0 &bo 000 06b 6),0 tb 0 db 0 000 db 0 6b 0 6b 000 6), 0 6),0 tb 0 6b 0 0 c0, 0 0 06), tb 0 o c0, 06), o tb o 6b 0 ''0 o 0 '\.9 CARD TYPE 0792 4K or 6K without Register Expansion (6111 feature). o - TRANSFER BUFFER CONTROL CARD TYPE 2722 Figure 4: 6K Machine with Register Expansion A·A1T2 A·A1U2 o PlugOne L o o o v . FO-FF I'- """'--;:--1,no o o o 0 6b 0 0 06), 0 6),0 o 6b 0 c0, 0 o 6b 6),0 6b 0 o c0, 06), 0 06), 0 6), 0 0 A·B1G2 Single Channel~ More than one o ~ v v '0 . • :> \ \ \ \ \ \ \ 00 0 ,,, , \ I I / I / I I I J \ \ ff- 6b 0 \ \ o o Figure 1: CARD LOCATION CHART More than one 'U' Plug the Address Select Card(s) as indicated in Figure 2. (See Figure 1 for Card(s) location chart.) Each channel must be plugged according to the allocation of addresses for that channel. They may or may not all be plugged the same. If different addresses are required see Note 1. Choose one of the following using INTRa 5 to determine features: a. If 4K (basic) or 6K (2150 feature) machine without Register Expansion (6111 feature) use figure 3 to plug A-A 1U2 and A-A 1T2. PLUG ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S) AS SHOWN BELOW ~<;ingle Channel~ a Match the customer·supplied addresses to the address range in Figure 2. (Address range is the lowest and highest address supplied.) Mark the plugging and the microdiagnostic channel wrap parameter value (parameter value = 00) on the label attached to the shroud of the address card. This information will be usee later during checkout. If no label is available write this information in Note 1. on MICRO 200, Step 11 and MICRO 210, Step 4. ADDRESS RANGE Figure 3: 4K or 6K without 6111 feature c. If 8K (2151 feature) and Register Expansion (6111 feature) are installed microcode diskette PIN 4168811 must be used. Return to INST 16 to determine correct address plugging. CAUTION: Addresses shown in Figure 2 are the ONL Y valid combinations that can be used. INST 16H I I \ / I I \ I CARD TYPE 0792 CARD TYPE Z512 CHNL CHANNEL FEATURE ~ LOCATION Single Channel A A·Al02 Two-channel Switch A B A·Al02 A·A1P2 Two-channel Switch Additional (Four Channels) A B C 0 A·Al02 A·Al P2 A-A1K2 A-A1J2 o TRANSFER BUFFER CONTROL CARD TYPE BH98 If 2150 feature (6K) and 6111 feature (Register Expansion) are installed. Plug as shown. ADDRESS SELECT CARD LA YOUT ---j"~ Note 1: For multiple channels the} indicated jumpers must be plugged identically on each of the address select cards. 3830-2 ADDRESSING 19 Copyright IBM Corporation 1975. 1976. 1978 .". (." .. /' / /" '\ " ./ I "- /" '" '\ ! >. /;' ." / 0 /"~I ("\ "- INST 16H " ." ) ., / ./ \ ./ ( f ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( c ( ( ( This page is to be used for a 3830 with 32 addresses assigned and no 3344s or 3350s in the subsystem. _ 5. ADDRESS RANGE Figure 3: 6K WI THOUT 6111 FEATURE If the addresses you were given do not appear in Figure 2, return to INST 16 and retrace your path in the flow diagrams. If this is the correct page and you still cannot match addresses, verify them with the customer. See INST 17 for additional information. 3. 4. ."'OO"l PLUG ADDRESS'SELECT CARD(S) AS SHOWN BELOW 6b 000 000 o 060 060 000 000 no o Ob o 060 60 0 on 000 000 on no on 000 no no o Oh 000 000 no no 060 000 000 060 on no 000 000 060 060 60 0 AO-BF 000 000 60 0 on 60 0 000 000 60 0 o Oh Oh CO-DF 000 000 on 6'1, 0 60 0 000 000 o Oh no 60 0 EO-FF 000 000 no no 60 0 000 000 6"'b Oh Oh 00-1F 000 000 on o 20-3F 000 000 60 0 40-5F 000 000 60-7F 000 80-9F ..,''''."'''~ Plug One ...:::. More than one 0 0 0 0 0 0 , a en, 't9 Plug the Address Select Card(s) as indicated in Figure 2. (See Figure 1 for Card(s) location chart.) 0 0 'U' Mark the plugging and the microdiagnostic channel wrap parameter value (parameter value = 01) on the label attached to the shroud of the address card. This information will be used later during checkout. If no label is available write this information in Note 1. on MICRO 200, Step 11 and MICRO 210, Step 4. ~ po '", r- 6K (feature 2150) without register expansion (6111 feature). CHNL TRANSFER BUFFER CONTROL CARD TYPE 2722 Single Channel A A-Al02 Two-channel Switch A B A-Al02 A-A1P2 A B C D A-A 102 A-A lP2 A-A1K2 A-A1J2 Two-channel Switch Additional (F.our Channels) 447465 15 Dec 78 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1978 on 0 0 Ob 0 I I \ \ / \ I \ I I I \ Figure 4: 6K MACHINE WITH REGISTER EXPANSION A-A1U2 Si.ngle Channel~ Plug OneL.. More than one o o "~O"J o o o o , o o .,Cb \, I \ \ A-B1G2 A-A1T2 0 \ \ v . I \ I \ . I \ " .:> ,I I \ \ v v \ ) o \. 00 00 O!dq] I ••• ,- • -,- • ~ I· ADDRESS SELECT CARD LA YOUT --~.~ CARD TYPE 0792 CARD TYPE Z512 If 2150 feature (6K) and 6111 feature (register expansion) are installed. Plug as shown. TRANSFER BUFFER CONTROL CARD TYPE BH98 3830-2 6b \ o LOCATION o \ o Figure 1: CARD LOCATION CHART CHANNEL FEATURE 6b CARD TYPE 0792 a. If 6K (2150 feature) machine without Register Expansion (6111 feature) use figure 3 to plug A-A 1U2 and A-A 1T2. c. If 8K (2151 feature) and Register Expansion (6111 feature) are installed microcode diskette PIN 4168811 must be used. Return to INST 16 to determine correct address plugging. o 0 Choose one of the following using INTRa 5 to determine features: b. If 6K (2150 feature) and Register Expansion (6111 feature) are installed use figure 4 to plug A-A 1U2, A-A 1T2 and A-Bl G2. O'b A-A1T2 A-A1U2 1. Match the customer-supplied addresses to the address range in Figure 2. (Address range is the lowest and highest address supplied.) 2. ( Figure 2: ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S) PLUG CHART Go to INST 18, entry B. CAUTION: Addresses shown in Figure 2 are the ONL Y valid combinations that can be used. f INST 16J ADDRESSING ADDRESSING _ ( ( •• I- • -I· •• I •• -I- •• I •• -,- •• [JO [Jd [Jo [J I 0 I I~____~J I~____~I IL-____~I I ADDRESSING INST 16J ADDRESSING ADDRESSING This page is to be used for a 3830 with two non·consecutive groups of eight addresses assigned and only two controllers attached. All attached 3350s will be operated in native mode or 3330·11 compatibility mode. 4. Plug the cards at A1S2, A1T2, B1G2, and A1U2 according to the diagrams on this page. 5. Go to INST 18, entry B. Figure 2: ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S) PLUG CHART ADDRESS RANGE CAUTION: Addresses shown in Figure 2 are the ONL Y valid combinations that can be used. If the addresses you were given do not appear in Figure 2, return to INST 16 and retrace your path in the flow diagrams. If this is the correct page and you still cannot match addresses, verify them with the customer. See INST 17 for additional information. _ _ _ 1. 2. 3. A·A1T2 A·A1S2 Single Channell1 Plug One"':"" More than one 'h'"~IJ ~ Plug the Address Select Card(s) as indicated in Figure 2. (See Figure 1 for Card(s) location chart.) Each channel must be plugged according to the allocation of addresses for that channel. They may or may not all be plugged the same. If different addresses are requ ired see Note 1. o Mark the plugging and the microdiagnostic channel wrap parameter value (parameter value = 10) on the label attached to the shroud of the address card. This information will be used later during checkout. If no label is available write this information in Note 1. on MICRO 200, Step 11 and MICRO 210, Step 4. .n '"" CARD TYPE BA89 A·B1G2 A·A1U2 0;) 0;) 0 0' 'U0 0::> Figure 1: CARD LOCATION CHART CHANNEL FEATURE CHNL LOCATION Single Channel A A·Al02 Two·channel Switch A B A·A102 A·A1P2 Two·channel Switch Additional (Four Channels) A B C 0 A·Al02 A·A1P2 A·A1K2 A·A1J2 000 060 060 060 060 000 060 060 060 80 ·1F OS·OF 18 ·1F 000 060 060 060 060 600 000 060 060 060 20·37 20 ·27 30·37 000 060 28·3F 28 ·2F 38·3F 000 060 600 060 40·57 40 ·47 50·57 000 060 060 600 060 060 000 060 600 060 48·5F 48 ·4F 58·5F 000 060 060 60·77 60 ·67 70·77 000 060 600 600 060 060 000 600 600 060 68· 7F 68·6F 78 ·7F 000 060 600 600 060 600 000 600 600 060 80·97 80 ·87 90 ·97 000 060 060 060 600 060 000 060 060 600 88·9F 88 ·8F 98·9F 000 060 060 060 600 600 000 060 AO·B7 AO·A7 BO·B7 000 060 600 060 600 060 000 600 060 600 A8·BF A8·AF B8·BF 000 060 600 060 600 600 000 600 060 600 CO·D7 CO·C7 00·07 ' 000 060 060 600 600 060 000 060 600 600 CS-DF C8·CF D8·DF 000 060 060 600 600 600 000 060 600 600 EO· F7 EO· E7 FO· F7 000 060 600 600 E8· FF E8· EF F8· FF 000 0'60 600 600 600 600 000 600 600 600 o TRANSFER BUFFER CONTROL CARD TYPE BH98 'U' the jumpers are changed on this card, Re-IMPL the functional microcode disk. 600 060 060 060 060 000 600 060 060 600 060 600 000 600 060 060 060 600 000 060 600 060 600 .... ... .... .... 600 \ " ... .... 060 060 000 600 600 600 ,, ... -- I I \ I \ " I I \ \ I 00 OoO!dqJ 1_. -1-· -,_. -,_. -,_. ·'~I·· -,_. -1-·· ii- Note: Anvtime CHANNEL TRANSFER CONTROL CARD TYPE BA82 PLUG ADDRESS SELECT CARD AS SHOWN BELOW 00·07 10 ·17 lI- VALID ADDRESS COMBINATIONS 00 ·17 /' Match the customer·supplied addresses to the address range in Figure 2. (Address range is the lowest and highest address supplied. These are not consecutive addresses.) INST 16K ADDRESS SE LECT CARD LAYOUT - -.....~ [Jo. ~D; I c::::J Note 1: For multiple channels the } indicated jumpers must be plugged identically on each of the address select cards. [JO lJ 0 I l- CARD TYPE Z512 3830·2 ADDRESSING @ Copyright IBM Corporation 1978 ~-"'\ I \ \.., ~ /' \ ... " ! '"! . ./ /'''\ '-. / .<' '-. r,,\ ('-\ / \ '. ," ) \.. j \.,,- /' .. j INST 16K ("'. \, ) ./ c ( ( ( f ( ( f ( c ( INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (Addressing Supplement) ( 64 Drive Addressing Capability for 3350 Attachment 64 Address Compare: Address Select Card Plugging With 3350 Attachment feature the 3830-2 CU has 64 Drive Addressing capability. This refers to the number of addresses the CU will answer to, not the physical number of drives attached to the CU (a maximum of 32 drives can be attached to one CUI. The 3344 Attachment Feature requires "64 Addresses Compare". The 3350 Attachment Feature, with 3 or 4 controllers attached to the CU and any 3350 operating in 3330 Model 1 Compatibility mode, also requires "64 Addresses Compare." With other 3350 configurations, use of "64 Addresses Compare" will provide for any future change. However, with some system configurations, 64 addresses may not be available. To provide for this, other addressing options are made available. Use of these options will depend on the number of controllers attached to the CU and the 3350 mode of operation (a 3350 operating in 3330 Model 1 Compatibility mode requires two logical addresses and must have Bit 2 of the CU address floating). With 3350 Attachment feature, refer to the description of 64 Drive Addressing Capability. Use jumper assembly PIN 816645 to connect bits 0-4 on the Address Select Card for the customer's address for the 3830-2. Use INST 16 to determine the proper table for address plugging. Card is located at A-A 1Q2. (See logic pages KA 103 and 104.) If 3350 Attachment feature is installed, ensure bits 3 and 4 of the controller's address cards are plugged to answer to bits 3 and 4 of the CU (Control Unit) address. If Two Channel switch feature is installed, also connect the Channel B address select card jumpers. Read "CAUTION" below. Card is located at A-A 1P2. (See logic pages KC103 and 104.) If Two Channel Switch Additional feature is installed, also connect channel C and 0 address select card jumpers. Read "CAUTION" below before plugging. Cards are located at A-A1 K2 (channel C) and A-A1J2 (channel 0). (See logic pages KC103, 104 and KD103, 104.) CAUTION If Tvvo Channel Switch, or Tvvo Channel Switch Additional, feature is installed the following rules must be followed or, on some interrupt conditions, incorrect CU addresses will be generated and system errors will result. The 3350 operates in one of three modes: Native mode; as a 3350 and requires one logical address per spindle. 3330 Model 11 Compatibility mode,' the 3350 operates as one 3330 Model 11 and requires one logical address per spindle. 3330 Model 1 Compatibility mode; the 3350 operates as two 3330 Model 1's and requires two logic addresses per spindle. These 3 modes can be intermixed on one controller. When two logical addresses are required by one physical drive, all bits of the two addresses will be the same except bit 2, for example: Address 47 (0100 0111) bit 2 off and address 67 (0110 0111) bit 2 on. Bit 2 on selects one half of the disk storage area, bit 2 off selects the other half. Therefore, to have two addresses for one drive, bit 2 must be left floating on the address compare section of the Address Select card. Native 3330s, 3340s, 3350s, and 3350s in 3330-11 compatibility mode must be assigned to a primary address. Address Select Card 1. If 3 or 4 controllers are attached to the CU, bits 3 and 4 of address compare must float. 2 If only 1 or 2 controllers are attached to the CU, bit 3 of address compare must be plugged the same on the Address Select Card of all channels of the CU. 3. If only 1 controller is attached to the CU, bits 3 and 4 must be plugged the same on the address compare of the Address Select Card for all channels. The Address Select Card Plugging is shown on Addressing pages INST 16A through INST 16K for all possible combinations of selecting the CU with 3340 or 3350 Attachment Features; Use INST 16 to select the correct Addressing page and follow the procedure on the selected page to plug the . Address Select Card. (- INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (Addr_ing Supplement)· ADDRESSING FOR 3344 AND 3350 FEATURES With 3344 Attachment feature, the Address Select card must be plugged for "64 Addresses Compare." ( ( INST 17 8,16, or 32 Address Options: 32 Addresses Compare, Bit 2 off; used with up to four controllers, with none of the 3350s operating in 3330 Model 1 Compatability mode. 32 Addresses Compare, Bit 2 on; used with up to four controllers, with none of the 3350s operating in 3330 Model 1 Compatability mode. 32 Addresses Compare, Bit 2 floating; used with up to two controllers, with one or more 3350s operating in 3330 Model 1 Compatability mode. 16 Addresses Compare, Bit 2 off; used with up to two controllers, with none of the 3350s operating in 3330 Model 1 Compatability mode. 16 Addresses Compare, Bit 2 on; used with Uj; to two controllers, with none of the 3350s operating in 3330 Model 1 Compatability mode. 16 Addresses Compare, Bit 2 floating; used with one controller with one or more 3350s operating in 3330 Model 1 Compatability mode. 8 Addresses Compare, Bit 2 off; used with one controller, with none of the 3350s operating in 3330 Model 1 Compatability mode. 8 Addresses Compare, Bit 2 on; used with one controller, with none of the 3350s operating in 3330 Model 1 Compatability mode. 3830-2 ~ Copyright IBM Corporation 1978 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (Addressing Supplement) I NST 17 INSTALLATION iNSTRUCTIONS (Addressing Supplement) The 3830-2 detects and interprets only bits 0-4 of the address presented by the channel on bus out. Connect both Address Compare and Address Select. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (Addressing Supplement) Figure 1: Address Select Card If 3344 attachment feature is present, check that jumpers on A·B1G2 are plugged correctly.' If 3350 attachment feature is present, check that card jumpers on A-B 1G2 and A·A1S2 are plugged correctly. Example: Address select card shown plugged for address range 158 through 15F. Figure 1 shows the Address Select card plugged for address range 158 through 15F. The Address Select card is located at A-A1Q2. (See logic pages KB103 and 104.) Type BA89 Type 2512 If Two Channel Switch feature is installed, also connect the channel B address select card jumpers as described above. Card is located at A-A 1P2. (See logic pages KB 103 and 104.) If Two Channel Switch, Additional, feature is installed, also connect channels C and 0 address select card jumpers as described above. Cards are located at A-A 1 K2 and A-A1J2 respectively. (See logic pages KC103, 104, and KD103, 104.) 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 CU Address Compare Bits ---~-~4~---1 o o _____ _ _.~--··2 2 ~ CU Address Generate .··'----3 L K J 0 ~ H , )-2 0 CL.P -1 0 'l,.;'l 30 31 0 cg Always floated {g ,," ,-' ,'not used ------------ ------------, : 0 0 , on (1)0 P 58e " I I-I-- 6 7 R 0 C-'o <1:_, bit: , '- -------, Bit Definition, Bit 1 Channel Channel Channel Channel A; B: C: D: A-A102 (KA103, 104) A-A1P2 (KB103, 104) A.A1K2 (KC103, 104) A-A1J2 (KD103, 104) Bit 2 On Off Bit 3 On Notes: 1. Bits 3 and 4 must be plugged identically for all channel inputs (these bits define attached controllers). If functional microdisk PN 4168811 with any 33508 in 3330-1 compatibility mode is installed, then bits 2, 3, and 4 must be plugged identically for all channel inputs. Off Bit P © " '-_/ "\ /~ ',- /; -.. ~\ ( / '- / '" '\ (I' \, Enable Offset Interlock (Jumper active with FunctIonal Microcode PIN 4168811 only) O"b - 053 to 054 R51 to R52 - Disable Offset Interlock 6-'0 - R51 to 051 - R53 to 053 • Bit Shown jumpered for: No E.C.C. 3330-1 Compatability Mode 8K Storage Offset Interlock (Jumpers are used by microdiagnostics and functional code to determine machine configuration.) I Copy light IBM Corporation 1978 "\, I- • On (1) Off (0) • 2. Always plug for the actual storage size regardless of functional disk Part Number (See INTRO 5). 15 Dec 78 ECC (3830 P21) I Rder to No ECC (Snipe) f I NTR 005 No 3330-1 Compatability 3330·1 cOmpatability mode or 3344 = 8K storage } Note 2 6K stora~e = Offset I nterlock (Jumper on with functional microcode PIN 4168811 only) = No offset Interlock Odd parity for bits 0·3 Bit 0 On = Off = Bit 1 On = Off = Jumper PN 816645 51 52 53 54 A·A1S2 A·B1G2 447465 tt- 0 ,'~ffio):--\ 3830-2 - 3 0 29 I-- Bit ~-. } Note 1 o ••••• ,--------, '8 o , ',, . ____4_ ,,"~' 5 Bits INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (Addressing Supplement) /~ "- /' / INST 17A \ \ /' ',- ( /' / " / "- " / , " " c- " I' , ( ~\ INST 17A ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (Addressing Supplement) CHANNEL TRANSFER CONTROL CARD TRANSFER BUFFER CONTROL CARD f ( INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (AddressingSupplementl TRANSFER BUFFER CONTROL CARD TYPE BH98 D Single channel E22 to 022 More than one channel E22 to E23 Jumper as shown on card layout for type of card present. Card type BAB2 is used with 3350 attachment feature. f· ( I NST 17B TRANSFER BUFFER CONTROL CARD TYPE 2722 f"\ r-'\ Single channel E22 to 022 More than one chan nel E22 to E23 11111 11111 K CHANNEL TRANSFER CONTROL CARD TYPE BA82 P17 to P18 = Offset Interlock active (Jumper active with Functional Microcode PIN 4168811 I I I I I I 0 0 0 0 0 p 0 to P S nly) Q P 10 J lC-24 22-~ 23-0~ P-26 '0-27 H I :-0-25 0-17 ~P-26 --19 '0-27 00 o o 0'b--22 iP18 '" 018· Standard } H26 to H?7 S47 to S48 Ob Or Offset Interlock inactive. 5 5 I A·A1U2 (GK502) 0 I I o 0-25 P "tl O'b E H I I 13 -17 qA~ -18 P-20 E 0 't>- 21 I_I 0-22-0.::0 23 -0"- CHANNEL TRANSFER CONTROL CARD TYPE 0792 A·A1U2 (GK502) P-46 '0-47 0-48 I This card shown jumpered for and single channel II . gil:', :-0-46 :;.0-47 '0-48 D A·A1T2 32 Drive Expansion } Feature H25 to H26 S46 to S47 A·A1T2 ... Card BH98 Address Plugging 16 Addresses 1H2a ro H27 -, 6 I J26 to J27 I K21 to K22 1547 to 548 II I t..!'~4..!~~~ ..J 32 Addresses r-------, II I I H25 to H26 I J26 to J27 K21 to K22 I 546 to 547 I I L!~~~~.J 64 Addresses ,-----, I H26to H27 : II I J26 to J27 ( K20 to K21 546 to 547 I I :.f~~~i....J 3830·2 447465 1 ~5 Dec 78 © Cop\·right IBM Corporation 1978 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (Addre iSing Supplement) INST 17B (- ADDRESSING AODRESSING ~ ~ Use the primary address range assigned and the Controller address column indicated to determine the controiler address assignments. Record this information in Figure 1 to be used in Step 5, INST 26. PRIMARY ADDRESS ASSIGNED See Note 1. + ~ Use the primary address range assigned and the Controller address column indicated to determine the controller address assignments. Record this information in Figure 1 to be used in Step 5, INST 26. t CONTROLLER ADDRESS ASSIGNMENTS CONTROLLER ADDRESS ASSIGNMENTS See Note 1. See Note 1. See Note 1. 18-1F. 20-27 28-2F 30-37 38-3F 0 1 2 3 See Note See Note See Note See Note 2. 2. 2. 2. 40-47 48-4F 50-57 58-5F 60-67 68-6F 70-77 78-7F 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 See Note See Note See Note See Note 2. 2. 2. 2. 80-87 88.8F 90-97 98-9F AO-A7 A8-AF BO-B7 B8-BF 0 0 1 1 0 2 3 0 1 2 3 CO-C7 CB-CF 00-07 D8-0F EO-E7 E8-EF FO-F7 F8-FF 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 3 PRIMARY ADDRESSES ASSIGNED CONTROLLER ADDRESS ASSIGNMENTS t CONTROLLER ADDRESS ASSIGNMENTS 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 10~17 FIGURE 1 Use the primary address range assigned and the Controller address column indicated to determine the controller address assignments. Record this information in Figure 1 to be used in Step 5, INST 26 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 00-07 08-0F INST 18 0 1 2 3 See Note See Note See Note See Note 2. 2. 2.. 2. Note 1: All Channel inputs must be capable of addressing all attached 3333s, 3340 A02s, and 3350 A021A2Fs, and all associated logical addresses. H.4Jen 33508 are to be operated in 3330-1 compatibility mode, the 3350 operates as two 33308 and requires two .logical addreSSBs per spindle, a primary and a secondary. In strings vvhere there are no 33508 operating in 3330- 7 mode only primary addresses are used. ~GO TO INST 25 and Continue. Note 2: No Real Device can be assigned to this address. This is reserved for secondary addreS$8S. 0 1 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 See Note See Note See Note See Note 2. 2. 2. 2. 3830-2 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1978 ADDRESSING /-'~ .------\ \ .... --,I '" . ./ r'''' ![>"\ --I \ '- / / '" ./ ~. I \ .INST 18 ( ( ( ( ( ( ( f ( ( ( ( ( ( ( INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ~ __ 7 ( ( f' ( INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS __ 9 Check When Complete ( ( I NST 25 On a two channel switch machine, jumper 01A-A1V2D07 to 01A-A1M2S03 and 01A-A1K2J13 to 01A-M2S04 (NE103) using purple wire. These wires must be removed if two channel switch additional is installed. Check that card jumpers on A·A 1L2, A·A 1M2, and A·A 1R2 match channel options as indicated by the jumper coding shown here. __ 10 Verify that the address range (including primary and addresses) does not conflict with other control units on the same channel. ~econdary SELECTED BUSrfAG OUT CARD TYPE 9965 CHANNEL SELECTOR CARD TYPE 9966 -----...... .(Card type x999 on some machinesl -11 -- A-A 1 R2(CS1031 _ 12 Single channel - - - - - - - - Two Channel Switch - - -_ _ Two Channel Switch, Additional 1111111 If the attached CPU or channel has Block Multiplex feature, be sure that it is activated. Check U.C.W. plugging in the CPU or channel for 3830 addresses. System performance can be seriously degraded if 3830 addresses are plugged for "Share" at CPU or channel. Be aware of all the addresses involved with 64 or 32 drive addresses. If 3344s installed or any 3350 in 3,,0$0·1 compatability mode installed review physical planning guide for resulting individual drive addresses. A-A 1 L2(NE2021 A-A 1M2 (NE1021 _13 __ 8 Go to INST 26 next. If Two Channel Switch, Additional feature is installed, maKe sure that violet jumpers are installed from B-A 1 E6D06 to B-A 1 E8B04 and from B-A 1 E6D12 to B-A 1B1009. (See logic page AR101-102). 3830-2 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1973, 1976, 1978 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS INST 25 ( \ . ./ '- '\ '\ /' ,/ (' '" '\ ,/ "- "- r~· '\ ,,r',, (' " " j ,/ \. - "\ ,/ ',- '\ / '\ (' "\ ,/,,' "\ "-- ./ ,/ " ./ /' '\ (' "- ',,- ./ " / \ ", "\, ( '-, / " '\ (~,--' / j (-",\, '- / ,('°1,\" '" j ,~ " '7)'" / r="\I" ; / , ~ , 1 \ { ( ( ( f ( ( ( ( INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 5 ( ( ( INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS f ( I NST 26 CONTROL UNIT MICRODIAGNOSTICS ___ Insert 3830-2 diagnostic disk in 23FD and perform step A on START 25, and step B on START 27. Verify controller address assignments by checking the controller plugging (Use the controller INST section and the information recorded in Figure 1 on INST 18 of this section). CAUTION: Verify that proper 383()'2 diagnostic disk is supplied for your machine configuration. See INTR 005. 6 SYSTEM TEST 1 ___ 2 7 Connect channel Bus and Tag cables between channel and 3830-2 Run online test 3830AAA from the CPU. Refer to step C on START 27. COVER INSTALLATION __1 Mount kickstrips. Light tapping with a hammer may be required to properly seat them. /.~ ~- 10,,,,,,;, Screws Note: If installation ;s on a non-raised floor do not attempt to mount kickstr;p (P/N2277387) on right end of 3830-2. __ 2 8 MtgBarY 1. Re-install covers removed in step RECORDS __1 Assist customer with his checkout of the facility. __ 2 Complete all installatioll' records. __ 3 3830-2 Retain these installation procedures in the Maintenance Library for future reference. 1 © 447461 12 Mar 76 Copyright IBM Corporation 1976, 1978 1447465 15 Dec 78 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS IN ST 26 , f ~ I' '\ j "- '\ /" '\, " / /' "- '" / /' -", /" '" " '\I / " \ /' '\ -~ "\. \ '\ / ''\ ''\ " \ " ! \ ( '- / " /~, ! / /" '\ /' / " j '\ ,/ " I --- ". ,~." '\ , ( " " / " ~~" ,- / (-"\ " ", / ' /~ r'\ '\ /' '\ .J (~ \ ~, ~- p(' ( (~\ (-- (" -. (' ( (' (- ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( (' (- ( L A AND B BUS-CHANNEL INTERFACE INDEX A and B Bus Assemblers CTRL 118 A Bus Assembler CTRL 400 Introduction CTRL 200,INTR 115 A Register Check CTRL 35 Error, FSI FSI55 Introduction CTRL 400 Parity Error PANEL 40 Abbreviations and Definitions LGND 16 Accept Data (Sequence Control) CHL-I 240 Accept Status (Sequence Control) CHL-I 240 Access Cycle CTRL 320 ACR (see Address Compare) Address Assembler/Error Assembler CHL-1165 Address Buffer Description CTRL 605 Address Bus Error 2 (23FD Attach) MPL 290 Address Byte Sector, MPL MPL 220 Address/Check/Program Display Check I Error I Collection PANEL 40 Indicators (CE Panel) PANEL 10 Operation PANEL 100 Register PANEL 40 Address Compare CHL-I 165 ACR Sync, Stop and Recycle PANEL 120 Indicator PANEL 10 Operation PANEL 16 Recycle PANEL 16 SW Sync, or Stop PANEL 120 Switch PANEL 10 Address/Data Entry Switches PANEL 10 Address In (Timing) CHL-1350 Address In Introduction CHL-I 220 Address Out (Timing) CHL-I 350 Address Out Introduction CHL-I 220 Address Select Card Wiring INST 20 Addressing Assignment I T 20 Control Storage CTRL 600 Decoding CHL-I 165,CHL-I 235 I/O Device CHL-I 230 Instruction Data Flow CTRL 230 ALD/Card Index START 905 Alert Lines, CTL-I CTL-I 10 ALU Check, ECD CTRL 60 Check, Indication PANEL 40 Data Flow INTR 90 Description CTRL 400 Error CTRL 60 Error, Description CTRL 400 Error, FSI FSI 50 Inputs INTR 115 Introduction CTRL 200 Microprogram Instruction Word CTRL 235 Operation CTRL 225,CTRL 235 Operations - Examples CTRL 410 Statement MIC 2 Analysis, Entry Point START 10 Anti-Recycle Latch PWR 105,PWR 310 Arithmetic Logic Unit (see ALU) Array Cards CTRL 605 Artificial Respiration (Back of Title Page) ii Attachment Concepts MPL 230 Attachment Errors MPL 290 Attachment Introduction MPL 220 3830-2 © Copyright IBM Corporation 1975 U:~~~51 BBus Assembler CTRL 400 Introduction INTR 115 B Register • Check ECD CTRL 35 Check MAP CTRL 35 Description CTRL 400 Parity Error PANEL 40 B Time Timing Chart (Read) MPL 280 Backup Address Register (BAR) Description CTRL 220 Introduction INTR 110 BFRDY Branch CL 14 CHL-I 145,CHL-1260 Bias Supply LOC 10 Bit Control MIC 2 Bit Counter MPL 230 Block Multiplex Mode CHI-I 230 Blowers LOC 2,LOC 14 Box Print Position MIC 2 Box Serial Number MIC 2 Branch Controls INTR 110 Status Error PANEL 40 Status Error, FSI FSI35 Buffer Assembly CHL-1165 Check, CHL-I PANEL 50 Controls, CHL-I CHL-I 200,CHL-I 260 Parity Check CHL-I 'I S5 Parity Error CTL-I liS Ready CHL-1145 Bulk Supply Diodes LOC 8 Bulk Transformers LOC 10 Bulk I Power Problem PWR 60 Bulk 1 Supply PWR 61 Bulk 2 Power Problem PWR 70 Bulk 2 Supply PWR 71 Bus Assemblers Block Diagram CTRL 118 Bus In CTL-I Data Transfer CTL-135 CTL-I Extended Operation CTL-I 50 Introduction, Channel CHL-I 220 Timing, Channel CHL-1350 Bus Out Check, Printout MSG 20 CTL-I Data Transfer CTL-I 35 CTL-I Extended Operation CTL-I 45 Introduction, Channel CHL-I 220 Parity Check, CHL-I CHL-I 255 Parity Check, CTL-I CTL-I lIO,P ANEL 50 Parity Error, Channel CHL-I 30 Timing, Channel CHL-I 350 Write Data Path, Channel CHL-I 165 Busy Status CMD 180,CHL-I 245 Byte Assembly Description CTRL 605 Register (Read) MPL 280 23FD Attachment Concepts MPL 230 Byte Counter MPL 270 Byte Format (23FD Attachment Introduction) MPL 220 CAFieid Decode Description MIC 3 Decode Error, FSI FSI35 Description CTRL 235 Even Decode Error CTRL 20,PANEL 40 Odd Decode Error CTRL 20,PANEL 40 Cabling INST 5,INST 20 Card Function Chart START 900 Card Layout by Board START 905 Card Location Chart START 900 Card to Logic Page List START 905 Carry In Control CTRL 400 Cartridge MPL 2 CAS Flow (Read) CMD 130 CAS Flow (Write) CMD 90 CB/CD Field Decode Description MIC 3 CB/CD Field Description CTRL 235 CB Decode Error, FSI FSI35 Even Error CTRL 25,PANEL 40 Odd Error CTRL 25,PANEL 40 CB2 Trips PWR 40 CD Decode Error Latched PANEL 40 Error Timing Chart CTRL 30 CE Address CE Communication Out Driver CTL-IIO CE Initial Entry, Description of START 10 CE Mode Register Display Circuits General Purpose Register PANEL 110 IAR Register PANEL 105 CE Panel LOC 2,P ANEL 10 Checkout PANEL 30 Controls INTR 9O,INTR 110 Description of Controls PANEL 10 Front View PANEL 10 Indications (Channel Wraparound Test) MICRO 200 Operations PANEL 10 ACR Addresss Compare Sync or Stop PANEL 16 Address Compare PANEL 16 Address Compare Recycle PANEL 16 Register Alter PANEL IS Register Display PANEL 15 Storage Alter PANEL IS Storage Display PANEL IS Rear View PANEL 11 Rotor Switches Rear View PANEL II Test (8A) MICRO 427 CH Field MIC 16 Decode Description CTRL 230 Description MIC 3 Chaining, Disconnected Command CMD 200 Chan B/Respon Branch CHL-1180 Channel Buffer Controls CHL-I 260 Channel Data Transfer Controls Description CHL-I 260 Channel Disabled CHL-I 20 Channel Drivers and Terminators LOC 14 Channel Interface A Check, CHL-I PANEL 50 Address/Error Assembler CHL-1165 Addressing, I/O Device CHL-I230 Attachment CHL-I 500 B Check, CHL-I PANEL 50 Block Multiplex Mode CHL-I 230 Buffer A and B,(Read) CHL-I 360 Buffer A and B (Offset Read) CHL-I 370 Buffer A and B (Write) CHL-I 385 Buffer A and B (Offset Write) CHL-I 390 Buffer Controls CHL-I 260 A and B Buffers CHL-I 260 IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER INDEX 1 Error Checking CHL-I 270 Initial Selection-Status Presentation CHL-I 260 Read Operation CHL-I 265 Write Operation CHL-I 260 Bus Out Parity CHL-I 25 Check Channel A, B, Cor D CHL-1185 Command Chaining (see also Block Multiplex Mode) CHL-124O Commands CHL-I 235 Connectors CHL-I 194 Control Check MSG 20,CHL-I 130 Control Unit Busy Sequence CHL-I 230 Control Unit Errors CHL-I 130 Control Unit Initiated Sequence CHL-I 230 Data Flow INTR 9O,CHL-I 500 Data Transfer CHL-I 230 Data Transfer Controls Description CHL-I 265 Description CHL-I 200 Detected Failure CHL-I 125 Diagnostic Flow Charts Routine 6A MICFL 70 Routine 6C MICFL 85 Routine 6E MICFL 125 Routine 60 MICFL 20 Routine 62 MICFL 30 Routine 64 MICFL 40 Routine 66 MICFL 55 Routine 68 MICFL 65 Disabled Indicator(s) PANEL 10 Disabled Manual Switch Flowchart CHL-I 20 Disconnected Command Chaining (see Block Multiplex Mode) End Status CMD 180,CHL-I 250 Ending Procedure CHL-I 230 Error Condition Diagrams Buffer Parity Check CHL-I 160 Buffer Ready CHL-I 145 Bus Out (Write Data Path) CHL-1165 Chan B/Respon Branch CHL-1180 Channel Bus Out Parity CHL-I 30 Channel Interface Disabled CHL-I 20 Control Unit End CHL-I 145 Halt I/O Busy CHL-I 140 Multiconnect Error/IFC CHL-II85 Overrun CHL-I 35 Request In CHL-I 135 Selective Reset CHL-I 190 Servo/Multi Branch CHL-I 180 Suppress Out CHL-I 150 System Reset CHL-1190 Transfer/Halt I/O CHL-I 140 Freeze CHL-114O General Information CHL-I 230 Initial Selection CHL-1300 Initial Selection Sequence CHL-I 230 Inter-board Wiring Chart CHL-I 194 Interface Disconnect CHL-I 240 Introduction INTR 20,INTR 14O,CHL-I 200,CHL-I 220 Jumper Card Assignments CHL-I 225 Logic Flow CHL-I 200 MAPs Buffer Parity Check CHL-I 160 Bus In Parity Check CHL-I 125 Channel Bus Out Parity CHL-I 25 Channel Time Out CHL-I 125,CHL-I 130 A AND B BUS-CHANNEL INTERFACE INDEX 1 c~ INDEX CHANNEL INTERFACE Icont'd)-CP15 OR 18 Channel Interface. MAPs (continued) Channels are Disabled CHL-120 CU Busy Check CHL-I 125 Illegal Sequence CHL-I 125 Interface Check Channel A, B, C, or 0 CHL-II85 Log Disconnect In CHL-I 125,CHL-I 130 Multiple In Tags CHL-I 125,CHL-I 130 No Response Check CHL-I 125 Unit Address No Compare CHL-I 125 Operation CAS Flowchart CMD 35 Response Latch CHL-I 260 Latch (Read) (,HL-I 365, (,HL-I 375 Latch (Write) CHL-I 385, CHL-I 395 Selection Switch CHL-I475 Sense Information CHL-I250 Sequence Controls CHL-I235 Special Control Lines CHL-I 225 Status Information CHL-I 245 Tag In/Out CHL-I 220 Timeout CHL-I 130 Timing Chart CHL-I 220,CHL-I 350 Transfer Buffer CHL-I 260 Transfer Controls CHL-I 260 Buffer Control During Initial Selection CHL-I 260 Buffer Control Error Checking CHL-I 270 Buffer Control of Data Transfer CHL-I 260,CHL-I 265 Buffer Controls to Control Unit CHL-I 260 Ending Sequence (Channel Truncation) CHL-I265 Truncation CHL-I 265 Unit Address Field MSG 20 Wrap Diagnostic Cable Point to Point Diagram MICRO 205 CE Panel Indications MICRO 200 Channel Routine 60 MICFL 20 Description of MICRO 200 M,crodiagnostic Running Instructions MICRO 200 Physical Layout MICRO 200 Routine 60 MICFL 20 Routines Summary MICRO 210 Test Cable Installation MICRO 205 Wrap Diagnostic Description MICFL 5 Wraparound Test, Description MICRO 200 Channel Selector Card Wiring INST 20 Channel Switching CHL-I 470 Channel Transfer Control Card INST 20 Channel Transfer Controls CHL-I 260 Chart Command Summary CMD 2 Control Command CMD 5 Control Unit Clock Timing CTRL 300 Format Decode Active Lines CTRL 500 Read Commands CMD 100 Read Cycle Timing CTRL 600 Search Commands CMD 50 Sense Commands CMD 140 Write Commands CMD 70 Write Cycle Timing CTRL 600 Check Bit Generator INTR 105 ,Check End, CTL-I CTL-I IO,CTL-I 110 Check Indicators PANEL 10 Check Reset Lamp Test PANEL 10 Check I Address/Check/Program Display Register PANEL 40 Definition of PANEL 4O,ST ART 5 Error Register Display PANEL 40 Errors CTRL 200,INTR 50 Errors, Description of PANEL 41 Register Card Location Table PANEL 40 Check 2 Error Collection PANEL 50 Error Collection, Description of PANEL 51 Errors INTR 50 Errors, Definition of START 5 CI (see Control Interface) Circuit Protectors LOC 6,LOC 8,LOC IO,PWR 30 Circuits by Card START 900 Card Location START 905 Duplicate Card Chart START 905 CL Decoder (Error> CTRL 45 CL Field Decode CTRL 230 Decode Description MIC 3 Clock Cycle Controls CTRL 300,INTR 110 Errors FSI 30,CTRL 40 Stopped Indicator PANEL 10 CM Field MSG 20 Command (see also specific command) Byte Decoding CHL-I 235 Chaining, Channel CHL-I 240,CHL-I 350 Chaining, Disconnected CMD 200 Decode Flowchart CMD 183,CMD 185 Execution Byte (CEB) Definition Charts CMD 430 Objectives Control CMD 15 Read CMD 107 Search CMD 55 Sense CMD 142 Write CMD 77 Out (Timing) CHL-I 350 Out/Address Out CHL-I 260 Out Introduction CHL-I 220 Reject MSG 20,CHL-I 255 Retry, Description and Flowchart CMD 210 Summary CMD 2 Compare Assist Check CTL-I IIO,CTL-I 120 Console Error Message MSG 20 Control Circuits, Introduction INTR 10 Control Commands Descriptions of CMD 5,CHL-I 235 Flowcharts CMD 20 Diagnostic Load CMD 25 Diagnostic Write CMD 30 Mask Byte CMD 20 No Operation (Instruction) CMD 25 Recalibrate CMD 20 Restore CMD 25 Seek CMD20 Set File Mask CMD 20 Set Sector CMD 25 Space Count CMD 30 Objectives CMD 15 Summary Chart CMD 2 Control Data Flow-Block Diagram CTRL 200 Control Errors, FSI FSI 20 Control Hardware Description CTRL 220 Control Interface (CI, CTL-I) Buffer INTR 120 Extended Operation CMD 45 Immediate Operation CMD 30 Load S Register CMD 190 Buffer Parity Check CTL-I IIO,CTL-1115 Load S Registers CMD 190 Bus In CTL-I 10 I IBM CONFIDENTIAL 447460 3830·2 19 Dec 75 © Copyright \... ' UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER IBM Corporation 1975 iJ 0 0 0 n J 0 ~ Bus Out CTL-I \0 Bus Out Parity Check CTL-I 115 Checks FSI 15,CTL-I 1\0 Checks. FSI FSI 15 Compare Assist Check CTL-I IIO,CTL-I 120 Compare Assist Logic CTL-I 120 Control Decode, Read CTL-I 50 Control Decode, Write CTL-I45 Controller Check CTL-I 110 Data Flow INTR 120 Extended Operation CMD 45 Immediate Operation CMD 30 Load S Registers CMD 190 Data Transfer CTL-I 35 Description of Lines CTL-I \0 Error Checking and Collection INTR 120 Error Condition Diagrams CTL-I I IO,CTL-I 115,CTL-I 120 Extended Operation CTL-I 15,CTL-I 35 Immediate Operation CTL-115,CTL-120 Introduction INTR 20,INTR 90,CTL-I I Load S Registers CTL-I 190 Check CTL-I I IO,CTL-I 120 Logic with Wraparound Cable Installed MICRO 506 Microdiagnostic Error Code Dictionary MICRO 515 Microdiagnostic Routines Summary MICRO 510 Operation (Cylinder Seek Example) CMD 35 Polling CTL-I 25 Read Data Transfer from Device CTL-I 50 Register Assignments MIC 5 S Reg Decode CTL-I 190 Scope Points MICRO 505 Select Active CTL-I 115 Select Check CTL-I 115 Select Controller CTL-I 20 Select Device CTL-I 20 Special Operations MIC 3 System Orientation CTL-I 5 Tag Bus Parity Check CTL-I I 10 Tag Sequences CTL-I 15 Tags In/Out CTL-I 10 Transfer Error CTL-I IIO,CTL-I 120 Wraparound Cable MICRO 500 Wraparound Test MICRO 500 Write Data Transfer to Device CTL-I 45 Control Module, Disk Storage INTR 20 Control Options (Microdiagnostics) MICRO 16,MICRO 20 Control Storage Address Buffer CTRL 605 Address Errors FSI 4O,CTRL 610 Address Relationship (MPL) MPL 220 Addressing CTRL 600 Array Cards CTRL 605 Byte Assembly CTRL 605 Check Bits CTRL 605 Contents (Address Assignments) CTRL 650,CTRL 652 Control Circuits INTR 100 Data Cycles CTRL 250 Data Flow INTR 100 Data Flow Description CTRL 250 Description CTRL 600 Diagnostic Mode CTRL 600 Error Checking Data Flow INTR 110 Error Correction Code (ECC) CTRL 600 Error Detection CTRL 610 IMPL Attachment Data Flow INTR lOS () ",-j () ''<-JI' 0 if' (JJ, ' ' ~ ~ a 0 rl\ \.JI :) 0 a ' , A ~ a !"'-"l\, ",,-..JJ Instruction Format Decode CTRL 500 Instruction Word CTRL 230 'Introduction INTR 20,INTR 90 Load Decodes INTR 120 Manual Controls INTR 110 MPL File INTR 105 Power Sequencing PWR 105 Read Cycle CTRL 600 Scoping Procedures FSI 32 Timing Chart (Read/Write) CTRL 600 Trileads Chart FSI 33 Write Bus CTRL 605 Error FSI40 Write Cycle CTRL 600 Control Unit A and B Bus Assemblers CTRL I 18 Address CHL-I 230 Busy Check CHL-I 125 Busy Sequence CHL-I 230 Clock (see Clock) CU Cycle Error FSI 30 Cycle Controls CTRL 300 Data Flow INTR 90 End Status CMD 180,CHL-I 145,CHL-I 245 Error Condition Diagrams A Register Parity Error CTRL 35 ALU Check CTRL 60 B Register Parity Error CTRL 35 CA Decode Even Error CTRL 20 CA Decode Odd Error CTRL 20 CB Decode Even Error CTRL 25 CB Decode Odd Error CTRL 25 Storage Address Bus Errors CTRL 610 Write Bus Bytes 0/2 Error CTRL 610 Write Bus Bytes 1/3 Error CTRL 610 Function Test (82-86) MICRO 400 Initiated Sequence (Polling) CHL-I 230,CHL-I 420,CHL-I 425 Interface Errors CHL-I 125,CHL-I 130 Interface to Channel Buffer Controls CHL-I 260 Microdiagnostics Track Location MPL 220 Controller Address CHL-I 230 Controller Check CTL-I I IO,PANEL 50 Correctable Data Errors in Data Field CMD 210 Counters (MPL) Bit Counter MPL 230 Byte Counter MPL 270 Data Separation MPL 280 Sector Counter MPL 290 CP Panel LOC 8 CP/Thermal Indicators LOC 2 CP I or 2 Trips PWR 135 CP 1-10 LOC 10 CP 3 Trips (Fan Problem) PWR 260 CP 4 Trips Troubleshooting Procedures PWR 80 CP 5 - MPL File AC Control PWR 45 CP 6, 9, or 10 Trips PWR 150 CP 7 (Bulk 2) Power Problem PWR 70 CP 8 (Bulk I) Power Problem PWR 60 CPI I Trips PWR 220 CPI2 Trips PWR 240 CPI3 Trips PWR 200 CPI4 Trips PWR 180 CPI5 or 18 Trips PWR 160 CHANNEL INTERFACE (cont'd)-CP15 OR 18 0 <=~ 0 " '",,- ' INDEX 2 INDEX 2 0 () 0 0 0 0 " ' ,~ C) n I' ( - (- (- (' ( ( ( { ( ( (- L INDEX CP16 OR 17-IMPL CPI6 or 17 Trips PWR 270 CS Field Decode Description MIC 3 Decode Error PANEL 40 Description CTRL 240 CSW Status Field MSG 20 CTL-I (see Control Interface) CV Field MIC 6 CX Field MIC 6 Cycle Control Error FSI 30,CTRL 4O,PANEL 41 Cylinder Seek Example CMD 35 DBus Assembler CTRL 400 Parity Check CTRL 60 D Equal to Zero CTRL 60 Data Address Register (DAR) CTRL 220 Data Check MSG 20,CHL-1 255 Data Collection MSG 10 Data Control MIC 2 Data Cycle CTRL 320 Data Detect (Read) MPL 280 Data Error CMD 210 Data Flow Addressing CTRL 220 ALU CTRL 235,INTR lIS By Card START 900 Channel Interface INTR 140,CHL-1 500 Control Interface INTR 120 Control Storage INTR 105 CU Clock CTRL 300 Data Cycles CTRL 250 Instruction CTRL 230 MPL Attachment INTR 105 Read CMD 130 Registers CTRL 225,INTR lIS SCU Controls INTR 105 To Device CTL-145 Write CMD90 23FD Attachment Concepts MPL 230 Data In Introduction CHL-I 220 Data In (Timing) CHL-I 350 Data In/Service In Controls INTR 140 Data or Command Overrun CMD 210 Data Out (Timing) CHL-I 350 Data Out Introduction CHL-I 220 Data Out Seq Error CHL-I 165 Data Response CTL-I 45,CTL-I 50 Data Retrieval Overview MSG 10 Data Separation MPL 240 Data Separation Counter Timing Chart (Read) MPL 280 Data Statement or Storage (DAR) Addressing MIC 2 Data Strobe (Read) MPL 280 Data Transfer Control Interface CTL-I 35 Controls INTR 120 From Channel (Address Out Command Out) CHL-I 260 Initial Selection CHL-I 300 Interface Sequence CHL-I 230 Operation (Read) ECD CHL-I 365, CHL-I 375 Operation (Write) Flowchart CHL-I 380, CHL-I 390 Read MPL 280 Read Channel Buffer Control CHL-I 265 Read Channel Controls CHL-I 360, CHL-I 370 To Channel (Address In Status In) CHl-1 260 Write Channel Controls CHL-I 380, CHL-I 370 3830-2 Write Operation Channel Buffer Control CHL-I 260 DC Ready Indicator PANEL \0 DCC (Disconnected Command Chaining Byte) CMD 200 DCI (see Control Interface) Decode Error FSI 30 DecodeTables START 100 Defective or Alternate Track CMD 210 Definitions and Abbreviations LGND 16 Device Address CHL-I 230 Control Operation, Description CMD 10 End Status CMD 180,CHL-1350 Error Collection INTR 50 Read/Write (CTL-J) CTL-I 35 Release Command CMD 140,CHL-1470 Release Flowchart CMD 450 Reserve Command CMD 140,CHL-1 470 Reserve Flowchart CMD ISO Diagnostic Command Objectives CMD IS Control Options MICRO 16,MICRO 20 Controls MICRO 35 Description, Channel Wraparound Tests MICFL 5 Load - Microprogram Controlled MPL 260 Load Command Description CMD 5 Load Command Flowchart CMD 25 Mode (ECC Logic) CTRL 600 Write Command Description CMD 5 Write Command Flowchart CMD 30 Disconnect In CHL-I 225,CHL-I 240 Disconnect In Interlock CHL-I 425 Disconnect In Latch CHL-I 425 Disconnect Sequence Latch CHL-I 425 Disconnect, Interface CHL-I 240 Disconnected Command Chaining (DCC) CMD 200,CHL-I 230 Disk Cartridge Drive MPL 245 Disk Format, MPL MPL 220 Disk Layout (Rotational Position Sensing) CMD 305 Disk Storage Devices, Control Introduction INTR 10 Disk Storage Subsystem Conceptual Units INTR 20 Display Check 1 Error PANEL 40 Check 2 Error Procedure PANEL 50 Tests Error Messages OLT 50 Distribution by Power Terminal PWR 305,PWR 306 Distribution, Control Unit AC and DC PWR 300 DOS-OLTEP (Online Tests) OLT IS Duplicate Card Chart START 905 Early Error Indication PANEL 40 ECD (see Error Condition Diagrams) ECI-EC4 LOC 2 EnableAddress In CHL-I 260 Enable Operational In CHL-I 260 Enable Status In CHL-I 260 End of File CMD 430 Ending Sequence Channel Operation CHL-I 400 Channel Truncation CHL-l 265 Description CHL-I 230,CHL-I 350 Flowchart CMD 190 Enter/Display Switch (Microdiagnostics) MICRO 20 Environmental Data Collection MSG 10 Equipment Check MSG 20,CHL-I 255 Erase Command Description CMD 70 LM~7~.~O~I~M~7~.~1~ ~ _19 Dec 7512 Mar 76 ______~____~____~______~__ ---l II:> ~rigllt t8M Corporation 1975. 1976 Erase Command Flowchart CMD 85 EREP MSG30 Error Assembly (Channel) CHL-1165 Check Flowchart CTRL 10 Checking Data Flow INTR I 10 Conditions (see also Error Condition Diagrams) Check I PANEL 40 Check 2 PANEL 50 Control Commands CMD 5 Controls INTR I 10 Counter MPL 290 Data Collection MSG IO,MSG 30 Description Field MSG 20 Identification Flowchart START 10 Message Analysis, Console MSG 20 Message Display, CE Panel MICRO 25 Symptom Code, EREP (see also Fault Symptom Code) MSG40 Error Condition Diagrams A and B Bus Assemblers Block Diagram CTRL 118 A Register Check CTRL 35 Address Bus 0-7 Parity Error CTRL 50 Address Bus 8-15 Parity Error CTRL 50 ALU Error CTRL 60 B Register Check CTRL 35 Branch/Status Error CTRL 40 Buffer Parity Check CHL-I 160 Buffer Ready CHL-I 145 Bus Out (Write Data Path) CHL-I 165 CA Decode Even Error CTRL 20 CA Decode Odd Error CTRL 20 CB Decode Even Error CTRL 25 CD Decode Error CTRL 30 Chan B/Respon Branch CHL-1180 Channel Bus Out Parity CHL-I 30 Channel Interface Disabled CHL-I 20 Channel Overrun CHL-I 35 Control Unit End CHL-II45 CS Field or Stat Set Error CTRL 30 CU Clock Error CTRL 40 CU Cycle Error CTRL 40 Definition START 5 Halt I/O Busy CHL-I 140 Interface Check/ Multiconnect Error CHL-I 185 MPL (23FD) MPL 295 Request In CHL-I 135 Selective Reset CHL-I 190 Servo/Multi Branch CHL-1180 Special Operation Error CTRL 40 Storage Address Bus Errors CTRL 610 Suppress Out CHL-I 150 System Reset CHL-1190 Transfer/Halt I/O CHL-II40 Write Bus Bytes 0/2 Error CTRL 610 Write Bus Bytes 1/3 Error CTRL 610 Execute Switch PANEL 10 Extended Operation CTL-I 15 Facility Error Collection, Description of INTR 50 Facility Maintenance Philosophy START 5 Facility Problem, Entry Point START 10 Fan Problem PWR 260 INDEX 3 Fault Symptom Code, Determining (see also Error Symptom Code) FSI5 Fault Symptom Index FSI 30 CD Decode Error FSI 30 Clock Errors FSI 30 Control Storage Failure Analysis FSI 32 Control Storage Trileads Chart FSI 33 Cycle Control Error FSI 30 Format 0 FSI 10 Format 2 FSI 15 Format 3 FSI 33 Feature Code MIC 2 Fetch Cycle CTRL 320 Fetch four Bytes CTRL 250 Fetch Single Byte CTRL 250 File INTR 105 Format Decode CTRL 500,START 100 Microword (see Microword Format) Sector, MPL MPL 220 Formatting Overflow Record CMD 400 Four Byte Cycle CTRL 320 Four Byte Fetch CTRL 250 Freeze CHL-I 260,CHL-1 475 FSI (see Fault Symptom Index) Functional Microprogram MIC 35 Gate A LOC 2,LOC 16 Gate BLOC 2,LOC 14 GateD LOC 16 Gate P LOC 12 General Purpose Register Alter PANEL 110 Data Flow CTRL 225 Display PANEL 100 Introduction CTRL 200 Glossary LGND 16 HA (see Read Home Address, Write Home Address) Halt I/O Busy CHL-I 140 Hardcore Check I Analysis MICRO 150 Stop Word List MICRO 65 Test Summary MICRO 60 Heat Sinks LOC 8 High Branch MIC 2 Hold Out (Timing) CHL-I 350 Hold Out Introduction CHL-1220 Home Address (see Read, Write) I/O Connectors LOC 14 I/O Device (see Device) IAR (see Instruction Address Register) Idle Loop CMD 170 Illegal Sequence CHL-1125 Immediate Operation CTL-I IS IMPL Control Sorage Addressing MPL 270 Data Flow MPL 200 Error, Stop or Retry MPL 290 Failure Analysis START 35 Hardware Controlled MPL 240 CP16 OR 17-IMPL INDEX 3 IMPL (cont'dl-READ INDEX IMPL (Continued) Microprogram Controlled MPL 260 Switch PANEL 10 Initial Program Load CMD 125,MPL 220 Initial Selection Buffer Operation CHL-I 305 Circuits CHL-I 200 Diagram CHL-I 300 Flowchart CMD 170,CMD 175 Idle Loop CMD 170 Sequence CHL-I 230,CHL-1 350 Sequence Introduction CHL-I 220 Initial Status Byte CMD 181 Inline Diagnostics Transfer CMD 160 Inner/Outer Switch PANEL 10 Input/Output Operations CHL-1235 Installation Address Select Card Wiring INST 20 Cabling Channel Interface INST 20 Control Module to 3830-2 INST 5 Channel Selector Card Wiring INST 20 Channel Transfer Control Card Wiring INST 20 Control Unit Power Check INST 10 Cover Installation INST 25 Priority Card Wiring INST 20 Records INST 25 Selected Bus/Tag Out Card Wiring INST 20 System Test INST 25 Transfer Buffer Control Card Wiring INST 20 Unpacking and Locating INST 5 Instruction Address Register (JAR) CTRL 220 Alter PANEL 105 Instruction Data Flow CTRL 230 Instruction Examples, Microprogram MIC 30, MIC 31 Instruction/Instruction Call Cycle CTRL 320 Instruction Word START 100 Interface Check CHL-I 185 Interface Disconnect CHL-I 240 Interface, CU to 23FD MPL 245 Intermittent Failures, Analysis MICRO 17 Intervention Required MSG 20,CHL-I 250 Introduction to Storage Control Subsystem INTR 10 IPL (see Initial Program Load) Job 10 Field MSG 20 Jumper Card Assignments INST 20 K-CK Emit Value MIC 2 Laminar Bus LOC 16 Lamp Test PANEL 10 Line Name to ALD Page List START 905 Load Operation (Microprogram) MPL 200 Load S Register Check CTL-I IIO,PANEL 50 Load S Registers CTL-I 190 Loading Procedure, Microdiagnostics MICRO 15 Locations Index LOC I Log Disconnect In CHL-I 130 Logging Mode MSG to Logic Type Failures START 5 Loop Option 32 - Description of MICRO 17 Low Branch MIC 2 I 447460 3830-2 i 19 Dec 75 1. Description of MIC 16 2, Description of MIC 17 3, Description of MIC 18 MLM Documentation Cross Reference MLX I Description PLAN 5 Layout' PLAN 10 . Ordering Procedure (Back of Title Page) ii Preface ii Symbology LGND 6 MPL Attachment Introduction MPL 220 MPLError ECDs MPL 295 MPL File (see also IMPL, 23FD Disk Drive) Attachment, SCU Data Flow INTR 90 IMPL Switch PANEL to Introduction INTR 20,INTR 105 Location LOC 2,MPL to Microprogram Load Operation MPL 200 Not Ready FSI to,FSI 40 Description PANEL 41 During Microdiagnostic Load MICRO 16 ECD MPL295 IMPL Analysis START 35 MAP MPL 30 Message (Sense Format 0) FSI 10.SENSE 40 Parity Error (see also MPL File Read Check) MPL 290 Power On Indicator PANEL 10 Read Check FSI 10,FSI 15.PANEL 40 Description PANEL 41 During Microdiagnostic Load MICRO 16 ECD MPL 295 Hardcore Analysis START 65 MAP MPL 15 Message (Sense Format 0) FSI IO.SENSE 40 Seek Check FSI 10 During Microdiagnostic Load MICRO 16 Hardcore Analysis START 65 MAP MPL45 Message (Sense Format 0) FSI IO,SENSE 40 Seek In/Seek Out Load Head Switch PANEL 10 To Control Storage Address Relationship MPL 220 MST Card/ ALD Index START 905 Multiconnect Error CHL-I 185 Multiple In Tags CHL-I 125,CHL-I 130 Multiple Requesting CMD 200 Multiple Tag Check CHL-I 125.CHL-1 130,CHL-I 185 Multiple Track Operation CMD 430 Multitag Switch PANEL I M/T (Multiple Track) Operation CMD 430 Machine Reset - ECD CHL-I 190 Maintenance Library Documentation Plan PLAN 10 Maintenance Library'lnformation PLAN 5 Maintenance,Entry Point START to Manual Controls INTR I to Message Analysis, Console MSG 20 Message Displays, CE Panel MICRO 16,MICRO 25 Messages, Sense SENSE to Format 0 SENSE 35 Format 2 SENSE 40 Format 3 SENSE 45 Meter Panel (see Power Sequence Panel) Micro-Orders, Definition of MIC 3 Microblock Format MIC 2 ,Microdiagnostics MPL 220 Channel Wraparound Tests, Routines 6O-6E MICRO 2to Control Interface Tests - Routines 8C-94 MICRO 500 Control Unit Tests - Routines 82-9A MICRO 400 Display Summary MICRO 25 Dynamic Control Options MICRO 20 Enter/Display Switch MICRO 20 Error Message Displays MICRO 25 Loading Procedure MICRO 15 Operating Information MICRO 25 Operation Mode Switch MICRO 20 Parameter Entry MICRO 20 Program Storage Area MICRO 35 Routine ID MICRO 10 Routine Summaries . Channel Wraparound, 60-6E MICRO 210 Control Interface, 8C-94 MICRO 510 CU Tests, 82-9A MICRO 400 Hardcore, OO-OB, Check I MICRO 60 Run Options MICRO 20 Summary MICRO 10 Termination MICRO 20 Microprogram Branch Conditions INTR 140 Controls, SCU Data Flow INTR 90 Data Flow Controls INTR 100 Decode, Introduction INTR 20,INTR 110 Detected Errors INTR 50 Format Decode CTRL 500,START 100 Format Decode Symbol Value START 102 Format Table START 100 Functional MIC 35 Inst~uction Decode MIC 3,CTRL 230,CTRL 325,CTRL 410 Instruction Examples MIC 30 Instruction Word CTRL 230 Introduction MIC 2 Load (MPU Operation MPL 200 Load Objectives MPL 260 Registers MIC 5,CTRL 225 Response Latch (Read) CHL-1365 Response Latch (Write) CHL-I 385 Routines MIC 35 Microword Format MIC 6 A, Description of MIC 10 B, Description of MIC II C, Description of MIC 12 D. Description of MIC 13 E, Description of MIC 14 F. Description of MIC 15 INDEX 4 Error Messages OLT 50 Error Messages Display OL T 50 OLTSEP OL T to OS-OLTEP OLT 10 Prerequisites OLT 20 Standard Error Messages OL T 300 T3830 AAB Error Messages OLT 200 Op Decodes, ALU CTRL 235,CTRL 400 Operating Modes (Microdiagnosticl MICRO 20 Operational In/Out (Timing) CHL-I 350 Operational In/Out Introduction CHL-I 220 Operations, I/O CHL-1235 Orientation CMD 430 Overflow Record CMD 400 Overrun MSG 20,CHL-1 255 P-A I Cards LOC 12 Panel, CE (see CE Panel) Panel, Power Sequence LOC 2,PANEL I Parameter Controls (Microdiagnostic) MICRO 15 Parameter Entry (Microdiagnostics) MICRO 20 Parity Assembler MPL 230 Parity, Bits Generator CTRL 600 Parity Predictor CTRL 400 Parity Time (Read) MPL 280 Partial A Bus Assembler CTRL 400 Partial B Bus Assembler CTRL 400 Pending Status Condition CMD 181 Performance Data Collection MSG 10 Polling (Control Unit Initiated Sequence) CHL-1425 Polling Sequence (CHL-J) CHl-1420 Positive Logic Diagrams LGND 6 Power Control Box LOC 12 Power Down Sequence PWR 120,PWR 311 Power On (Resets) CMD 250 Power Problem Analysis PWR 30 Power Sequence Box toc 12 Power Sequence Concepts PWR 2 Power Sequence Panel LOC 2.PANEL I Power Sequence Problem PWR 100 Power Sequencing Flowchart PWR 3 to For Control Storage PWR 105 Power Supply Adjustment PWR 50 Power Up Sequence PWR 120,PWR 310 Power. Introduction INTR 20 Preventive Maintenance START 950 Priority Card Wiring INST 20 Problem Analysis, Entry Point START 10 Proceed (Sequence Control) CHL-I 240 Processing Overflow Record CMD 400 Program Display Indicators (Microdiagnostic) MICRO 15 PS 4 Voltage Distribution PWR 185 PS 5 Voltage Distribwtion PWR 205 PS 6 Voltage Distribution PWR 225 PS 7 Voltage Distribution PWR 245 Push Button-Manual (Resets) CMD 250 NE or Tag Bus Parity Check CTL-I 115 No Operation CMD 5,CMD 25 No Response Check CHL-I 125 Normal End CTL-I to Objectives, Command Control CMD 15 Read CMD 107 Search CMD 55 Sense CMD 142 Write CMD 77 Offset Interlock See CHL-I 1 Online Tests Brief Descriptions OLT 25 DOS-OL TEP OLT 15 Read And Reset Buffered Log CMD 145 Commands Descriptions CMD IOO,CHL-1235 Flowcharts CMD I to 1447461 12 Mar 76 IMPL Icont'dl-READ INDEX 4 ©Copyright IBM Corporation 1975. 1976 ) () \.... t) ,,-, () 1"",\ \",j) f") 'J 0 0.' ~ '''-,J/ rll 0 1 f"'~ J I /"',"1 V () ('"" '-.Y t"-~ (-"1 J"'-~ "y V J (..=~ \..Y 10 \"J 0 () () ~ ~'y /-". ",-y r"'~ J ·0 \.._y 0 0 0 0 \, '< . "", 0",-J () () () 'Ii., " --~ ( ( (~ ( INDEX ("~ ( (' READ (cont'd)-UNSUPPRESSIBLE INDEX 5 Read, Commands (continued) Objectives CMD 107 Summary CMD 2 Count CMD 110 Count, Key and Data CMD 120 Cycle CTRL 600 Cycle Timing CTRL 600 Data CMD 120 Channel Controls, Simplified CHL-I 360 Flowchart CMD 120 MPL MPL2S0 Path, SCU Data Flow INTR 90 Transfer CMD 130,CTL-135,CTL-I 50 Transfer Operation ECD CHL-I 365, CUL-I 37S Diagnostic I CCW (Sense Bytes) CMD 150 Diagnostics to System CMD 165 Home Address CMD 100,CMD 110 I/O Channel Interface Timing CHL-I3S0 Initial Program Load CMD 100 Key and Data CMD 120 MPL Data MPL 2S0 Operation CMD 10S,CHL-1 265 Record Zero (RO) CMD 110 Sector CMD 125 Sector (Rotational Position Sensing) CMD 300 Truncation CHL-I 270 Read Bus Byte 3 Parity Error CTRL 45 Recalibrate CMD S,CMD 20 Recycle, CTL-I CTL-I 10 Recycle/Sync/Stop Switch PANEL 10 Recycle, Address Compare PANEL 120 Register Alter PANEL IS,PANEL 105 ALU Data Flow INTR 1 IS Assignment MIC 5 Data Flow INTR 90 Display Circuit PANEL 100 Display Operation PANEL IS Select Switch PANEL 10 Storage Display Indicators PANEL 10 Test Routine S2 MICRO 405 Relays LOC 12,PWR 105 Release (see Device Release) Request In Introduction CHL-I 220 Operation CHL-I 350 Reserve (see Device Reserve) Reset Controls INTR 110 Reset Switch PANEL 10 Resets, Description CMD 2S0,CHL-1 245 Resistors LOC 6,LOC 12 Response LatchCHL-126O Restore CMD S,CMD 25 Rotational Position Sensing Description CMD 300 Track Layout CMD 305 Routines, Microprogram MIC 3S,MICRO 10 Run Options (Microdiagnostic) MICRO 15 Run Otions (Microdiagnostic) MICRO 20 Safety (Back of Title Page) ii Satellite Module, Disk Storage INTR 20 SCRIO Cards Location PANEL II SCU Data Flow A Bus INTR 115 ALU Inputs INTR 115 B Bus INTR 115 447460 3830·2 19 Dec 75 tD COPYright IBM CorporatIon 1975 Backup Register INTR 110 Branch Controls INTR 110 ByCard START900 Clock and Cycle Controls INTR 110 Control Storage Error Checking INTR 110 Control Storage IMPL Attachment INTR 105 Control Storage Manual Controls INTR Ito Control Storage MPL File INTR toS CTL-I (Read) CTL-I SO CTL-I (Write) CTL-I 45 D Bus INTR 115 Data Flow, Block Diagram INTR 100 -Description of INTR 90 Disk Cartridge Drive INTR 105 Error Controls INTR 110 Manual Controls and Error Checking Data Flow INTR Ito Microprogram Decodes INTR 110 Registers, ALU Data Flow INTR 115 Reset Controls INTR 110 Status Register Set Controls INTR 110 Search Commands Descriptions CMD SO Flowcharts CMD 55 Objectives CMD 55 Summary CMD 2 Sector Address Byte MPL 220 Counter MPL 290 Not Zero (23FD Attachment Concepts) MPL 290 Summary CMD 5 Seek Address Field MSG 20 Flowchart CMD 20 Malfunctions CMD 210 Operation Data Flow CMD 5 Select A Reg Entry CTRL 235 Select Active CTL-I 10 Select Active or Select Check CTL-I IIO,PANEL 50 Select Controller CTL-I 20 Select Device CTL-I 20 Select Hold CTL-I 10 Select In CHL-I 350 Introduction CHL-I 220 Timing CHL-I 350 Select Out Introduction CHL-I 220 Operation CHL-1350 Selected Bus/Tag Out Card INST 20 Selection Sequence CHL-I 230 Selective Reset CHL-I 245 Description and Flowcharts CMD 250 ECD CHL-119O Selector Channel Initiated Sequences CHL-I 350 Selector Channel Input Operation CHL-I 350 Sense Byte CHL-I 255 Commands Descriptions CMD 140,CHL-1 235 Flowcharts CMD 145 Objectives CMD 42 Conditions CHL-1255 Control Block FSI 5 Data Description SENSE 30 Field MSG 20 Logic Type Failures START 10 Setup, Reset Operation CMD 250 Summary SENSE 10 Transfer CHL-I 250 Messages SENSE to Sequence Controls, Channel Interface CHL-1235 Sequential Starter Card LOC 16,PWR 132 SERDES CMD 130 Service In/Out Introduction CHL-I220 Operation CHL-I 350 Service Out Seq Error CHL-I 165 SERVO/MULTI Branch CHL-I ISO Set File Mask CMD 5,CMD I 5,CMD 20 Set Sector CMD 5,CMD 15,CMD 25,CMD 300 Shutdown Cycle CHL-I 265 Single Byte Fetch CTRL 250 Single Byte Transfer CHL-I265 Space Count CMD S,CMD 15,CMD 30 Special Control Lines CHL-I 225 Special Operation CTL-I Control MIC 5 Decode Table MIC 15 Error PANEL 40 Field Description MIC 3 Test (S4) MICRO 4to Special Register Display PANEL 100 ST Reg Parity Error CTRL 45 Stack Status CHL-I 240 Standard Error Numbers (Online Tests) OL T 300 Start Switch PANEL 10 Statistical Data Collection MSG 10 Statistical Information, EREP MSG 30 Status Accepted CHL-I 350 Byte CHL-I 245 Conditions Pending CMD lSI Errors FSI 10 Information CMD ISI.CHL-I 245 Information, Description of CMD 180 Modifier CMD ISO,CHL-I 245 Presented CHL-I 350 Register Set Controls INTR Ito Stack CHL-I 240 Status In Address In CHL-1260 Introduction CHL-I 220 Operation CHL-I 350 Stepping Motor MPL 245,INTR 105 Stop (see also Truncation) CHL-I24O Stop/SI Switch PANEL 10 Stop, Address Compare PANEL 120 Storage (see also Control Storage) Access Registers CTRL 200,CTRL 220 Address Errors FSI 40,CTRL 610 Alter PANEL 15,PANEL 115 Display PANEL 15,PANEL 115 Write Bus Error FSI 40 Storage Control Unit (see Control Unit> Store Cycle CTRL 320 Four Bytes CTRL 250 Suppress Out ECD CHL-I 150 Introduction CHL-1220 Operation CHL-I 350 Suppress Status CHL-124O IBM CONFIDENTIAL UNTIL MARCH 26. 1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER SW Indicator PANEL 10 SW Sync, Address Compare PANEL 120 Switching, Channel CHL-I 470,CHL-I 475 Symbology, Documentation LGND 6 Sync In/Out CTL-I to Sync/Stop Switch PANEL to System Error Collection INTR 50 System Reset Description CMD 250,CHL-I 245 ECD CHL·II9O Flowchart CMD 255 Tabs LOC 12 Tag Bus CTL-l 10 Parity Check (CTL-I) CTL-I IIO,PANEL 50 Tag Gate CTL-I 10 Tag In Controls (CHL-I) INTR 140 Generation (CHL-I) INTR 140 Introduction (CHL-I) CHL-1220 Tag Out Introduction CHL-I220 Tag Valid, CTL-I CTL-I 110 Tail Gate LOC 14 Temporary Address Register (TAR) CTRL 220 Terminology LGND 16 Test Cable Installation Channel Interface Wraparound MICRO 205 Control Interface Wraparound MICRO 500 Test I/O (Status Byte) CMD 145,CHL-I 235 Thermal Circuit Diagram PWR 31 Tie Breaker CHL-I 475 Tie Breaking and Interlock Circuits CHL-I 200 Timing, CU Clock CTRL 300 Track Data Orientation (23FD Attach) MPL 230 Track Layout (RPS) CMD 305 Track Not Zero (23FD Aftach) MPL 290 Transfer (see also XFER) Check (CHL-I) PANEL 50 Controls CHL-I 260 Error (CTL-I) CTL-I 115,PANEL 50 Halt I/O CHL-I 140 In-Line Diagnostics to Control Unit CMD 160 Latch (Read) CHL-I 365 Latch (Write) CHL-1385 Transfer Buffer Control Card INST 20 Triac LOC 12 Trilead Chart, Control Storage FSI 33 Troubleshooting, Entry Point START 10 Truncation CHL-I 24O,CHL-I 265 Two Channel Switch CHL-1470 Channel Wraparound Test MICRO 200 Circuit CHL-I 475 Concept and Commands CMD 450 Controls INTR 140 T3S30AAA OL T 25 T3830AAB OL T 25 Uncorrectable Data Errors CMD 210 Unexpected End Check CTL-I I IO,PANEL 50 Unit Address No Compare CHL-I 125 Unit Check Status CMD ISO,CHL-1250 Unit Exception Status CMD 180,CHL-1250 Unsuppressible Register (Device) CTL-125 READ (cont',-UNSUPPRESSIBLE INDEX 5 USAGE/ERROR-WAVEFORMS INDEX Usage/Error Threshold Values MSG \0 Use Meter LOC 2,PANEL 1 INDEX6 Transition Detector MPL 25 Waveforms MPL 25 Voltage Adjust, Control Unit PWR 50 Voltage Check, Control Unit INST 10 Voltage Regulation PWR 105 Voltage. Sequencing Logic PWR 110 Volume ID Field MSG 20 Word and Parity Assembly (23FD Attach) MPL 230 Write Bus Errors CTRL 610 Commands Description CMD 70,CHL-I 235 Flowcharts CMD 80 Objectives CMD 77 RO CMD70 Special Count, Key, Data CMD 70,CMD 85 Summary CMD 2 Cycle Timing CTRL 600 Data Transfer CHL-I 380,CTL-I 35 Flowchart CMD 90 Errors (23FD Attach) MPL 290 Operation CMD 75,CHL-1 260 Truncation CHL-I 270 XCHAN Branch CH 14 CHL-1150 XFER Branch CL 12 CHL-I 140,CHL-1260 Read CHL-I 365, CHL-I 375 Write CHL-I 385, CHL-I 375 23FD Disk Drive (see also MPL File) Access Drive Mechanical Diagnostic (MAP) MPL 15 Access Housing MPL 55 Attachment Introduction MPL 220 Cartridge Handling MPL 2 Characteristics MPL \0 Cover Removal MPL 55 Disk Centering Cone MPL 55 Drive Belt MPL 55 Drive Hub MPL 55 Drive Motor and Pulley MPL 55 Frame MPL 55 Functional Principles MPL 5 Head/ Arm Assembly MPL 20 Cautions MPL I Locations LOC 2,MPL \0 Operating Sequence MPL 5 Power Control MPL 40 Pressure Pad MPL 20 Pressure Pad Loading (MAP) MPL 45 Read Amplifier MPL 25 Read Channel Timing MPL 5 Read Circuit MPL 25 Read Circuit Diagnostic (MAP) MPL 15 Read Head MPL 20 Removal MPL 55 Scoping Procedures MPL 15 Sector Tower MPL 35 Seek Circuits Stepping Control (MAP) MPL 45 Stepping Motor, Lead Screw MPL 50 Test Points MPL 25 Timing MPL 5 447460 3830-2 19 Dec 75 IBM CONFIDENTIAL USAGE/ERROR-WAVEFORMS UNTIL MARCH 26,1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER INDEX 6 (1 C"PYP\lht IBM Corporahon 1975 ('i'~""" .J o (~ \,-j r~ \ \.y ,ic " , "" ;; C) r) \ ' C) .1'.'"\ \.~"_ ej)/ /"~ 't,.., ! )-" ,"-", I i 1"" JI /""/ \ ~.,
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19 Create Date : 2018:10:08 15:30:44-08:00 Modify Date : 2018:10:08 15:53:51-07:00 Metadata Date : 2018:10:08 15:53:51-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:8a04c6d8-5f75-ff43-8304-e7d31c4a6d46 Instance ID : uuid:753bc62e-45ca-5c4f-837b-68cafc91b8fa Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseNone Page Count : 232EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools